Comtech EF Data SLM 5650A Satellite Modem Installation and Operation Manual

SLM-5650A
Satellite Modem
Installation and Operation Manual
For Firmware Version 1.4.8 or Higher
IMPORTANT NOTE: The information contained in this document supersedes all previously published
information regarding this product. Product specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
Part Number MN-SLM5650A / CD-SLM5650A Revision 9
SLM-5650A
Satellite Modem
Installation and Operation Manual
For Firmware Version 1.4.8 or Higher
Part Number MN-SLM5650A / CD-SLM5650A
Copyright © 2016 Comtech EF Data. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA.
Comtech EF Data, 2114 West 7th Street, Tempe, Arizona 85281 USA, 480.333.2200, FAX: 480.333.2161
BLANK PAGE
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS ............................................................................III
TABLES
....................................................................................... XXI
FIGURES
...................................................................................... XXII
PREFACE
................................................................................... XXVII
About this Manual ....................................................................................... xxvii
Conventions and References ........................................................................ xxvii
Patents and Trademarks ................................................................................. xxvii
Related Documents ........................................................................................ xxvii
Military Standards ......................................................................................... xxviii
Warnings, Cautions, Notes, and References ................................................. xxviii
Examples of Multi-Hazard Notices .................................................................. xxix
Recommended Standard Designations ........................................................... xxix
Safety and Compliance .................................................................................. xxix
Electrical Safety and Compliance .................................................................... xxix
Electrical Installation ....................................................................................... xxix
Class I Pluggable Equipment Type A-Protective Earthing ................................. xxx
Galvanic Isolator Use ........................................................................................ xxx
Restricted Access Location ............................................................................... xxx
Battery Warning ............................................................................................... xxx
Operating Environment .................................................................................... xxx
European Union Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal
Equipment (R&TTE) Directive (1999/5/EC) and EN 301 489-1 ..................... xxxi
European Union Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive
(2004/108/EC) ............................................................................................... xxxi
European Union Low Voltage Directive (LVD) (2006/95/EC)........................ xxxii
European Union RoHS Directive (2002/95/EC) ............................................ xxxii
European Union Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive
(91/263/EEC) ................................................................................................xxxiii
CE Mark ..................................................................................................xxxiii
iii
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
MN-SLM5650A / CD-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Product Support .......................................................................................... xxxiii
Comtech EF Data Headquarters ................................................................... xxxiii
Warranty Policy ........................................................................................... xxxiv
Limitations of Warranty ..................................................................................xxxiv
Exclusive Remedies ..........................................................................................xxxv
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION ............................................................1–1
1.1
Overview ............................................................................................ 1–1
1.2
Functional Description ........................................................................ 1–2
1.3 Product Features ................................................................................. 1–3
1.3.1 Operational Features............................................................................ 1–4
1.3.1.1
Operating Modes ....................................................................... 1–4
1.3.1.1.1 Closed Networks .................................................................... 1–4
1.3.1.1.2 Open Networks (Intelsat) ....................................................... 1–4
1.3.1.1.3 OM-73 Mode .......................................................................... 1–5
1.3.1.2
Secure Management Interfaces ................................................ 1–5
1.3.1.3
Data Interfaces .......................................................................... 1–6
1.3.1.3.1 TIA/EIA-530 Interface ............................................................. 1–6
1.3.1.3.2 TIA/EIA-613 (HSSI) Interface .................................................. 1–6
1.3.1.3.3 10/100/1000 BaseT (Gigabit Ethernet) Module Option ......... 1–6
1.3.1.3.4 G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Module Option ........................................ 1–6
1.3.1.3.5 LVDS Module Option .............................................................. 1–7
1.3.1.3.6 Network Processor Module Option ....................................... 1–7
1.3.1.4
Independent Tx and Rx Function............................................... 1–7
1.3.1.5
Verification ................................................................................ 1–8
1.3.1.6
Updating Modem Firmware ...................................................... 1–8
1.3.1.7
Fully Accessible System Topology (FAST) ................................... 1–8
1.3.1.7.1 FAST Accessible Options ......................................................... 1–9
1.3.1.7.2 Extended Temperature Option ............................................. 1–10
1.3.1.7.3 Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) Option ............... 1–11
1.3.1.8
Interoperability ........................................................................ 1–12
1.3.1.8.1 Legacy Modems ................................................................... 1–12
1.3.1.8.2 Modem Switches .................................................................. 1–12
iv
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
MN-SLM5650A / CD-SLM5650A
Revision 9
1.4 Physical Features .............................................................................. 1–13
1.4.1 Dimensional Envelope........................................................................ 1–14
1.4.2 Front Panel ......................................................................................... 1–15
1.4.3 Rear Panel .......................................................................................... 1–16
CHAPTER 2. SPECIFICATIONS..........................................................2–1
2.1 Environmental and Physical ................................................................ 2–1
2.1.1 Prime Power ......................................................................................... 2–1
2.1.2 Mounting.............................................................................................. 2–1
2.1.3 Dimensions........................................................................................... 2–1
2.1.4 Weight .................................................................................................. 2–1
2.1.5 Temperature ......................................................................................... 2–2
2.1.5.1
Operating ................................................................................... 2–2
2.1.5.1.1 Standard Operating Temperature .......................................... 2–2
2.1.5.1.2 Extended Temperature Option ............................................... 2–2
2.1.5.2
Storage....................................................................................... 2–2
2.1.6 Humidity............................................................................................... 2–2
2.2 General Specifications......................................................................... 2–3
2.2.1 Operating Frequency Range................................................................. 2–3
2.2.2 Modulation Types ................................................................................ 2–3
2.2.3 Digital Data Rates ................................................................................. 2–3
2.2.4 Symbol Rate Range .............................................................................. 2–3
2.2.5 EXT REF Input ....................................................................................... 2–3
2.2.6 INT REF Stability ................................................................................... 2–3
2.2.7 Scrambling............................................................................................ 2–4
2.2.8 IDR/IBS Framing Compatibility............................................................. 2–4
2.2.9 Built-in test (BIT) .................................................................................. 2–4
2.2.10 Summary Faults.................................................................................... 2–4
2.2.11 Monitor and Control ............................................................................ 2–4
2.3 Modulator Specifications .................................................................... 2–5
2.3.1 Output Power ....................................................................................... 2–5
2.3.2 Output Return Loss .............................................................................. 2–5
2.3.3 Output Impedance ............................................................................... 2–5
2.3.4 Spurious ............................................................................................... 2–5
2.3.5 Harmonics ............................................................................................ 2–5
2.3.6 Tx Clock Source .................................................................................... 2–5
v
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
2.3.7
2.3.8
2.3.9
2.3.10
2.3.11
MN-SLM5650A / CD-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Output Connectors............................................................................... 2–5
Modulation Timing Jitter ..................................................................... 2–6
Modulation Phase Error ....................................................................... 2–6
Modulator Spectral Inversion .............................................................. 2–6
Transmit Clock and Data Inversion ...................................................... 2–6
2.4 Demodulator Specifications ................................................................ 2–7
2.4.1 Input Carrier Power .............................................................................. 2–7
2.4.2 Maximum Composite Power................................................................ 2–7
2.4.3 Input Impedance .................................................................................. 2–7
2.4.4 Input Connectors.................................................................................. 2–7
2.4.5 Carrier Acquisition Range .................................................................... 2–7
2.4.6 Input Return Loss ................................................................................. 2–7
2.4.7 Buffer Clock .......................................................................................... 2–7
2.4.8 Doppler Buffer...................................................................................... 2–8
2.4.9 Demodulator Spectral Inversion .......................................................... 2–8
2.5 Coding Options ................................................................................... 2–8
2.5.1 Uncoded ............................................................................................... 2–8
2.5.2 Viterbi .................................................................................................. 2–8
2.5.3 Viterbi+Reed-Solomon ......................................................................... 2–8
2.5.4 Trellis .................................................................................................... 2–8
2.5.5 Trellis+Reed-Solomon .......................................................................... 2–8
2.5.6 Turbo .................................................................................................... 2–8
2.5.7 LDPC: ULL, LL, and HP .......................................................................... 2–9
2.6 Open Network Options ....................................................................... 2–9
2.6.1 IDR ........................................................................................................ 2–9
2.6.2 IBS ........................................................................................................ 2–9
2.7 Performance Specifications ................................................................. 2–9
2.7.1 Acquisition and Timing Performance Requirements ........................... 2–9
2.7.2 Data Quality Performance.................................................................. 2–11
2.7.2.1
OM-73 Compatible Mode Performance.................................. 2–11
2.7.2.2
MIL-STD-188-165A Compatible Mode Performance .............. 2–11
2.7.2.3
IESS-308 Compatible Mode Performance ............................... 2–11
2.7.2.4
IESS-309 Compatible Mode Performance ............................... 2–11
2.7.2.5
IESS-310 Compatible Mode Performance ............................... 2–12
2.7.2.6
16QAM Coding Mode Performance ........................................ 2–12
2.7.2.7
Turbo Coding Mode Performance ........................................... 2–12
vi
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
MN-SLM5650A / CD-SLM5650A
Revision 9
2.7.2.8
Sequential Mode Performance ............................................... 2–12
2.7.2.9
LDPC Coding Mode Performance ............................................ 2–12
2.7.3 BER Performance ............................................................................... 2–13
2.7.3.1
BPSK/QPSK/Offset QPSK, Viterbi Decoding ............................ 2–13
2.7.3.2
BPSK/QPSK/Offset QPSK, Viterbi Decoding and Reed-Solomon
................................................................................................. 2–13
2.7.3.3
8PSK, Trellis Decoder ............................................................... 2–14
2.7.3.4
8PSK, Trellis Decoder and Reed-Solomon ............................... 2–14
2.7.3.5
16QAM, Viterbi Decoder and Reed-Solomon ......................... 2–15
2.7.3.6
Turbo Product Code (TPC) Decoding ....................................... 2–15
2.7.3.7
Sequential Decoding with/without Reed-Solomon ................ 2–16
2.7.3.8
BER Performance with Symmetrical or Asymmetrical Adjacent
Carriers ................................................................................................. 2–16
2.7.3.8.1 BER Performance with Symmetrical Adjacent Carriers........ 2–17
2.7.3.8.2 BER Performance with Asymmetrical Adjacent Carriers...... 2–17
2.7.3.9
LDPC ULL Decoding.................................................................. 2–18
2.7.3.10 LDPC LL Decoding .................................................................... 2–18
2.7.3.11 LDPC HP Decoding ................................................................... 2–19
CHAPTER 3. INSTALLATION..............................................................3–1
3.1
Unpack and Inspect the Shipment....................................................... 3–1
3.2 Install the Unit Into a Rack Enclosure .................................................. 3–2
3.2.1 Install the Optional Rear Support Brackets Kit..................................... 3–5
3.2.2 Install the Optional Bearingless Rack Slide Set .................................... 3–6
3.3
Connect External Cables...................................................................... 3–7
3.4
Configuration and Operation .............................................................. 3–7
CHAPTER 4. REAR PANEL CONNECTORS ......................................4–1
4.1 Overview – Cabling Connection Types ................................................. 4–1
4.1.1 Coaxial Cable Connections ................................................................... 4–2
4.1.1.1
Type ‘BNC’ ................................................................................. 4–3
4.1.1.2
Type ‘TNC’ ................................................................................. 4–3
4.1.1.3
Type ‘N’ ...................................................................................... 4–3
4.1.1.4
Type ‘F’ ...................................................................................... 4–3
vii
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
MN-SLM5650A / CD-SLM5650A
Revision 9
4.1.1.5
Type ‘SMA’ ................................................................................. 4–3
4.1.2 D-Subminiature Cable Connections ..................................................... 4–4
4.1.3 RJ-45, RJ-48 Cable Connections ........................................................... 4–4
4.1.4 USB Cable Connections ........................................................................ 4–5
4.2 Unit Connectors .................................................................................. 4–6
4.2.1 Power and Ground Connections .......................................................... 4–6
4.2.1.1
Power Interface Module – Standard AC Unit ............................ 4–6
4.2.1.1.1 AC Operation – Replace the Fuses ......................................... 4–7
4.2.1.1.2 AC Operation – Apply Power .................................................. 4–7
4.2.1.2
Power Interface Module – Optional 24V DC Unit ..................... 4–8
4.2.1.2.1 DC Operation – Replace the Fuses ......................................... 4–8
4.2.1.2.2 DC Operation – Apply Power.................................................. 4–8
4.2.1.3
Unit Ground Connection ........................................................... 4–9
4.2.2 Operational Connections ................................................................... 4–10
4.2.2.1
Utility Connectors.................................................................... 4–10
4.2.2.1.1 ‘J1 Ext Ref’ (TNC-F) Utility Connector................................... 4–10
4.2.2.1.2 ‘J5 Ethernet’ (RJ-45) Utility Connector ................................. 4–10
4.2.2.1.3 ‘J8 Alarms’ (DB-9F) Utility Connector ................................... 4–11
4.2.2.1.4 ‘J9 Auxiliary’ (HD-15F) Utility Connector ............................. 4–12
4.2.2.1.5 ‘J10 Remote’ (DB-9F) Utility Connector ............................... 4–13
4.2.2.2
Data Interface Connectors....................................................... 4–14
4.2.2.2.1 ‘J6 EIA530’ (DB-25F) Data Interface Connector.................... 4–14
4.2.2.2.2 ‘P1 Overhead Data’ (DB-25M) Interface .............................. 4–15
4.2.2.2.3 ‘J7 HSSI’ Interface ................................................................. 4–16
4.2.2.2.4 Data Interface Module Slot .................................................. 4–17
4.2.3 IF Interface Connectors ...................................................................... 4–17
4.2.3.1
‘J2 TX’ L-Band IF Connector (Type ‘N’) .................................... 4–17
4.2.3.2
‘J4 RX’ L-Band IF Connector (Type ‘N’).................................... 4–17
4.2.3.3
‘J11 TX’ 70/140 MHz IF Connector (BNC)................................ 4–17
4.2.3.4
‘J3| RX’ 70/140 MHz IF Connector (BNC) ................................ 4–17
CHAPTER 5. FIRMWARE UPDATE ....................................................5–1
5.1 Firmware Update Overview ................................................................ 5–1
5.1.1 Firmware Update Procedure Summary ............................................... 5–1
5.1.2 About Firmware Numbers, File Versions, and Formats....................... 5–2
5.2
Prepare for the Firmware Download ................................................... 5–3
viii
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
MN-SLM5650A / CD-SLM5650A
Revision 9
5.2.1 Required User-supplied Items .............................................................. 5–3
5.2.1.1
Modem Connections ................................................................. 5–3
5.2.2 Configure the Terminal Emulator Program .......................................... 5–4
5.2.3 Get the Management IP Address and Firmware Information ............. 5–4
5.2.3.1
Use Front Panel Operation to Find the Management IP Address ....
................................................................................................... 5–5
5.2.3.2
Use Front Panel Operation to Find the Firmware Information . 5–5
5.2.3.3
Use the Serial Interface to Find the Firmware Information ...... 5–5
5.2.3.4
Use the Base Modem HTTP Interface to Find the Firmware
Information .................................................................................................. 5–6
5.2.4 Make a Temporary Folder (Subdirectory) on the User PC ................... 5–6
5.2.4.1
Use Windows Desktop to Make a Folder .................................. 5–7
5.2.4.2
Use Windows Explorer to Make a Folder .................................. 5–7
5.2.4.3
Use the Run and Browse Windows to Make a Folder ............... 5–8
5.2.4.4
Use Windows Command-line or Command Prompt to Make a
Folder
................................................................................................... 5–8
5.2.5 Download and Extract the Firmware Update Files .............................. 5–9
5.2.5.1
Use Windows Desktop to View Folder Contents .................... 5–11
5.2.5.2
Use Windows Command-line to View Folder Contents .......... 5–11
5.3 Upload the Bulk Firmware Files and Update the Modem .................. 5–12
5.3.1 Important Considerations .................................................................. 5–12
5.3.2 Steps to FTP Upload the Firmware Files ............................................ 5–12
5.4 Optional Network Processor (NP) Module Interface Firmware Update
Procedure.................................................................................................... 5–14
5.5
Optional TRANSEC Module Interface Firmware Update Procedure.... 5–19
5.6
USB Firmware Update Procedure ...................................................... 5–24
CHAPTER 6. FAST ACTIVATION PROCEDURE ................................6–1
6.1
Overview ............................................................................................ 6–1
6.2
FAST Activation Procedure via the SLM-5650A Front Panel ................. 6–2
CHAPTER 7. FRONT PANEL OPERATION ........................................7–1
7.1
Overview ............................................................................................ 7–1
ix
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
MN-SLM5650A / CD-SLM5650A
Revision 9
7.1.1 Keypad with Data Entry Array .............................................................. 7–2
7.1.2 LED Indicators....................................................................................... 7–3
7.1.3 Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) ...................................................... 7–5
7.1.3.1
Navigating the Menu Screens.................................................... 7–6
7.2 Front Panel Operation ......................................................................... 7–7
7.2.1 Opening Screen .................................................................................... 7–7
7.2.2 SELECT: (Main) Menu ........................................................................... 7–7
7.2.3 (SELECT:) Configure (Configuration) Menu Branch .............................. 7–8
7.2.3.1
(CONFIG:) Tx ............................................................................ 7–10
7.2.3.2
(CONFIG:) Rx ............................................................................ 7–17
7.2.3.3
(CONFIG:) Mode ...................................................................... 7–26
7.2.3.4
(CONFIG:) AUPC ....................................................................... 7–28
7.2.3.5
(CONFIG:) Transec ................................................................... 7–32
7.2.3.6
(CONFIG:) AntHndOvr.............................................................. 7–32
7.2.3.7
(CONFIG:) Ref .......................................................................... 7–32
7.2.3.8
(CONFIG:) Mask ....................................................................... 7–33
7.2.3.9
(CONFIG:) Reset ....................................................................... 7–34
7.2.3.10 (CONFIG:) Remote ................................................................... 7–34
7.2.3.10.1 (CONFIG:) Remote  EthernetConfig  SNMP ................ 7–37
7.2.3.10.2 (CONFIG:) Remote  EthernetConfig  Option Card Addr ......
............................................................................................ 7–41
7.2.4 (SELECT:) Monitor Menu Branch ........................................................ 7–43
7.2.4.1
(Monitor:) Alarms .................................................................... 7–43
7.2.4.2
(Monitor:) Event-Log ................................................................7–47
7.2.4.3
(Monitor:) Rx-Params .............................................................. 7–48
7.2.4.4
(Monitor:) CnC (DoubleTalk® Carrier-in-Carrier®) ................... 7–48
7.2.4.5
Monitor: Stats (Statistics) ........................................................ 7–49
7.2.4.6
Monitor: GigaBit I/F Statistics ................................................. 7–50
7.2.5 (SELECT:) Test Menu Branch ............................................................... 7–50
7.2.5.1
(TEST:) Carrier .......................................................................... 7–50
7.2.5.2
(TEST:) Loopback...................................................................... 7–51
7.2.5.3
(TEST:) BERT ............................................................................. 7–51
7.2.5.4
(TEST:) LampTest ...................................................................... 7–52
7.2.6 (SELECT:) Save/Load Menu Branch .................................................... 7–53
7.2.7 (SELECT:) Utility Menu Branch ........................................................... 7–54
7.2.7.1
(UTIL:) RT-Clk ........................................................................... 7–54
7.2.7.2
(UTIL:) RefAdjust...................................................................... 7–54
7.2.7.3
(UTIL:) ID .................................................................................. 7–55
x
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
MN-SLM5650A / CD-SLM5650A
Revision 9
7.2.7.4
(UTIL:) Display.......................................................................... 7–55
7.2.7.5
(UTIL:) Temp ............................................................................ 7–55
7.2.7.6
(UTIL:) Agc (Automatic Gain Control) ...................................... 7–55
7.2.7.7
(UTIL:) Alarm ........................................................................... 7–56
7.2.7.8
(UTIL:) PwrCal .......................................................................... 7–56
7.2.7.9
(UTIL:) Firmware ..................................................................... 7–56
7.2.7.10 (UTIL:) FAST.............................................................................. 7–58
7.2.7.10.1 Enter Modem Code (FAST Activation Procedure) .............. 7–60
7.2.7.10.2 FAST Demo Mode ............................................................... 7–60
CHAPTER 8. ETHERNET INTERFACE OPERATION .........................8–1
8.1 Ethernet Management Interfaces & Protocols..................................... 8–1
8.1.1 Secure Ethernet Management Interfaces ............................................ 8–2
8.1.1.1
Base Modem Interface .............................................................. 8–2
8.1.1.2
Optional NP Interface Module .................................................. 8–3
8.1.1.3
Base Modem + Optional NP Interface + Optional TRANSEC
Module
................................................................................................... 8–5
8.2 SNMP Interface ................................................................................... 8–6
8.2.1 Management Information Base (MIB) Files ......................................... 8–6
8.2.2 SNMP Community Strings .................................................................... 8–7
8.2.3 SNMP Traps .......................................................................................... 8–7
8.2.4 SNMPv3 (Base Modem) ....................................................................... 8–8
8.3 Telnet Interface ................................................................................. 8–10
8.3.1 Using HyperTerminal for Telnet Remote Control Operation .............. 8–10
8.3.1.1
Configure HyperTerminal for Telnet Remote Control Operation
................................................................................................. 8–11
8.4 SSH (Secure Shell) Interface .............................................................. 8–13
8.4.1 Configure a SSH CLI Session ............................................................... 8–13
CHAPTER 9. BASE MODEM HTTP INTERFACE OPERATION .........9–1
9.1 Overview ............................................................................................ 9–1
9.1.1 Prerequisites ........................................................................................ 9–1
9.2 Base Modem HTTP Interface ............................................................... 9–2
9.2.1 HTTP Interface Availability via Secure Management Interfaces .......... 9–2
xi
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
MN-SLM5650A / CD-SLM5650A
Revision 9
9.2.2 HTTP Interface User Login .................................................................... 9–2
9.2.3 HTTP Interface Features ....................................................................... 9–4
9.2.3.1
Page Navigation ......................................................................... 9–4
9.2.3.2
Page Sections ............................................................................. 9–4
9.2.3.3
Action Buttons ........................................................................... 9–4
9.2.3.4
Drop-down Lists......................................................................... 9–5
9.2.3.5
Text or Data Entry ...................................................................... 9–5
9.2.4 HTTP Interface Menu Tree ................................................................... 9–5
9.3 HTTP Interface Page Examples ............................................................ 9–6
9.3.1 Home Pages.......................................................................................... 9–6
9.3.1.1
Home | Home............................................................................ 9–6
9.3.1.2
Home | Contact ......................................................................... 9–7
9.3.2 Admin (Administration) Pages ............................................................. 9–8
9.3.2.1
Admin | Access .......................................................................... 9–8
9.3.2.2
Admin | Remote ........................................................................ 9–9
9.3.3 Config Mdm (Configure Modem) Pages............................................. 9–10
9.3.3.1
Config Mdm | Page 1 (Modem Config) ................................... 9–10
9.3.3.2
Config Mdm | Page 2 (Modem Utilities) ................................. 9–11
9.3.3.3
Config Mdm | Page 3 (Antenna Handover FAST Option) ........ 9–12
9.3.3.4
Config Mdm | CnC (FAST Option) ............................................ 9–12
9.3.3.5
Config Mdm | Spreading (FAST Option) .................................. 9–13
9.3.3.6
Config Mdm | AUPC (Automatic Uplink Power Control) ......... 9–14
9.3.4 Stats (Statistics) Pages ........................................................................ 9–15
9.3.4.1
Stats | Modem Status.............................................................. 9–15
9.3.4.2
Stats | Event Log ...................................................................... 9–16
9.3.4.3
Stats | Statistics ....................................................................... 9–17
9.3.4.4
Stats | Config Log .................................................................... 9–18
9.3.4.5
Stats | Router Stats.................................................................. 9–19
9.3.4.6
Stats | Ether Stats .................................................................... 9–21
9.3.5 Maint (Maintenance)| Unit Info Page ................................................ 9–22
CHAPTER 10. SERIAL INTERFACE OPERATION .............................10–1
10.1 Overview .......................................................................................... 10–1
10.2 Remote Control Protocol and Structure ............................................ 10–1
10.2.1 EIA-232 ............................................................................................... 10–1
10.2.2 EIA-485 ............................................................................................... 10–2
xii
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
MN-SLM5650A / CD-SLM5650A
Revision 9
10.2.3 Basic Serial Protocol ........................................................................... 10–2
10.2.4 Packet Structure ................................................................................. 10–3
10.2.4.1 Start of Packet ......................................................................... 10–4
10.2.4.2 Target Address ......................................................................... 10–4
10.2.4.3 Address Delimiter .................................................................... 10–4
10.2.4.4 Instruction Code ...................................................................... 10–4
10.2.4.5 Instruction Code Qualifier ....................................................... 10–4
10.2.4.5.1 Controller-to-Target Rules .................................................. 10–4
10.2.4.5.2 Target-to-Controller Rules .................................................. 10–5
10.2.4.6 Optional Message Arguments ................................................. 10–6
10.2.4.7 End of Packet ........................................................................... 10–6
10.3 Remote Commands and Queries ....................................................... 10–7
10.3.1 10–7
10.3.2 Initial Setup – Priority Commands and Queries................................. 10–9
10.3.3 Modulator (Tx) Commands and Queries.......................................... 10–11
10.3.4 Demodulator (Rx) Commands and Queries ..................................... 10–17
10.3.5 Modem (Unit) Commands and Queries ........................................... 10–25
10.3.6 Bulk Configuration Commands and Queries .................................... 10–36
10.3.7 Automatic Uplink Power Control (AUPC) Commands and Queries . 10–39
10.3.8 Gigabit Ethernet Interface Commands and Queries ........................ 10–45
10.3.9 G.703 Interface Commands and Queries ......................................... 10–46
10.3.10
Network Processor (NP) Interface Commands and Queries ..... 10–48
10.3.11
TRANSEC Module Interface Commands and Queries ............... 10–50
APPENDIX A. SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND TROUBLESHOOTING .... A–1
A.1
Overview ............................................................................................ A–1
A.2 System Checkout................................................................................. A–1
A.2.1 Interface Checkout ............................................................................... A–2
A.2.2 Modulator Checkout ............................................................................ A–2
A.2.3 Demodulator Checkout ........................................................................ A–6
A.3
Fault Isolation ..................................................................................... A–9
A.4
System Faults/Alarms ....................................................................... A–11
A.5
LED Display and Description .............................................................. A–13
xiii
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
MN-SLM5650A / CD-SLM5650A
Revision 9
APPENDIX B. OPERATIONAL REFERENCES ................................... B–1
B.1
Overview ............................................................................................ B–1
B.2 Modes ................................................................................................ B–2
B.2.1 OM-73 Mode ........................................................................................ B–2
B.2.2 MIL-STD-188-165A Mode .................................................................... B–2
B.2.3 MIL-STD-188-165A Mode – Sequential................................................ B–4
B.2.4 IESS-308 Mode – Standard Higher Rates ............................................. B–5
B.2.5 IESS-308 Mode – Extended .................................................................. B–7
B.2.6 IESS-309 Mode – Extended (Closed Network) ..................................... B–9
B.2.7 IESS-310 Mode – Extended Rates ...................................................... B–10
B.2.8 Turbo Code Mode .............................................................................. B–10
B.2.9 16-QAM Mode ................................................................................... B–11
B.2.10 AUPC Mode ........................................................................................ B–11
B.2.11 AUPC Mode – Sequential ................................................................... B–12
B.2.12 AUPC Mode – Turbo ........................................................................... B–12
B.2.13 LDPC Mode – Ultra Low Latency (ULL)............................................... B–13
B.2.14 LDPC Mode – Low Latency (LL) .......................................................... B–13
B.2.15 LDPC Mode – High Performance (HP) ................................................ B–14
B.3 Clocking Options ............................................................................... B–15
B.3.1 IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Master ........................................................... B–15
B.3.2 IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Slave............................................................... B–17
B.4 Buffering ........................................................................................... B–19
B.4.1 Buffer Size .......................................................................................... B–20
B.4.1.1
Doppler .................................................................................... B–20
B.4.1.2
Plesiochronous ........................................................................ B–21
B.4.1.3
Frame / Multiframe Length ..................................................... B–22
B.4.1.3.1 Multiples of the Frame Length ............................................. B–22
B.4.1.3.2 Total Buffer Length ............................................................... B–22
B.4.1.3.3 Converting Between Bits and Seconds ................................ B–23
APPENDIX C. OPTIONAL DATA INTERFACE MODULES.................. C–1
C.1
Overview ............................................................................................ C–1
xiv
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
MN-SLM5650A / CD-SLM5650A
Revision 9
C.2 SLM-5650A Optional Data Interface Modules ..................................... C–3
C.2.1 10/100/1000 BaseT (GbE) Interface Module........................................ C–3
C.2.1.1
Physical Description................................................................... C–3
C.2.1.2
“J1” Connector Pinout ............................................................... C–4
C.2.1.3
Specifications............................................................................. C–5
C.2.1.3.1 General Specifications ............................................................ C–5
C.2.1.3.2 Monitor & Control .................................................................. C–6
C.2.1.3.3 Physical and Environmental ................................................... C–7
C.2.1.4
10/100/1000 BaseT (GbE) Interface Module Removal and
Installation ................................................................................................... C–8
C.2.1.4.1 GbE Interface Module Removal Procedure............................ C–8
C.2.1.4.2 GbE Interface Module Installation Procedure........................ C–8
C.2.2 G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Data Interface Module .......................................... C–9
C.2.2.1
Physical Description................................................................... C–9
C.2.2.1.1 G.703 Balanced “J1 | BAL DATA” Connector (DB-15F) ......... C–10
C.2.2.1.2 G.703 Unbalanced “J2” through “J4” BNC Connectors ........ C–11
C.2.2.2
Specifications........................................................................... C–11
C.2.2.2.1 General Specifications .......................................................... C–11
C.2.2.2.2 Interfaces.............................................................................. C–12
C.2.2.2.3 Physical and Environmental ................................................. C–13
C.2.2.3
G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module Removal and Installation
................................................................................................. C–13
C.2.2.3.1 G.703 Interface Module Removal Procedure....................... C–13
C.2.2.3.2 G.703 Interface Module Installation Procedure................... C–14
C.2.3 Low Voltage Differential (LVDS) Interface Module............................. C–15
C.2.3.1
Physical Description................................................................. C–15
C.2.3.1.1 “J1” Connector Pinout (DB-25F) ........................................... C–16
C.2.3.2
Specifications........................................................................... C–17
C.2.3.2.1 General Specifications .......................................................... C–17
C.2.3.2.2 Physical & Environmental..................................................... C–17
C.2.3.3
LVDS Interface Module Removal and Installation ................... C–18
C.2.3.3.1 LVDS Interface Module Removal Procedure ........................ C–18
C.2.3.3.2 LVDS Interface Module Installation Procedure .................... C–18
APPENDIX D. OPTIONAL NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) INTERFACE
MODULE
...................................................................................... D–1
D.1 Overview ............................................................................................ D–1
D.1.1 Functional Hardware Description ........................................................ D–2
xv
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
MN-SLM5650A / CD-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.1.2 Connector Pinout ................................................................................. D–3
D.1.3 Interface Specifications ........................................................................ D–4
D.1.3.1
Physical Description................................................................... D–4
D.1.3.2
General Specifications ............................................................... D–4
D.1.4 NP Interface Module Removal and Installation ................................... D–5
D.1.4.1
NP Interface Module Removal .................................................. D–5
D.1.4.2
NP Interface Module Installation .............................................. D–5
D.1.5 Using BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode.................................... D–6
D.1.6 Important Operational Considerations ................................................ D–6
D.2 Network Processor (NP) HTTP/HTTPS Interface................................... D–7
D.2.1 HTTP/HTTPS Interface Introduction ..................................................... D–7
D.2.1.1
HTTP/HTTPS Interface Availability via Secure Management
Interfaces ................................................................................................... D–7
D.2.1.1.1 Secure Management – NP Interface Only.............................. D–8
D.2.1.1.2 Secure Management – NP Interface PLUS TRANSEC Module
Interface ............................................................................................... D–9
D.2.2 User Login........................................................................................... D–10
D.2.3 HTTP/HTTPS Interface – Operational Features .................................. D–11
D.2.4 HTTP/HTTPS Menu Tree ..................................................................... D–12
D.2.5 HTTP/HTTPS Page Descriptions .......................................................... D–13
D.2.5.1
Info (Information) pages .......................................................... D–13
D.2.5.1.1 Info | Home.......................................................................... D–13
D.2.5.1.2 Info | Contact ....................................................................... D–14
D.2.5.1.3 Info | Log Off ........................................................................ D–15
D.2.5.2
Admin (Administration) pages ................................................. D–16
D.2.5.2.1 Admin | Vipersat Mode (FAST Option) ................................ D–16
D.2.5.2.2 Admin | FAST Features ......................................................... D–19
D.2.5.2.3 Admin | Security (Account Information) ............................. D–21
D.2.5.2.4 Admin | SNMP ..................................................................... D–23
D.2.5.2.5 Admin | Upgrade ................................................................. D–25
D.2.5.2.6 Admin | Defaults .................................................................. D–27
D.2.5.2.7 Admin | Time (Date and Time)............................................ D–28
D.2.5.2.8 Admin | Event Log................................................................ D–30
D.2.5.2.9 Admin | Reboot ................................................................... D–31
D.2.5.3
Modem pages .......................................................................... D–33
D.2.5.3.1 Modem | Config (Modem Configuration) ........................... D–33
D.2.5.3.2 Modem | Monitor (Modem Status) .................................... D–39
D.2.5.3.3 Modem | Events (Modem Events Log) ................................ D–40
xvi
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
MN-SLM5650A / CD-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.2.5.3.4 Modem | Stats (Modem Statistics Log) ............................... D–41
D.2.5.3.5 Modem | Utility (Modem Utilities) ..................................... D–42
D.2.5.4
LAN pages ................................................................................ D–43
D.2.5.4.1 LAN | Interface .................................................................... D–43
D.2.5.4.2 LAN | Ethernet Ports............................................................ D–47
D.2.5.4.3 LAN | ARP (ARP Table) ......................................................... D–48
D.2.5.5
WAN Pages .............................................................................. D–50
D.2.5.5.1 WAN | QoS (Quality of Service) ........................................... D–50
D.2.5.5.2 WAN | QoS Stats (Quality of Service Statistics) ................... D–51
D.2.5.5.3 WAN | Loopback Test........................................................... D–52
D.2.5.6
Routing Pages .......................................................................... D–53
D.2.5.6.1 Routing | Routes .................................................................. D–53
D.2.5.6.2 Routing | OSPF ..................................................................... D–55
D.2.5.6.3 Routing | IGMP .................................................................... D–57
D.2.5.7
Stats (Statistics) pages ............................................................. D–59
D.2.5.7.1 Stats | Ethernet Tx ............................................................... D–59
D.2.5.7.2 Stats | Ethernet Rx ............................................................... D–61
D.2.5.7.3 Stats | IP ............................................................................... D–63
D.2.5.7.4 Stats | WAN.......................................................................... D–66
D.2.5.7.5 Stats | Clear All .................................................................... D–68
D.2.5.8
Vipersat Pages ......................................................................... D–69
D.2.5.9
Redundancy Page .................................................................... D–70
D.2.5.10 Save page ................................................................................. D–71
D.3 Network Processor (NP) Telnet/SSH CLI Interface Operation ............. D–73
D.3.1 Important Operational Considerations .............................................. D–73
D.3.1.1
Telnet User Access ................................................................... D–74
D.3.1.1.1 Telnet Operational Guidelines ............................................. D–74
D.3.1.2
SSH (Secure Shell) User Access ................................................ D–74
D.3.1.3
Using the Command Line Interface ......................................... D–75
D.3.1.3.1 CLI Menu System – Parallel Functionality ............................ D–75
D.3.1.3.2 CLI Menu – Common Information, Navigation, Operation
Features ............................................................................................. D–75
D.3.2 Command Line Interface Pages.......................................................... D–77
D.3.2.1
Main Menu .............................................................................. D–77
D.3.2.2
Administration Menu page (A) ................................................ D–79
D.3.2.2.1 Administration Menu | Information page (I) ....................... D–81
D.3.2.2.2 Administration Menu | FAST Feature Code Page (F) ........... D–82
D.3.2.2.3 Administration Menu | Security Page (A) ............................ D–83
xvii
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
MN-SLM5650A / CD-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.3.2.2.4 Administration Menu | SNMP Page (P) ............................... D–84
D.3.2.2.5 Administration Menu | Restore Factory Defaults (D) .......... D–85
D.3.2.2.6 Administration Menu | Set Time Page (T) ........................... D–86
D.3.2.2.7 Administration Menu | Event Log Page (E).......................... D–87
D.3.2.2.8 Administration Menu | Reboot Now prompt (R) ................ D–88
D.3.2.3
Satellite Modem Configuration (Modem Menu) Page (M) ..... D–89
D.3.2.3.1 Satellite Modem Configuration | Modulator Menu Page (M) .....
............................................................................................. D–90
D.3.2.3.2 Satellite Modem Configuration | Demodulator Menu Page (D) .
............................................................................................. D–92
D.3.2.3.3 Satellite Modem Configuration | Receive Monitor Page (R) .......
............................................................................................. D–94
D.3.2.3.4 Satellite Modem Configuration | Events Page (E) ............... D–95
D.3.2.3.5 Satellite Modem Configuration | Stats Page (T) .................. D–96
D.3.2.3.6 Satellite Modem Configuration | Utility Page (U)................ D–97
D.3.2.4
LAN Menu Page (N) ................................................................. D–98
D.3.2.4.1 LAN Menu | Interface Page (I) ............................................. D–99
D.3.2.4.2 LAN Menu | Ethernet Ports Menu Page (E)....................... D–100
D.3.2.4.3 LAN Menu | ARP Menu (A) ................................................ D–101
D.3.2.5
WAN Menu Page (W)............................................................. D–102
D.3.2.6
Routing Table Page (R) ........................................................... D–103
D.3.2.7
OSPF Configuration Page (F) .................................................. D–104
D.3.2.8
IGMP Configuration Page (I) .................................................. D–105
D.3.2.9
Vipersat Configuration Page (V) ............................................ D–106
D.3.2.10 Redundancy Configuration Page (E) ...................................... D–107
D.3.2.11 Operations & Maintenance Page (O) .................................... D–108
D.3.2.11.1 Operations & Maintenance | Statistics Page (T).............. D–109
APPENDIX E. OPTIONAL TRANSEC MODULE OPERATION ........... E–1
E.1
Overview ............................................................................................ E–1
E.2 TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface ...................................................... E–2
E.2.1 HTTPS Interface Introduction ................................................................E–2
E.2.1.1
Secure Management – TRANSEC Module PLUS NP Interface ....E–2
E.2.2 User Login..............................................................................................E–3
E.2.3 HTTPS Interface – Operational Features ...............................................E–6
E.2.4 HTTPS Menu Tree ..................................................................................E–6
E.2.5 TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface Page Descriptions ..........................E–7
xviii
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
MN-SLM5650A / CD-SLM5650A
Revision 9
E.2.5.1
Home Pages ................................................................................E–7
E.2.5.1.1 Home | Home......................................................................... E–7
E.2.5.1.2 Home | Contact ...................................................................... E–8
E.2.5.2
Admin (Administrative) Pages ....................................................E–9
E.2.5.2.1 Admin | Config ....................................................................... E–9
E.2.5.2.2 Admin | Update .................................................................... E–15
E.2.5.2.3 Admin | Event....................................................................... E–16
E.2.5.3
Stats (Statistics) | Module Status Page ....................................E–18
E.2.5.4
Maint (Maintenance) | Unit Info Page .....................................E–20
E.3 TRANSEC Module SSH/CLI Interface Operation ................................. E–21
E.3.1 Overview .............................................................................................E–21
E.3.1.1
SSH (Secure Shell) User Access .................................................E–21
E.3.1.2
Using the Command Line Interface ..........................................E–22
E.3.1.2.1 CLI Menu System – Parallel Functionality ............................ E–22
E.3.1.2.2 CLI Menu – Common Information, Navigation, Operation
Features .............................................................................................. E–22
E.3.2 Command Line Interface Pages...........................................................E–24
E.3.2.1
Main Menu ...............................................................................E–24
E.3.2.2
Configuration page [C]..............................................................E–25
E.3.2.2.1 Configuration | Active Encryption Key Menu page [A] ........ E–26
E.3.2.2.2 Configuration | Future Encryption Key Menu page [F] ........ E–27
E.3.2.2.3 Configuration | Encryption Menu page [E] .......................... E–28
E.3.2.2.4 Configuration | Network Menu page [N] ............................. E–29
E.3.2.2.5 Configuration | Credentials Menu page [C] ......................... E–30
E.3.2.2.6 Configuration | SSH Console Menu page [S]........................ E–31
E.3.2.3
Module Status Page [M] ...........................................................E–32
E.3.2.4
Event Log [E] .............................................................................E–33
E.3.2.5
Unit Info [ I ] ..............................................................................E–34
E.3.2.6
Comtech EF Data Information page [Z] ....................................E–35
APPENDIX F. DOUBLETALK CARRIER-IN-CARRIER OPTION ........ F–1
F.1
Overview ............................................................................................ F–1
F.1.1 What is DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier? ................................................. F–2
F.2
Application Requirements................................................................... F–3
F.2.1 Operational Recommendations ............................................................ F–5
xix
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
MN-SLM5650A / CD-SLM5650A
Revision 9
F.3
System Functionality and Operational Considerations ........................ F–6
F.3.1 DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Cancellation Process .............................. F–9
F.3.2 Margin Requirements .........................................................................F–10
F.3.3 Carrier-in-Carrier Latency....................................................................F–11
F.3.4 Carrier-in-Carrier Link Design ..............................................................F–11
F.3.4.1
Symmetric Data Rate Link ........................................................F–11
F.3.4.2
Asymmetric Data Rate Link ......................................................F–13
F.3.4.3
Power Limited Links ..................................................................F–15
F.3.5 Carrier-in-Carrier Commissioning and Deployment ...........................F–16
F.3.6 Validating Carrier-in-Carrier Performance .......................................... F–17
F.4
Operational References..................................................................... F–19
F.4.1 Carrier-in-Carrier Link Budget Calculation ..........................................F–19
F.4.2 Estimating PSD Ratio ........................................................................... F–20
F.4.2.1
Estimating PSD Ratio from LST ................................................. F–20
F.4.2.2
Estimating PSD Ratio from Satmaster ......................................F–21
F.4.2.3
Estimating PSD Ratio Using Spectrum Analyzer .......................F–21
F.5
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Specifications ...................................... F–22
F.6
Carrier-in-Carrier Summary ............................................................... F–23
F.7
Glossary of Terms.............................................................................. F–23
APPENDIX G. VIPERSAT NETWORK APPLICATION EXAMPLES .... G–1
G.1
Overview ............................................................................................ G–1
G.2 OSPF v2 in a Shared Outbound Satellite Network................................ G–2
G.2.1 Shared Outbound Satellite Network Overview .................................... G–2
G.2.2 OSPF Basics .......................................................................................... G–3
G.2.3 OSPF Challenges ................................................................................... G–3
G.2.4 OSPF Maritime Use Cases .................................................................... G–3
G.2.4.1
OSPF Use Case: At Shore ........................................................... G–4
G.2.4.2
OSPF Use Case: At Sea ............................................................... G–5
G.2.5 OSPF Deployment Solution .................................................................. G–6
G.2.5.1
OSPF Test Network .................................................................... G–6
G.2.5.2
OSPF Test Solution ..................................................................... G–7
G.2.5.3
OSPFv2 Summary ...................................................................... G–8
xx
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
MN-SLM5650A / CD-SLM5650A
Revision 9
G.3 Network Processor (NP) Interface BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint)
Mode ........................................................................................................... G–9
G.3.1 BPM Mode Functional Description ...................................................... G–9
G.3.1.1
Glossary of Terms .................................................................... G–10
G.3.2 BPM Mode Configuration .................................................................. G–11
G.3.3 BPM Mode in Hub Data Traffic Networks .......................................... G–13
G.3.4 Dynamic Hub Demodulators in a Multiple TDM Hubs Configuration
............................................................................................................ G–15
G.3.5 Remote Data Traffic Handling ............................................................ G–16
APPENDIX H. OVERHEAD AND SYMBOL RATE CALCULATIONS .. H–1
H.1
Overview ............................................................................................ H–1
H.2
SLM-5650A Processing Flow and Symbol Rate Calculation .................. H–2
H.3 Sources of Overhead ........................................................................... H–4
H.3.1 Framing Overhead ................................................................................ H–4
H.3.1.1
Reed–Solomon/Outside FEC Codec Framing Factor ................. H–4
H.3.1.2
AUPC/ASYNC (ESC) and ACPC Channel Framing ........................ H–4
H.3.1.3
TRANSEC Framing ...................................................................... H–5
H.3.2 Total Framing Overhead ........................................................................ H–5
H.3.3 IP Traffic Encapsulation Overhead ........................................................ H–5
H.4
Product Support.................................................................................. H–7
TABLES
Table 2-1. Acquisition and Timing Performance Requirements ......................... 2–9
Table 2-2. Doppler Requirements ..................................................................... 2–10
Table 2-3. Viterbi Decoder BER ......................................................................... 2–13
Table 2-4. BSPK/QPSK/OQPSK Viterbi with Reed-Solomon Decoder BER
Performance .............................................................................................. 2–13
Table 2-5. 8PSK, Trellis Decoder BER Performance ........................................... 2–14
Table 2-6. 8PSK, Trellis Decoder with Reed-Solomon BER Performance .......... 2–14
Table 2-7. 16QAM, Viterbi Decoder with Reed-Solomon BER Performance .... 2–15
Table 2-8. TPC Decoder BER Performance ........................................................ 2–15
Table 2-9. Sequential Decoding with / without Reed-Solomon BER Performance ...
................................................................................................................... 2–16
xxi
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
MN-SLM5650A / CD-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Table 2-10. Acceptable ACI Degradation with Spacing Factor of 1.2 ................ 2–16
Table 2-11. LDPC ULL Decoder BER Performance ............................................. 2–18
Table 2-12. LDPC LL Decoder BER Performance................................................ 2–18
Table 2-13. LDPC HP Decoder BER Performance .............................................. 2–19
Table 4-1. ‘J8 Alarms’ DB-9F Connector Pinout................................................. 4–11
Table 4-2. ‘J9 Auxiliary’ HD-15F Connector Pinout ........................................... 4–12
Table 4-3. ‘J10 Remote’ (DB-9F) Pinout............................................................. 4–13
Table 4-4. ‘J6 EIA530’ DB-25F Connector Pinout .............................................. 4–14
Table 4-5. ‘P1 Overhead Data’ DB-25M Connector Pinout ............................... 4–15
Table 9-1. Router Stats Page – Drop-down “Feature Select” Items .................. 9–20
Table 10-1. Controller-to-Target Packet Structure ............................................ 10–3
Table 10-2. Target-to-Controller Packet Structure ............................................ 10–3
Table A-1. Conversion to S/N and Eb/N0Chart ..................................................... A–4
Table A-2. SLM-5650A Fault Tree ...................................................................... A–11
Table C-1. “J1” Connector Pinout ........................................................................ C–4
Table C-2. “J1 | BAL. DATA” DB-15F Connector Pinout ..................................... C–10
Table C-3. G.703 Unbalanced Connectors ......................................................... C–11
Table C-4. “J1” DB-25F Connector Pinout ......................................................... C–16
Table D-1. LAN Interface Connector Pinout (Typical).......................................... D–3
Table E-1. Event Log Message Types (By Order of Increasing Severity) ............ E–17
Table F-1. Spectral Efficiency using DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier ...................... F–8
FIGURES
Figure 1-1. Comtech EF Data SLM-5650A Satellite Modem ............................... 1–1
Figure 1-2. SLM-5650A Block Diagram ............................................................... 1–2
Figure 1-3. SLM-5650A Dimensional Envelope ................................................. 1–14
Figure 1-4. SLM-5650A Satellite Modem – Front Panel View .......................... 1–15
Figure 1-5. SLM-5650A Satellite Modem – Rear Panel View ............................ 1–16
Figure 3-1. Unpack and Inspect the Shipment .................................................... 3–1
Figure 3-2. Install the Unit Into a Rack Enclosure ............................................... 3–4
Figure 3-3. Install the Optional Rear Support Brackets Kit ................................. 3–5
Figure 3-4. Install the Optional Bearingless Rack Slide Set ................................. 3–6
Figure 4-1. Coaxial Connector Examples............................................................. 4–2
Figure 4-2. D-Subminiature Connector Examples ............................................... 4–4
Figure 4-3. RJ-45/RJ-48 Connector Example ....................................................... 4–4
Figure 4-4. USB Connector Examples.................................................................. 4–5
Figure 4-5. SLM-5650A Rear Panel View ............................................................ 4–6
xxii
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
MN-SLM5650A / CD-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Figure 4-6. Replace the AC Fuses ........................................................................ 4–7
Figure 4-7. Apply AC Power to the Unit .............................................................. 4–7
Figure 4-8. Unit Ground Connection ................................................................... 4–9
Figure 4-9. Rear Panel Operational Connections .............................................. 4–10
Figure 7-1. SLM-5650A Satellite Modem – Front Panel View ............................ 7–1
Figure 8-1. IP Traffic Isolation When Using Bridge Modes.................................. 8–4
Figure 8-2. Telnet Interface Example – Windows Command-line .................... 8–10
Figure 8-3. Telnet Interface Example – HyperTerminal..................................... 8–11
Figure 8-4. Configure HyperTerminal ................................................................ 8–11
Figure 8-5. Configure PuTTY for CLI Operations ............................................... 8–13
Figure 8-6. CLI Session Examples ...................................................................... 8–14
Figure 9-1. HTTP Interface “Splash” Page Example ............................................ 9–3
Figure 9-2. ‘Home | Home’ Page ........................................................................ 9–6
Figure 9-3. ‘Home | Contact’ Page ..................................................................... 9–7
Figure 9-4. ‘Admin | Access’ Page ....................................................................... 9–8
Figure 9-5. ‘Admin | Remote’ Page ..................................................................... 9–9
Figure 9-6. ‘Config Mdm | Page 1 (Modem Config)’ Page ................................ 9–10
Figure 9-7. ‘Config Mdm | Page 2 (Modem Utilities)’ Page .............................. 9–11
Figure 9-8. ‘Config Mdm | Page 3 (Modem Config/Antenna Handover)’ Page ........
................................................................................................................... 9–12
Figure 9-9. ‘Config Mdm | CnC’ Page ............................................................... 9–12
Figure 9-10. ‘Config Mdm | Spreading’ Page .................................................... 9–13
Figure 9-11. ‘Config Mdm | AUPC’ Page ........................................................... 9–14
Figure 9-12. ‘Stats | Modem Status’ Page ........................................................ 9–15
Figure 9-13. ‘Stats | Event Log’ Page ................................................................ 9–16
Figure 9-14. ‘Stats | Statistics’ Page .................................................................. 9–17
Figure 9-15. ‘Stats | Config Log’ Page ............................................................... 9–18
Figure 9-16. ‘Stats | Router Stats’ Page ............................................................ 9–19
Figure 9-17. ‘Stats | Ether Stats’ Page............................................................... 9–21
Figure 9-18. ‘Maint | Unit Info’ Page ................................................................ 9–22
Figure A-1. Fault Isolation Test Setup.................................................................. A–2
Figure A-2. Typical Output Spectrum – With Noise ............................................ A–5
Figure A-3. Typical Output Spectrum – Without Noise ...................................... A–5
Figure A-4. Typical Constellation Patterns – With Noise .................................... A–7
Figure A-5. Typical Constellation Patterns – Without Noise .............................. A–8
Figure B-1. IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Master Clocking Diagram ........................... B–16
Figure B-2. IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Slave Clocking Diagram .............................. B–18
Figure B-3. Clock Slip ......................................................................................... B–19
Figure B-4. Doppler Shift................................................................................... B–20
xxiii
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
MN-SLM5650A / CD-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Figure C-1. SLM-5650A Data Interface Module Slot (Empty) ............................. C–1
Figure C-2. 10/100/1000 BaseT (GbE) Interface Module (AS/11985) ................. C–3
Figure C-3. GbE Interface Functional Block Diagram .......................................... C–4
Figure C-4. GbE Interface Module Removal or Installation ................................ C–8
Figure C-5. G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module (AS/11579 shown)................. C–9
Figure C-6. G.703T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Functional Block Diagram ................... C–9
Figure C-7. G.703 Interface Module Removal or Installation ........................... C–13
Figure C-8. Low Voltage Differential (LVDS) Interface Module (PL/12272-1).... C–15
Figure C-9. LVDS Interface Functional Block Diagram ....................................... C–15
Figure C-7. LVDS Interface Module Removal or Installation ............................. C–18
Figure D-1. Network Processor (NP) Interface Module ...................................... D–1
Figure D-2. NP Interface Block Diagram.............................................................. D–2
Figure D-3. NP Interface Module Removal or Installation .................................. D–5
Figure D-4. ‘Info | Home’ Page ......................................................................... D–13
Figure D-5. ‘Info | Contact’ Page ...................................................................... D–14
Figure D-6. ‘Info | Logoff’ Page ......................................................................... D–15
Figure D-7. ‘Admin | Vipersat Mode’ Page ....................................................... D–16
Figure D-8. ‘Admin | FAST Features’ Page ......................................................... D–19
Figure D-9. ‘Admin | Security’ (Management Security) Page ........................... D–21
Figure D-10. ‘Admin | SNMP’ Page ................................................................... D–23
Figure D-11. ‘Admin | Upgrade’ Page................................................................ D–25
Figure D-12. ‘Admin | Defaults’ (Factory Default Configurations) Page ........... D–27
Figure D-13. ‘Admin | Time’ (Date & Time) Page ............................................. D–28
Figure D-14. ‘Admin | Event Log’ Page ............................................................. D–30
Figure D-15. ‘Admin | Reboot’ Page ................................................................. D–31
Figure D-16. ‘Modem | Config’ (Modem Configuration) Page ......................... D–33
Figure D-17. ‘Modem | Monitor’ (Modem Status) Page .................................. D–39
Figure D-18. ‘Modem |Events’ (Modem Events Log) Page ............................... D–40
Figure D-19. Modem | Stats (Modem Statistics Log) page ............................... D–41
Figure D-20. ‘Modem | Utility’ (Modem Utilities) Page ................................... D–42
Figure D-21. ‘LAN | Interface’ Page .................................................................. D–43
Figure D-22. ‘LAN | Ethernet Ports’ Page ......................................................... D–47
Figure D-23. ‘LAN | ARP’ Page .......................................................................... D–48
Figure D-24. ‘WAN | Quality of Service’ Page ................................................... D–50
Figure D-25. WAN | Quality of Service Statistics page ..................................... D–51
Figure D-26. WAN | Loopback Test page .......................................................... D–52
Figure D-27. ‘Routing | Routes’ Page ................................................................ D–53
Figure D-28. ‘Routing | OSPF’ Page................................................................... D–55
Figure D-29. Routing | IGMP page .................................................................... D–57
xxiv
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
MN-SLM5650A / CD-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Figure D-30. ‘Stats | Ethernet Tx’ Statistics Page .............................................. D–59
Figure D-31. Stats | Ethernet Rx Statistics page ............................................... D–61
Figure D-32. ‘Stats | IP’ Statistics Page ............................................................. D–63
Figure D-33. ‘Stats | WAN’ Statistics Page ........................................................ D–66
Figure D-34. ‘Stats | Clear All’ Statistics Page ................................................... D–68
Figure D-35. Vipersat pages .............................................................................. D–69
Figure D-36. Redundancy page ......................................................................... D–70
Figure D-37. ‘Save’ Page .................................................................................... D–71
Figure E-1. TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface ‘Home’ Page .............................. E–5
Figure E-2. ‘Home | Home’ Page ........................................................................ E–7
Figure E-3. ‘Home | Contact’ Page...................................................................... E–8
Figure E-4. ‘Admin | Config’ Page ....................................................................... E–9
Figure E-5. ‘Admin | Update’ Page .................................................................... E–15
Figure E-6. ‘Admin | Event’ Page ....................................................................... E–16
Figure E-7. ‘Stats | Module Status’ Page........................................................... E–18
Figure E-8. ‘Maint | Unit Info’ Page ................................................................. E–20
Figure E-9. ‘PuTTY’ Examples ............................................................................ E–21
Figure F-1. Conceptual Block Diagram ................................................................ F–4
Figure F-2. Conventional FDMA Link................................................................... F–6
Figure F-3. Same Link Using SLM-5650A and DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier....... F–7
Figure F-4. Duplex Link Optimization .................................................................. F–7
Figure F-5. DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Signals ................................................ F–9
Figure F-6. Carrier-in-Carrier Signal Processing Block Diagram ........................ F–10
Figure G-1. Satellite Shared Outbound Network ................................................ G–2
Figure G-2. OSPF Support at Shore ..................................................................... G–4
Figure G-3. OSPF Support at Sea ......................................................................... G–5
Figure G-4. OSPF Laboratory Test Network......................................................... G–6
Figure G-5. OSPF Test Solution ............................................................................ G–7
Figure G-6. Ethernet Port Configuration in BPM Mode ...................................... G–9
Figure G-7. Hub Data Traffic Network ............................................................... G–13
Figure G-8. Hub VLAN Configuration HTTP/HTTPS Interface Pages ................. G–15
Figure G-9. Remote (Spoke) Data Traffic Network ............................................ G–16
Figure H-1. SLM-5650A – Feature Block Diagram ............................................... H–2
xxv
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Table of Contents
MN-SLM5650A / CD-SLM5650A
Revision 9
BLANK PAGE
xxvi
PREFACE
About this Manual
This manual describes the installation and operation for the Comtech EF Data
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem. This is a document intended for the persons
responsible for the operation and maintenance of the SLM-5650A.
Conventions and References
Patents and Trademarks
See all of Comtech EF Data's Patents and Patents Pending at
http://patents.comtechefdata.com.
Comtech EF Data acknowledges that all trademarks are the property of the
trademark owners.
• DoubleTalk® is licensed from “Raytheon Applied Signal Technology”.
• DoubleTalk® is a registered trademark of “Raytheon Applied Signal
Technology”.
• Carrier-in-Carrier® is a registered trademark of Comtech EF Data.
Related Documents
The following documents are referenced in this manual:
• Department of Defense (DOD) MIL-STD-188-114A, Electrical
Characteristics of Digital Interface Circuits
xxvii
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Preface
•
•
•
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Department of Defense (DOD) MIL-STD-188-165A, Interoperability
and Performance Standards for SHF Satellite Communications PSK
Modems (FDMA Operation) (dated November 2005)
INTELSAT Earth Station Standards IESS-308, -309, -310, and -315
EUTELSAT SMS
Military Standards
References to “MIL-STD-188” apply to the 114A series (i.e., MIL-STD-188-114A),
which provides electrical and functional characteristics of the unbalanced and
balanced voltage digital interface circuits applicable to both long haul and
tactical communications. Specifically, these references apply to the MIL-STD188-114A electrical characteristics for a balanced voltage digital interface circuit,
Type 1 generator, for the full range of data rates. For more information, refer to
the Department of Defense (DOD) MIL-STD-188-114A, Electrical Characteristics
of Digital Interface Circuits.
Warnings, Cautions, Notes, and References
A WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not
avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
A CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may
result in minor or moderate injury. CAUTION may also be used to
indicate other unsafe practices or risks of property damage.
A NOTE: gives you important information about a task or the
equipment.
A REFERENCE directs you to important operational information or
details furnished elsewhere, either in the manual or in adjunct
Comtech EF Data publications.
xxviii
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Preface
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Examples of Multi-Hazard Notices
Recommended Standard Designations
The Electronic Industries Association (EIA) designations supersede the
Recommended Standard (RS) designations. References to the old designations
may be shown when depicting actual text (e.g., RS-232) displayed on front panel
menus, Web Server pages, serial remote interfaces, Telnet Command Line
Interfaces (CLIs), or unit rear panels. All other references in the manual refer to
EIA designations.
CAUTION
You should carefully review the following information.
Safety and Compliance
Electrical Safety and Compliance
The unit complies with the EN 60950 Safety of Information Technology
Equipment (Including Electrical Business Machines) safety standard.
Electrical Installation
CAUTION
Connect the unit to a power system that has separate ground, line and
neutral conductors. Do not connect the unit without a direct connection
to ground.
xxix
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Preface
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Class I Pluggable Equipment Type A-Protective Earthing
The cable distribution system/telecommunication network of this product relies
on protective earthing and the integrity of the protective earthing must be
ensured
In Finland:
"Laite on liitettävä suojakoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan"
In Norway:
“Apparatet må tilkoples jordet stikkontakt”
In Sweden:
“Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag”
Galvanic Isolator Use
Utrustning som är kopplad till skyddsjord via jordat vägguttag och/eller via
annan utrustning och samtidigt är kopplad till kabel-TV nät kan i visa fall medfőra
risk főr brand. Főr att undvika detta skall vid anslutning av utrustningen till kabelTV nät galvanisk isolator finnas mellan utrustningen och kabel-TV nätet.
Restricted Access Location
In Nordic Countries, equipotential bonding should be applied using the
permanently connected ground stud by a qualified service person
Battery Warning
CAUTION
Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type.Dispose of
used batteries according to the instructions.
Operating Environment
CAUTION
DO NOT OPERATE THE UNIT IN ANY OF THESE EXTREME OPERATING
xxx
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Preface
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
CONDITIONS:
• AMBIENT TEMPERATURES LESS THAN 0° C (32° F) OR MORE
THAN 50° C (122° F) FOR STANDARD UNITS; FOR UNITS WITH
THE EXTENDED TEMPERATURE OPTION, AMBIENT
TEMPERATURES LESS THAN -32° C (-25° F) OR MORE THAN 50°
C (122° F).
• PRECIPITATION, CONDENSATION, OR HUMID ATMOSPHERES
OF MORE THAN 95% RELATIVE HUMIDITY.
• UNPRESSURIZED ALTITUDES OF MORE THAN 2000 METRES
(6561.7 FEET).
• EXCESSIVE DUST.
• FLAMMABLE GASES.
• CORROSIVE OR EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES.
European Union Radio Equipment and Telecommunications
Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) Directive (1999/5/EC) and EN 301
489-1
Independent testing verifies that the unit complies with the European Union
R&TTE Directive, its reference to EN 301 489-1 (Electromagnetic compatibility
and Radio spectrum Matters [ERM]; ElectroMagnetic Compatibility [EMC]
standard for radio equipment and services, Part 1: Common technical
requirements), and the Declarations of Conformity for the applicable directives,
standards, and practices that follow:
European Union Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive
(2004/108/EC)
•
•
•
•
•
Emissions: EN 55022 Class B – Limits and Methods of Measurement
of Radio Interference Characteristics of Information Technology
Equipment.
Immunity: EN 55024 – Information Technology Equipment: Immunity
Characteristics, Limits, and Methods of Measurement.
EN 61000-3-2 – Harmonic Currents Emission
EN 61000-3-3 – Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker.
Federal Communications Commission Federal Code of Regulation
FCC Part 15, Subpart B.
xxxi
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Preface
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
CAUTION
TO ENSURE THAT THE UNIT COMPLIES WITH THESE STANDARDS, OBEY
THESE INSTRUCTIONS:
• Use coaxial cable that is of good quality for connections to the LBand Type ‘N’ Rx (receive) female connector.
• Use Type 'D' connectors that have back-shells with continuous
metallic shielding. Type ‘D’ cabling must have a continuous outer
shield (either foil or braid, or both). The shield must be bonded to
the back-shell.
• Operate the unit with its cover on at all times.
European Union Low Voltage Directive (LVD) (2006/95/EC)
Symbol
Description
<HAR>
Type of power cord required for use in the European Community.
CAUTION: Double-pole/Neutral Fusing
ACHTUNG: Zweipolige bzw. Neutralleiter-Sicherung
!
International Symbols
Symbol
Definition
Symbol
Definition
Alternating Current
Protective Earth
Fuse
Chassis Ground
For additional symbols, refer to Warnings, Cautions,Notes and
References listed earlier in this Preface.
European Union RoHS Directive (2002/95/EC)
This unit satisfies (with exemptions) the requirements specified in the
European Union Directive on the Restriction of Hazardous Substances in
Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EU RoHS, Directive 2002/95/EC).
xxxii
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Preface
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
European Union Telecommunications Terminal Equipment
Directive (91/263/EEC)
In accordance with the European Union Telecommunications Terminal
Equipment Directive 91/263/EEC, the unit should not be directly connected
to the Public Telecommunications Network.
CE Mark
Comtech EF Data declares that the unit meets the necessary requirements
for the CE Mark.
Product Support
For all product support, please call:
+1.240.243.1880
+1.866.472.3963 (toll free USA)
By email:
[email protected]
Comtech EF Data Headquarters
http://www.comtechefdata.com
Comtech EF Data Corp.
2114 West 7th Street
Tempe, Arizona USA 85281
+1.480.333.2200
xxxiii
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Preface
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Warranty Policy
Comtech EF Data products are warranted against defects in material and
workmanship for a specific period from the date of shipment, and this period
varies by product. In most cases, the warranty period is two years. During the
warranty period, Comtech EF Data will, at its option, repair or replace products
that prove to be defective. Repairs are warranted for the remainder of the
original warranty or a 90 day extended warranty, whichever is longer. Contact
Comtech EF Data for the warranty period specific to the product purchased.
For equipment under warranty, the owner is responsible for freight to Comtech
EF Data and all related customs, taxes, tariffs, insurance, etc. Comtech EF Data is
responsible for the freight charges only for return of the equipment from the
factory to the owner. Comtech EF Data will return the equipment by the same
method (i.e., Air, Express, Surface) as the equipment was sent to Comtech EF
Data.
All equipment returned for warranty repair must have a valid RMA number
issued prior to return and be marked clearly on the return packaging. Comtech
EF Data strongly recommends all equipment be returned in its original
packaging.
Comtech EF Data Corporation’s obligations under this warranty are limited to
repair or replacement of failed parts, and the return shipment to the buyer of
the repaired or replaced parts.
Limitations of Warranty
The warranty does not apply to any part of a product that has been installed,
altered, repaired, or misused in any way that, in the opinion of Comtech EF Data
Corporation, would affect the reliability or detracts from the performance of any
part of the product, or is damaged as the result of use in a way or with
equipment that had not been previously approved by Comtech EF Data
Corporation.
The warranty does not apply to any product or parts thereof where the serial
number or the serial number of any of its parts has been altered, defaced, or
removed.
xxxiv
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Preface
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
The warranty does not cover damage or loss incurred in transportation of the
product. The warranty does not cover replacement or repair necessitated by loss
or damage from any cause beyond the control of Comtech EF Data Corporation,
such as lightning or other natural and weather related events or wartime
environments.
The warranty does not cover any labor involved in the removal and or
reinstallation of warranted equipment or parts on site, or any labor required to
diagnose the necessity for repair or replacement.
The warranty excludes any responsibility by Comtech EF Data Corporation for
incidental or consequential damages arising from the use of the equipment or
products, or for any inability to use them either separate from or in combination
with any other equipment or products.
A fixed charge established for each product will be imposed for all equipment
returned for warranty repair where Comtech EF Data Corporation cannot
identify the cause of the reported failure.
Exclusive Remedies
Comtech EF Data Corporation’s warranty, as stated is in lieu of all other
warranties, expressed, implied, or statutory, including those of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose. The buyer shall pass on to any purchaser,
lessee, or other user of Comtech EF Data Corporation’s products, the
aforementioned warranty, and shall indemnify and hold harmless Comtech EF
Data Corporation from any claims or liability of such purchaser, lessee, or user
based upon allegations that the buyer, its agents, or employees have made
additional warranties or representations as to product preference or use.
The remedies provided herein are the buyer’s sole and exclusive remedies.
Comtech EF Data shall not be liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or
consequential damages, whether based on contract, tort, or any other legal
theory.
xxxv
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Preface
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Notes:
xxxvi
Chapter 1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Overview
Figure 1-1. Comtech EF Data SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Comtech EF Data’s SLM-5650A Satellite Modem (Figure 1-1) satisfies the
requirements for government and military communications system applications
that require state-of-the-art modulation and coding techniques to optimize
satellite transponder bandwidth usage, while retaining backward compatibility.
The SLM-5650A:
• Supports baseband data rates up to 155.52 Mbps, and its flexible
modulation and Forward Error Correction (FEC) capabilities ensure that
the throughput and BER over the satellite is optimized.
• Is compliant with the provisions of Department of Defense (DoD)
Standard MIL-STD-188-165A, Interoperability of SHF Satellite
Communications PSK Modems (Frequency Division Multiple Access
[FDMA] Operation).
• Is fully interoperable with legacy OM-73 modems and other Government
owned Commercial Off-the-Shelf (COTS) and International
Telecommunications Satellite Organization (Intelsat) compatible PSK
modems.
1–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
•
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Can be controlled and monitored from a variety of platforms, including its
own front panel controls and indicators, a co-located Personal Computer
(PC), and remote control systems such as the Vipersat Network
Management System (VNMS).
1.2 Functional Description
Figure 1-2. SLM-5650A Block Diagram
Figure 1-2 shows the functional block diagram for the SLM-5650A. The modem
has been designed to accommodate a wide range of currently required features,
and to support both near- and far-term advances in software-defined radio
technology as well as advances in FEC technology. It is designed for installation in
fixed or mobile Earth Terminal (ET) facilities (sites) using Defense Satellite
Communications System III (DSCS III), DSCS III/Satellite Life Enhancement
Program (SLEP), Wideband Gap filler System (WGS), and commercial satellites.
The user has the ability to:
• Add or change modular data interfaces and FEC assemblies;
• Utilize an extensive array of built-in test capabilities;
• Easily upgrade the modem’s operational capabilities in the field;
• Easily update the modem’s firmware in the field;
• Use a wide range of flexible remote control options.
1–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
As shown in Figure 1-2, the modem accepts signals from a selected digital signal
source and modulates either a 70/140 MHz or L-Band Intermediate Frequency
(IF) carrier with these signals. The demodulator receives the Rx signal from either
the 70/140 MHz or L-Band IF input interface, then demodulates the IF carrier.
Clock and data are recovered and output on a selected data interface.
The Tx and Rx functions are independent with respect to coding, interleaving,
overhead, and scrambling. The modem does not allow simplex operation in the
70/140 and the L-Band IF interfaces at the same time. The modem allows duplex
operation in either one of the two IF interfaces.
1.3 Product Features
The SLM-5650A incorporates the following features:
• MIL-STD-188-165A compliance (Types A, B, D, E, F);
• Intelsat IESS-308, -309, -310, and -315;
• A rugged, one-rack unit (1RU) enclosure;
• Low weight and low power dissipation;
• Selectable 70/140 MHz or L-Band (950 to 2000 MHz) IF interfaces;
• EIA-530/422 Data Interface (built-in, to 20 Mbps);
• EIA-613/HSSI Data Interface (built-in, to 51.84 Mbps);
• EIA-485/EIA-232 Interface for serial remote control;
• Ethernet Interface for remote control using Telnet, SNMP, HTTP, HTTPS,
and SSH;
• Plug-in Data Interface supporting the optional Gigabit Ethernet, Network
Processor (NP), G.703, and LVDS interface modules;
• Asymmetrical Loop Timing;
• Data Source Bit Synchronization (Clock recovery for input data without an
associated transmit clock);
• Full-featured, built-in BER test-set;
• Electrical and Ethernet Rx constellation monitor;
• Adaptive Equalizer for high order modulation types;
• 64 kbps to 155.52 Mbps (Modulation-, code rate-, and interfacedependent);
• BPSK, QPSK, OQPSK, 8PSK, 8QAM, and 16QAM;
• FEC Rates: 5/16, 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 21/44, 5/16, 17/18, .378, .451,
.541, and 1/1;
1–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Viterbi and Reed-Solomon Codec;
Optional Turbo Product Codec;
Optional Low-Density Parity Check (LDPC) coding in three block sizes: ULL,
LL, and HP;
Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) (optional with LDPC).
Optional Sequential FEC;
Static Bridge, Router, and BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Modes (via
the optional NP Interface);
Optional TRANSEC Encryption;
Firmware updating capability.
1.3.1 Operational Features
1.3.1.1
Operating Modes
The SLM-5650A supports Closed Network, Open Network and OM-73 modes of
operation.
1.3.1.1.1
Closed Networks
Closed Networks refer to private networks with modem operational parameters
that do not need to interoperate with modems developed for commercial open
networks (as specified under IAW IESS-308, IESS-309, and IESS-310 requirements
for open network operation).
A Comtech EF Data overhead channel is provided to allow the modem to operate
in such closed networks over commercial satellite IAW Intelsat requirements for
use during closed network operation.
1.3.1.1.2
Open Networks (Intelsat)
Open Networks refer to networks that must meet Intelsat specifications for
Effective Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP), EIRP stability, spurious emissions,
intermodulation products, adjacent carrier interference, frequency tolerance,
equalization, and modem parameters such as modulation, FEC, and scrambling.
1–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
The SLM-5650A meets Intelsat certification requirements and is capable of
operating in such open networks over commercial satellites (as specified under
IAW IESS-308, IESS-309, and IESS-310 requirements for open network operation).
The modem supports the overhead framing integral to those modems, in order
to be fully compatible with commercial modems complying with IAW IESS-308,
IESS-309, and IESS-310.
The rear panel ‘P1 Overhead’ I/O port does not support the Open
Network Backward Alarms.
1.3.1.1.3
OM-73 Mode
OM-73 Mode allows the SLM-5650A to be compatible with Linkabit’s original
OM-73 modem. This modem and its operational capabilities have become a de
facto standard when operating over DSCS satellites. All OM-73 modes listed in
MIL-STD-188-165A are supported.
1.3.1.2
Secure Management Interfaces
The SLM-5650A supports secure management interfaces, as part of its
Management Security option, when the optional Network Processor (NP)
Interface Module and/or the TRANSEC Encryption card are installed either
individually or in tandem. To enable such interoperational considerations, the
internal systems of the SLM-5650A are interconnected with an internal Ethernet
bus.
The SLM-5650A’s use of the Secure Management interfaces, in combination with
the modem’s use of Router Mode, (Static) Bridge Mode, and Bridge Point-toMultipoint (BPM) Mode – and their functional association with the Base Modem,
NP Interface and/or the TRANSEC Module – is addressed in detail in the following
sections of this manual:
•
•
•
•
Chapter 8. ETHERNET INTERFACE OPERATION
Chapter 9. BASE MODEM HTTP OPERATION
Appendix D. OPTIONAL NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) INTERFACE
MODULE
Appendix E. OPTIONAL TRANSEC MODULE OPERATION
1–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
1.3.1.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Data Interfaces
•
•
Appendix C. OPTIONAL DATA INTERFACE MODULES
Appendix D. OPTIONAL NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) INTERFACE
MODULE
The SLM-5650A supports only one data interface at a time. The modem features
two native data interfaces (TIA/EIA-530/422 and TIA/EIA-613 [HSSI]), plus an
option slot for installation of a modular data interface. The optional modular
interfaces available at this time are the Network Processor, Gigabit Ethernet,
G.703, and LVDS.
1.3.1.3.1
TIA/EIA-530 Interface
The native TIA/EIA-530 interface supports the physical layer requirements for
TIA/EIA-530. It also supports the TIA/EIA-422 electrical interface specification.
This interface operates in duplex from 64 kbps to 20 Mbps.
1.3.1.3.2
TIA/EIA-613 (HSSI) Interface
The native TIA/EIA-613 interface supports the physical layer requirements for
TIA/EIA-613. It also supports the TIA/EIA-612 electrical interface specification.
This interface operates in duplex from 64 kbps to 51.84 Mbps.
1.3.1.3.3
10/100/1000 BaseT (Gigabit Ethernet) Module Option
The optional 10/100/1000 BaseT (Gigabit Ethernet, or GbE) interface performs a
simple bridge function and passes IP packets, unaltered, in each direction
between the LAN (10/100/1000 BaseT interface) and WAN (SLM-5650A
modulator/demodulator). IP packet traffic is framed via HDLC encapsulation by
the GBEI-5650A logic, and the GBEI-5650A is both the origination and
termination point for HDLC encapsulation. HDLC CRC-16 verification is performed
on all received (from WAN) HDLC frames.
1.3.1.3.4
G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Module Option
The optional G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 interface is designed for full duplex capability
and is automatically configured for simplex transmit or simplex receive operation
1–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
The interface operates at the digital hierarchy bit rates of 1.544, 2.048, 6.312,
and 8.448 Mps as defined by ITU-T G.703.
1.3.1.3.5
LVDS Module Option
The optional Low Voltage Differential (LVDS) interface provides a physical and
electrical interface between an SLM-5650A modulator and demodulator and
signal sources operating with LVDS electrical characteristics.
1.3.1.3.6
Network Processor Module Option
The optional Network Processor (NP) Interface is Comtech EF Data’s third
generation IP router, Ethernet Bridge, and BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint)
device. The interface is designed to process more than 150,000 packets per
second (pps) in Layer 2, Layer 3, or Brouter mode of operation. The NP Interface
supports the following operating modes:
• Layer 2 Ethernet Bridge Mode
• Layer 2 and Layer 3 SCPC Ethernet Brouter Mode
• Layer 2 and Layer 3 Vipersat Brouter Mode
• Layer 3 SCPC IP Router Mode
• Layer 3 Vipersat STDMA Router Mode
• Extended Temperature Range: -25° to 50° C
1.3.1.4
Independent Tx and Rx Function
The Tx (modulator) and Rx (demodulator) sides of the modem are functionally
independent and separately controllable. The baseband Tx and Rx sides of a
communications channel passing through the modem are independently
configurable, including the ability to select different parameters (to include data
rate, modulation, and coding) in support of asymmetrical operation.
Data interfaces and IF interfaces are not independent.
Example: If the TIA/EIA-530 interface is selected, DO NOT USE TIA/EIA-530 to
transmit and a HSSI interface to receive. The same principle applies to the IF
interfaces: If 70/140 is selected, DO NOT USE 70/140 to transmit and the LBand interface to receive.
1–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
1.3.1.5
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Verification
The SLM-5650A includes test modes and loopbacks for rapid verification of the
correct functioning of the modem. Of particular note is the IF loopback, which
permits the user to perform a quick diagnostic test without having to disturb
external cabling. During the loopback, the receive frequency is temporarily
changed to match the Tx side, and an internal RF switch connects a sample of the
modulator to the demodulator input. When normal operation is again selected,
the previous value is restored.
1.3.1.6
Updating Modem Firmware
Chapter 5. FIRMWARE UPDATE
The SLM-5650A stores its firmware in flash memory, which allows the modem to
upload firmware downloads from an external PC once you establish Ethernet
connectivity. Firmware updates for the base modem, 10/100/1000 BaseT (GbE)
Interface Module, and Network Processor (NP) Interface Module may be
obtained free from Comtech EF Data via the CEFD Web site, or via e-mail from
Comtech EF Data Product Support during normal business hours. (Note that
TRANSEC Module firmware updates must be requested directly from Comtech EF
Data Product Support.)
1.3.1.7
Fully Accessible System Topology (FAST)
Chapter 6. FAST ACTIVATION PROCEDURE
The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem incorporates a number of optional features. In
order to permit a lower initial cost, you may purchase the unit with only the
desired features enabled. If, at a later date, you wish to upgrade the functionality
of a unit, Comtech EF Data provides Fully Accessible System Topology (FAST), a
technology that permits the purchase and installation of options through special
authorization codes.
These unique Fast Access Codes may be purchased from Comtech EF Data during
normal business hours, and then loaded into the unit using the front panel
keypad.
1–8
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
1.3.1.7.1
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
FAST Accessible Options
SLM-5650A hardware options can be ordered and installed either at the factory
or in the field. The following FAST-accessible hardware options are available for
the SLM-5650A:
• Extended Temperature Range -32° to 50° C
(Network Processor option provides range from -25° to 50°C)
(see Section 1.3.1.7.2 for more information)
• Low-Density Parity Check (LDPC) FEC Option (chassis-installed card and
FAST)
• Low-Density Parity Check (LDPC) FEC-2 Option (chassis-installed card and
FAST)
• Network Processor (NP) Plug-in Interface Module
• TRANSEC Module (chassis-installed card and FAST)
• Gigabit Ethernet Plug-in Interface Module
• G.703 Plug-in Interface Module
• LVDS Plug-in Interface Module
In the field, the operator can select FAST options that can be easily activated,
depending on the current hardware configuration of the unit. The unique FAST
Access Code that is purchased from Comtech EF Data enables configuration of
the installed optional hardware. The available firmware-based FAST Options, as
listed on the SLM-5650A Front Panel Utility: FAST  View Options screens, are
as follows:
FAST
Option
No.
Description
01
Modem Data Rate: 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps.
02
8PSK/8QAM modulation
03
16QAM modulation
04
16APSK/32APSK Modulation
05
AUPC (Automatic Uplink Power Control) Overhead
06
ASYNC ESC
07
Reed-Solomon Coding
08
Turbo FEC Option
09
Adv FEC Data Rate: 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps.
10
Network Processor (NP) I/F Card (Module)
1–9
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
FAST
Option
No.
11
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Description
Sequential Encode/Decoder
12
TRANSEC (Transmission Security)Module
13
Carrier-In-Carrier Date Rate: Not Installed, 512 kbps, 1Mbps, 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10
Mbps, 15 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 25 Mbps, 30 Mbps, 40 Mbps, 51.84 Mbps, <70 Mbps
14
NP QoS (Quality of Service)
15
NP Management Security
16
NP Vipersat
17
Demodulator Only
18
Asymmetrical Rx Data Rate: 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps.
19
TRANSEC Data Rate: 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps.
20
Vipersat Data Rate: 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <155 Mbps.
21
NP OW (Order Wire) Serial Commands
22
NP BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode
23
Customer Options
24
NP Antenna Handover
25
LDPC FEC Option
26
Extended Temperature Range
27
Spectrum Spreading
28
DSSS-MA
29
IESS-308v2
30
Enhanced Spreading Features
1.3.1.7.2
Extended Temperature Option
Extended temperature range is -32° to 50° C. When operating from -32° to 0° C
(the Network Processor option rangew is -25° to 50° C), Tx power accuracy is
1.5 dB. A heater is installed on the bottom of the chassis. This 300-Watt heater
operates at 120 or 240V AC.
When temperatures are below 0° C, a 10-minute warm up period is required
upon power-up before the modem boots. Comtech EF Data recommends that
you allow an additional 15 minutes, for a total of 25 minutes of recommended
warm-up time, to ensure performance to specifications.
1–10
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
1.3.1.7.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) Option
As On-The-Move systems with very small dishes (e.g., VSATs) become more
popular, there is an increased interest in Spectrum Spreading. To meet this need,
Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) is optionally available in the SLM5650A.
DSSS works by modulating the normal carrier with a pseudo-random PN
sequence (chips) at a much higher chip rate. The chip rate is determined by the
carrier’s symbol rate and a multiplying (spreading) factor.
The SLM-5650A offers spreading in the following LDPC MODCODs:
• LDPC ULL BPSK 1/2
• LPDC LL BPSK .378
• LPDC LL BPSK .451
• LPDC LL BPSK .541
• LDPF HP BPSK 1/2
The Spreading Factors currently supported are 1 (Spreading Off), 2 through 512
up to a maximum chip rate of 23 Mcps. You can select between four built-in
pseudo-random PN sequences so that multiple spread carriers can occupy the
same bandwidth in a Code-Division Multiple Access (CDMA) fashion.
When using large spreading factors, the SLM-5650A also exhibits a large
tolerance to jamming – up to 24 dB – and a Low Probability of Detection and
Interception. With DSSS enabled, the lower data rate limit has been reduced to 8
kbps.
The SLM-5650A Base Modem Web Server Interface provides a Web page to
facilitate anti-jamming applications. This page allows you to configure the
modem parameters so that a fixed occupied bandwidth can be maintained.
Lastly, there is no loss in performance with spreading enabled.
1–11
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
1.3.1.8
Interoperability
1.3.1.8.1
Legacy Modems
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
The SLM-5650A is fully compatible and interoperable with all specified modes of
operation of the following legacy modems:
• OM-73 (V);
• MD-1352 (P)/U (BEM-7650);
• MD-1340 (OM-73 interoperable mode only; orderwire not required);
• MD-1030B;
• SLM-3650;
• SLM-5650;
• SLM-8650;
• SLM-7650.
The serial interface remote control protocol is not backwards compatible.
1.3.1.8.2
Modem Switches
To ensure operational reliability, the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem may be
incorporated into a number of Comtech EF Data switching products. These
switches are compatible only with Comtech EF Data modems; this
switch/modem compatibility is further defined for the SLM-5650A as follows:
• Compatible Switches: CRS-300 1:10 Redundancy Switch; CRS-311 1:1
Redundancy Switch; CRS-311-AH Antenna Handover Switch
• Non-compatible Switches: SMS-300 Series Redundancy Switches;
SMS-450 Series Satellite Switches
For detailed information on using the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem in 1:1 or 1:N
redundancy or Antenna Handover applications, refer to your pertinent switch
Installation and Operation Manual.
1–12
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
1.4 Physical Features
The SLM-5650A is constructed as 1RU-high rack-mounting chassis. Handles at the
front allow easy removal from and placement into a user-supplied rack cabinet.
The unit can be free-standing if desired.
Optional Rack Cabinet Support Kits are available from Comtech EF Data:
• KT/6228-2 4” Rear-Mounting Support Brackets Kit
• KT/6228-3 10” Rear-Mounting Support Brackets Kit
• FP/SL0006 26” Bearingless Rack Slide Set
•
•
Chapter 2. SPECIFICATIONS
Chapter 3. INSTALLATION
1–13
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
1.4.1 Dimensional Envelope
Figure 1-3. SLM-5650A Dimensional Envelope
Feature
A
B
C
D
SLM-5650A Chassis Features (Figure 1-3)
Description
For detailed information see…
Front Panel
Chapter 7. FRONT PANEL OPERATION
Rear Panel
Chapter 4. REAR PANEL CONNECTORS
Air Inlets
Chapter 3. INSTALLATION
Exhaust Fan (2X)
1–14
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
1.4.2 Front Panel
Chapter 7. FRONT PANEL OPERATION
Figure 1-4. SLM-5650A Satellite Modem – Front Panel View
The SLM-5650A front panel (Figure 1-4) provides the following features:
Item 1 – This USB port is currently non-functioning. It is reserved for future
software support.
Item 2 – This six-button keypad array is used for local control via menu
navigation.
Item 3 – This 12-button keypad array is used for local control via manual data
entry.
Item 4 – These 10 Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs) provide overall status monitoring
at a glance.
Item 5 – This Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) provides viewing of two lines (at
40 characters per line) of messages, menus, and prompts.
Item 6 – This is the Unit Power On/Off switch.
Item 7 – These rack handles afford ease of installation into and removal from a
customer-supplied rack.
1–15
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
1.4.3 Rear Panel
Chapter 4. REAR PANEL CONNECTORS
Figure 1-5. SLM-5650A Satellite Modem – Rear Panel View
The SLM-5650A front panel (Figure 1-5) provides the following features:
Item 1 – Power interface: 90-264VAC (standard)l 24V DC (optional).
Item 2 – Press-fit fuse holder
Item 3 – Grounding lug
Item 4 – ‘J1 Ext Ref’ TNC-F connector for master external reference input
Item 5 – ‘J5 Ethernet’ 10/100 BaseT RJ-45 port for Ethernet-based remote
monitor and control (M&C)
Item 6 – ‘J6 EIA530’ DB-45F data interface connector
Item 7 – ‘P1 Overhead Data’ DB-25M data interface connector
Item 8 – ‘J7 HSSI’ 50-pin female SCSI-2 data interface connector
Item 9 – ‘J8 Alarms’ DB-9F utility connector for Form C alarms
Item 10 –‘J9 Auxiliary’ HD-15F utility connector for redundancy switch operations
1–16
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Item 11 – ‘J10 Remote’ DB-9F utility connector for serial-based remote monitor
and control (M&C)
Item 12 – Interface module slot for installation of the optional Gigabit Ethernet,
Network Processor (NP), G.703, or LVDS interface modules.
Item 13 – ‘J2 TX’ Type ‘N’ female connector for L-Band IF transmit output.
Item 14 – ‘J4 RX’ Type ‘N’ female connector for L-Band IF receive input.
Item 15 – ‘J11 TX’ BNC female connector for 70/140 MHz IF transmit output.
Item 16 – ‘J3 RX’ BNC female connector for 70/140 MHz IF receive input.
1–17
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Introduction
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Notes:
1–18
Chapter 2. SPECIFICATIONS
2.1 Environmental and Physical
2.1.1
•
•
•
•
2.1.2
•
•
2.1.3
Prime Power
90 to 264V AC
47 to 63 Hz
130W (maximuim), 90W (typical)
24V DC optional
Mounting
1RU
Optional Rear Support Brackets Kits, Bearingless Rack Slide Set Kits
available
Dimensions
1.72H x 19 W x 20W inches (43.7W x 482.6W x 508D mm)
2.1.4
Weight
≤12 lbs (5.5 kg)
2–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Specifications
2.1.5
2.1.5.1
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Temperature
Operating
2.1.5.1.1 Standard Operating Temperature
32° to 122° F (0° to 50° C)
2.1.5.1.2 Extended Temperature Option
-25° to 122° F (-40° to 70° C)
2.1.5.2
Storage
-40° to 158° F (-40° to 70° C)
2.1.6
Humidity
0 to 95%, non-condensing
2–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Specifications
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
2.2 General Specifications
2.2.1
Operating Frequency Range
52 to 88, 104 to 176, 950 to 2000 MHz (in 100 Hz steps).
2.2.2
Modulation Types
BPSK, QPSK, OQPSK, 8PSK, 8QAM, 16QAM.
2.2.3
•
•
•
•
•
•
2.2.4
Digital Data Rates
64 kbps to 2.5 Mbps, in 1 bps steps (EIA-530, EIA-613)
64 kbps to 5 Mbps, in 1 bps steps (EIA-530, EIA-613)
64 kbps to 10 Mbps, in 1 bps steps (EIA-530, EIA-613)
64 kbps to 20 Mbps, in 1 bps steps (EIA-530, EIA-613)
64 kbps to 51.840 Mbps, in 1 bps steps (EIA-613, LVDS)
64 kbps to 155.52 Mbps, in 1 bps steps (GBEI, Network Processor)
Symbol Rate Range
32 Ks/s to 64 Ms/s
2.2.5
EXT REF Input
The ‘J1 Ext Ref’ interface is a type TNC female connector features a selectable
frequency of 1 MHz, 5 MHz, or 10 MHz. This interface functions in accordance
with MIL-STD-188-115, with accuracy and stability in compliance with MIL-STD188-165A, Paragraph 5.4.
2.2.6
INT REF Stability
1 x 10-7
2–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Specifications
2.2.7
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Scrambling
V.35, OM-73, and Synchronous
2.2.8
IDR/IBS Framing Compatibility
Support for IBS and IDR framing. Allows basic IBS/IDR Open Network capable
operation.
2.2.9
Built-in test (BIT)
Fault and status reporting, BER performance monitoring, IF Loop-back,
programmable test modes, built-in Fireberd emulation with all comprehensive
BER measurements.
2.2.10 Summary Faults
Reported via:
• Front Panel LEDs
• Rear panel “Alarm” DB-9F connector, relay contacts for Tx, Rx, Common
equipment faults, and Tx and RX alarms. Open collector faults available.
• Rear panel “AUX” DB-15F connector. Open collector faults available.
2.2.11 Monitor and Control
EIA-485, EIA-232, 10/100 BaseT Ethernet with HTTP, Telnet, and SNMP.
2–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Specifications
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
2.3 Modulator Specifications
2.3.1
Output Power
+10 to -40 dBm, adjustable in 0.1 dB steps.
In Extended Temperature Range of -32° to 0° C, TX Power accuracy is 1.5 dB
2.3.2
•
•
2.3.3
Output Return Loss
70/140 MHz: -14 dB
L-Band:
-9 dB
Output Impedance
50 Ω
2.3.4
Spurious
From Carrier ± Tx SR to 500 MHz -51 dBc (measured in a 10 kHz bandwidth).
2.3.5
Harmonics
From Carrier (CW) to the greater of the 12th harmonic or 4000 MHz -60 dBc.
2.3.6
Tx Clock Source
Rx, INT, Tx Terrestrial, and Data Source Sync.
2.3.7
•
•
Output Connectors
70/140 MHz: TNC for 52 to 88 MHz, 104 to 176 MHz
L-Band: Type ‘N’ for 950 to 2000 MHz
2–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Specifications
2.3.8
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Modulation Timing Jitter
< 3% of the modulation symbol period.
2.3.9
Modulation Phase Error
< 2°
2.3.10 Modulator Spectral Inversion
The modem can invert the modulated spectrum.
2.3.11 Transmit Clock and Data Inversion
Modem can invert the Tx clock and data independently of each other. (EIA-530,
EIA-613).
2–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Specifications
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
2.4 Demodulator Specifications
2.4.1
•
•
2.4.2
Input Carrier Power
70/140MHz: +10 to –55 dBm
L-Band:
+10 to –55 dBm carrier (SR > 3.2 Msps)
+10 to [–55 - 10log10(3.2/SR)], (SR ≤ 3.2 Msps)
Maximum Composite Power
+20 dBm or +40 dBc
2.4.3
Input Impedance
50 Ω
2.4.4
•
•
2.4.5
Input Connectors
70/140 MHz: TNC for 52 to 88 MHz, 104 to 176 MHz
L-Band: Type ‘N’ for 950 to 2000 MHz
Carrier Acquisition Range
± 30 kHz, selectable
2.4.6
•
•
2.4.7
Input Return Loss
70/140 MHz: –14 dB
L-Band:
–9 dB
Buffer Clock
Internal, Tx Terrestrial, Rx Satellite
2–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Specifications
2.4.8
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Doppler Buffer
32 to 16,777,216 bits, selectable
2.4.9
Demodulator Spectral Inversion
The modem can invert the demodulator spectrum.
2.5 Coding Options
2.5.1
Uncoded
1/1
2.5.2
Viterbi
K=7, 1/2, 3/4, and 7/8 rates
2.5.3
Viterbi+Reed-Solomon
Closed Network per IESS-308 and IESS-309
2.5.4
Trellis
IESS-310
2.5.5
Trellis+Reed-Solomon
IESS-310
2.5.6
Turbo
Turbo Product Coding (TPC) per IESS-315
2–8
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Specifications
2.5.7
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
LDPC: ULL, LL, and HP
Closed Network
2.6 Open Network Options
2.6.1
•
•
2.6.2
•
•
IDR
INTELSAT IESS-308 (Framing only)
INTELSAT IESS-310 (Framing only)
IBS
INTELSAT IESS-310 (Framing only)
INTELSAT IESS-309 (Framing only)
2.7 Performance Specifications
2.7.1
Acquisition and Timing Performance Requirements
The following reference Eb/N0 is defined as the required Eb/N0 corresponding to a
BER of IE-3 with Reed-Solomon FEC not enabled.
Table 2-1. Acquisition and Timing Performance Requirements
Parameter
Specification
Initial
Acquisition
The modem achieves initial acquisition within the times as
specified within ± 30 kHz at the reference Eb/N0
•
•
•
For baseband data rates between 64 kbps and ≤ 128
kbps, the maximum initial acquisition time is 500
seconds.
For Baseband data rates between 128kbps and ≤ 1544
kbps, the maximum initial acquisition time is 30
seconds.
For baseband data rates > 1544 kbps, the maximum
initial acquisition time is 1.5 seconds.
2–9
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Specifications
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Parameter
Specification
Reacquisition
Reacquisition is achieved, as follows, after a period of up to
15 minutes of the absence of signal when the carrier returns
to within 500 Hz of its original frequency.
•
•
•
For baseband data rates between 64 kbps and 128
kbps, the maximum reacquisition time shall be 45
seconds.
For baseband data rates between 128 kbps and 1544
kbps, the maximum reacquisition time shall be 20
seconds.
For baseband data rates greater than 1544 kbps, the
maximum reacquisition time shall be 1 second.
BCI
With Tx and Rx random data, the mean time to loss of BCI
due to falsely adding or deleting bits is at least 3 days at the
reference Eb/N0. In addition, the modem maintains BCI over
50 consecutive bits of all ones or zeros, which occur no more
than once in 10,000 bits, without employing data scrambling.
System
Retention
Synchronization and BCI are maintained for all Eb/N0 above
the reference Eb/N0 (BPSK/QPSK/OQPSK/8PSK) for signal loss
of up to 50 modulation symbol periods, with a probability of
at least 90 percent.
Receive Timing
Jitter
The Rx output clock peak timing jitter cannot exceed ± 5
percent at the reference Eb/N0 when the modulated signal
meets the modulation timing jitter requirement.
Doppler
The modem meets the requirements with a Doppler shift,
rate of change, and acceleration for satellite inclination up to
± 7° as presented in Table 2-2, and an additional 0.5 dB
added to the reference Eb/N0.
Table 2-2. Doppler Requirements
Parameter
C-Band
X-Band
Ku-Band
Ka-Band
Doppler Shift in Hz
±2475
±3535
±6045
±11,810
Doppler Rate of Change in Hz/sec
±226
±270
±490
±1046
Doppler Acceleration in Hz/sec2
±243
±290
±526
±1124
2–10
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Specifications
2.7.2
2.7.2.1
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Data Quality Performance
OM-73 Compatible Mode Performance
Operating in the OM-73-compatible mode, SLM-5650A BER vs. Eb/N0
performance with differential encoding and data scrambling enabled does not
exceed values shown in Table 2-3 through Table 2-8.
2.7.2.2
MIL-STD-188-165A Compatible Mode
Performance
Operating with BPSK, QPSK, or OQPSK modulation in the MIL-STD-188-165A
compatible mode, SLM-5650A BER vs. Eb/N0 performance, with differential
encoding and data scrambling enabled, will be equal to or better than the values
shown in Table 2-3 (without Reed-Solomon) or Table 2-4 (with Reed-Solomon) as
tested in an IF back-to-back configuration over the BER range 5 x 10-3 to 1 x 10-7.
Operating with 8PSK modulation and rate 2/3 pragmatic Trellis coding (without
Reed-Solomon outer coding), SLM-5650A BER vs. Eb/N0 performance is less than
or equal to the values shown in Table 2-5 when tested in an IF back-to-back
configuration.
Operating with 8PSK modulation, rate 2/3 pragmatic Trellis coding, and ReedSolomon (219,201) outer coding, SLM-5650A BER vs. Eb/N0 performance is better
than or equal to the values shown in Table 2-6 when tested in an IF back-to-back
configuration.
2.7.2.3
IESS-308 Compatible Mode Performance
When operating in the IESS-308 Compatible Mode, SLM-5650A BER vs. Eb/N0
performance is as specified in IESS-308.
2.7.2.4
IESS-309 Compatible Mode Performance
When operating in the IESS-309 Compatible Mode, SLM-5650A BER vs. Eb/N0
performance is as specified in IESS-309.
2–11
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Specifications
2.7.2.5
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
IESS-310 Compatible Mode Performance
When operating in the IESS-310 Compatible Mode, SLM-5650A BER vs. Eb/N0
performance is as specified in IESS-310.
2.7.2.6
16QAM Coding Mode Performance
The SLM-5650A operating in the 16QAM mode provides back-to-back BER vs.
Eb/N0 performance better than or equal to the values shown inTable 2-7 when
using the modulation formats indicated.
2.7.2.7
Turbo Coding Mode Performance
The SLM-5650A operating in the Turbo Code Mode provides back-to-back BER
vs. Eb/N0 performance better than or equal to the values shown in Table 2-8
when using the modulation formats indicated.
2.7.2.8
Sequential Mode Performance
The SLM-5650A operating in the Sequential Mode provides back-to-back BER vs.
Eb/N0 performance better than or equal to the values shown in Table 2-9 when
using the modulation formats indicated.
2.7.2.9
LDPC Coding Mode Performance
The SLM-5650A operating in an LDPC Mode provides back-to-back BER vs Eb/N0
performance better than or equal to the values shown in Table 2-11 through
Table 2-13 when using the indicated block size and modulation formats.
2–12
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Specifications
2.7.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
BER Performance
2.7.3.1
BPSK/QPSK/Offset QPSK, Viterbi Decoding
Table 2-3. Viterbi Decoder BER
1/2
3.8
Eb/No (dB) Specifications
Viterbi Decoder
3/4
5.0
7/8
6.3
-4
4.7
5.9
7.1
-5
5.3
6.6
7.8
10.8
-6
5.9
7.2
8.4
11.6
-7
6.5
7.8
9.0
12.4
-8
7.1
8.3
9.5
13.0
BER
-3
10
10
10
10
10
10
2.7.3.2
Uncoded
BPSK/QPSK/Offset QPSK, Viterbi Decoding and
Reed-Solomon
Table 2-4. BSPK/QPSK/OQPSK Viterbi with Reed-Solomon Decoder BER
Performance
BER
-6
Eb/No (dB) Specifications
Viterbi Decoder with Reed-Solomon
1/2
3/4
7/8
4.1
5.6
6.7
-7
4.4
6.0
7.1
-8
5.0
6.3
7.5
10
10
10
2–13
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Specifications
2.7.3.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
8PSK, Trellis Decoder
Table 2-5. 8PSK, Trellis Decoder BER Performance
Eb/No (dB) Specifications
Trellis Decoder
BER
2/3
5/6
-3
6.5
8.7
-4
7.3
9.4
-5
8.1
10.1
-6
8.9
10.8
-7
9.6
11.6
-8
10.2
12.3
10
10
10
10
10
10
2.7.3.4
8PSK, Trellis Decoder and Reed-Solomon
Table 2-6. 8PSK, Trellis Decoder with Reed-Solomon BER Performance
BER
-6
Eb/No (dB) Specifications
Trellis Decoder with Reed-Solomon
2/3
5/6
6.2
8.2
-7
6.5
8.5
-8
6.7
8.9
-9
6.9
9.3
-10
7.2
9.7
10
10
10
10
10
2–14
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Specifications
2.7.3.5
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
16QAM, Viterbi Decoder and Reed-Solomon
Table 2-7. 16QAM, Viterbi Decoder with Reed-Solomon BER Performance
Eb/No (dB) Specifications
Viterbi Decoder with Reed-Solomon
BER
3/4
7/8
-6
8.2
9.5
-7
8.4
9.8
-8
8.6
10.1
-9
8.8
10.3
-10
9.0
10.6
10
10
10
10
10
2.7.3.6
Turbo Product Code (TPC) Decoding
Table 2-8. TPC Decoder BER Performance
BER
-6
BPSK
21/44
5/16
Eb/No (dB) Specifications
Turbo Product Code Decoder
QPSK/OQPSK
21/44 3/4
7/8 17/18 3/4
8PSK
7/8 17/18
16QAM
3/4
7/8
3.3
2.5
3.3
3.9
4.3
6.8
6.5
7.1
10.0
7.6
8.2
-7
3.4
2.8
3.4
4.1
4.4
7.1
6.9
7.2
10.6
8.0
8.4
-8
3.5
3.1
3.5
4.3
4.5
7.4
7.2
7.3
11.2
8.4
8.5
-9
3.6
3.4
3.6
4.8
4.6
7.7
7.5
7.4
11.8
8.7
8.7
-10
3.7
--
3.7
--
4.7
--
7.8
7.5
--
9.0
8.8
10
10
10
10
10
2–15
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Specifications
2.7.3.7
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Sequential Decoding with/without Reed-Solomon
Table 2-9. Sequential Decoding with / without Reed-Solomon BER
Performance
Eb/No (dB) Specifications
Sequential Decoder with / without Reed-Solomon
DESCRIPTION
BER
1/2
1/2
3/4
7/8
4.8
4.8
5.8
7.0
-6
5.2
5.2
6.4
7.5
-7
5.6
5.6
6.9
8.0
-5
5.2
5.2
5.9
7.2
-6
5.7
5.7
6.5
7.7
-7
6.1
6.1
7.0
8.3
-6
4.4
4.4
5.0
5.6
-7
4.6
4.6
5.3
6.0
-8
4.8
4.8
5.6
6.4
10
10
10
Sequential – 1544 kbps
10
10
10
Sequential+RS (225,205)
10
10
2.7.3.8
QPSK/OQPSK
-5
10
Sequential – 64 kbps
BPSK
BER Performance with Symmetrical or
Asymmetrical Adjacent Carriers
Table 2-10. Acceptable ACI Degradation with Spacing Factor of 1.2
Test Carrier
Es/N0 (dB)
Adjacent Carriers
Es/N0 (dB)
Eb/N0 Degradation (dB)
Symmetric Case
Eb/N0 Degradation (dB)
Asymmetric Case
5.5
18.5
< 0.36
< 0.41
6.0
19.0
< 0.38
< 0.43
8.0
21.0
< 0.48
< 0.56
8.4
21.4
< 0.51
< 0.60
10.0
23.0
< 0.64
< 0.77
12.0
25.0
< 0.88
< 1.10
12.7
25.7
< 0.99
< 1.21
2–16
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Specifications
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
2.7.3.8.1 BER Performance with Symmetrical Adjacent
Carriers
Operating in the presence of two adjacent symmetrical carriers (one lower in
frequency and one higher in frequency with same modulation, data rate, and
coding), the modem performance is not degraded more than as indicated in
Table 2-10 Column 3, and a) and b) in this section. This performance is measured
with the adjacent carrier’s center frequencies offset XRs Hz from the center
frequency of the carrier under test, where X is the spacing factor and Rs is the
modulation symbol rate in Hz of the symmetrical carriers.
The BER of the test carrier is measured at the specified carrier Ratio of Energy
per Symbol to Noise Power Density in a 1 Hz Bandwidth (Es/N0) Carrier to Noise
Ratio (C/N) without the adjacent carriers. The adjacent carriers are applied at the
specified center frequencies and Es/N0 and the BER of the test carrier is
measured. The change in BER is equal to the change in Eb/N0 based on the
characterization curve of the test carrier and the amount of Adjacent Channel
Interference (ACI) degradation. For modulation symbol rates below 38.4 ksps,
this paragraph does not apply.
a) For X (spacing factor) = 1.2, the symmetric degradation shall be IAW one
of the values in Table 2-10 Column 3, and corresponding test carrier
Es/N0 in Column 1. Select a test carrier Es/N0 that will yield timely results
based on modulation and coding used in the test configuration. The
adjacent carriers Es/N0 shall be set to corresponding value in Column 2.
b) For the case of X (spacing factor) = 1.4, the degradation is less than 0.2
dB.
2.7.3.8.2 BER Performance with Asymmetrical Adjacent
Carriers
Operating in the presence of two adjacent asymmetrical carriers, one lower in
frequency and one higher in frequency, and each adjacent carrier symbol rate
(R"s) = 2.0 R's, the modem performance is not degraded more than indicated in
Table 2-10 Column 4, and a) and b) in this section. Performance is measured
with the adjacent carriers center frequencies offset (X/2) times (R's + R"s) Hz
from the test carrier center frequency, where X is the spacing factor and R's is
the modulation symbol rate in Hz of the test carrier, and R"s is the modulation
2–17
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Specifications
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
symbol rate in Hz of each adjacent carrier. For modulation symbol rates below
38.4 ksps, this paragraph does not apply.
a) For X (spacing factor) = 1.2, and R"s = 2.0 R's, the asymmetric degradation
shall be IAW one of the values in Table 2-10 Column 4, and the
corresponding test carrier Es/N0 in Column 1. Select a test carrier Es/N0
that will yield timely results based on modulation and coding used in the
test configuration. The adjacent carriers Es/N0 are set to the
corresponding value in Column 2.
b) For the case of (1.4/2)(R's + R"s) Hz carrier spacing, the degradation is <
0.2 dB.
2.7.3.9
LDPC ULL Decoding
Table 2-11. LDPC ULL Decoder BER Performance
Eb/N0 (dB) Specification
BPSK
BER
QPSK
1/2
1/2
2/3
3/4
-5
3.1
3.1
3.6
4.1
-8
3.7
3.7
4.2
4.7
10
10
2.7.3.10 LDPC LL Decoding
Table 2-12. LDPC LL Decoder BER Performance
Eb/N0 (dB) Specification
BER
BPSK
QPSK
8QAM
16QAM
.378
.451
.541
1/2
2/3
3/4
7/8
2/3
3/4
7/8
2/3
3/4
7/8
-5
1.8
2.0
2.2
2.4
3.0
3.6
4.4
5.0
5.6
6.5
6.1
6.8
8.0
-8
2.1
2.3
2.5
2.7
3.3
3.9
5.0
5.4
5.9
7.1
6.5
7.1
8.4
10
10
2–18
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Specifications
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
2.7.3.11 LDPC HP Decoding
Table 2-13. LDPC HP Decoder BER Performance
BER
10-5
10-9
Eb/N0 (dB) Specification
BPSK
(O)QPSK
8QAM
1/2
1/2
2/3
3/4
2/3
3/4
2.0
2.0
2.3
3.0
4.6
5.6
2.3
2.3
2.7
3.3
5.0
6.0
2–19
16QAM
3/4
6.8
7.1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Specifications
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Notes:
2–20
Chapter 3. INSTALLATION
3.1 Unpack and Inspect the Shipment
Figure 3-1. Unpack and Inspect the Shipment
The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem, its optional Installation and Operation Manual
(otherwise available online at http://www.comtechefdata.com), and its power
cord were packaged and shipped in a reusable cardboard carton containing
protective foam spacing (Figure 3-1).
3–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Installation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
CAUTION
THIS EQUIPMENT CONTAINS PARTS AND ASSEMBLIES SENSITIVE TO
DAMAGE BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD). USE ESD
PRECAUTIONARY PROCEDURES WHEN HANDLING THE EQUIPMENT.
Inspect the shipment. Do these steps:
1. Keep all shipping materials.
2. Check the packing list to make sure the shipment is complete.
3. Inspect the equipment for damage. If damage exists,
immediately contact the carrier and Comtech EF Data to submit
a damage report.
4. Read the manual.
3.2 Install the Unit Into a Rack Enclosure
Install the unit in its assigned position in a rack enclosure (Figure 3-2). You must install
the rack in a location with a controlled environment. Failure to obey this
requirement can cause damage to the equipment, and denial of subsequent
warranty claims. You may use:
•
•
•
•
•
A standard rack-mounted shelf;
User-supplied screws to secure the front panel to the rack enclosure threaded
front mounting rails;
Comtech EF Data’s optional KT/6228-2 (4”) or KT/6228-3 (10”) Rear Support
Brackets Kit (Figure 3-3).
Comtech EF Data’s optional FP/SL0006 26” Bearingless Rack Slide Set
(Figure 3-4).
For information about custom rack enclosures, contact Comtech EF Data
Product Support.
CAUTION
CORRECT GROUNDING PROTECTION IS REQUIRED – Connect the ground
stud, located on the rear panel of the unit, to a power system that has
separate ground, line and neutral conductors. Do not operate the unit
without a direct connection to ground.
The rack must be connected to a suitable earthing connection at all
times. You must connect the rack ground bar to a suitable earthing
demarcation point.
3–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Installation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
CORRECT AIR VENTILATION IS REQUIRED – In a rack system where there
is high heat discharge, provide forced-air cooling with top- or bottommounted fans or blowers.
Make sure there is adequate clearance inside the enclosure, especially
at the sides, for air circulation and ventilation.
Air temperature inside the rack enclosure should never exceed 50°C
(122°F).
If there is any doubt, contact Comtech EF Data Product Support during
normal business hours.
3–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Installation
Feature
1
2
3
4
5
6
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Description
Custom Rack Enclosure
SLM-5650A chassis
Standard Rack Shelving
Rack Enclosure Threaded Front Rail (typical)
Unit Front Panel
User-supplied Screws
Figure 3-2. Install the Unit Into a Rack Enclosure
3–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Installation
3.2.1
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Install the Optional Rear Support Brackets Kit
Feature
Description
1
Back of Unit
2
Rack Enclosure Threaded Rear Mounting Rail (typical)
KT/6228-X Rear Support Bracket Kit
Item
Quantity
CEFD Part Number
Description
2
HW/10-32SHLDR
Screw, #10 Shoulder
4
4
HW/10-32FLT
Washer, #10 Flat
3
2
2
HW/10-32SPLIT
Washer, #10 Split
4
2
2
HW/10-32HEXNUT
Nut, #10 Hex
5
4
4
HW/10-32x1/2RK
Bolt, #10 Rack Bracket
2
–
FP/6138-2
Bracket, Rear Support – 4”
–
2
FP/6138-3
Bracket, Rear Support – 10”
KT/6228-2
KT/6228-3
1
2
2
6
Figure 3-3. Install the Optional Rear Support Brackets Kit
Tools needed to install the optional KT/6228-2 (4”) or KT/6228-3 (10”)
Brackets Kit:
• A medium Phillips screwdriver
• A 5/32-inch SAE Allen Wrench
• An adjustable Crescent wrench.
3–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Installation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Do these steps to install the brackets kit (Figure 3-3):
1. Assemble the #10 Shoulder Screws (Item 1) through the Adapter Plate
mounting slots using the #10 Flat Washers (Item 2), #10 Split Washers
(Item 3), and #10 Hex Nuts (Item 4).
2. Mount the Rear Support Brackets (Item 6) to the rack enclosure threaded
rear mounting rails (Feature 2) using the #10 Rack Bracket Bolts (Item 5).
3. Slide the unit into the front of the rack enclosure. Make sure that the #10
Shoulder Screws (Item 1) properly engage into the slots of the Rear
Support Brackets (Item 6).
3.2.2
Install the Optional Bearingless Rack Slide Set
CEFD Part Number
Description
FP/SL0006
Bearingless Rack Slide Set – 26”
Figure 3-4. Install the Optional Bearingless Rack Slide Set
You may install the optional FP/SL0006 Bearingless Rack Slide Set into the equipment rack
cabinet and onto the sides of the SLM-5650A as shown in Figure 3-4.
3–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Installation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Do these steps:
1. Use the provided hardware (not shown) to install one slide onto each side
of the SLM-5650A chassis.
2. Use the provided hardware (not shown) to install the slide rail components
into each interior side of the equipment rack cabinet.
3. Install the unit into the front of the equipment rack. Ensure that the slides
properly engage the cabinet-mounted slide rails.
4. Continue to slide the modem into the equipment rack to its final operating
position. Then, use four user-provided screws to secure the modem to the
equipment rack’s right and left threaded front rails (through the front
panel slots).
3.3 Connect External Cables
Chapter 4. REAR PANEL CONNECTORS
Connect the cables to the proper locations on the rear panel.
3.4 Configuration and Operation
Before attempting to operate your modem, make sure that:
• You have made all the necessary cable, power, and ground connections.
• You are operating with the latest available firmware load from Comtech
EF Data.
• You have installed all FAST Options or otherwise enabled all FAST
features on your modem.
Do these tasks:
1. Make to read and become familiar with Chapter 7. FRONT PANEL
OPERATION before proceeding.
2. Connect the supplied power cable between your power source and the
SLM-5650A rear panel.
3. Set the power switch to ON.
The auto-sensing AC power supply does not require any
adjustments.
3–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Installation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
4. Do a check for the correct transmitter (Tx) and receiver (Rx) output signal
levels and spectrums.
5. Use the fronbt panel keypad and display to configure the modem.
CAUTION
If you encounter any problems with installation or initial operation, make
sure to read Appendix A. SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND TROUBLESHOOTING
for possible solutions.
3–8
Chapter 4. REAR PANEL
CONNECTORS
4.1 Overview – Cabling Connection Types
Comtech EF Data’s SLM-5650A Satellite Modems use a number of different
cables. Each cable type is typically dedicated to a specific mode of operation.
1) Not all of these operational interface types may be available.
2) The European EMC Directive (EN55022, EN50082-1) requires using
properly shielded cables for DATA I/O. These cables must be
double-shielded from end-to-end, ensuring a continuous ground
shield.
4–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Rear Panel Connectors
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
4.1.1 Coaxial Cable Connections
(TOP) Bayonet Coupling Plug and Jack (Type ‘BNC’ Shown)
(BOTTOM) Threaded Coupling Plug and Jack (Type ‘N’ Shown)
Figure 4-1. Coaxial Connector Examples
The types of coaxial cables used by Comtech EF Data are ‘BNC’, ‘TNC’, ‘N’, ‘F’,
and ‘SMA’. Coaxial cables (plugs) and their mating connectors (jacks/sockets) are
available in two coupling styles – Bayonet or Threaded:
Bayonet Coupling Style – The jack has a pair of guideposts that accommodate
the plug’s lockdown slots. This lockdown design provides secure assembly
without over-tightening the connection.
Threaded Coupling Style – The jack features external threads. The plug shell
features internal threads, and has either a knurled outer surface to permit handtightening of the connection, or hex flats to accommodate torqued installation.
Connection Instructions:
Bayonet Coupling Connections – Use the plug slots to guide, and then slide the
plug onto the jack posts. Then, turn the plug clockwise until the jack posts are
fully seated within the plug slot.
Threaded Coupling Connections – Engage the plug onto the jack threads, and
then turn the plug clockwise until it is fully threaded onto the jack. Do not overtighten the connection.
4–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Rear Panel Connectors
4.1.1.1
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Type ‘BNC’
BNC plugs and jacks feature a Bayonet
Coupling design.
4.1.1.2
Type ‘TNC’
TNC plugs and jacks feature a Threaded
Coupling design similar to Type ‘N’, Type
‘F,’ and Type ‘SMA’ connectors.
4.1.1.3
Type ‘N’
Type ‘N’ connectors feature a Threaded
Coupling design similar to Type ‘TNC’,
Type ‘F’, and Type ‘SMA’ connectors.
4.1.1.4
Type ‘F’
Type ‘F’ connectors feature a Threaded
Coupling design similar to Type ‘TNC’,
Type ‘N’, and Type ‘SMA’ connectors.
4.1.1.5
Type ‘SMA’
Type ‘SMA’ connectors feature a
Threaded Coupling design similar to
Type ‘TNC’, Type ‘N’, and Type ‘F’
connectors.
4–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Rear Panel Connectors
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
4.1.2 D-Subminiature Cable Connections
Type ‘D’ Cable with Jack Screws
(Female Shown)
Type ‘D’ Chassis Receptacles with Jack Nuts:
(TOP) Female
(BOTTOM) Male
Figure 4-2. D-Subminiature Connector Examples
D-Subminiature connectors are also called Type ‘D’ or ‘D-Sub’ connectors. The
cable plug and chassis receptacle each feature a D-shaped profile that interlock
to ensure proper pin orientation and connector seating. The connector pair
features multiple rows of pins (male side) coupled to mating sockets (female
side).
Whether the gender is male or female, the cable plug features two jack screws
for secure connection to the jack nuts provided on the mating chassis receptacle.
Connection Instructions: Orient the plug to the receptacle in the proper
position. Press firmly into place. Hand tighten, or use a standard flat-blade
screwdriver, to secure the plug jack screws to the receptacle jack nuts. Do not
over-tighten.
About connector pinout tables: Figure 4-2 identifies the Pin 1 location for either
gender connector. The connector pinout tables provided in this manual base the
order of information (i.e., the “Pin #” column) on this orientation, except where
noted.
4.1.3 RJ-45, RJ-48 Cable Connections
Figure 4-3. RJ-45/RJ-48 Connector Example
4–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Rear Panel Connectors
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
The plug for an RJ-45 or RJ-48 cable features a flexible tab. The RJ-45 or RJ-48
receptacle features a mating slot. This design configuration ensures a secure
installation.
Connection Instructions (Figure 4-3): Press down the tab on the cable plug and
then insert the plug into the receptacle. The connection is complete when the
tab ‘clicks’ into position inside the receptacle.
4.1.4 USB Cable Connections
(TOP) Type ‘A’ USB Plug and Receptacle
(BOTTOM) Type ‘B’ USB Plug and Receptacle
Figure 4-4. USB Connector Examples
Universal Serial Bus connectors are also called USB connectors. A USB
connection is used as a bus-type communications or power interface between
peripheral devices. The connector pair (Figure 4-4) features a plug (male side)
coupled to its mating receptacle (female side).
Connection Instructions:
Type ‘A’ Connections – Slide the plug firmly into the chassis receptacle.
Type ‘B’ Connections – Orient the plug to the receptacle and push in firmly. The
Type ‘B’ cable plug and chassis receptacle each feature a D-shaped profile that
interlock to ensure proper orientation and connector seating. By design, it is
impossible to incorrectly insert the plug into the receptacle.
4–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Rear Panel Connectors
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
4.2 Unit Connectors
Figure 4-5. SLM-5650A Rear Panel View
External cables are attached to connectors provided on the rear panel of the unit
(Figure 4-5). These connectors serve power and ground, modem utility,
terrestrial data interface, and IF functions.
4.2.1 Power and Ground Connections
4.2.1.1
Power Interface Module – Standard AC Unit
As shown in Figure 4-5, the AC power interface module consists of the following
components:
Item 1 – AC Power Connector: This connector is an IEC-60320 Type C14 (male)
three-prong connector, for connection with an IEC-60320 Type C13 (female)
three-prong plug. Note the following:
• Input Power:
130W maximum
• Input Voltage:
90 to 132V or 175 to 254V AC. The unit switches
voltage ranges automatically.
Item 2 – Press-fit Fuse Holder: The fuse holder is press-fit into the body of the
IEC power module. Two 5mm 1 Amp Slo-Blo type fuses are installed here for line
and neutral fusing.
4–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Rear Panel Connectors
4.2.1.1.1
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
AC Operation – Replace the Fuses
Figure 4-6. Replace the AC Fuses
WARNING!
DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY BEFORE PROCEEDING!
CAUTION
FOR CONTINUED OPERATOR SAFETY, ALWAYS REPLACE THE FUSES
WITH THE CORRECT TYPE AND RATING.
Do these steps to replace the AC fuses (Figure 4-6):
1. Unseat the fuse holder from the IEC power module.
a. Use the slot to pry the holder outward from the IEC power module.
b. Pull the holder straight out, and then swing the holder away from the
module.
2. Remove and replace the fuses as needed. Use T1.00A 5mm fuses for
115V and 230V AC operation.
3. Re-seat the fuse holder in the IEC power module.
4.2.1.1.2
AC Operation – Apply Power
Figure 4-7. Apply AC Power to the Unit
4–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Rear Panel Connectors
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Do these steps to apply AC power to the unit (Figure 4-7):
1. Plug the provided AC power cord female end into the unit.
2. Plug the AC power cord male end into the user-supplied power source.
3. Switch the unit ON.
4.2.1.2
Power Interface Module – Optional 24V DC Unit
Contact Comtech EF Data Product Support for detailed information about
connecting and supplying power, and replacing the fuses for the optional
DC-powered SLM-5650A.
4.2.1.2.1
DC Operation – Replace the Fuses
For DC operation, the fuses are located on the rear panel in individual screw-in
receptacles found adjacent to the terminal block.
WARNING!
DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY BEFORE PROCEEDING!
CAUTION
FOR CONTINUED OPERATOR SAFETY, ALWAYS REPLACE THE FUSES
WITH THE CORRECT TYPE AND RATING.
Do these steps to replace the DC fuses:
1. Disconnect the power supply leads.
2. Unscrew either fuse holder from its receptacle.
3. Remove and replace the fuses as needed.
4. Screw the fuse holder back into its receptacle.
4.2.1.2.2
DC Operation – Apply Power
Do these steps to apply DC power to the unit:
1. Connect the user-supplied (+) and (–) DC power leads to their respective
terminals.
Number 18 AWG minimum wires are recommended.
2. Connect the user-supplied DC power leads to the user power source.
3. Energize the power source.
4. Switch the unit ON.
4–8
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Rear Panel Connectors
4.2.1.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Unit Ground Connection
Figure 4-8. Unit Ground Connection
CAUTION
PROPER GROUNDING PROTECTION IS REQUIRED. You must connect the
equipment to the protective earth connection at all times. Use this
ground stud during installation, configuration, and operation.
The AC power interface provides the safety ground.
Item 3 in Figure 4-5 and Figure 4-8: Use this #10-32 stud, located adjacent to the
power interface module, for connecting a common chassis ground among
equipment.
4–9
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Rear Panel Connectors
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
4.2.2 Operational Connections
See Sect. 4.1 Overview – Cabling Connections Types for information
about each utility, data interface, or IF connector type and its connection
instructions.
Figure 4-9. Rear Panel Operational Connections
4.2.2.1
4.2.2.1.1
Utility Connectors
‘J1 Ext Ref’ (TNC-F) Utility Connector
Item 4 in Figure 4-9: This type TNC female connector supplies a master external
reference to the entire chassis. Functional features include:
• Frequency selectable at 1MHz, 5 MHz, or 10 MHz
• Input impedance to 50Ω unbalanced
• Voltage up to 3 V (rms)
• Sine or square waveform (50% duty cycle)
4.2.2.1.2
‘J5 Ethernet’ (RJ-45) Utility Connector
Item 5 in Figure 4-9: This 8-pin 'RJ-45' 10/100 BaseT port provides access to the
Ethernet Interface for remote control of the modem using using SNMP,
HTTP/HTTPS or Telnet.
4–10
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Rear Panel Connectors
4.2.2.1.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
‘J8 Alarms’ (DB-9F) Utility Connector
Item 9 in Figure 4-9: This Type ‘D’ 9-pin female (DB-9F) connector provides Form
‘C’ contact closures for alarm reporting. The three Form ‘C’ summary fault
contacts are Modulator, Demodulator, and Common Equipment.
Table 4-1. ‘J8 Alarms’ DB-9F Connector Pinout
Pin #
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Signal Function
RX Alarm is faulted
RX Alarm is not faulted
RX Alarm Common
TX Alarm is faulted
TX Alarm is not faulted
TX Alarm common
Unit Alarm is faulted
Unit Alarm is not faulted
Unit Alarm Common
4–11
Name
NC
NO
COM
NC
NO
COM
NC
NO
COM
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Rear Panel Connectors
4.2.2.1.4
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
‘J9 Auxiliary’ (HD-15F) Utility Connector
Item 10 in Figure 4-9: This Type ‘HD’ 15-pin female (HD-15F) connector is used
for redundancy switch operations. It provides TTL (Transistor-to-Transistor Logic)
open collector faults for the modulator and demodulator; a TTL input for
external transmit carrier mute; an analog demodulator Q and I constellation
monitor; and a programmable DC voltage monitor for the demodulator’s
Automatic Gain Control (AGC).
Table 4-2. ‘J9 Auxiliary’ HD-15F Connector Pinout
Pin #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Signal Function
Demod ‘I’ Channel
Spare
Spare
Reserved for Redundancy Switch
Chassis Ground
Demod ‘Q’ Channel
AGC Monitor Test Point
Spare
Reserved for Redundancy Switch
Ext Carrier OFF
Reserved for Redundancy Switch
Reserved for Redundancy Switch
Tx TTL Fault
Rx TTL Fault
Reserved for Redundancy Switch
4–12
Name
I
---GND
Q
AGC
--EXT
--TxFLT
RxFLT
--
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Rear Panel Connectors
4.2.2.1.5
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
‘J10 Remote’ (DB-9F) Utility Connector
Item 11 in Figure 4-9: This Type ‘D’ 9-pin female (DB-9F) connector interfaces
the M&C functions to a remote location; the remote location can be an M&C
computer located away from the modem, but attached via cable to the remote
connector. This DCE interface is user selectable for either EIA-232 or EIA-485.
Table 4-3. ‘J10 Remote’ (DB-9F) Pinout
EIA-232
Pin #
9
8
7
6
Name
5
4
3
2
1
GND
--CTS
TD
RTS
RD
DSR
--
Pin #
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
* For EIA-485 2-Wire Operation:
• Only two wires are required
• Tie pins 4 and 8 together (both +)
• Tie pins 5 and 9 together (both -)
4–13
EIA-485
Name
2-Wire
- TX/ RX
- TX/ RX
+ TX/ RX
+ TX/RX
----GND
4-Wire
- TX
- RX
+ TX
+ RX
----GND
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Rear Panel Connectors
4.2.2.2
4.2.2.2.1
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Data Interface Connectors
‘J6 EIA530’ (DB-25F) Data Interface Connector
Item 6 in Figure 4-9: This Type ‘D’ 25-pin female (DB-25F) connector conforms to
the EIA-530 pinout for EIA-422 operation only.
Table 4-4. ‘J6 EIA530’ DB-25F Connector Pinout
Pin #
13
25
12
24
11
23
10
22
9
21
8
20
7
19
6
18
5
17
4
16
3
15
2
14
1
Signal Function
CS_B
NOT USED
ST_B
TT_A
TT_B
NOT USED
RR_B
DM_B
RT_B
DMD FLT OC
RR_A
NOT USED
GROUND
RS_B
DM_A
MOD FLT OC
CS_A
RT_A
RS_A
RD_B
RD_A
ST_A
SD_A
SD_B
GROUND
4–14
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Rear Panel Connectors
4.2.2.2.2
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
‘P1 Overhead Data’ (DB-25M) Interface
Item 7 in Figure 4-9: This Type ‘D’ 25-pin male (DB-25M) connector allows for
connection of the EIA-422, EIA-485 and EIA-232 data interfaces used with
overhead framing. It also supports signaling for tactical applications.
Table 4-5. ‘P1 Overhead Data’ DB-25M Connector Pinout
Pin #
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Signal Function
1 EIA-422 Transmit Data “A”, Input
EIA-422 Transmit Data “B”, Input
2 EIA-422 Transmit Clock “A”, Output
EIA-422 Transmit Clock “B”, Output
3 EIA-422 Transmit Byte Sync “A”, Output
EIA-422 Transmit Byte Sync “B”, Output
4 EIA-422 Receive Data “A”, Output
EIA-422 Receive Data “B”, Output
5 EIA-422 Receive Clock “A”, Output
EIA-422 Receive Clock “B”, Output
6 EIA-422 Receive Byte Sync “A”, Output
EIA-422 Receive Byte Sync “B”, Output
7 Shield
EIA-485 Transmit Data “-“
8 EIA-485 Transmit Data “+”
EIA-422 Transmit Handover Sync “A”, Input
9 EIA-485 Receive Data “-“
EIA-485 Receive Data “+”
10 EIA-422 Transmit Handover Sync “B”, Input
EIA-232 Clear to Send
11 EIA-232 Receive Data
EIA-232 Request to Send
12 EIA-232 Transmit Data
EIA-422 Transmit Handover Control “A”, Input
13 EIA-422 Transmit Handover Control “B”, Input
* For EIA-485 2-Wire Operation:
• Only two wires are required
• Tie pins 8 and 22 together (both +)
• Tie pins 9 and 20 together (both -)
4–15
Name
TX Data A
TX Data B
TX Clk A
TX Clk B
TX Sync A
TX Sync B
RX Data A
RX Data B
RX Clk A
RX Clk B
RX Sync A
RX Sync B
Ground
485 TX Data 485 TX Data +
THS A
485 RX Data 485 RX Data +
THS B
232 CTS
232 RX Data
232 RTS
232 TX Data
THC A
THC B
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Rear Panel Connectors
4.2.2.2.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
‘J7 HSSI’ Interface
Notes:
1) Shown as Item 8 in Figure 4-9:
This is a 50-pin SCSI-2 female
connector.
2) Pins 21 and 45 are non-HSSI
defined signals. On Cisco routers
there is no connection to these
pins.
Fault  Open
No Fault  Ground
Pin #
50
25
49
24
48
23
47
22
46
21
45
20
44
19
43
18
42
17
41
16
40
15
39
14
38
13
37
12
36
11
35
10
34
9
33
8
32
7
31
6
30
5
29
4
28
3
27
2
26
1
4–16
Name
GROUND
GROUND
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
MOD FAULT – SEE NOTE 2
DEMOD FAULT – SEE NOTE 2
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
GROUND
GROUND
NOT USED
NOT USED
SDSD+
NOT USED
NOT USED
TTTT+
TATA+
GROUND
GROUND
STST+
NOT USED
NOT USED
RDRD+
CACA+
RTRT+
GROUND
GROUND
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Rear Panel Connectors
4.2.2.2.4
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Data Interface Module Slot
Item 12 in Figure 4-9: You may install optional data interface modules into this
rear panel option slot.
•
•
Appendix C. OPTIONAL DATA INTERFACE MODULES (includes the
optional 10/100/1000 BaseT Gigabit Ethernet (GbE), G.703, and
LVDS modules)
Appendix D. OPTIONAL NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) INTERFACE
MODULE
4.2.3 IF Interface Connectors
4.2.3.1
‘J2 TX’ L-Band IF Connector (Type ‘N’)
Item 13 in Figure 4-9: This Type ‘N’ female connector handles L-Band (950 MHz
to 2000 MHz) Transmit ( TX) output from the unit.
4.2.3.2
‘J4 RX’ L-Band IF Connector (Type ‘N’)
Item 14 in Figure 4-9: This Type ‘N’ female connector handles L-Band (950 MHz
to 2000 MHz) Receive (RX) input into the unit.
4.2.3.3
‘J11 TX’ 70/140 MHz IF Connector (BNC)
Item 15 in Figure 4-9: This type BNC female connector handles 70/140 MHz (52
to 88 MHz, 104 to 175 MHz) Transmit ( TX) output from the unit.
4.2.3.4
‘J3| RX’ 70/140 MHz IF Connector (BNC)
Item 16 in Figure 4-9: This type BNC female connector handles 70/140 MHz (52
to 88 MHz, 104 to 175 MHz) Receive (RX) input into the unit.
4–17
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Rear Panel Connectors
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Notes:
4–18
Chapter 5. FIRMWARE
UPDATE
5.1 Firmware Update Overview
Make sure to operate the Comtech EF Data SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
with its latest available firmware.
The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem is factory-shipped with the latest version of
operating firmware. If you need to update the firmware, you can apply the
update to the modem without having to remove it from operation. You may
directly acquire the download from Comtech EF Data’s web site or receive the
archive file by e-mail from Comtech EF Data Product Support.
5.1.1
Firmware Update Procedure Summary
1. Download the firmware update archive file to a user-supplied PC. The User
PC must be Microsoft Windows® compatible.
2. Make sure the User PC is connected to the base modem rear panel ‘J5
Ethernet’ 10/100 Base-T Ethernet M&C port.
3. Use the modem front panel or the SLM-5650A Base Modem HTTP Interface
to configure the modem to operate using the updated firmware image.
4. You may FTP automatically if using the optional Network Processor (NP)
Interface Module HTTP/HTTPS or TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interfaces.
5–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Firmware Update
5.1.2
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
About Firmware Numbers, File Versions, and
Formats
Comtech EF Data’s Web site catalogues its firmware update files by product type
(e.g., modem, converter, etc.) and specific model/optional configuration. The
SLM-5650A files are provided under “Home | Support | Software Downloads |
Flash & Software Update Files |Satellite Modems | SLM-5650A”. Typical for all
names, ‘X’ is the revision letter, and ‘###’ represents the firmware version
number – e.g., V148 = Version 1.4.8:
• The firmware download hyperlink for the BASE MODEM SLM-5650A BULK
FIRMWARE appears as F0000030XX_V###X.
These optional configurations require separate firmware update:
• The firmware download hyperlink for the GBEI (GIGABIT ETHERNET
INTERFACE) MODULE INTERFACE appears as F0000401X_V###.
• The firmware download hyperlink for the NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP)
MODULE INTERFACE appears as F0000051X_V###.
You must contact Comtech EF Data Product Support to obtain the
firmware update for the optional TRANSEC Module Interface.
Comtech EF Data provides its archive download files in two compressed formats
as *.exe (self-extracting) and *.zip (compressed):
• The self-extracting *.exe file does not require use of a third-party utility
program.
• Some firewalls do not allow the download of self-extracting *.exe files.
You must instead download the *.zip file, and extract the firmware files
from the download with a user-supplied third-party file archiver and
compression utility program such as PKZIP for Windows, WinZip,
ZipCentral, etc. (PKZIP for DOS is not supported due to file naming
conventions). Comtech EF Data does not provide this utility program.
For detailed information on handling archived files, read your archive utility
program’s Help documentation.
5–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Firmware Update
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
5.2 Prepare for the Firmware Download
5.2.1
Required User-supplied Items
You will need:
• A Microsoft Windows-based PC, equipped with available serial and
Ethernet ports.
• A 9-pin serial cable and an RJ-45 CAT5 Ethernet cable to connect the User
PC to the modem.
• A terminal emulator program (e.g., Tera Term or HyperTerminal).
• A compatible Web browser (e.g., Internet Explorer).
5.2.1.1
Modem Connections
Connect the User PC to the modem:
• Use the 9-pin serial cable to connect the modem ‘P10 Remote’ port to a
serial port on the User PC.
• Use an Ethernet hub, switch, or direct cable connection to connect the
modem ‘J5 Ethernet’ port to the Ethernet port on the User PC.
BASE MODEM firmware can only be loaded via the ‘J5 Ethernet’ M&C
port; do not use the Ethernet Traffic ports available on the GBEI or NP
Module Interfaces.
5–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Firmware Update
5.2.2
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Configure the Terminal Emulator Program
On the User PC – Open the terminal emulator program, and then configure the
program’s serial port communication and terminal display operation:
• Baud Rate = 38400 bps
• Data Bits = 8
• Stop bits = 1
• Parity = NO
• Local Echo = ON
• Port Flow Control = NONE
• Display New Line Rx/Tx = CR
Read your terminal emulator program user guide or HELP feature for
operating and configuration instructions.
5.2.3
Get the Management IP Address and Firmware
Information
•
•
•
Chapter 8. FRONT PANEL OPERATION
Chapter 9. BASE MODEM HTTP INTERFACE OPERATION
Chapter 10. SERIAL INTERFACE OPERATION
Do these steps:
1. On the modem – Apply power to the unit. Your power connection varies
depending on your ordered unit (i.e., AC vs. DC operation).
2. Identify your default Management IP Address. You will not be able to access
the HTTP/HTTPS (non-secure or secure Web Server) Interface without this
information. See Section 5.2.3.1.
3. Get the firmware information using one of these methods:
• To use the modem Front Panel, see Section 5.2.3.2.
• To use the Serial Remote Interface, see Section 5.2.3.3.
• To use the HTTP/HTTPS Interfaces, see Section 5.2.3.4.
5–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Firmware Update
5.2.3.1
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Use Front Panel Operation to Find the Management IP
Address
Ethernet IP Address/Range:
192.168.001.001/24
(E)
You may view the assigned Management IP Address on the SELECT: Configure
Remote  EthernetConfig  IP Address/Range screen.
5.2.3.2
Use Front Panel Operation to Find the Firmware
Information
You may view the base modem running M&C version at the top level screen.
Press the CLEAR key several times to view this information.
The detailed firmware information can be found within the SELECT: Utility 
Firmware  Information  Image#1 or Image#2  Bulk nested submenus.
Examples of these screens are as follows:
Comtech SLM-5650A Modem
Firmware Version x.x.x
Bulk #1:
5.2.3.3
State:
Mode:
GO
TURBO
FW-0000030XX,MM/DD/YY,1.4.X
Use the Serial Interface to Find the Firmware Information
Use your terminal emulator to execute remote queries with the modem. Use the
“SWR” remote query to find the firmware information:
• <0/SWR?{CR}
(returns the firmware version numbers running under Boot, Bulk1, and
Bulk2, in the form Boot:xx.yy.zz Bulk1:xx.yy.zz Bulk2:xx.yy.zz)
5–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Firmware Update
5.2.3.4
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Use the Base Modem HTTP Interface to Find the Firmware
Information
Do these steps:
1. The ‘Firmware Information’ section of the ‘Maint | Unit Info’ page provides
the Firmware Information details as Boot, Bulk1, and Bulk2 as shown in this
example:
2. Write down your firmware information for further reference or to provide to
Comtech EF Data Product support.
5.2.4
Make a Temporary Folder (Subdirectory) on the
User PC
The temporary folder is where you store the firmware archive download. There
are several ways you can make a temporary folder on a Windows PC:
• To use the Windows Desktop, see Section 5.2.4.1.
• To use Windows Explorer, see Section 5.2.4.2.
• To use the Run and Browse windows, see Section 5.2.4.3.
• To use Windows Command-line or the Command Prompt, see Section
5.2.4.4.
After you make the temporary folder, proceed to Section 5.2.5 to download and
extract the firmware files.
1) These examples specify drive letter “c:”. You can use any valid,
writable drive letter.
2) Typical for many of the tasks that follow, type the command as
instructed and then press Enter.
5–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Firmware Update
5.2.4.1
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Use Windows Desktop to Make a Folder
Do these steps:
1. Right-click anywhere on the desktop to open the popup submenu.
2. Select New > Folder to make the new, temporary folder on the desktop.
3. Right-click on the new folder and then select Rename from the popup
submenu. Rename this folder to “temp” or some other convenient, unused
name.
5.2.4.2
Use Windows Explorer to Make a Folder
Do these steps:
1. Left-double-click the Windows Explorer icon on the Windows Desktop.
2. Depending in your Windows OS version: select File > New > Folder, or click
your Folder Destination (e.g., Windows (C:) and then New Folder to make
the new, temporary folder in the active location.
3. Right-click the New Folder folder name, and then Rename this folder to
“temp” or some other convenient, unused name.
5–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Firmware Update
5.2.4.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Use the Run and Browse Windows to Make a Folder
Select Start on the Windows taskbar and then do these steps:
1. Click Run… to open the Run window.
2. Click Browse… to open the Browse window.
3. Click New Folder. This can be an icon or a text label, depending on the
Windows OS version.
4. Right-click the New Folder folder name, and then Rename this folder to
“temp” or some other convenient, unused name.
5.2.4.4
Use Windows Command-line or Command Prompt to
Make a Folder
Select Start on the Windows taskbar and then do these steps:
1. Click Run... to open the Run window (or, depending on Windows OS version
prior to Windows 95, click the MS-DOS Prompt icon from the Main Menu).
2. Open a Command-line window:
• For Windows 95 or Windows 98 – type “command”.
• For any Windows OS versions later than Windows 98 – type “cmd” or
“command”.
• Alternately, from Start, select the All Programs > Accessories popup
submenu, and then select Command Prompt:
5–8
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Firmware Update
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
3. From the c:\> prompt, type either “mkdir temp” or “md temp” (both “mkdir”
and “md” mean “make directory”), and then press Enter.
There will now be a “temp” folder created and available for placement of the
firmware file download.
5.2.5
Download and Extract the Firmware Update Files
The example figures in this section are provided for reference only. Your
firmware information will be different.
Do these steps:
1. Go online to www.comtechefdata.com.
2. On the Main page – Under Support Information or the Support tab, select
the Software Downloads hyperlink.
3. On the Software Downloads page – Click Download Flash and Software
Update Files.
4. On the Flash Updates Index page – Select the (Select a Product Line)
Satellite Modems hyperlink.
5. On the Modems product page – Select the SLM-5650A product hyperlink;
6. Select the appropriate firmware archive EXE or ZIP file download hyperlink.
7. Once you select the EXE or ZIP hyperlink, the File Download dialogue opens
on your browser and prompts an action. You may otherwise click [Cancel] to
quit the file download process. Note the following:
• For EXE files:
5–9
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Firmware Update
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
o Click [Run] to open the self-extractor dialogue window. Use
[Browse] to select your destination folder. Click [Unzip] to extract
the files. Your results display as per this example – click [OK] to
close. Your files are now available for transfer to the modem.
o Click [Save] to download the EXE file to your Downloads folder.
Once the download is complete the dialogue prompts you to
either [Run] the self-extracting file, or to open or view the
Windows Downloads folder for further action.
•
For ZIP files:
o Click [Open] to open the archive file. Use the WinZip features to
select the files for extraction to your destination folder.
o Click [Save] to download the ZIP file to your Windows Downloads
folder. Once the download is complete the dialogue prompts you
to either [Open] the archive file, or to open or view the Windows
Downloads folder for further action.
5–10
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Firmware Update
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
8. If not already done with File Download > Open, you must extract, at a
minimum, these files (filenames are subject to change):
• FW-0000030XX_EBULK_v###X.BIN (bulk image file).
• SLM-5650A_ReleaseNotes_v###X.pdf (firmware release notes).
9. Confirm availability of the firmware files in the temporary folder. There are
several ways you can view the contents of the temporary folder on a
Windows-based PC:
• To use the Windows Desktop, see Section 5.2.5.1.
• To use Windows Command-line or Command Prompt, see Section
5.2.5.2.
• After you confirm the firmware files are in the folder, proceed to
Section 5.3 to upload the firmware update to the modem.
5.2.5.1
Use Windows Desktop to View Folder Contents
From the Windows Desktop:
1. Double-left-click the Windows Explorer icon, and then double-left-click as
needed to locate, and then open, the “temp” folder (directory) created
earlier on the Windows Desktop.
2. Use the Browse window (Start > ...Run > Browse) to locate, and then doubleclick to open, the “temp” folder.
5.2.5.2
Use Windows Command-line to View Folder Contents
Using Command-line or Command Prompt:
1. Type “cd c:\temp” at the Windows Command-line prompt to change to the
temporary folder (directory) created earlier using Command-line.
2. Type “dir” to list the files extracted to the temporary folder from the
downloaded archive file.
5–11
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Firmware Update
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
5.3 Upload the Bulk Firmware Files and Update the
Modem
5.3.1
Important Considerations
Before you proceed with the firmware update, make sure that:
• You connect the modem ‘J5 Ethernet’ M&C port to the User PC as
described in Section 5.2.1.1.
The BASE MODEM firmware MUST be loaded only through the
10/100 BaseT ‘J5 Ethernet’ M&C port. Do NOT use the GBEI
(Gigabit Ethernet Interface) Module or Network Processor (NP)
Module Interface traffic or Console ports.
•
•
•
•
5.3.2
Your PC is running a terminal emulation program for operation of the
modem Serial or Ethernet Telnet interfaces.
You have noted your modem Management IP Address.
Your PC is running a compatible Web browser for operation of the
modem HTTP Interface.
You download or otherwise have Comtech’s latest firmware files available
on the User PC in an accessible temporary folder.
Steps to FTP Upload the Firmware Files
1) Typical for all steps: “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” represents the assigned unit
Management IP Address.
2) Type all commands without quotes, and press Enter to execute.
Do these steps:
1. Use Windows Command-line to send a ping command. To ping the unit, type
“ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” at the Windows Command-line prompt. The response
should confirm whether the unit is connected and communicating correctly
with the User PC.
2. Use Windows Command-line to transfer the files from the User PC to the
modem via FTP:
a. Type “ftp xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” to open the FTP session.
b. Type “bin” to set the binary transfer mode.
c. Type “prompt”.
d. Type “hash”.
5–12
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Firmware Update
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
e. To begin the file transfer, type “put FW-0000030XX_EBULK_v###X.bin
ebulk:”
The destination “ebulk:” must be all lower-case.
The process sequences through several blocks – this may take several
minutes for the transfer to occur. The modem front panel reports the
status as follows:
Programming flash sector #xx
Please wait…
1) If you stop the transfer before the “PROGRAMMING FLASH
SECTOR#xx PLEASE WAIT” messaging sequence is
complete, this could lead to an incomplete download,
and you must repeat the “put” command (Step 2e).
2) You must make sure to update both images with the same
firmware version for the unit to function properly.
3) The update from an earlier version to FW Ver. 1.4.8B is a
one-way update path. Once you complete an update to
FW Ver. 1.4.8B or later, it is no longer possible to revert to
earlier versions. If you attempt to update to an earlier
firmware version, the modem will detect and disallow this
as a protective measure. The unit will also disallow an
attempt to switch to an image that contains an earlier
version of firmware.
f. Wait for the file transfer to end.
If you receive the “Connection closed by remote host”
message, wait another minute before continuing. The
modem update sometimes takes longer than the FTP client
allows.
g. Type “bye” to close the FTP session.
h. Close the Command-line window.
3. Select the alternate Boot Slot (Image) from the modem front panel:
SELECT: UtilityFirmware Select, and then use the keypad  (LEFT) and 
(RIGHT) arrows to select the alternate image:
5–13
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Firmware Update
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Current Active Image: #2
Next Reboot Image: #1 #2
4. Power down the modem, and then power up to reboot.
5. To verify that the PC-to-unit FTP file transfer was successful, find the current
firmware information via the front panel, or the HTTP or Serial interface (see
Sections 5.2.3.2, 5.2.3.3, or 5.2.3.4).
The base modem is now operating with its latest firmware. The firmware
update process is now complete.
5.4 Optional Network Processor (NP) Module
Interface Firmware Update Procedure
See Appendix D. OPTIONAL NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) INTERFACE
MODULE for further information on updating the firmware for this
optional interface.
Do these steps:
1. Find the current firmware information via the front panel, or the HTTP or
Serial interface (see Sections 5.2.3.2, 5.2.3.3, or 5.2.3.4).
To aid identification, when using the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface,
the Bootrom, Image 1, and Image 2 firmware loads may be
viewed from the Admin (Administration) | Upgrade page.
2. Create a temporary folder (directory) on an external PC as instructed
previously in Section 5.2.4.
3. Download the correct firmware file to your temporary folder. The NP
Module firmware for the modem is FW-0000051x, where "x" denotes the
firmware revision letter. See Section 5.1.2 for more information about
firmware file naming and archive file formats.
4. Extract the firmware files, and confirm the availability of the files in the
temporary folder as per the steps provided in Section 5.2.5.
5. Enable the NP Module. From the modem front panel:
SELECT: Configure  Mode  Interface  NetworkProc.
5–14
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Firmware Update
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
6. Send a “ping” command – either to the NP Module’s Traffic IP Address
when in single mode, or to its Management IP Address when in dual
mode – to verify the connection and communication:
• If in single address mode, to determine the IP Address of the NP
Module, from the modem front panel, go to the SELECT: Configure 
Remote  EthernetConfig  Option Card Addr  Network Proc
Traffic IP menu, and then select Yes.
• If in dual address mode, to determine the IP Address of the NP
Module, from the modem front panel, go to the SELECT: Configure 
Remote  EthernetConfig  Option Card Addr  Network Proc
Mgmt IP menu, and then select Yes.
• Use Command-line to ping the modem: At the prompt, type “ping
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” (where ‘xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx’ is the NP Module’s IP
Address). The results should confirm whether or not the module is
connected and communicating.
7. Initiate a Web browser session with the NP Module using the PC and a
supported Web browser.
1) The Web interface is disabled in Bridge Mode.
2) The browser and page examples that follow use Internet
Explorer Version 7.0.
3) NP HTTP/HTTPS pages are shown with optional FAST
Features installed.
From the User PC, type the NP Module’s IP Address into the browser’s
Address box (where “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” represents the NP Module’s IP
Address).
Depending on the NP Module’s security level setting:
• Type “http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” for non-secure access (Low Security
Mode);
• Type “https:/xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” for SSH (Secure Shell) access (High
Security Mode). When prompted, enter the User Name and
Password to log in:
o Factory Default User Name is comtech;
o Factory Default Password is comtech.
5–15
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Firmware Update
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
8. To update the Network Processor Bulk firmware:
a. Open the Admin | Upgrade page:
b. In the Upgrade section of the page, locate the update file
downloaded to the User PC temporary folder.
• Click [Browse]. The Choose File dialog box will open.
• Locate the folder created for the file download; double-click
on the folder name to open the folder.
c. Select the update file, and then click [Open]. The filename should
appear in the Upgrade Image File text box.
d. Click [Upload] to begin the Image Upgrade process.
9. Wait while the file transfers.
a. After [Upload] is clicked, the Image Upgrade page appears while
the Network Processor first transfers, and then uploads, the update
file from the PC. Allow sufficient time for the file to be loaded into
the NP Module – uploading will take approximately five minutes.
It is not necessary to wait five minutes before clicking
[OK], but you MUST wait five minutes before rebooting
the modem.
b. During the upload process, the page displays a transfer progress bar
that provides the scrolling percentage of completion. During
transfer, the message Please Wait… displays:
5–16
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Firmware Update
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
c. Upon successful completion of transfer, the progress bar reads
100%, and the Image Upgrade Complete message displays:
d. Click [OK] to exit the Image Upgrade page and return to the Admin
| Upgrade page.
10. Refresh the Admin | Upgrade page and verify that the newly-uploaded
firmware is reported in the proper Network Processor Firmware Info
Image slot.
If not, open the Admin | Reboot page and then, in the Network Processor
Boot From section, use the drop-down menu to select Newest as needed
to force the NP Module to boot using the firmware with the most recent
build date. Click [Submit] when done.
5–17
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Firmware Update
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
11. Save all settings before rebooting to prevent loss of configuration
settings. Go to the Save Configuration page, then click [Save Now]:
12. After saving, return to the Admin | Reboot page, then click [Reboot
Now] to boot the NP Module with the new firmware:
13. To load the second image, repeat Steps 8 through 10.
5–18
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Firmware Update
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
5.5 Optional TRANSEC Module Interface Firmware
Update Procedure
See Appendix E. OPTIONAL TRANSEC MODULE OPERATION for further
information on updating the firmware for this optional interface.
Firmware updates for the TRANSEC Module (also referred to in front
panel menu screens as the “Option Card”) are not available from the
Comtech EF Data Web site, but they may be obtained from Comtech EF
Data on an as-needed basis. To obtain these updates, contact Comtech
EF Data Product Support to request access to the modem firmware
update files online FTP site. The Product Support representative will
arrange for full firmware access information and download privileges at
that time.
Do these steps:
1. Contact Comtech EF Data Product Support during normal business hours
to request delivery of the SLM-5650A’s TRANSEC Module firmware
update files. The Product Support representative will arrange for full
firmware access information and download privileges at that time.
To aid identification, when using the TRANSEC Module HTTPS
Interface, the Bootrom, Image 1, and Image 2 firmware loads
may be viewed from the Maint (Maintenance) | Unit Info page.
2. Create a temporary folder (directory) on an external PC as instructed
previously in Section 5.2.4.
3. Download the correct firmware file to your temporary folder. The
TRANSEC Module firmware for the modem is FW-0000058x, where "x"
denotes the firmware revision letter. See Section 5.1.2 for more
information about firmware file naming and archive file formats.
4. Extract the firmware files, and confirm the availability of the files in the
temporary folder as per the steps provided in Section 5.2.5:
• Fw-0000058x.bin, where "x" denotes the revision letter of the
module bulk image file.
5. Send a “ping” command to the TRANSEC Module to verify the connection
and communication:
5–19
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Firmware Update
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
•
To determine the IP Address of the TRANSEC Module, from the
modem front panel, go to the SELECT:
ConfigureTransecModule IP Address screen.
• Use Command-line to ping the modem: At the prompt, type “ping
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” (where ‘xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx’ is the TRANSEC Module’s
IP Address). The results should confirm whether or not the
module is connected and communicating.
6. Initiate a secure Web browser session with the TRANSEC Module via its
HTTPS Interface.
a. From the User PC, type the TRANSEC Module’s secure IP Address
into the browser’s Address box (where “https:/xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”
represents the TRANSEC Module’s IP Address):
b. To log in to the secure interface, select Crypto Officer from the
navigation list that is provided in the upper left-hand corner of each
page, then click [Go!].
c. When prompted, enter the User Name and Password at the Login
page:
• Factory Default User Name is comtech;
• Factory Default Password is comtech.
7. Update the TRANSEC Module bulk firmware:
a. Open the Admin | Update Firmware page.
b. In the Bulk Firmware Upload section of the page, locate the update
file downloaded earlier to the User PC temporary folder.
• Click [Browse]. The Choose File dialog box will open.
• Locate the folder created for the file download; double-click
on the folder name to open the folder.
c. Select the update file, and then click [Open]. The filename should
appear in the Upgrade Bulk File text box.
d. Click [Upload] to begin the Firmware Application Process.
5–20
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Firmware Update
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
8. Wait while the file transfers.
a. After [Upload] is clicked, the Firmware Application Process page
appears while the TRANSEC Module transfers, then uploads, the
update file from the User PC.
b. Allow sufficient time for the file to be uploaded – approximately
five minutes is required for the process to be completed. During the
upload process, the page displays a transfer progress bar that
provides the scrolling percentage of completion. During transfer,
the message Please Wait… displays:
Any power failure during this process will result in failure
of the TRANSEC Module.
c. In the event that an error occurs during the Firmware Application
Process, the following message is displayed:
5–21
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Firmware Update
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
For troubleshooting purposes, three common reasons for
disruption of the Firmware Application Process are:
• Power Failure;
• Loss of Ethernet signal (e.g., disconnection of Ethernet
cable);
• Attempting to load firmware other than the TRANSEC
Module bulk firmware (i.e., FW-0000058x.bin).
d. Upon successful completion of transfer, the progress bar reads
100%, and the Image Upgrade Complete message displays:
9. Refresh the Admin | Upgrade page and verify that the newly-uploaded
firmware is reported in the proper Security Module Bulk Info slot. If not,
update the Active Boot Slot Configuration – use the drop-down menu to
select Newest. (This forces the TRANSEC Module to boot using the
firmware with the most recent build date.) Click [Submit] when done.
5–22
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Firmware Update
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
10. Click [Reboot Now!] to boot the TRANSEC Module with the new
firmware:
The modem will reboot with the new firmware loaded as configured.
11. You must restart the TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface browser session
once the modem returns online.
12. To load the alternate image, repeat Steps 7 though 9.
5–23
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Firmware Update
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
5.6 USB Firmware Update Procedure
Use of the front panel USB port for the firmware update process is not
available in this firmware release. Please contact Comtech EF Data
Product Support for this feature’s release schedule.
5–24
Chapter 6. FAST ACTIVATION
PROCEDURE
6.1 Overview
The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem incorporates a number of optional features. In
order to permit a lower initial cost, you may purchase the unit enabled with only
the desired features.
If you wish to upgrade the functionality of a unit at a later date, Comtech EF Data
provides Fully Accessible System Topology (FAST), which permits the purchase
and activation of options through special authorization codes. You may contact
Comtech EF Data Product Support to purchase these unique, register-specific
Fast Access Codes, and then load these codes into the unit using the front panel
keypad.
See Sect. 1.3.1.7.1 FAST Accessible Options in Chapter 1.
INTRODUCTION or Sect. 7.2.7.10 (UTIL:) FAST in Chapter 7. FRONT
PANEL OPERATION for listings of the available FAST and FAST-accessible
hardware options.
FAST System Theory: FAST facilitates on-site upgrade of the operating feature
set without removing a unit from the setup. FAST technology allows you to order
a unit precisely tailored for the initial application. When your service
requirements change, you can upgrade the topology of the unit to meet these
requirements within minutes. This accelerated upgrade is possible because of
FAST’s extensive use of the programmable logic devices incorporated into
Comtech EF Data products.
6–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
FAST Activation Procedure
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
FAST Implementation: Comtech EF Data implements the FAST system in the
modem at the factory. All FAST options are available through the basic platform
unit at the time of order – FAST allows immediate activation of available options,
after confirmation by Comtech EF Data, through the SLM-5650A front panel.
FAST Accessible Options: You may order hardware options for installation either
at the factory, or you can install and activate them on-site. The FAST Access Code
that you purchase from Comtech EF Data enables configuration of the available
hardware.
6.2 FAST Activation Procedure via the SLM-5650A
Front Panel
See Chapter 7. FRONT PANEL OPERATION for complete information
about using this interface.
Do these steps:
1. Before contacting Comtech EF Data Product Support to order FAST
feature upgrades, obtain and record the modem’s motherboard serial
number:
a. From the front panel main SELECT: menu, select Utility►FAST, and
then press [ENT].
b. The modem’s 9-digit motherboard “S/N” is displayed on the
Utility►FAST screen top line, to the right.
c. Record the Serial Number:
______________________________________
2. View the currently installed features. Proceed as follows:
a. From the front panel main SELECT: menu, select Utility►FAST, and
then press [ENT].
b. From the SELECT: Utility ►FAST menu, select View Options, and then
press [ENTER].
c. Use the up and down arrow keys (▲▼) to scroll through the list of
available FAST options – 01 through 30. Options are identified on
each screen as ‘Installed’ or ‘Not Installed’. Any that are ‘Not
Installed’ may be purchased as a FAST upgrade.
3. Contact Comtech EF Data Product Support to order features:
6–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
FAST Activation Procedure
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
•
Provide the unit Serial Number to the Product Support
representative.
• Identify and purchase the desired FAST option(s).
• Obtain the invoice, the 20-digit FAST Access Code(s), and the FAST
option activation instructions.
4. Enter the FAST Access Code (each FAST Access Code is submitted
separately):
a. Depending on the FAST option, press [CLR] until you return to the
SELECT: Utility►FAST menu.
b. Use the ◄ ► arrow keys to select Enter Modem Code, and press
[ENT].
c. Use the arrow keys (▲▼◄ ►) to carefully enter each registerspecific 20-character FAST Access Code.
d. Press [ENT]. The modem responds with “Configured Successfully” if
the FAST upgrade is accepted; the modem then resets to its newlyincorporated default configuration. However, if an invalid code is
entered, the following message displays:
That FAST code has been rejected.
(ENTER or CLEAR)
Repeat the FAST Access Code entry procedure. Should the code entry
error persist, contact Comtech EF Data Product Support for further
assistance.
6–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
FAST Activation Procedure
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Notes:
6–4
Chapter 7. FRONT
PANEL OPERATION
7.1 Overview
Figure 7-1. SLM-5650A Satellite Modem – Front Panel View
The front panel USB 1.1 port is non-functional.
The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem allows you to locally monitor the modem
operating status (including clocking information) and to control modem
configuration parameters. The front panel (Figure 7-1) provides these
operational features:
• Item 1 – This is the backlit Power On/Off switch.
• Item 2 – This six-button keypad array is used for local control via menu
navigation.
• Item 3 – This 12-button keypad array is used for local control via manual
data entry.
• Item 4 – These 10 Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs) provide overall status
monitoring at a glance.
• Item 5 – This Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) provides viewing of two
lines (at 40 characters per line) of messages, menus, and prompts.
7–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
7.1.1
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Keypad with Data Entry Array
The front panel keypad (Items 2 and 3 in Figure 7-1) controls the local operation
of the modem. Enter data via the keypad. Data, prompts, and messages appear
on the Vacuum Fluoresecent Display (VFD).
The buttons (keys) have a positive ‘click’ action that provides tactile feedback.
The modem responds with audible ‘beeps’ whenever you press a key:
• A single ‘beep’ indicates that an entry was valid and provides you with
confirmation that a proper action was taken;
• A double ‘beep’ indicates that an entry was either invalid, or that a
feature or parameter is not available for operation.
The keypad has an auto-repeat feature. If you hold a key down for
more than three seconds, the key action repeats automatically at the
rate of seven keystrokes per second. This is particularly useful when
editing numeric fields with many digits, such as Frequency or Data
Rate.
Each of the 18 keys provide one or more logical function:
• Use the [ENT] (Enter) key to select a displayed function or to execute a
unit configuration change.
• Use the [CLR] (Clear) key to back out of a selection or to cancel a
configuration change that has not been executed using [ENT]. Pressing
[CLR] generally returns the display to the previous selection.
• Use the  (LEFT) and  (RIGHT) keys to move to the next selection or to
move the cursor functions. At times, they may also used to move from
one section to another.
• Use the  (UP) and  (DOWN) keys to change configuration data
(numbers). You may also use these keys to move from one menu section
to another.
7–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
•
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Use the 12 alphanumeric keys as follows:
COLUMN 1
1 (Space)
4 (GHI)
7 (PQRS)
COLUMN 2
2 (ABC)
5 (JKL)
8 (TUV)
COLUMN 3
3 (DEF)
6 (MNO)
9 (WXYZ)
COLUMN 4
+/.
0
The first three columns of keys are multi-function in purpose. Number-tocharacter assignment for this array means that each successive push of
key 1 through 9 selects the nested choices. For example, the first time
the ‘2’ key is pushed, it selects a ‘2’; the second time, an ’A’; the third
time, a ‘B’; the fourth time, a ‘C’. Pushing the key a fifth time would start
over with a ‘2’.
The last column of keys in this array function as follows:
o Use the ‘+/-’ key to change signs (positive/negative);
o Use the ‘.’ key to enter a decimal point;
o Use the ‘0’ key to enter a zero.
7.1.2
LED Indicators
The 10 Light-Emitting Diode (LED) indicators (Item 4 in Figure 7-1) convey
operational states as follows:
• General modem summary fault information;
• Status;
• Alarms.
The behavior of the individual front panel LED indicators is as follows:
UNIT STATUS
• Lights GREEN when there are no Unit Faults or Stored Faults.
• Lights AMBER when a Unit Fault exists.
• Lights RED when a Unit Alarm exists.
7–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Tx STATUS
• Lights GREEN when there are no Tx Traffic Faults or Alarms.
• Lights AMBER when a Tx Traffic Alarm exits.
• Lights RED when a Traffic Fault exists.
• Remains OFF when the unit is DEMOD ONLY.
Rx STATUS
• Lights GREEN when there are no Rx Traffic Faults or Alarms.
• Lights AMBER when an Rx Traffic Alarm exits.
• Lights RED when an Rx Fault exists.
• Remains OFF when Demod Faults are MASKED.
Tx ON
• Lights GREEN when the Transmitter is currently ON (this LED reflects the
actual operating state of the transmitter, and not its programmed
setting).
• Remains OFF when the Transmitter is OFF.
STORED EVENTS
• Lights AMBER when Stored Events are logged.
• Remains OFF when there are no Stored Events.
IF LOCK
• Lights GREEN if the Demodulator has constellation lock.
• Remains OFF when there is no constellation lock.
DATA LOCK
• Lights GREEN if the Decoder is locked.
• Remains OFF when there is no Decoder lock.
REMOTE
• Lights GREEN if the modem is in Remote Communication Mode.
• Remains OFF when the unit is in Local Mode (remote monitoring is
possible, but there is no remote control).
TEST MODE
• Lights AMBER when a Test Mode (e.g., IF Loopback) is active.
• Remains OFF when no Test Modes are active.
7–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
ENCRYPTION ON
• Lights GREEN when Encryption is ENABLED.
• Remains OFF when Encryption is DISABLED.
7.1.3
Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD)
The SLM-5650A features a Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) (Item 5 in Figure
7-1). The VFD is an active display showing two lines of 40 characters each. It
produces a blue light with adjustavle brightness. Compared to a Liquid Crystal
Display (LCD), it has superior viewing characteristics and does not suffer
problems of viewing angle or contrast.
The opening screen displays once you apply power to the unit. The top line
identifies the unit model (i.e., Comtech SLM-5650A Modem). The bottom line
displays the running Firmware Version (this number may vary) and the current
operating mode for the modem.
Press any key to display the top-level Select menu. On most menu screens, you
will see a flashing, solid-block cursor that blinks at a once-per-second rate. This
indicates the currently selected item, digit, or field:
SELECT: Configure
Save/Load
Monitor Test
Utility
(E)
Where this solid block cursor obscures the item under edit (e.g., a numeric field),
the cursor automatically changes to an underline cursor:
Tx Frequency:
Spectrum:
1955.0000 MHz
Normal
(E)
To prevent the display from becoming burnt by a constant image, the unit
employs a screen saver feature that activates after 15 minutes. This message
7–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
constantly scrolls and wraps across the screen. Sandwiched between the product
display message “Comtech EF Data SLM-5650A Modem” and the user prompt
“Press any key to continue”, the screen saver provides the following operating
statistics:
Modem Status
Description
Code
01
Circuit Identification
02
Demodulator receive frequency offset from the nominal
03
04
Buffer fill status (%)
Receive signal level (dBm)
05
06
Estimated Eb/No
Estimated Corrected Bit Error Rate
07
Bit Error Rate reported by the internal Bit Error Rate Test set
Press any key to exit the screen saver mode and restore the previously active
screen.
7.1.3.1
Navigating the Menu Screens
Both single-function and multi-function menu screens are used throughout the
front panel SELECT: menu interface. Both screen types display all available
options and prompt the user to carry out a required action.
For the top-tiered menu screens, such as the SELECT: Configure menu branch
screen and its nested SELECT: CONFIGTx menu screen, use the arrow
keys to first select a menu item. Press [ENT] to open the nested submenu screen.
Nested submenu screens, such as the SELECT: CONFIGTx Mod submenu,
provide multiple functional selections on a single screen, and therefore require
additional navigation steps:
First, you must first use the arrow keys to navigate to an available option on
the active screen. Press [ENT] to enable selection of that option’s available
settings. Note that the cursor jumps from the select option name to its
editable/selectable setting.
7–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Then, unless otherwise noted, you must use the  arrow keys to scroll
through the available settings. Once the desired setting is selected, you must
then press [ENT] to save that option setting. Note that the cursor jumps from the
setting back to its select option name.
Repeat these steps as needed for each available option. Once all option settings
are configured via the  arrow keys and the [ENT] key, press [CLR] to exit the
active menu screen and return to the previously selected menu.
7.2 Front Panel Operation
7.2.1
Opening Screen
The front panel menu screens provide the visual means to fully control and
monitor operation of the SLM-5650A. The first screen to display, after the
modem power switch is turned on (Item 1 in Figure 7-1), is the read-only
opening screen:
Comtech SLM-5650A Modem
Firmware Version x.x.x
State:
Mode:
GO
TURBO
The top line identifies the product and its operational state. The bottom line
displays the currently running firmware version, and the selected mode of
operation. Press any key to continue to the SELECT: (Main) menu screen.
You must first use the (CONFIG:) MODE submenu to set the MODEM
type, the FREQBAND, and the INTERFACE type before proceeding with
the rest of the modem configuration.
7.2.2
SELECT: (Main) Menu
SELECT: Configure
Save/Load
Monitor
Utility
Test
(E)
Use the   arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired choice. Press [ENT].
The function of each menu branch is as follows:
7–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
•
•
•
•
•
7.2.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Configure Menu Branch – These screens provide you with selections to
fully configure the modem. See Section 7.2.3.
Monitor Menu Branch – These screens permit you to monitor or clear the
alarm status of the unit, to view or clear the log of stored events, and to
display the Rx Parameters screen. See Section 7.2.4.
Test Menu Branch – These screens permit you to configure the modem
into one of several available BERT (Bit Error Rate Test) modes (e.g., CW or
Loopback). See Section 7.2.5.
Save/Load Menu Branch – These screens permit you to save (store) and
retrieve (load) up to 10 different modem configurations. See Section
7.2.6.
Utility Menu Branch – These screens permit you to configure various unit
operation functions, such as setting the Real-Time Clock, adjusting the
display brightness, loading FAST options, etc. See Section 7.2.7.
(SELECT:) Configure (Configuration) Menu Branch
CONFIG: Tx Rx Mode AUPC Transec
AntHndOvr Ref Mask Reset Remote
(E)
Use the  arrow keys to select a configuration submenu. Press [ENT].
The Configure Menu Branch provides submenus for configuring the following
modem operations:
• Tx (Transmit) Submenu – Use the selections here to configure, on a
parameter-by-parameter basis, the Tx operation of the unit. For
example, use these submenus if you wish to change only the Tx
Frequency. This submenu is not accessible if modem operation has been
set to Demod Only. See Section 7.2.3.1.
• Rx (Receive) Submenu – Use the selections here to configure, on a
parameter-by-parameter basis, the Rx operation of the unit. For
example, use these submenus if you wish to change only the Rx
Frequency. See Section 7.2.3.2.
• Mode Submenu – Use the selections here ro configure the modem
operational mode, frequency band, interface types and their associated
operating modes. See Section 7.2.3.3.
7–8
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
AUPC Submenu – Use the selections here to configure the Automatic
Uplink Power Control functions. This menu is selectable only if the
“Modem Type” has been set to AUPC. See Section 7.2.3.4.
Transec Submenu – Use the selections here to configure the optional
TRANSEC (Transmission Security) Module features. See Section 7.2.3.5.
AntHndOvr Submenu – Use the selections here to configure the Antenna
Handover features (when the SLM-5650A is used with the CRS-311-AH
Antenna Handover Switch). This menu is selectable only if the Antenna
Handover FAST option is installed. See Section 7.2.3.6.
Ref (Reference) Submenu – Use the selections here to configure the
internal 10MHz Reference or allow the unit to phase lock to an External
Reference of 1, 5, or 10 MHz. The unit reverts to Internal if the External
Reference is not present or is faulted. See Section 7.2.3.7.
Mask Submenu – Use the selections here to configuere how the modem
handles alarms and faults. See Section 7.2.3.8.
Reset Submenu – Use this menu to reset the modem to its factory
configurastion settings. See Section 7.2.3.9.
Remote (Remote Control) Submenu – The selections here configure
whether the unit is being controlled locally or remotely. See Section
7.2.3.10.
The modem may be monitored over the remote control bus at
any time. When in Local mode, however, configuration
parameters may only be changed through the front panel.
Conversely, when in Remote mode, the unit may be monitored
from the front panel, but configuration parameters may only
be changed via the remote control bus.
7–9
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
7.2.3.1
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
(CONFIG:) Tx
Tx: Mod DataRate Overhead Frequency
Power Clocking Misc Spreading (E)
Use the  arrow keys to select a Tx configuration submenu. Press [ENT]:
Submenu
Option
Mod
Select: FEC; Type; Rate; RS; Diff; Scrambler.
Enter a selected data rate and view the symbol rate (see Appendix B.
OPERATIONAL REFERENCES).
Select the Overhead Type; view the Overhead Rate; select the ReedSolomon Code Word; set the Depth.
DataRate
Overhead
See Appendix H. OVERHEAD AND SYMBOL RATE
CALCULATIONS for information about Overhead bandwidth.
Frequency
Select the desired frequency and spectral inversion.
Power
Clocking
Misc
Select desired output power level and state of the output.
Select the transmit clock source and SCT reference.
Select CLK/DataPhase and BPSK Bit Ordering.
Select the Tx spreading factor and equation. View the Tx Chip Rate. This
menu is selectable only if the “Modem Type” has been set to LDPC.
Spreading
(CONFIG:) Tx  Mod
Mod: FEC:VIT
Type:QPSK Rate:1/2
RS:Off Diff:On Scram:OM-73
(E)
Use the  arrow keys to select FEC, Type, Rate, RS, Diff, or Scram. Press
[ENT]. For any option, use the arrow keys to scroll through the available
settings. Select your setting. Press [ENT] to finish.
7–10
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Option
FEC
Type
(Modulation)
Rate
RS
Diff
Scram
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Setting
Standard settings:
• VIT (Viterbi) – K=7 convolutional encoder.
• NONE – Uncoded.
Optional settings:
• TURBO – Turbo Product Code, which is a block code.
• SEQ – Sequential Encoder/Decoder.
• ULL – Ultra Low Latency LDPC
• LL – Low Latency LDPC
• HP – High Performance LDPC
Standard settings:
• BPSK – Bi Phase Shift Keying.
• QPSK – Quadrature Phase Shift Keying.
• OQPSK – Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Keying.
Optional settings:
• 8PSK – 8 Phase Shift Keying.
• 8QAM – 8 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
• 16QAM – 16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation.
• Viterbi – 1/2; 2/3; 3/4; 5/6; 7/8
• Uncoded – 1/1
• Turbo – 5/16; 3/4; 7/8; 17/18; 21/44
• Sequential – 1/2; 3/4; 7/8
• ULL – 1/2; 2/3; 3/4
• LL – .378; .451; .541; 1/2; 2/3; 3/4; 7/8
• HP – 1/2; 2/3; 3/4
Reed-Solomon Encoder: On or Off
Differential Encoder: On or Off
Scrambling (for energy dispersal):
• V.35 – ITU standard.
• MOD-V.35 (Modified V.35) – Comtech EF Data Closed Network
with Reed- Solomon compatible .
• IBS – Used for IESS-309 operation.
• Turbo – Synchronous scrambler synchronized to the Turbo
block.
• OM73 – Linkabit OM-73 modem compatibility mode.
• Synch – Synchronous scrambler synchronized to the ReedSolomon.
• Off – Scrambling is disabled.
7–11
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
When changing modulation type, the data rate must be set to
a rate supported by the modulation type or the change to the
modulation type will not be allowed. Some choices will only be
visible if the modem is set to a compatible mode, or if an
option is installed or enabled.
(CONFIG:) Tx  DataRate
Tx Data Rate:
Sym Rate:
020000.000 kbps
0266666.666 ksps(E)
Use Method 1 or Method 2 to enter the desired Tx Data Rate (in kilobits per
second):
Method
Procedure
1
Use the number keypad and enter the desired data rate. Press [ENT.]
(See Appendix B. OPERATIONAL REFERENCES.)
2
Use the  arrow keys to scroll through and select the desired data rate
or symbol rate. When scrolling through the data rates the symbol rate is
automatically recalculated and displayed. Press [ENT].
When entering the data rate, the following interactions need to be
taken into account:
• If the modulation type selected is 8PSK, 8QAM, or 16QAM
the minimum data rate allowed is 256 kbps.
• When changing certain parameters like modem type, the
data rate will default to 64 kbps or 256 kbps.
• The calculated symbol rate is displayed for the user. This is
helpful for determining the occupied bandwidth required for
the selected modulation type, code rate and overhead.
(CONFIG:) Tx  Overhead
Tx:
Overhead:None
RS-CW:N/A
Rate: N/A
Depth:N/A (E)
7–12
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Use the  arrow keys to select Overhead, Rate, RS-CW, and Depth. Press
[ENT]. Use the  arrow keys to scroll through the available settings. Select
your setting. Press [ENT] to finish.
Option
Setting
Overhead
Standard settings: IESS-308; IESS-309
Optional setting: AUPC
96 kbps (IESS-308); 1/15 (IESS-309 or AUPC); N/A (None).
Rate
See Appendix H. OVERHEAD AND SYMBOL RATE CALCULATIONS
for Overhead rate information.
RS-CW
Reed-Solomon Code Word, N/K:
126/112; 194/178; 208/192; 219/201; 220/200; 225/205.
Depth
Interleaving depth:
4; 8; 16.
Some selections will only be visible if the modem is set to a
compatible mode, or if an option is installed or enabled.
(CONFIG:) Tx  Frequency
Tx Frequency:
Spectrum:
1955.0000 MHz
Normal
(E)
Use the  arrow keys to select Tx Frequency or Spectrum. Press [ENT]. Use
Method 1 or Method 2 to enter the desired Tx Frequency:
Method
Procedure
1
Use the number keypad and enter the desired frequency. Press [ENT].
2
Use the  arrow keys to select a digit to edit, and then use the 
arrow keys to change that digit. Press [ENT].
• For 70/140 MHz – the valid range is 52-88 or 104-176 MHz (in 100 Hz
steps).
• For L-Band – the valid range is 950-2000 MHz (in 100 Hz steps).
7–13
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
When entering an IF frequency, the M&C will check the occupied
bandwidth calculated from the data rate, modulation type, code rate
and overhead and will not allow an IF frequency to be entered if the
occupied bandwidth falls outside of the minimum or maximum IF
frequencies.
Select Spectrum to counteract frequency converters that invert the spectrum.
Use the  arrow keys to select Normal or Invert. Press [ENT].
(CONFIG:) Tx  Power
Tx Power:
State:On
Control:
Level:-20.0
Normal
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select State, Level, or Control. Press [ENT].
Option
State
Level
Control
Setting
Use the  arrow keys to select On or Off. Press [ENT].
Edit the Power Level from –40 dBm to +10 dBm in 0.1 dB steps:
1. Key in the desired number using the keypad –or–
2. Select the digit to be edited using thearrow keys, and then
change the value of that digit by using the  arrow keys.
3. Press [ENT].
Use the  arrow keys to select Normal, RTS, or VSAT. Press [ENT].
• RTS (Request to Send) is an interface signaling control. If enabled,
RTS can be used to control the output state of the modulator. Only
available when using either the EIA-530 or HSSI interface.
• When VSAT is selected, the output state of the modulator is
controlled by the demodulator carrier detect status. Modulator
output will be enabled when the demodulator is detected, and
disabled otherwise.
(CONFIG:) Tx  Clocking
Tx Clocking:
CLK Source: SCT
(E)
SCT Ref:
Reference
Use the  arrow keys to select Clk Source or SCT Ref. Press [ENT].
7–14
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Option
Setting
Clk Source Use the  arrow keys to select SCT or Tx-Terr. Press [ENT].
• SCT (Send Clock Timing) – Select as an output to provide a clock
reference for the user.
• Tx-Terr – Provides transmit clock input on the selected data interface.
SCT Ref
Use the  arrow keys to select Reference, DataSrcSync, or
LoopTiming. Press [ENT].
• Reference – SCT will be generated from the modem’s 10 MHz
reference (this could be derived from and external reference if
selected).
• DataSRCSync (Data Source Synchronization) – No clock is provided on
the interface and a clock is generated such that it is phase locked to
the incoming data stream.
• LoopTiming – The clock generated from the received carrier is used as
a reference for generating SCT.
(CONFIG:) Tx  Misc
Tx Misc:
Clk/DataPhase
BitOrdering
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select Clk/DataPhase or BitOrdering. Press [ENT].
(CONFIG:) Tx  Misc  Clk/DataPhase
Tx Clock Phase: Normal
Data Phase: Normal
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select Tx Clock Phase or Data Phase. Press
[ENT]. For either, use the  arrow keys to select Normal or Invert.
Press [ENT].
(CONFIG:) Tx  Misc  BitOrdering
BPSK Bit Ordering: Standard
Non-Standard
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select BPSK Bit Ordering (for BSPK
compatibility) as Standard or Non-Standard. Press [ENT].
7–15
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
(CONFIG:) Tx  Spreading
Tx Spreading: Factor:001 Equation:1
Chip Rate: 000128.000 kcps
(E)
Use the  arrow keys to select Factor or Equation. Press [ENT].
Option
Factor
Equation
Setting
Tx Spreading Factor (1-512), where 1=Spreading OFF.
Use one of the four built-in Pseudo PN patterns, designated 1 through 4.
Use Method 1 or Method 2 to configure either option:
Method
Procedure
1
Key in the desired value using the numbered keypad. Press [ENT].
2
Use the  arrow keys to select a digit to edit, and then use the 
arrow keys to change that digit. Press [ENT].
7–16
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
7.2.3.2
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
(CONFIG:) Rx
Rx: Demod DataRate Overhead Frequency
Acq Buffer Misc CnC Spreading (E)
Use the  arrow keys to select an Rx configuration submenu. Press [ENT]:
Submenu
Demod
DataRate
Overhead
Frequency
Acquisition
Buffer
Misc
CnC
Spreading
Option
Select FEC, Type, Rate, RS, Diff, or Descrambler.
Enter a selected data rate (see Appendix B. OPERATIONAL
REFERENCES).
Select the Overhead Type; view the Overhead Rate; select the ReedSolomon Code Word; set the Depth.
See Appendix H. OVERHEAD AND SYMBOL RATE
CALCULATIONS for information about Overhead
bandwidth.
Select desired frequency and spectral inversion.
Select acquisition range and reacquisition time period.
Select buffer reference clock source, recenter, the buffer size, Bit
mode or millisecond mode and external Framing for Plesiochronous
operation.
Select Clk and Data Phase, BPSK Bit Ordering, and Eb/No Threshold.
Select Mode, Acquisition, or SearchDelay.
Select the Rx spreading factor and equation; view the Rx Chip Rate.
This menu is selectable only if the modem type has been set to
LDPC.
Framing is applicable only when using externally framed data
with the following formats: T1 or E1 G.704; T2 G.743, G.704,
G.707; and E2 G.742, G.704, G.745.
(CONFIG:) Rx  Demod
Demod: FEC:VIT
RS:N/A Diff:On
Type:BPSK Rate:3/4
Descram:OM-73
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select FEC, Type, Rate, RS, Diff, or Descram. Press
[ENT]. For any option, use the  arrow keys to scroll through the available
settings. Select your setting. Press [ENT] to finish.
7–17
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Option
FEC
Settings
Standard settings:
• VIT (Viterbi) – K=7 convolutional encoder.
• NONE – Uncoded.
Optional settings:
• TURBO – Turbo Product Code, which is a block code.
• SEQ – Sequential Encoder/Decoder.
• ULL – Ultra Low Latency LDPC
• LL – Low Latency LDPC
• HP – High Performance LDPC
Type
Standard settings:
(Modulation) • BPSK – Bi Phase Shift Keying.
• QPSK – Quadrature Phase Shift Keying.
• OQPSK – Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Keying.
Optional settings:
• 8PSK – 8 Phase Shift Keying.
• 8QAM – 8 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
• 16QAM – 16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation.
Rate
• Viterbi – 1/2; 2/3; 3/4; 5/6; 7/8
•
•
•
•
•
•
RS
Diff
Descram
Uncoded – 1/1
Turbo – 5/16; 3/4; 7/8; 17/18; or 21/44
Sequential – 1/2; 3/4; 7/8
ULL – 1/2; 2/3; 3/4
LL - .378; .451; .541; 1/2; 2/3; 3/4; 7/8
HP – 1/2; 2/3; 3/4
Reed-Solomon Decoder: On or Off.
Differential Decoder: On or Off.
Descrambling:
• V.35 – ITU standard;
• MOD-V.35 (modified V.35) – Comtech EF Data Closed Network
with Reed-Solomon compatible;
• IBS – Used for IESS-309 operation;
• Turbo – Synchronous descrambler synchronized to the Turbo
block;
• OM-73 – OM-73 Linkabit modem compatibility mode;
• Synch – Synchronous descrambler synchronized to the ReedSolomon frame.
• Off – Descrambling is disabled.
7–18
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
When changing Modulation type, the data rate must be set to a rate
supported by the modulation type, or the change to the modulation
type will not be allowed. Some choices will only be visible if the modem
is set to a compatible mode, or if an option is installed or enabled.
(CONFIG:) Rx  DataRate
Rx Data Rate:
Sym Rate:
020000.000 kbps
0266666.666 ksps(E)
Use Method 1 or Method 2 to enter the desired Rx Data Rate (in kilobits per
second):
Method
Procedure
1
Use the number keypad and enter the desired data rate (see Appendix
B. OPERATIONAL REFERENCES).
2
Use the  arrow keys to scroll through and select the desired data
rate or symbol rate. When scrolling through the data rates, the symbol
rate is automatically recalculated and displayed.
When entering the data rate, the following interactions need to be
taken into account:
• If the modulation type selected is 8PSK, 8QAM, or 16QAM the
minimum data rate allowed is 256 kbps.
• When changing certain parameters like modem type, the data
rate will default to 64 kbps or 256 kbps.
• The calculated symbol rate is displayed for the user. This is
helpful for determining the occupied bandwidth required for the
selected modulation type, code rate and overhead
(CONFIG:) Rx  Overhead
Rx:
Overhead:None
RS-CW:N/A
Rate: N/A
Depth:N/A (E)
Use the  arrow keys to select Overhead, Rate, RS-CW, and Depth. Press
[ENT]. For each option, use the  arrow keys to scroll through the available
settings. Select your setting. Press [ENT] to finish.
7–19
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Option
Overhead
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Settings
(IESS-308, IESS-309 are standard; AUPC is optional).
96 kbps (IESS-308); 1/15 (IESS-309 or AUPC); N/A (none).
Rate
See Appendix H. OVERHEAD AND SYMBOL RATE
CALCULATIONS for Overhead rate information.
RS-CW
Reed-Solomon Code Rate, N/K: 126/112; 194/178; 208/192; 219/201;
220/200; 225/205.
Depth
De-interleaving depth: 4; 8; 16
Some selections will only be visible if the modem is set to a
compatible mode, or if an option is installed or enabled.
(CONFIG:) Rx  Frequency
Rx Frequency:
Spectrum:
1955.0000 MHz
Normal
(E)
Use the  arrow keys to select Rx Frequency or Spectrum. Press [ENT]. Use
Method 1 or Method 2 to enter the desired Rx Frequency:
Method
Procedure
1
Use the number keypad and enter the desired frequency. Press [ENT].
2
Use the  arrow keys to select a digit to edit, and then use the 
arrow keys to change that digit. Press [ENT].
• For 70/140 MHz – the valid range is 52-88 or 104-176 MHz (in 100 Hz
steps).
• For L-Band – the valid range is 950-2000 MHz (in 100 Hz steps).
When entering an IF frequency, the M&C will check the occupied
bandwidth calculated from the data rate, modulation type, code
rate and overhead, and will not allow an IF frequency to be entered
if the occupied bandwidth falls outside of the minimum or maximum
IF frequencies.
Select Spectrum to counteract frequency converters that invert the spectrum.
Use the  arrow keys to select Normal or Invert. Press [ENT].
7–20
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
(CONFIG:) Rx  Acquisition
Acquisition: Range: 0001.000 KHz
Reacq: 000 Seconds (E)
Use the arrow keys to select Range or Reacq. Press [ENT].
Option
Range
Reacq
Settings
Demodulator Acquisition range:
0-60 kHz (in 1 Hz steps).
Holdoff time before the demodulator reverts to normal acquisition:
0 to 999 seconds.
During the holdoff, the demodulator will stay centered on the last known
frequency position of the carrier for faster reacquisition.
Use Method 1 or Method 2 to configure these options:
Method
Procedure
1
Key in the desired frequency using the numbered keypad. Press [ENT].
2
Use the  arrow keys to select a digit to edit, and then use the 
arrow keys to change that digit. Press [ENT].
(CONFIG:) Rx  Buffer
Buffer: Src:RX-Sat Center: Y/N
ExtClk
Size:00001024 Mode:Bits Framing (E)
Use the  arrow keys to select Src, Center, ExtClk, Size, Mode, or Framing.
Press [ENT]. Use the  arrow keys to scroll through the available settings.
Select your setting. Press [ENT] to finish.
7–21
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Option
Src
Center
ExtClk
Size
Mode
Framing
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Settings
Select Rx-Sat, Int, Tx-Terr, or ExtClk:
• Rx-Sat is the recovered clock from the received carrier.
• Int is a clock synthesized from the modems reference (internal or
external).
• Tx-Terr is the transmit clock supplied by the user.
• ExtClk is the external clock supplied by the user when using the
optional G.703 interface.
Select Yes or No.
By selecting Center, the buffer can be manually centered – the buffer is
automatically centered when the demodulator locks.
Sets the frequency of the external G.703 clock:
Select RxDataRate, 5MHz, 10 MHz, or 20 MHz.
• If Mode is set to Bits, the valid range is 128-4194304 (in 16 bit
steps).
• If Mode is set to mSec (milliseconds), the valid range is 2-60 (in 1
mSec steps).
Buffer size format: Set to Bits or mSec.
Select T1, E1, T2, or E2:
• T1 – G704 or None.
• E1 – G704 or None.
• T2 – G704, G743, G747, or None.
• E2 – G704, G742, G745, or None.
If selected, permits buffer to operate in a plesiochronous mode when
running externally framed data. If Mode is set to mSec and Rx data rate
is 1544 kbps (T1), 2048 (E1), 6312 kbps (T2), or 8448 kbps (E2), then the
selected framing card is used to calculate the required buffer size so that
the buffer will slip properly.
While the framing selections show up in the menus regardless of
which interface is plugged in, they will only have effect if the Buffer
Mode is set to mSec.
(CONFIG:) Rx  Misc
Rx Misc:
Clk/DataPhase BitOrdering
Eb/No Threshold
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select Clk/DataPhase, BitOrdering, or Eb/No
Threshold. Press [ENT].
7–22
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
(CONFIG:) Rx  Misc  Clk/DataPhase
Rx Clock Phase: Normal
Data Phase: Normal
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select Rx Clock Phase or Data Phase. Press
[ENT]. For either, use the  arrow keys to select Normal or Invert.
Press [ENT].
(CONFIG:) Rx  Misc  BitOrdering
BPSK Bit Ordering: Standard
Non-Standard
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select BPSK Bit Ordering (for BSPK
compatibility) as Standard or Non-Standard. Press [ENT].
(CONFIG:) Rx  Misc  Eb/No Threshold
Eb/No Threshold: 00.1 dB
(E)
This sets an Eb/No threshold. When the received carrier Eb/No is less than
the threshold value, the Rx threshold alarm is set.
Use the  arrow keys to select a digit, and then use the  arrow
keys to change that digit. The valid range is 0.1-20 dB (in 0.1 dB steps).
Press [ENT].
(CONFIG:) Rx  CnC
Carrier-in-Carrier(CnC): Mode:Off
Acquisition SearchDelay (E)
Use the arrow keys to select Mode, Acquisition, or SearchDelay. Press
[ENT]. If Mode is selected, use the  arrow keys to select either On or Off.
Press [ENT].
7–23
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
(CONFIG:) Rx  CnC  Acquisition
CnC Acquisition: Range: 60.000 KHz
Reacq: 120 Sec
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select Range or Reacq. Press [ENT].
Option Settings
Range CnC Interfering Carrier Frequency Offset Search Range:
0-60 kHz (in 1 Hz steps).
Reacq
Holdoff time before the demodulator starts a new search.
Use Method 1 or Method 2 to configure these options:
Method Procedure
1
Key in the desired value using the numbered keypad. Press [ENT].
2
Use the  arrow keys to select a digit to edit, and then use the
 arrow keys to change that digit. Press [ENT].
(CONFIG:) Rx  CnC  SearchDelay
CnC Search Delay:
Min: 000 mSec
Max: 290 mSec
(E)
Set the Minimum Delay and Maximum Delay values to use when
searching for the Interfering Carrier. Use the arrow keys to select
Min or Max. Press [ENT].
Use Method 1 or Method 2 to configure either option:
Method Procedure
1
Key in the desired value using the numbered keypad. Press [ENT].
2
Use the  arrow keys to select a digit to edit, and then use the
 arrow keys to change that digit. Press [ENT].
7–24
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
(CONFIG:) Rx  Spreading
Rx Spreading: Factor:001 Equation:1
Chip Rate: 000128.000 kcps
(E)
Use the  arrow keys to select Factor or Equation. Press [ENT].
Option
Settings
Factor
Rx Spreading Factor (1-512), where 1=Spreading OFF.
Equation Use one of the four built-in Pseudo PN patterns, designated 1 through 4.
Use Method 1 or Method 2 to configure either option:
Method
Procedure
1
Key in the desired value using the numbered keypad. Press [ENT].
2
Use the  arrow keys to select a digit to edit, and then use the 
arrow keys to change that digit. Press [ENT].
7–25
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
7.2.3.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
(CONFIG:) Mode
Mode: Modem:TURBO
Interface:EIA-530
FreqBand:L-Band
Mode:N/A
(E)
Use the  arrow keys to select Modem Type, FreqBand, Interface, or (when
applicable) the Network Processor Working Mode. Press [ENT]. Use the 
arrow keys to scroll through the available settings. Select your setting. Press
[ENT] to finish.
Option
Modem:
Settings
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
FreqBand
Interface
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
OM-73 – Select Linkabit OM-73 modem compatibility mode.
MIL-165A – Select functionality defined by MIL-STD-188-165A.
IESS-308 – Select functionality defined by IESS-308, the Intelsat
Intermediate Data Rate standard.
IESS-309 – Select functionality defined by IESS-309, the Intelsat
Business Services standard.
IESS-310 – Select functionality defined by IESS-310, the Intelsat 8-PSK
Intermediate Data Rate standard.
TURBO – Select functionality defined by IESS-315 plus Comtech EF Data
Turbo mode interoperability.
16QAM – Select 16-QAM as a modulation type.
AUPC – Select Automatic Uplink Power Control.
RXBURST – Select when unit is a Vipersat STDMA Hub Modem with its
Acquisition Mode set to “Standard.”
TXBURST – Select when unit is a Vipersat Remote Modem.
TURBO-FA – Select when unit is in Vipersat SCPC operation.
RXBRSTFA – Select when unit is a Vipersat STDMA Hub Modem with its
Acquisition Mode set to “Long”.
LDPC – Select Low Density Parity Check and Spreading.
70/140 MHz (52-88 MHz, 104-176 MHz);
L-Band (950-2000 MHz).
EIA-530 – Base modem native interface
HSSI – Base modem native interface
Network Processor – Optional data interface
GigaBit Ethernet – Optional data interface
G.703 (BAL) – Optional data interface
G.703 (UNBAL) – Optional data interface
LVDS – Optional data interface.
7–26
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Option
Settings
Mode
The menu is fixed at N/A if the optional Network Processor is not present.
Otherwise, select the Network Processor Working Mode:
• RtrVSHub
• RtrVSHEx
• RtrVSRem
• RtrVSREx
• RtrMPHub
• RtrMPRem
• RtrPtoP
• Bridge
Vipersat mode should not be selected from the front panel under
most circumstances. Refer to the supplementary Vipersat User
Guide (CEFD P/N MN-0000035) for detailed information on
configuring the Vipersat features.
When selecting an IF frequency band, both transmit and receive
operate in the selected band. Operation of transmit in one IF
frequency band and the receive in the other IF frequency band is
not permitted.
When selecting a data interface type, a native interface can be
selected even if an optional interface is installed, but an optional
interface can only be selected if it is installed. Both transmit and
receive must use the selected interface type. Transmitting using one
interface type and receiving using another interface type is not
permitted.
7–27
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
7.2.3.4
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
(CONFIG:) AUPC
You must first go to the (CONFIG:) MODE submenu and set the modem
type as AUPC in order to select this menu.
AUPC: Local Remote
Logging
ASYNC
(E)
Use the  arrow keys to select Local, Remote, ASYNC, or Logging. Press
[ENT].
(CONFIG:) AUPC  Local
Local AUPC: Enable: Off Power Settings
Target Setting Carrier Loss Action (E)
Use the arrow keys to select Enable, Power Settings, Target Setting, or
Carrier Loss Action. Press [ENT].
(CONFIG:) AUPC  Local  Enable
Use the  arrow keys to select to enable AUPC on the local modem as
On or Off. Press [ENT].
(CONFIG:) AUPC  Local Power Settings
Local AUPC Power: Nominal: -10.0 dBm
Min: -30.0 dBm Max: -05.0 dBm
(E)
Use thearrow keys to select Nominal:, Min:, or Max:. Press [ENT].
Typical for each setting, use thearrow keys to select a digit, and then
use the  arrow keys to change that digit. Press [ENT] to finish.
Setting
Nominal:
Valid Operational Range
Nominal Output Power:
-40 to +10 dB.
7–28
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Setting
Min:
Max:
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Valid Operational Range
Minimum Output Power:
-40 to +10 dB.
Maximum Output Power
-40 to +10 dB.
(CONFIG:) AUPC  Local Target Settings
Target Settings: Eb/No: 0.60 dB
RateOfChange: 1.0 dB/Minute
(E)
Use thearrow keys to select Eb/No or RateOfChange. Press [ENT].
Typical for either setting, use thearrow keys to select a digit, and
then use the  arrow keys to change that digit. Press [ENT] to finish.
Setting
Eb/No
Valid Operational Range
To set the Target Eb/No for AUPC:
3.2 to 16.0 dB.
RateOfChange To set the maximum tracking rate:
0.5 to 6.0 dB per minute (in 0.5 dB increments)
(CONFIG:) AUPC  Local Carrier Loss Action
Carrier Loss: Local: HOLD
Remote: HOLD
(E)
Use thearrow keys to select Local or Remote. Press [ENT].
Option
Local
Remote
Function
Sets the action of the local modem when it loses carrier
detect.
Sets the action of the local modem when the remote
modem loses carrier detect.
For either option, use the  arrow keys to select HOLD, NOMINAL, or
MAXIMUM. Press [ENT] to finish.
7–29
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
(CONFIG:) AUPC  Remote
Remote AUPC: Enable: Off BasebandL: Off
Tx Pattern: Off BER: Loss
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select Enable, BasebandL, Tx Pattern, or BER. Press
[ENT].
Option
Function
Enable
View or modify the status of the remote modem’s AUPC Enable.
View or modify the status of the remote modem’s I/O Loopback #1
setting.
View or modify the status of the remote modem’s Tx pattern
substitution.
Note: In order to maintain compatibility with older Comtech EF Data
modems, only 2047 pattern substitution is supported.
Monitor BER of the remote modem. The remote modem must have Tx
Pattern set to On and the local modem must be transmitting a 2047
pattern.
BasebandL
Tx Pattern
BER
Typical for all options, use the  arrow keys to select operation as On or Off.
Press [ENT] to finish.
(CONFIG:) AUPC  ASYNC
ASYNC: TxBaud:1200 TxFormat:7E2 (E)
Type:232
RxBaud:1200 RxFormat:7E2
Use thearrow keys to select TxBaud, TxFormat, Type, RxBaud, or RxFormat.
Press [ENT]. Typical for each option, use the  arrow keys to scroll through
the available settings. Select your setting. Press [ENT] to finish.
Option
TxBaud
TxFormat
Settings
Select the Async Channel Tx Baud Rate:
110; 150; 300; 600; 1200; 2400; 4800; 9600; 19200; 38400.
Select the Async Channel Tx Character Format:
7N1; 7E1; 7O1; 7N2; 7E2; 7O2; 8N1; 8E1; 8O1; 8N2; 8E2; 8O2.
7–30
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Option
Type
RxBaud
RxFormat
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Settings
Select the Async Channel communications protocol:
232; 485-2W; 485-4W.
Select the Async Channel Rx Baud Rate:
110; 150; 300; 600; 1200; 2400; 4800; 9600; 19200; 38400.
Select the Async Channel Rx Character Format:
7N1; 7E1; 7O1; 7N2; 7E2; 7O2; 8N1; 8E1; 8O1; 8N2; 8E2; 8O2.
Max Tx or Rx baud rate is limited to 1.875% of the primary data rate.
(CONFIG:) AUPC  Logging
AUPC Statistics: View
Clear-All
Config
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select View, Clear-All, or Config. Press [ENT].
Option
Settings
View
Use the  arrow keys to view/scroll through the stored AUPC
statistics. Press [CLR] or [ENT] to return to the previous menu.
Clear-All
Use the arrow keys to select No or Yes to clear all stored AUPC
statistics. Press [ENT].
Config
Use the  arrow keys to set the interval that the statistics are
stored. Valid settings are 10 minutes through 90 minutes (in 10minute increments), or Disabled. Press [ENT].
7–31
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
7.2.3.5
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
(CONFIG:) Transec
TRANSEC: State: Encrypted
Module IP Address
Gateway
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select State, Module IP Address, or Gateway. Press
[ENT].
Option
State
Module IP
Address
Gateway
7.2.3.6
Settings
Select Encrypted or Bypass.
Set the TRANSEC Module’s Management IP Address and subnet mask
length.
Set the TRANSEC Module’s IP Gateway.
(CONFIG:) AntHndOvr
AntHndOvr: Mode: Off State: ONLINE
PwrOffset: +01.2 Delay: 040ms (E)
Use the arrow keys to select Mode, State, PwrOffset, or Delay. Press [ENT].
Option
Mode
State
PwrOffset
Delay
7.2.3.7
Function
Select the Antenna Handover Mode as Off, Man, or Auto.
Select the current modem state as ONLINE or OFFLINE.
Select the offset that is added to the Tx power level to compensate for
system loss.
Select the size of the buffer used during Handover events.
(CONFIG:) Ref
Reference: Internal Ext-1Mhz
Ext-5Mhz Ext-10Mhz
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select Internal, Ext-1Mhz, Ext-5Mhz or Ext-1Mhz.
Press [ENT].
7–32
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Option
Function
Internal
Select the Internal high stability ovenized 10 MHz oscillator.
Ext-1Mhz
Select an external 1 MHz reference (accepts sine wave or square
wave and locks the internal reference to the 1 MHz).
Ext-5Mhz
Select an external 5 MHz reference (accepts sine wave or square
wave and locks the internal reference to the 5 MHz).
Ext-10Mhz
Select an external 10 MHz reference (accepts sine wave or square
wave and locks the internal reference to the 10 MHz).
7.2.3.8
(CONFIG:) Mask
Mask: TxData RxData
DemodFaults
Eb/No
Threshold
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select TxData, RxData, Eb/No Threshold, or
DemodFaults. Press [ENT].
Option
Settings
TxData
This alarm monitors data activity on the transmit data interface:
Use the arrow keys to select Masked, Activity, or AIS. Press [ENT].
RxData
This alarm monitors the received data activity:
Use the arrow keys to select Masked, Activity, or AIS. Press [ENT].
Eb/No
Threshold
Demod
Faults
This alarm monitors the receive Eb/No of the demodulator and
compares it to the Eb/No threshold value:
Use the arrow keys to select Masked or Active. Press [ENT].
This alarm will mask all demod faults and alarms:
Use the arrow keys to select Masked or Active. Press [ENT].
When selecting masked for a given alarm, if the condition occurs the
alarm will not be set. Activity or Active means the alarm is enabled. AIS
(Alarm Indication Signaling) will put out all ones, allowing the connected
equipment to recognize that there is an alarm condition.
7–33
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
7.2.3.9
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
(CONFIG:) Reset
Are you sure that you want to default
the modem configuration? No Yes (E)
Use the arrow keys to select No to retain all current configuration settings
and return to the (CONFIG:) menu. Press [ENT]. Otherwise, select Yes to
immediately reboot the modem with is factory-shipped settings.
•
•
•
The default Base Modem Management IP Address is
192.169.1.1/24.
The default User Name is comtech.
The default Password is comtech.
7.2.3.10 (CONFIG:) Remote
Remote Control:
SerialConfig
Mode:Serial
EthernetConfig
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select Mode, SerialConfig, or EthernetConfig. Press
[ENT].
(CONFIG:) Remote  Mode
Use the  arrow keys to select Local, Serial, or Serial+Ethernet. Press [ENT].
Local mode limits your access to remote operations. You may only
monitor the status of the modem.
(CONFIG:) Remote  SerialConfig
Remote Control:
Interface
Baudrate
Format
(E)
For serial communications, use the arrow keys to select Interface, Format,
or Baudrate. Press [ENT].
7–34
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
(CONFIG:) Remote  SerialConfig  Interface
M&C Bus Interface: RS232 RS485-2W
RS485-4W TTL(Switch) CRS-500
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select RS232, RS485-2W (2-wire), RS485-4W
(4-wire), TTL (Switch), or CRS-500. Press [ENT].
When you select RS-232, the local M&C Bus Address
displays 0000. Addressing is not supported by RS-232 or
TTL (Switch) because they are not multi-drop
communication standards.
If you select RS-485, the display will show address 0001 to
9999. This address can be changed using the front panel.
The most significant digit is for Comtech EF Data
redundancy switches.
If you select TTL (Switch), this enables interoperation with
the CRS-311 (1:1) or CRS-300 (1:N) redundancy switches.
With RS-232 Selected:
Local M&C Bus Address:
0000
With RS-485 Selected:
Local M&C Bus Address:
0001
(CONFIG:) Remote  SerialConfig  Format
Local M&C Bus Format:
8N1
(E)
Use the  arrow keys to select the character format 7N1, 7E1, 7O1,
7N2, 7E2, 7O2, 8N1 (default), 8E1, 8O1, 8N2, 8E2, or 8O2. Press [ENT].
7–35
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
(CONFIG:) Remote  SerialConfig  Baudrate
Local M&C Bus Baud Rate:
38400 Baud
(E)
Use the  arrow keys to select a Baud Rate of 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200,
38400 (default), 57600, or 115200. Press [ENT].
(CONFIG:) Remote  EthernetConfig
Ethernet Config: IP Address/Range
Gateway SNMP Option Card Addr
MAC
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select IP Address/Range, MAC, Gateway, SNMP, or
Option Card Addr. Press [ENT].
See Sections 7.2.3.10.1 and 7.2.3.10.2 for detailed information about
using the (CONFIG:) Remote  EthernetConfig SNMP and
(CONFIG:) Remote  EthernetConfig Option Card Addr menu
screens.
(CONFIG:) Remote  EthernetConfig  IP Address/Range
Ethernet IP Address/Range:
192.168.001.005/24
(E)
To enter the IP Address and range (subnet mask), use the arrow keys
to select a digit, and then the arrow keys to change that digit. Press
[ENT].
(CONFIG:) Remote  EthernetConfig  MAC
Modem MAC Address: 00-00-B09-000-FC-00
(E)
The modem’s MAC address is programmed at the factory and is not user
changeable. If installed, the Gigabit Ethernet Interface’s MAC Address
also displays on this screen.
7–36
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
(CONFIG:) Remote  EthernetConfig  Gateway
Ethernet Default Gateway IP Address:
192.168.001.001
()
The IP Gateway Address is the default address that the modem will send
all IP responses when the message originated from a source outside the
modems local attached network. To enter the Gateway IP Address, use
the arrow keys to select a digit, and then the arrow keys to
change that digit. Press [ENT].
7.2.3.10.1
(CONFIG:) Remote  EthernetConfig  SNMP
IMPORTANT CONSIDERATIONS:
1) SNMP is NOT supported by the TRANSEC module.
2) For modems running Base Modem Firmware Version 1.4.6 or
higher, the base modem management can be changed to secure
mode by changing the SNMP Version setting from SNMPv1/v2c to
SNMPv3. Make sure to carefully read the operational restrictions
described in this section when selecting your SNMP Version as
SNMPv3.
SNMP: Version
Communities
Traps
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select Version, Communities, or Traps. Press [ENT].
(CONFIG:) Remote  EthernetConfig  SNMP  Version
SNMP Version: SNMPv1v2c
SNMPv3
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select SNMPv1v2c or SNMPv3. Press [ENT].
After you select SNMPv3 and reboot the modem, access to the
HTTP and Telnet interfaces will be blocked. This operational
change also forces the Trap Version to be SNMPv3. Change of
the management mode to SNMPv3 is allowable via the HTTP
7–37
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
(non-secure) interface, but you should be aware that, after the
modem reboot, HTTP access will no longer be available.
SNMPv3 operation uses the Base Modem’s IP Address via the
‘J5 Ethernet’ port. The Base Modem HTTPS (secure) Interface
is accessible by the TRANSEC IP Address.
(CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig  SNMP  Communities
SNMP Communities: Read
Write
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select Read or Write. Press [ENT].
(CONFIG:) Remote  EthernetConfig  SNMP 
Communities  Read
SNMP Read Community:
public
(E)
To edit the SNMP Read Community string: Use thearrow keys to
select a character, and then use the arrow keys to change that
character.
1) Only the first 20 characters on the bottom line are available.
2) All printable ASCII characters are available with the
exception of the backslash ‘/’ (ASCII code 92) and tilde ‘~’
(ASCII code 126).
Once you compose the string, press [ENT]. All trailing spaces are removed
from the Read Community string upon entry.
(CONFIG:) Remote  EthernetConfig  SNMP 
Communities  Write
SNMP Write Community:
private
7–38
(E)
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
To edit the SNMP Write Community string: Use the  arrow keys to
select a character, and then use the arrow keys to change that
character.
1) Only the first 20 characters on the bottom line are available.
2) All printable ASCII characters are available with the
exception of the backslash ‘/’ (ASCII code 92) and tilde ‘~’
(ASCII code 126).
Once you compose the string, press [ENT]. All trailing spaces are removed
from the Write Community string upon entry.
(CONFIG:) Remote  EthernetConfig  SNMP  Traps
SNMP Traps: Address #1 Address#2
Port Community Version
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select Address #1, Address #2, Port, Community, or
Version. Press [ENT].
(CONFIG:) Remote  EthernetConfig  SNMP  Traps 
Address #1/#2
SNMP Traps IP Address #X:
000.000.000.000
(E)
Where X indicates IP Address #1 or IP Address #2:
To edit the SNMP Trap Destination IP Address: Use the arrow keys to
select a digit, and then use the  arrow keys to change that digit.
Press [ENT].
To disable the Traps, set both Trap IP Addresses to
000.000.000.000
7–39
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
CONFIG:) Remote  EthernetConfig  SNMP  Traps  Port
SNMP Trap Port:00164
To edit the SNMP Trap Port: Use the  arrow keys to select a digit, and
then use the arrow keys to change that digit.
If you are running Base Firmware Version 1.4.8c or higher,
you must make sure to only use port values that are not
already in use by other services. The standard port value is
164.
(CONFIG:) Remote  EthernetConfig  SNMP  Traps 
Community
SNMP Trap Community:
comtech
To edit the SNMP Trap Community string: Use the  arrow keys to
select a character, and then use the arrow keys to change that
character.
1) Only the first 20 characters on the bottom line are available.
2) All printable ASCII characters are available with the
exception of the backslash ‘/’ (ASCII code 92) and tilde ‘~’
(ASCII code 126).
Once you compose the string, press [ENT]. All trailing spaces are removed
from the SNMP Trap Community string upon entry.
(CONFIG:) Remote  EthernetConfig  SNMP  Traps 
Version
SNMP Trap Version: SNMPv1
SNMPv3
7–40
SNMPv2
(E)
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Use the  arrow keys to select SNMPv1, SNMPv2, or SNMPv3.
Press [ENT].
The Trap Version selection is forced to SNMPv3 if you
select SNMPv3 as your SNMP Version.
7.2.3.10.2
(CONFIG:) Remote  EthernetConfig  Option Card
Addr
Option Card Addr: Gigabit Ethernet
Network Proc
(E)
Use this menu to edit the IP Address and subnet mask (range) for either optional
interface. Use the  arrow keys to select Gigabit Ethernet or Network Proc.
Press [ENT].
When Network Proc is selected, the submenu also provides configuration
options for this optional module.
(CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig Option Card Addr Gigabit
Ethernet
Option Card Ethernet IP Address/Range:
192.168.001.002/24
(E)
To edit the Gigabit Ethernet Interface Management IP Address and Range: Use
the arrow keys to select a digit, and then use the  arrow keys to change
that digit. Press [ENT].
(CONFIG:) Remote  EthernetConfig  Option Card Addr 
Network Proc
NP Card:
AddrMode:Dual
BPM:Off
Traffic IP
Security: Low
Mgmt IP (E)
Use the  arrow keys to select AddrMode, Security, BPM, Traffic IP, or Mgmt
IP . Press [ENT].
7–41
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
(CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig Option Card Addr
Network Proc  AddrMode
Use the  arrow keys to select the Address Mode as Local or Dual.
Press [ENT].
1) When in Single Address Mode: Select Traffic IP to edit
the NP Module Ethernet IP Address and Range.
2) When in Dual Address Mode: Select Mgmt IP to edit the
NP Module Ethernet IP Address and Range.
(CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig Option Card Addr
Network Proc  Security
Use the  arrow keys to select the FAST-enabled Management
Security level as Low or High. Press [ENT].
(CONFIG:) Remote EthernetConfig Option Card Addr
Network Proc  BPM
Use the  arrow keys to select the BPM (Bridge Point to Multipoint)
mode as On or Off. Press [ENT].
When the BPM Mode FAST feature is On, NP Interface
Ethernet ports P1 through P4 transparently bridge data
traffic. The ‘J5 Ethernet’ port can be used for Routed IP
Traffic and is isolated from the Bridged traffic network. NP
HTTPS management is only available using the Base
Modem’s ‘J5 Ethernet’ port.
(CONFIG:) Remote  EthernetConfig  Option Card Addr 
Network Proc  Traffic IP
Ethernet IP Address/Range:
192.168.001.054/24
(E)
To edit the Network Processor Module Traffic IP Address and Range
(when the module is in Single Address Mode): Use the  arrow keys to
select a digit, and then use the  arrow keys to change that digit.
Press [ENT].
7–42
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
(CONFIG:) Remote  EthernetConfig  Option Card Addr 
Network Proc  Mgmt IP
Ethernet IP Address/Range:
192.168.002.072/16
(E)
To edit the Network Processor Module Management IP Address and
Range (when the module is in Dual Address Mode): Use the  arrow
keys to select a digit, and then use the  arrow keys to change that
digit. Press [ENT].
7.2.4
(SELECT:) Monitor Menu Branch
Monitor: Alarms Event-Log Rx-Params
CnC Stats GigaBit I/F Stats
The Monitor Menu Branch provides submenus that permit you to monitor the
alarm status of the unit, to view the log of stored events, and to display the Rx
Parameters screen. Use the  arrow keys to select Alarms, Event-Log, RxParams, CnC, Stats, Gigabit I/F, or Stats. Press [ENT].
7.2.4.1
(Monitor:) Alarms
Live Alarms: Transmit
Receive
Unit
(E)
Use the  arrow keys to select Transmit, Receive, or Unit. Press [ENT].
(Monitor:) Alarms  Transmit
Mod: ---Intf: -+-+--
Press <ENT> for
detailed status
Press [ENT] to enable access to the available read-only Modulator and Intf
(Interface)Tx alarm status screens. Use the  arrow keys to then page
through the available Modulator and Interface character positions (Mod#1
7–43
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
through #4, and Tx Intf#1 through #4). The status message to the right changes
based on the current position, as follows:
Transmit (Tx) Alarm Position
Top row
Mod #1
Mod #2
Mod #3
Mod #4
Bottom
Tx Intf #1
row
Tx Intf #2
Tx Intf #3
Description
Modulator symbol clock Phase Lock Loop status.
Modulator RF Synthesizer Phase Lock Loop status.
Modulator IQ activity status.
Modulator Nyquist filter Over range.
Tx data interface clock Phase Lock Loop status.
Tx data interface terrestrial clock activity status.
Tx data interface SCT (send clock timing) Phase Lock
Loop status.
Tx Intf #4 Tx data interface AIS (alarm indication signal) status.
The examples that follow depict alarm status screens displayed for the Mod 1st
and Intf Tx 1st character positions. If the Mod 1st character position is selected:
Mod: +--Intf: ----
Mod symbol clk
not locked.
If the Intf Tx 1st character position is selected:
Mod: ---Intf: +---
TxIntf data
not locked.
(Monitor:) Alarms  Receive
Demod: -----Intf: ----------
Press <ENT> for
detailed status
Press [ENT] to access the available read-only Demodulator and Intf (Interface) Rx
alarm screens. Use the  arrow keys to navigate through the displayed
Demodulator and Interface character positions (Demod#1 through #6, and Rx
Intf#1 through #10). The status message to the right changes based on the
current cursor position, as follows:
7–44
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Receive (Rx) Alarm Position
Top
Demod #1
row
Demod #2
Demod #3
Demod #4
Demod #5
Demod #6
Bottom
Rx Intf #1
row
Rx Intf #2
Rx Intf #3
Rx Intf #4
Rx Intf #5
Rx Intf #6
Rx Intf #7
Rx Intf #8
Rx Intf #9
Rx Intf #10
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Description
Demodulator carrier Phase Lock Loop status.
Demodulator FEC (forward error correction) lock status.
Demodulator RF Synthesizer Phase Lock Loop status.
Demodulator IQ activity status.
Composite Power exceeds 40 dBc.
Composite Power exceeds 20 dBm.
Demultiplexer lock status.
Doppler buffer status.
Doppler buffer fill status.
Doppler buffer overflow status.
Doppler buffer underflow status.
Doppler buffer Phase Lock Loop status.
Doppler buffer reference clock activity status.
Rx data interface AIS (alarm indication signal) status.
Rx Eb/No lower than Eb/No threshold status.
Internal BERT sync status.
The examples that follow depict the alarm status screens displayed for the
Demod 1st and Intf Rx 1st character positions. If the Demod 1st character position
is selected:
Demod: +----Intf: ----------
Demod IF not
not locked.
If the Intf 1st character position is selected:
Demod: -----Intf: +---------
Demux
not locked.
(Monitor:) Alarms  Unit
Unit ----------------------
Press <ENT> for
detailed status
Press [ENT] to access the available read-only SLM-5650A Unit Alarm screens. Use
the  arrow keys to navigate through the displayed character positions
(Unit#1 through #23). The status message to the right changes based on the
current cursor position, as follows:
7–45
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Unit Alarm Position
Description
Top row
Unit #1
Unit #2
Unit #3
Unit #4
Unit #5
Unit #6
Unit #7
Unit #8
Unit #9
Unit #10
Unit #11
Unit #12
Unit #13
Unit #14
Unit #15
Unit #16
+ 5.0 volt power supply is out of range.
+ 3.3 volt power supply is out of range.
+ 2.5 volt power supply is out of range.
+ 1.5 volt power supply is out of range.
+ 12 volt power supply is out of range.
- 12 volt power supply is out of range.
+ 18 volt power supply is out of range.
Cooling fan fault.
External reference activity status.
192 MHz clock Phase Lock Loop status.
10 MHz reference Phase Lock Loop status.
M&C FPGA configuration fault.
Modulator FPGA configuration fault.
Demodulator FPGA configuration fault.
Decoder FPGA configuration fault.
Transmit interface FPGA configuration fault.
Bottom
row
Unit #17
Unit #18
Unit #19
Unit #20
Receive interface FPGA configuration fault.
FEC #1 FPGA configuration fault.
FEC #2 FPGA configuration fault.
Optional data interface card (module) FPGA configuration
fault.
Unit #21 FPGA DCM Phase Lock Loop fault.
Unit #22 Network Processor mailbox communications error.
Unit #23 TRANSEC mailbox communications error.
The example that follows shows the appearance of the alarm status screen when
you select the Unit 1st character position:
Unit: +---------------------
7–46
+5.0V Power is
out of range.
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
7.2.4.2
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
(Monitor:) Event-Log
Stored Events: View Clear-All
ModemParameters
(E)
Use the  arrow keys to select View, Clear-All, or ModemParameters. Press
[ENT].
(Monitor:) Event-Log  View
Event 001:003 1:43:02
Mod: ---- ++ --
27/09/05
(E)
To view the details of a stored fault: Use the  arrow keys to scroll through
the event numbers. Press [ENT] to select. Then, on the bottom line, use the
 arrow keys to navigate the listed fault character positions to view the
fault description.
When the listed fault is Power On or Power Off, nothing is
displayed if you attempt to view details for that event.
(Monitor:) Event-Log  Clear-All
Clear All Stored Events?
No
Yes
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select No (to retain) or Yes (to clear all) stored faults.
Press [ENT].
Monitor: Event-Log  ModemParameters
Current Temp: +41
Comp Power< -70.0
Max Temp:
+56
Max Power> +25.0
(E)
This read-only screen displays the unit’s Current Temperature, Max Temp, Comp
Power and Max Power. Press [ENT] or [CLR] to return to the previous menu.
7–47
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
7.2.4.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
(Monitor:) Rx-Params
Fc=+05917 RSL<-60.0 dBm
BERT=N/A
Buf=000% Eb/No=Loss
BER <1.0E-12 (E)
This read-only screen monitors the following Rx operating parameters:
• Fc displays the received carrier frequency offset in Hz. The range is the
same as the acquisition range of the modem (60 kHz).
• RSL displays the signal level of the received carrier in dBm. The range
supported is (+15) to (-60) dBm.
• BERT displays the measured BER. This requires that the modem be set to
Test mode for Rx. If a Fireberd is supplying a data pattern, only the Test
mode for the Rx needs to be turned on. The Fireberd data pattern and
the modems’ data patterns must match to work properly.
• Buf displays the buffer fill status as a percentage.
• Eb/No displays the estimated Eb/No of the received carrier. The range is
threshold to 20 dB Eb/No.
• BER displays the estimated BER based on the demodulator’s
measurement of the carrier to noise.
The difference between BERT and BER is that BERT is measured
when the Test mode is turned ON, whereas BER is estimated in the
demodulator.
Press [ENT] or [CLR] to return to the previous menu.
7.2.4.4
(Monitor:) CnC (DoubleTalk® Carrier-in-Carrier®)
CnC: Delay=000,005uS
Eb/No=Loss
FreqOff=008.7kHz
Ratio<-10dB
(E)
This read-only screen updates once every second. If enabled and locked, this
screen monitors the CnC performance data:
• Delay displays the current search delay value.
• FreqOff displays the current frequency offset between the outbound
interferer and the desired inbound.
• Eb/No displays the estimated Eb/No of the received carrier. The range is
threshold to 20 dB Eb/No.
7–48
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
•
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Ratio displays the ratio of outbound interferer power to desired inbound
power. The range is ±10 dB.
Press [ENT] or [CLR] to return to the previous menu.
7.2.4.5
Monitor: Stats (Statistics)
Link Statistics: View Clear-All
Config
(E)
Use the  arrow keys to select View, Clear-All, or Config. Press [ENT].
Monitor: Stats  View
Event 001:003 1:43:02 27/09/11
Min: Loss
Avg: Loss
(E)
Use the  arrow keys to scroll through the stored statistics. The statistics are
limited to Minimum, Average, and Maximum Eb/No. Press [ENT] or [CLR] to
return to the previous menu.
Monitor: Stats  Clear-All
Clear All Stored Statistics?
No
Yes
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select No (to retain) or Yes (to clear all) stored
statistics. Press [ENT].
Monitor: Stats  Config
Statistics Logging Interval:
10 minutes
(E)
Use the  arrow keys to set the Statistics Logging Interval to 10 minutes
through 90 minutes (in 10-minute increments), or Disabled. Press [ENT].
7–49
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
7.2.4.6
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Monitor: GigaBit I/F Statistics
This menu is visible only when the modem is equipped with the
optional GigaBit Ethernet Interface (GBEI) Module.
GigaBit Ethernet Card Statistics:
View Clear-All
Use the arrow keys to select View or Clear-All:
• Select View to view the link statistical counters.
• Select Clear-All to clear or reset the FPGA link error counter.
Press [ENT].
7.2.5
(SELECT:) Test Menu Branch
TEST: Carrier Loopback
LampTest
BERT
(E)
Select the Carrier, Loopback, BERT, or LampTest submenu. Press [ENT].
Carrier Test Modes, Loopback, and Tx BERT are not allowed when the
modem is set to Demod Only.
7.2.5.1
(TEST:) Carrier
Carrier Test Modes: Normal
Tx-1,0
Tx-CW
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select Normal, Tx-CW, or Tx-1,0 then press [ENT].
Carrier Test Mode
Normal
TX-CW
Description
Not a test mode:
Select for standard modem operation.
The modulator produces a pure carrier that can be used for
frequency and power measurements.
7–50
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Carrier Test Mode
TX 1,0
7.2.5.2
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Description
The modulator produces an offset (single upper side band
suppressed) test carrier. Use this test mode to check for
quadrature error in the modulator.
(TEST:) Loopback
Loopback Test Modes: Normal
IFℓ
I/O1ℓ
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select Normal, IFℓ, or I/O1ℓ. Press [ENT].
Loopback Test Mode Description
Not a test mode:
Select for standard modem operation.
IF Loopback:
Loops the output of the modulator back to the
demodulator (inside the modem) to verify transmit and
receive configurations match as well as the data inputs and
outputs.
Baseband Loopback:
Loops the transmit data (after the interface) back to the
receive data path interface. This mode is useful for checking
interface cabling and clocking.
Normal
IFℓ
I/01ℓ
7.2.5.3
(TEST:) BERT
BERT: Tx:Off Pattern:2047 ErrIns
Reset Rx:Off Errs:=0000000 BER:NoSync
Use the arrow keys to select Tx, Pattern, ErrIns, Reset, Rx, Errs, or BER. Press
[ENT]. For any option, use the  arrow keys to select the desired setting. Press
[ENT] to execute the test.
BERT
Mode
Option
Tx
Description
Select to turn the transmit test pattern generator On or Off.
7–51
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
BERT
Mode
Option
Pattern
ErrIns
Reset
Rx
Errs
BER
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Description
Select from the available patterns:
• Mark – All ones.
• Space – All zeros.
• 1:1 – A one followed by a zero and then repeats.
• 1:2 – A one followed by two zero’s and then repeats.
• 2E15-1 – A pseudo-random data pattern of 2^15 –1, compatible
with standard BERTs.
• 2E20-1 – A pseudo-random data pattern of 2^20 –1, compatible
with standard BERTs.
• 2E23-1 – A pseudo-random data pattern of 2^23 –1, compatible
with standard BERTs.
• MIL188 – A modified pseudo-random data pattern of 2^11 –1,
compatible with the MIL-188-165 test data pattern requirement of a
continuous stream of 50 zero’s every 10,000 bits. This pattern has 5
normal 2047 patterns, with the fifth patterns longest string of zero’s
(11) stretched an additional 39 bits to create a lack of transitions for
50 bits approximately every 10,000 bits.
• 2047 – A pseudo-random data pattern of 2^11 –1, compatible with
standard BERTs.
Select to insert a single error into the data stream by pressing [ENT].
Select to restart the BER test and clear the error and BER displays.
Select to turn on the receive bit error test set.
Select to view the absolute number of errors counted.
Select to view the bit error rate as measured by the modem.
The BER function can work with a Fireberd supplying the transmit
data test pattern, while only turning on the Rx Bit Error Rate tester.
The transmit test pattern generator can be turned on at the far end
of the link as long as the test patterns match the Rx BERT. An external
bit error test set can be used even when the internal bit error test set
is enabled. If AIS is enabled, the data will be overwritten with all
ones.
7.2.5.4
(TEST:) LampTest
Select LampTest to perform a diagnostic run on the front panel LEDs and VFD.
7–52
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
7.2.6
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
(SELECT:) Save/Load Menu Branch
Save/Load: Loc:0
Empty
Action: View
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select Loc or Action. Press [ENT].
Option
Settings
Loc
There are 10 locations available [0-9]. To save or load a stored
configuration, use the  arrow keys to select the location. Press
[ENT].
View is the default setting to select and view the location before loading
or saving. Otherwise, select Save or Load at the selected location [0-9]:
• To save a configuration, go through the modem’s menus and
configure all the necessary parameters. Then, select a location, select
Save. Press [ENT].
• To load a saved configuration, select the desired configuration, select
Load. Press [ENT].
Action
If you reset the modem, this will clear all configurations!
Note that:
• If a location has no saved configuration present, the bottom line will
display “Empty” as per the example shown above.
• If a location has a configuration saved to it, the bottom line will display
the date stamp for that saved configuration in “HH:MM:SS DD/MM/YY”
format:
Save/Load: Loc:0 Action: View
16:18:00 08/07/10
•
(E)
If a location has a configuration saved, and the user attempts to save a
new configuration to that location, the screen will display the following
message:
This configuration contains data. Would
you like to overwrite it? No
(E)
7–53
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
The default to this question is No. To overwrite, use the  arrow keys
to change the answer to Yes. Press [ENT].
A programming sequence message will briefly display, and then the
screen displays the following message before returning back to the
(SELECT:) Save/Load menu screen:
The current configuration has been saved
to the selected location.
7.2.7
(SELECT:) Utility Menu Branch
UTIL:
RT-Clk RefAdjust ID Display Temp
Agc Alarm PwrCal Firmware FAST
(E)
Use the arrow keys to select RT-Clk, RefAdjust, ID, Display, Temp, Agc,
Alarm, Alarm, PwrCal, Firmware, or FAST submenu. Press [ENT].
7.2.7.1
(UTIL:) RT-Clk
Edit Real-Time Clock:
15:34:25 27/09/16
(E)
Use the  arrow keys to select and set the Real-Time Clock. The time is
provided in the military 24-hour time format (HH:MM:SS). The date is provided
in the DAY/MONTH/YEAR (dd/mm/yy) European format.
7.2.7.2
(UTIL:) RefAdjust
Internal 10 MHz Ref Freq
Fine Adjust: 3F3
(E)
Use the  arrow keys to select and adjust the internal high stability 10
MHz oscillator to counteract aging. The control value is in hex – not decimal –
and has a range of 000 to FFF. The typical calibration point for a modem is
nominally around 400.
7–54
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
7.2.7.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
(UTIL:) ID
Edit Circuit ID:
------------------------
(E)
Use the  arrow keys to assign a name for the unit in the
communications link. This name (Circuit ID) can be any combination of
alphanumeric characters up to 24 characters in length.
Additional characters supported are: ( ) * + / . (period) , (comma) and space.
7.2.7.4
(UTIL:) Display
Edit Display Brightness
100%
(E)
Use the  arrow keys to adjust the front panel display brightness. Valid
settings are 25%, 50%, 75% or 100%.
7.2.7.5
(UTIL:) Temp
Modem Temp (Deg C): RF=+61 PS=+40
M&C=+35
Mod=+43
Demod=+51
(E)
This read-only screen allows the user to view the modem internal temperatures
(RF, PS, M&C, Mod and Demod).
7.2.7.6
(UTIL:) Agc (Automatic Gain Control)
AgcMon:
Min Value: 00.0 Volts
Max Value: 10.0 Volts
(E)
Use this submenu to set the minimum and maximum voltage levels for the
external AGC monitor voltage that is available through the rear panel ‘J9
Auxiliary’ connector.
7–55
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Use the arrow keys to select Min Value or Max Value. Press [ENT]. Note
that:
• Min Value specifies the voltage to output on the External AGC voltage
signal when the demodulator RSL is at its minimum level.
• Max Value specifies the voltage to output when the demodulator RSL is
at its maximum level.
To edit either value, use the arrow keys to select a digit, and then use the
 arrow keys to change that digit. Press [ENT].
7.2.7.7
(UTIL:) Alarm
Audible Alarm: Disable
Enable
(E)
Use the arrow keys to either Disable or Enable the alarm. Press [ENT].
7.2.7.8
(UTIL:) PwrCal
Burst L-Band Pwer Cal: The modem will
Be (re)calibrated. Continue? No Yes
To execute calibration of the L-Band board for burst operation, use the  arrow
keys to select Yes. Press [ENT].
7.2.7.9
(UTIL:) Firmware
Firmware Images: Information
Select
(E)
Use the  arrow keys to select Information or Select. Press [ENT].
(UTIL:) Firmware  Information
Firmware Info: Bootrom
Image#2
7–56
Image#1
(E)
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
This menu permits you to view information on the firmware and software used
by the modem. Use the  arrow keys to select Bootrom, Image#1, or
Image#2.
(UTIL:) Firmware  Information  Bootrom
Bootrom:
10/18/07
FW-0000029- 1.1.1
This screen displays the Bootrom release date, the Firmware number and
the revision number. Press [ENT] or [CLR] to return to the previous menu.
(UTIL:) Firmware  Information  Image#X
Image#X: Bulk App M&C Mod Demod Decoder
Filters TxIntfc RxIntfc Turbo
(E)
Where Image #X denotes selection of Image#1 or Image#2:
This information may differ for each firmware image load. Both Image
screens display similar information – the loaded image’s firmware
number with revision letter (shown as ‘x’); the firmware version’s release
date (shown as MM/DD/YY); and the firmware version number (shown as
#.#.#):
Image#X Item
App
Example
(The bulk is the sum of all the individual pieces)
FW-0000030x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
FW-0000031x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
M&C
Mod
Demod
Decoder
Filters
FW-0000032x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
FW-0000033x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
FW-0000034x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
FW-0000038x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
FW-0000034x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
TxIntfc
RxIntfc
FW-0000040x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
FW-0000041x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
Turbo
FW-0000042x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
Bulk
7–57
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
Image#X Item
Opt
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Example
This number varies depending on the installed optional
interface (NP, GBEI, etc.):
FW-#######x, MM/DD/YY, #.#.#
(UTIL:) Firmware  Select
Current Active Image#2
Next Reboot Image#1 #2
(E)
This menu sets which Firmware Image loads upon bootup. Use the  arrow
keys to select the Next Reboot Image as #1 or #2. Press [ENT].
To reboot the modem with the selected Next Reboot Image, cycle the
power.
7.2.7.10 (UTIL:) FAST
Chapter 6. FAST ACTIVATION PROCEDURE
FAST: Configuration
View Options
S/N 000000000
(E)
Use the  arrow keys to select View Options or Configuration. Press [ENT].
(UTIL:) FAST  View Options
View Options: 01
Installed
Data Rate <= 155 Mbps
Use the  arrow keys to browse the available FAST options. The nested
screens identify whether or not each FAST option is Installed or Not installed.
There are 30 FAST options, listed as 01 to 30:
FAST Option Description
01
Modem Data Rate:
2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, or <=155 Mbps.
7–58
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
FAST Option Description
02
8PSK/8QAM modulation
03
16QAM modulation
04
16APSK/32APSK Modulation
05
06
07
08
AUPC (Automatic Uplink Power Control) Overhead
ASYNC ESC
Reed-Solomon Coding
Turbo FEC Option
09
Adv FEC Data Rate:
2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, or <=155 Mbps.
10
11
Network Processor I/F Card (Module)
Sequential Encode/Decoder
12
TRANSEC Module
13
Carrier-In-Carrier Date Rate:
Not Installed, 512 kbps, 1Mbps, 2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 15
Mbps, 20 Mbps, 25 Mbps, 30 Mbps, 40 Mbps, 51.84 Mbps, or <=70
Mbps
14
15
16
17
18
NP QOS (Quality of Service)
NP Management Security
NP Vipersat
Demodulator Only
Asymmetrical Rx Data Rate:
5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, or <=155 Mbps.
19
TRANSEC Data Rate:
2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, or <=155 Mbps.
20
Vipersat Data Rate:
2.5 Mbps, 5 Mbps, 10 Mbps, 20 Mbps, 52 Mbps, <=155 Mbps.
21
NP OW (Order Wire) Serial Commands
22
23
24
NP BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode
Customer Options
NP Antenna Handover
25
26
LDPC FEC Option
Extended Temperature Range
27
28
Spectrum Spreading Full Rate
DSSS-MA Option
7–59
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
FAST Option Description
29
IESS-308V2 Option
30
Enhanced Spreading Features
(UTIL:) FAST  Configuration
FAST Configuration:
Demo Mode
Enter Modem Code
(E)
Use the  arrow keys to select Enter Modem Code or Demo Mode. Press
[ENT].
7.2.7.10.1
Enter Modem Code (FAST Activation Procedure)
This is a 20-digit code, purchased from Comtech EF Data product Support, which
permits upgrading the modem functionality.
Legal characters are hexadecimal, 0-F.
See Chapter 6. FAST ACTIVATION PROCEDURE for the proper use of
Enter Modem Code.
7.2.7.10.2
FAST Demo Mode
FAST Demo Mode: Off (Off,On)
604800 seconds remain
(E)
FAST Demo Mode allows access to ALL SLM-5650A FAST Options for 604800
seconds (seven 24-hour calendar days). The bottom line displays the time
remaining – the time format is in seconds.
On the top line, use the arrow keys to select Demo Mode as Off or On.
Press [ENT].
The time count decrements only when Demo Mode is turned On. You
may turn Demo Mode On and Off an unlimited number of times until
the full 604800 seconds (seven 24-hour calendar days) expire.
Upon expiration of the Demo period, the following message displays:
7–60
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
FAST Demo Mode: Expired
0000000 seconds remain
(E)
Once the Demo Mode timer reaches 0000000, you may no longer
enable FAST Options Demo Mode. The modem will automatically
perform a configuration reset. This means that all configuration
parameters return to factory default settings, and the modem will
reboot. The modem will not check its current configuration against
purchased FAST options.
7–61
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Front Panel Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Notes:
7–62
Chapter 8. ETHERNET
INTERFACE OPERATION
8.1 Ethernet Management Interfaces & Protocols
The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem rear panel features a 10/100 BaseT RJ-45 ‘J5
Ethernet’ monitor and control (M&C) interface port. This port operates in the
Auto-Negotiation and Auto-Crossover mode.
You may use the optional Network Processor (NP) Interface Module as an
alternate means of M&C access. The NP Interface Module features four
10/100/1000 BaseT RJ-45ports labeled 1, 2, 3 and 4. The operational mode of
these ports can be individually selected for Auto-Negotiation or fixed mode
operation.
The internal systems of the SLM-5650A are interconnected with an internal
Ethernet bus, which allows both the Base Modem ‘J5 Ethernet’ port and NP Ports
1 through 4 to provide M&C access while the NP is operating in Router modes.
The following Ethernet M&C Protocols are supported by the SLM-5650A:
• HTTP (non-secure) or HTTPS (secure) interface – These interface modes
require a compatible user-supplied web browser such as Internet
Explorer, FireFox, or Google Chrome. These protocols are supported by
the following systems:
o Base Modem M&C (HTTP only)
o Network Processor (NP) M&C (HTTP/HTTPS)
o TRANSEC Module M&C (HTTPS only)
FOR MORE INFORMATION ABOUT THESE OPERATIONAL
INTERFACES, SEE:
8–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Ethernet Interface Operation
•
•
•
•
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Chapter 9. BASE MODEM HTTP INTERFACE
Appendix D. OPTIONAL NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP)
INTERFACE MODULE
Appendix E. OPTIONAL TRANSEC MODULE OPERATION
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) - This protocol requires a
user-supplied Network Management System (NMS) or a user-supplied
MIB File Browser. Comtech EF Data supplies the MIB File sets required for
the SLM-5650A Modem.
SNMP is NOT supported by the TRANSEC module.
•
Telnet Interface - This non-secure protocol requires use of the user PC’s
Command Line Interface (CLI), or a user-supplied terminal emulation
program such as HyperTerminal, PuTTY, or TeraTerm.
Telnet is NOT supported by the TRANSEC module.
•
SSH (Secure Shell) Interface - This protocol requires use of the user PC’s
Command Line Interface (CLI), or a user-supplied terminal emulation
program such as HyperTerminal, PuTTY, or TeraTerm.
This interface protocol is supported by the NP Interface Module
and the TRANSEC Module.
8.1.1 Secure Ethernet Management Interfaces
8.1.1.1
Base Modem Interface
For modems running Base Modem Firmware Version 1.4.6 or higher, the base
modem management can be changed to secure mode by changing the SNMP
setting from SNMPv1/v2c to the SNMPv3mode:
• The SNMP mode is available using the front panel menu:
SELECT:Configure→Remote→EthernetConfig→SNMP→Version→SNMPv
1/v2c or SNMPv3.
• After you select SNMPv3 and reboot the modem, the HTTP and Telnet
access will be blocked. This operational change also forces the Trap mode
to be SNMPv3Traps.
• The SNMP Trap Destination Port (default 164) can be changed to a user
value in the SELECT:Configure→Remote→EthernetConfig→SNMP→
8–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Ethernet Interface Operation
•
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Traps→Port menu. If you are running Base Firmware Version 1.4.8c or
higher, you must make sure to only use port values that are not already
in use by other services.
Change of the management mode to SNMPv3 is allowable via the HTTP
(non-secure) interface, but you should be aware that, after the modem
reboot, HTTP access will no longer be available. The SNMPv3 mode uses
the Base Modem’s IP Address via the ‘J5 Ethernet’ port. The Base Modem
HTTPS Interface is accessible by the NP IP Address or the TRANSEC IP
Address.
8.1.1.2
Optional NP Interface Module
When the optional NP Interface is installed in the SLM-5650A, the NP
Management Security (available as a FAST Option) may be used to change to an
alternative secure network management mode:
• When NP-Management Security is Low the modem operates in a normal
access mode.
• When NP-Management Security is High the modem has secure access
modes active:
o The NP Interface changes from HTTP to HTTPS web page access,
and the Base Modem web page and Telnet are disabled. The Base
Modem M&C is accessible with SNMPv3, using the NP’s IP
Address on the ‘J5 Ethernet’ port.
o When the modem is operating in Router Mode:
 A number of Base Modem parameters are available via the
NP HTTPS Interface.
 A limited number of status-only NP parameters are
typically viewable over the Base Modem HTTP Interface.
o When the modem is operating in (Static) Bridge Mode:
 NP Management Security cannot be set to High when the
NP is in (Static) Bridge mode.
 There is no M&C provided by the NP Interface Module.
 The internal Ethernet connection from Base Modem ‘J5
Ethernet’ port and the TRANSEC Module is disabled to the
NP module interface.
 The NP Interface ports P1 through P4 transparently bridge
data traffic.
 Ethernet communication between the Base Modem ‘J5
Ethernet’ port and the NP Interface is disabled, this is
8–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Ethernet Interface Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
independent functionality that is not changed by the
Management Security mode.
o When the NP is operating in BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint)
Mode:
 NP Interface Ethernet ports P1 through P4 transparently
bridge data traffic.
 The ‘J5 Ethernet’ port can be used for Routed IP Traffic
and is isolated from the Bridged traffic network.
 M&C of the Base Modem, NP Interface, and TRANSEC
Module are only available using the Base Modem’s ‘J5
Ethernet’ port.
See Figure 8-1. Selecting the NP (Static) Bridge Mode or Bridge Pointto-Multipoint Mode has the affect of isolating the ‘J5 Ethernet’
communication from the Bridged IP traffic crossing through the
modem via the NP Ports 1 through 4. This is an important point to
consider for more secure network operations.
Feature Description
A
Base Modem ‘J5 Ethernet’ Port
B
C
TRANSEC Module
Plug-in NP Interface Module
Comments
Base Modem Management IP Address and Gateway
Address
TRANSEC Module IP Address and Gateway Address
Ports 1 through 4 NP IP Address
Figure 8-1. IP Traffic Isolation When Using Bridge Modes
8–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Ethernet Interface Operation
8.1.1.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Base Modem + Optional NP Interface + Optional TRANSEC
Module
Each of these three system areas require their own IP Address and
User name and Password for login. See Figure 8-1.
The TRANSEC Module is always accessible through the Base Modem ‘J5
Ethernet’ port.
When the optional NP Interface is installed in the SLM-5650A in tandem with the
optional TRANSEC Module Interface, and Management Security is enabled, the
network management operating restrictions as previously described (i.e., when
High Level Security is selected) therefore always apply. Additionally, the NP
HTTPS Interface provides a status parameter associated with the TRANSEC
Module – a second TRANSEC Key.
The TRANSEC Module Interface provides a proxy function of HTTPS connections
to the Base Modem and the NP Interface; a secure HTTPS connection to the
TRANSEC Module therefore enables user access to all Base Modem and/or all NP
M&C parameters securely through this indirect proxy connection. The ‘J5
Ethernet’ port is used in this case, and the Secure Management interfaces
supported by this configuration are summarized as follows:
Base Modem
Network Processor
TRANSEC Module
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
HTTPS Proxy via the
TRANSEC Module
SNMPv3 (via the NP’s
IP Address)
HTTPS
SSH
HTTPS (Proxy via
the TRANSEC
Module)
8–5
HTTPS
SSH
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Ethernet Interface Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
8.2 SNMP Interface
The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an Internet-standard
protocol for managing devices on IP networks. An SNMP-managed network
consists of three key components:
• The managed device. This includes the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem.
• The SNMP Agent. The software that runs on the SLM-5650A. The
SLM-5650A SNMP Agent supports SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3.
• The user-supplied Network Management System (NMS). The software
that runs on the manager.
8.2.1 Management Information Base (MIB) Files
MIB files are used for SNMP remote management of a unique device. A MIB file
consists of a tree of nodes called Object Identifiers (OIDs). Each OID provides
remote management of a particular function. These MIB files should be compiled
in a user-supplied MIB Browser or SNMP Network Monitoring System server.
The following MIB files are associated with the SLM-5650A:
MIB File/Name
( ‘x’ indicates revision
letter)
Description
fw10874-2x.mib
ComtechEFData MIB file
ComtechEFData MIB file gives the root tree for ALL Comtech EF
Data products and consists of only the following OID:
Name: ComtechEFData
Type: MODULE-IDENTITY
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247
Full path:
iso(1).org(3).dod(6).internet(1).private(4).enterprises(1).comtec
hEFData(6247)
Module: ComtechEFData
FW-0000049x.mib
SLM-5650A OID MIB File
MIB file consists of all of the OID’s for management of the
modem functions.
FW-0000050x.mib
SLM-5650A Traps MIB file
Trap MIB file is provided for SNMPv1 traps common for base
modems.
8–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Ethernet Interface Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
8.2.2 SNMP Community Strings
CAUTION
In SNMP v1/v2c, the SNMP Community String is sent unencrypted in
the SNMP packets. Caution must be taken by the network
administrator to ensure that SNMP packets travel only over a secure
and private network if security is a concern.
The SLM-5650A uses Community Strings as a password scheme that provides
authentication before gaining access to the modem agent’s MIBs. They are used
to authenticate users and determine access privileges to the SNMP agent.
Type the SNMP Community String into the user-supplied MIB Browser or
Network Node Management software.
The user defines three Community Strings for SNMP access:
• Read Community
default = public
• Write Community
default = private
• Trap Community
default = comtech
1) Maximum number of characters for community strings shall not
exceed 20. All printable ASCII characters, except ’\’ and ‘~’ are
allowed. No trailing spaces for community strings.
2) For proper SNMP operation, the SLM-5650A MIB files must be
used with the associated version of the SLM-5650A base modem
M&C. Please refer to the SLM-5650A SW Release Notes for
information on the required FW/SW compatibility.
8.2.3 SNMP Traps
These include the Unit faults, TX faults, and RX faults. A trap is sent both when a
fault occurs and when it is cleared.
You need to compile the “Traps” file into the MIB Browser library only if you
intend to use Traps. When you set the modem for SNMPv1/v2c, you may select
Trap (v1) or (v2c) types; the modem automatically forces Trap Version(v3) when
you select SNMPv3 mode. You may also use the slm5650SNMPTrapVersion OID
to configure the Trap (v1) or (v2c) type.
8–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Ethernet Interface Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
You can assign two Trap destination addresses. If you are running Base FW
Version 1.4.8c or higher, you can assign the destination Port – Port 164 is the
default trap port.
The modem supports the following MIB2 SNMPv1traps / SNMPv2 notifications:
MIB2 SNMPv1 trap: Authentication
Failure
MIB2 SNMPv2 notifications:
Authentication Failure
5
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5
The modem supports the following Alarms and Faults SNMPv1 traps / SNMPv2
notifications:
Alarms and Faults SNMPv1 traps
slm5650TxTrafficAlarmV1
slm5650UnitAlarmV1
slm5650RedundancyStateV1
slm5650RedundancyStateV1
6247472
6247471
6247473
6247474
Alarms and Faults SNMPv2 notification
slm5650UnitAlarmV2
1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.47.2.1.1
slm5650TxTrafficAlarmV2
1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.47.2.1.2
slm5650RxTrafficAlarmV2
1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.47.2.1.3
slm5650RedundancyStateV2
1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.47.2.1.4
8.2.4 SNMPv3 (Base Modem)
When the user activates the SNMPv3
option, either by changing the SNMP
Mode or selecting the NP’s Security Mode
to High, SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c will not
function. Instead of using the public and
private community strings identified in
Section 8.2.2, you must define and use a
username and password to authenticate
8–8
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Ethernet Interface Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
and encrypt SNMP communication to and from the modem.
Four parameters are available to configure SNMPv3 on the NP HTTP/HTTPS
Interface ‘Admin | SNMP’ page:
• Engine ID – a 5- to 32-character length hex number that is used to
encrypt/decrypt the SNMP data. The default Engine ID is
0000000c000000007f000001.
• User Name – A user-defined string used to authenticate SNMP
communications (the default is comtech).
• Password – A user-defined string used to authenticate SNMP
communications (the default is comtech).
• Security Model – Using the drop-down menu, you may choose between
two security models to authenticate communications: md5 and sha (the
default is md5).
1) Although the customer can choose the security model used,
there is no choice on the encryption method – data is always
encrypted using the DESC scheme.
2) The User Name and Password defined here are the ones used in
an SNMP client, and are separate from the user name/password
used to access the SLM-5650A HTTP/HTTPS/Telnet interfaces.
3) It is not necessary to change the Engine ID to have an acceptable
level of encryption. However, you should note that changing the
Engine ID does affect the generation of authentication keys.
8–9
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Ethernet Interface Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
8.3 Telnet Interface
Chapter 10. SERIAL INTERFACE OPERATION
Figure 8-2. Telnet Interface Example – Windows Command-line
The SLM-5650A has a Telnet interface for the purpose of equipment M&C via the
Serial Remote Control protocol.
The Telnet interface requires user login at the Administrator and Read/Write
user access levels. Once you log in to the Telnet interface as the Administrator,
you have access to the standard serial-based Remote Control Interface. Figure
8-2 shows an example of the login process using Windows Command-line.
The Telnet interface is also available for use with the menu-driven Command
Line Interface (CLI) that is provided with the optional Network Processor (NP)
Interface – but only when the security level setting for the NP Interface has been
set as “Low”.
8.3.1 Using HyperTerminal for Telnet Remote Control
Operation
There is a disadvantage when using Windows Command line as a Telnet client
with the optional Remote Control protocol. For the messages coming from the
Telnet Server, Command line cannot translate a carriage return command (\r) to
a carriage return + line feed command (\r\n). Therefore, any multi-line Target-toController response (e.g., the response to the RNE? query) shows as one line,
with the latter lines overwriting the previous lines.
8–10
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Ethernet Interface Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
To see the full response messages, you can use the HyperTerminal terminal
emulation program configured as a Telnet client. Figure 8-3 shows an example of
the login process and remote control operation when you use HyperTerminal as
the interface.
Figure 8-3. Telnet Interface Example – HyperTerminal
8.3.1.1
Configure HyperTerminal for Telnet Remote Control
Operation
Figure 8-4. Configure HyperTerminal
8–11
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Ethernet Interface Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
See Figure 8-4. Do these steps:
1. Make sure to define the Connect To Telnet connection properties
correctly (File  Properties) (Figure 8-4, left):
a. Enter the SLM-5650A’s Traffic/Management IP Address as the “Host
address” (e.g., 192.168.1.1).
b. Enter TCP Port 23 as the “Port number”.
c. Set “Connect using” to TCP/IP (Winsock) instead of COM1 or COM2.
d. Click [OK] to save your settings.
2. For ASCII Setup (File  Properties  Settings  ASCII Setup) (Figure
8-4, right):
a. Check the “Send line ends with line feeds” option in the ‘ASCII
Sending’ section.
b. Check the “Append line feeds to incoming line ends” option in the
‘ASCII Receiving’ section.
c. Click [OK] to save your settings.
8–12
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Ethernet Interface Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
8.4 SSH (Secure Shell) Interface
See Section D.3 Network Processor (NP) Telnet/CLI Interface
Operation in Appendix D. OPTIONAL NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP)
INTERFACE MODULE or Section E.3 SSH CLI OPERATION in Appendix
E. OPTIONAL TRANSEC MODULE OPERATION for further details on
operations via this secure interface.
When the modem is equipped with the optional NP or TRANSEC Module
Interfaces, the security and encryption features for either require that
administrative maintenance and control operations are accomplished using a
Secure Shell (SSH) Command Line Interface (CLI).
8.4.1 Configure a SSH CLI Session
For demonstration purposes, this manual uses PuTTY, a free and open
source terminal emulator application used as a serial console client for
SSH, Telnet, rlogin and raw TCP computing protocols. While the
TRANSEC Module CLI main and nested screens will be identical across
terminal emulator applications, setup may differ slightly – the chapter
assumes users’ familiarity with their preferred SSH interface.
Figure 8-5. Configure PuTTY for CLI Operations
8–13
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Ethernet Interface Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
See Figure 8-5. To initiate a SSH CLI session, do these steps:
1. From the SSH terminal emulation program’s folder, double-click the
program filename (e.g., putty.exe), shortcut, icon, etc. to open the SSH
application and its configuration window.
2. (Using PuTTY as the example program) Type in the IP address of the NP
Module or TRANSEC Module interface (in the example to the right, the
Host Name (or IP Address) window) and select SSH as the Connection
Type.
3. Click Open to open the session. The session login window will appear as
per Figure 8-6 (left). The default for both user name and password is
comtech.
4. Once the login is accepted, you are granted access to the CLI as per
Figure 8-6 (right).
Figure 8-6. CLI Session Examples
8–14
Chapter 9. BASE MODEM
HTTP INTERFACE
OPERATION
9.1 Overview
The operational parameters available from the SLM-5650A Base Modem’s nonsecure HTTP (Web Server) Interface complement operation of the SLM-5650A’s
front panel menus.
9.1.1 Prerequisites
Before you proceed with non-secure Ethernet remote product management,
make sure the following is true:
• You have read Chapter 8. ETHERNET INTERFACE OPERATION in its
entirety, and you fully understand the requirements and limitations when
using the SLM-5650A Ethernet Interface in non-secure and secure
applications.
• The SLM-5650A is operating with the latest version firmware files.
• The User PC is connected to the Base Modem’s RJ-45 ‘J5 Ethernet’ port.
• You have recorded the unit’s Management IP Address.
• The User PC is running a compatible web browser for operation of the
Base Modem HTTP Interface.
• The User PC is running a terminal emulation program for operation of the
Telnet Remote Control features.
9–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
9.2 Base Modem HTTP Interface
A user-supplied web browser allows the full monitoring and control (M&C) of the
SLM-5650A base modem from its HTTP Interface. This non-secure embedded
web application is designed for, and works best with, Microsoft Internet Explorer
Version 7.0 or higher, Firefox, and Google Chrome.
9.2.1 HTTP Interface Availability via Secure Management
Interfaces
•
Section D.2 Network Processor (NP) HTTP.HTTPS Interface in
Appendix D. OPTIONAL NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) INTERFACE
MODULE
• Section E.2 TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface in Appendix E.
OPTIONAL TRANSEC MODULE OPERATION
Only non-secure Ethernet-based network management is allowable via the HTTP
Interface browser and SNMPv2 interfaces, using the Base Modem’s ‘J5 Ethernet’
RJ-45 port.
The Management Security option is not available for the SLM-5650A’s Base
Modem operations. For modems with installed upgrades (i.e., the Network
Processor (NP) Interface and/or the TRANSEC Module Interface), enhanced Web
interface functionality is afforded through the dedicated HTTP/HTTPS interfaces
provided with those upgrades. The NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface, specifically, is
designed to be used as an enhanced version of the Base Modem HTTP Interface
featured in this chapter.
9.2.2 HTTP Interface User Login
Do these steps:
1. From the PC, enter the default Management IP Address for the unit into the
Address area of the browser.
9–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
The default Base Modem Management IP Address is 192.169.1.1/24.
You may obtain your assigned address from the SLM-5650A front
panel menu: SELECT: ConfigureRemoteEthernetConfig
IPAddress/Range. See Chapter 7. FRONT PANEL OPERATION for
further details. You may also need to consult with your network
administrator to determine the appropriate IP address assignment
for your modem.
2. In the Login window, type the User name and Password. For all interfaces,
the default for both is comtech. Click OK.
Once the valid User Name and Password is accepted, the HTTP Interface splash
page appears (Figure 9-1). The firmware version as shown here may differ from
your setup.
Figure 9-1. HTTP Interface “Splash” Page Example
9–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
9.2.3 HTTP Interface Features
9.2.3.1
Page Navigation
The HTTP Interface has five navigation tabs at the
top of each page. Click a navigation tab to see its
page hyperlinks. Click a page hyperlink to open a
page.
This manual uses a convention for all web pages to show you how to navigate to
the featured page: Navigation Tab | Page Hyperlink. For example, “Home |
Home” instructs you to click the ‘Home’ navigation tab, and then click the
‘Home’ page hyperlink.
9.2.3.2
Page Sections
This manual explains the purpose and operation for
each Web page and its sections. Each page has one
or more sections. The title at the upper-left corner of
each page or section describes its operational
features.
Each section can have editable fields, action buttons and read-only displays for a
specific function.
9.2.3.3
Action Buttons
Action buttons are important in the HTTP Interface. Click
an action button to do one of these tasks:
• Click [Refresh] to see the latest page data.
• Reset changed parameters to remove unsaved
changes.
• Click [Submit] to save changes.
If you change any parameters, make sure to click the related action
button before you leave the page. If you go to another page without
first clicking the action button, your changes are not saved.
9–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface Operation
9.2.3.4
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Drop-down Lists
A drop-down list lets you choose from a list of
selections. Left-click the drop-down button to open
the list. Then, left-click on an item to select that
choice.
9.2.3.5
Text or Data Entry
Text boxes let you type data into a field. An action button
can be associated with a single text box, or a group of text
boxes. For any text box, left-click anywhere inside the box
and type the desired data into that field. Make sure to
press Enter when done typing.
Click the related action button to save the data.
If you edit a field, make sure to click the related action button before
you leave the page. If you go to another page without first clicking the
action button, your changes are not saved.
9.2.4 HTTP Interface Menu Tree
This menu tree illustrates the options available via the SLM-5650A Base Modem
HTTP Interface:
Home
Admin
Home
Access
Contact
Remote
Config Mdm
Page 1
(Modem Config)
Page 2
(Modem Utilities)
Page 3
(Antenna Handover)
Page 4
(NON-WORKING)
Stats
Maint
Modem Status
Unit Info
Event Log
Statistics
Config Log
CnC
Router Stats
Spreading
Ether Stats
AUPC
9–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
This interface provides access to five navigation tabs (shown in blue). Beyond
this top-level row of navigation tabs, the diagram illustrates the available nested
hyperlinks (shown in grey) that afford more specific user functionality.
The ‘Page 4’ hyperlink opens a non-functioning web page. Its features
are not available to SLM-5650A Base Modem users.
Click any tab or hyperlink to continue.
9.3 HTTP Interface Page Examples
See Chapter 7. FRONT PANEL OPERATION for detailed descriptions of
the configuration and monitoring features available throughout this
interface.
The page figures provided in this section are intended for reference
only. Your setup will differ.
9.3.1 Home Pages
Click Home or Contact to continue.
9.3.1.1
Home | Home
Use this page to identify the product in use. Click the Home navigation tab or the
nested hyperlink to return to this page from anywhere in the HTTP Interface.
Figure 9-2. ‘Home | Home’ Page
9–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface Operation
9.3.1.2
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Home | Contact
For all product support, please call:
+1.240.243.1880
+1.866.472.3963 (toll free USA)
Figure 9-3. ‘Home | Contact’ Page
9–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
9.3.2 Admin (Administration) Pages
The ‘Admin’ pages are available only to users who have logged in using
the Administrator Name and Password.
Click Access or Remote to continue.
9.3.2.1
Admin | Access
The Administrator must use this page as the means to set up user names,
passwords, the E-mail server, and the host IP addresses as needed to facilitate
communication with the SLM-5650A Base Modem HTTP Interface.
Figure 9-4. ‘Admin | Access’ Page
Click [Submit Admin] to save any changes made on this page.
9–8
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface Operation
9.3.2.2
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Admin | Remote
Section 8.2 SNMP Interface in Chapter 8. ETHERNET INTERFACE
OPERATION.
The Administrator must use this page to manage the SNMP (Simple Network
Management Protocol) settings.
Figure 9-5. ‘Admin | Remote’ Page
Click [Submit] to save any changes made on this page. Click [Reboot Now!] to
ensure any changes associated with SNMP Version 3 take effect.
IMPORTANT CONSIDERATIONS
After you select SNMPv3 and reboot the modem, the HTTP and Telnet
access will be blocked. This operational change also forces the Trap
mode to be SNMPv3Traps.
The SNMPv3 mode uses the Base Modem’s IP Address via the ‘J5
Ethernet’ port. The Base Modem HTTPS Interface is accessible by the
NP IP Address or the TRANSEC IP Address.
If you are running Base Firmware Version 1.4.8c or higher, you must
make sure to only use SNMP Trap Port values that are not already in
use by other services.
9–9
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
9.3.3 Config Mdm (Configure Modem) Pages
Use the ‘Config Mdm’ pages to configure the Modulator, Demodulator, and
installed interfaces (e.g., EIA-530, HSSI, Balanced and Unbalanced G.703, Gigabit
Ethernet, Network Processor, and LVDS). Click Page 1, Page 2, Page 3, CnC,
Spreading, or AUPC to continue.
The ‘Page 4’ hyperlink opens a non-functioning web page. Its features
are not available to SLM-5650A Base Modem users.
9.3.3.1
Config Mdm | Page 1 (Modem Config)
Use this page to configure modem configuration parameters including Modem
Operating Mode; Transmit/Receive; and Tx Power Level.
Figure 9-6. ‘Config Mdm | Page 1 (Modem Config)’ Page
Click [Submit] as needed in each section to save any changes.
9–10
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface Operation
9.3.3.2
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Config Mdm | Page 2 (Modem Utilities)
Use this page to configure modem operating parameters, including Date and
Time; Test Mode (including BERT); Miscellaneous Tx and Rx Parameters; Circuit
ID; and Modem Configuration Store/Load.
Figure 9-7. ‘Config Mdm | Page 2 (Modem Utilities)’ Page
Click [Submit] as needed in each section to save any changes.
9–11
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface Operation
9.3.3.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Config Mdm | Page 3 (Antenna Handover FAST Option)
When this FAST Option is enabled, use this page to configure the optional
Antenna Handover feature.
Figure 9-8. ‘Config Mdm | Page 3 (Modem Config/Antenna Handover)’ Page
Click [Submit] to save any changes made on this page.
9.3.3.4
Config Mdm | CnC (FAST Option)
When this FAST Option is enabled, use this page to configure the optional
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier (CnC) feature.
Figure 9-9. ‘Config Mdm | CnC’ Page
Click [Submit] to save any changes made on this page.
9–12
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface Operation
9.3.3.5
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Config Mdm | Spreading (FAST Option)
When this FAST Option is enabled, use this page to configure the optional Direct
Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) spectrum spreading and anti-jamming
applications.
Figure 9-10. ‘Config Mdm | Spreading’ Page
Click [Submit] to save any changes made on this page.
This page is operational only if the LDPC FEC FAST option is available
and configured, and the Spectrum Spreading or DSSS-MA FAST options
are available. If you attempt to access and operate this page with a
non-LDPC ModCod active, or any non-compatible modem mode active,
you will receive an error message in the affected “Modulator
configuration” or “Demodulator Configuration” page section: for
example, “Error: Invalid FEC” or “Error: Invalid Modem Type”.
9–13
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface Operation
9.3.3.6
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Config Mdm | AUPC (Automatic Uplink Power Control)
Use this page to enable the Automatic Uplink Power Control (AUPC) feature.
Figure 9-11. ‘Config Mdm | AUPC’ Page
AUPC enables the modem to automatically adjust its output power to maintain
as constant the Eb/No of the remote end of the satellite link. This provides
protection against rain fading, a particularly severe problem with Ku-Band links.
You must use the AUPC mode of operation to accomplish this protective
adjustment. With AUPC mode enabled, the distant end modem constantly sends
back information about the demodulator Eb/No, using reserved bytes in the
overhead structure. The local modem uses Eb/No to adjust its output power, and
a closed-loop feedback system is created over the satellite link.
Click [Submit] to save any changes made on this page.
9–14
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
9.3.4 Stats (Statistics) Pages
The Stats (Statistics) pages provide read-only status windows: General operating
and configuration information about the modem; Installed Options (FAST,
assorted Interface modules, etc.); Alarms; Tx and Rx Parameters; and Ethernet
information.
Click Modem Status, Event Log, Statistics, Config Log, Router Stats, or Ether
Stats to continue.
9.3.4.1
Stats | Modem Status
Figure 9-12. ‘Stats | Modem Status’ Page
Use this read-only page to view the modem’s current configuration and
operation parameters:
9–15
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface Operation
•
•
•
•
•
•
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
General Information
Installed Options
Live Faults
Click on a hyperlinked fault code to display a page that describes the
errors that have been logged.
Rx Parameters
Modem Symbol Rates
Assigned Ethernet MAC and IP Addresses.
9.3.4.2
Stats | Event Log
Use this page to review a scrollable record of the unit’s stored events.
Figure 9-13. ‘Stats | Event Log’ Page
Modem Event Log
•
•
•
(Event #) Date | Time: The first three columns display the event by the
order in which it is logged (1, 2, 3, etc.) along with the date and time the
event is recorded.
Type: The event is identified by its type in this column. The four event
types are Info, Unit, Tx Traffic, and Rx Traffic.
Code: Click on a hyperlinked fault code to display a page that describes
the events that have been logged.
Click [Refresh] to update the display with the most recently logged events. Click
[Clear Log] to clear the log of all visible events. Once the log is cleared, the next
time [Refresh] is clicked any new events are logged and numbered beginning
with ‘1’.
9–16
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface Operation
9.3.4.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Stats | Statistics
Use this page to review a scrollable record of the unit’s stored statistics.
Figure 9-14. ‘Stats | Statistics’ Page
Modem Statistics Log
•
•
•
(Statistic #) Date | Time: The first three columns display the statistic by
the order in which it is logged (1, 2, 3, etc.) along with the date and time
the event is recorded.
Min Eb/No
Avg Eb/No
Click [Refresh] to update the display with the most recently logged statistics.
Click [Clear Log] to clear all entries from the active feature’s log. Once the log is
cleared, the next time [Refresh] is clicked any new statistics are logged beginning
with the number ‘1’.
9–17
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface Operation
9.3.4.4
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Stats | Config Log
Use this read-only page to view a scrollable display of a number of configuration
change logs.
Figure 9-15. ‘Stats | Config Log’ Page
Configuration Change Log
Select a feature to query from the drop-down list. Click [Refresh] to display the
attribute statistics for that feature. The available Configuration Change Log
feature pages are:
• Logging Off
• SNMP
• Front Panel
• Telnet
• Serial Remote
• NP Mailbox
• Web
• TRANSEC Mailbox
The visible display provides Configuration Change Log information as follows:
• Date | Time | Command
• Date | Time | Response
• Intf
Click [Refresh] to update the attribute statistics for the active feature.
Otherwise, click [Clear Log] to clear all entries from the active feature’s log.
9–18
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface Operation
9.3.4.5
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Stats | Router Stats
Use this read-only page to view statistics for the modem FPGA, and the Ethernet
operating statistics for the modem WAN ports, M&C ports and, when the
optional Network Processor (NP) Interface is installed, the NP Interface’s LAN
ports 1 through 4.
Figure 9-16. ‘Stats | Router Stats’ Page
Router Statistics
Use the drop-down list to select a page to query. Click
[Refresh] to display the attribute statistics for that
feature.
In the example shown at right, LAN Port 2 (on the
optional NP Interface) queries, and then displays, the
most recent statistics for NP Interface LAN Port 2.
Click [Clear Stats] to reset the statistics counts for the
visible display.
See Table 9-1 to review the seven selectable pages of statistics available via the
‘Stats | Router Stats’ page drop-down list.
9–19
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Table 9-1. Router Stats Page – Drop-down “Feature Select” Items
Feature Select Item
FPGA
Attribute
Description
FPGA Link Errors
FPGA Overrun Errors
The count of received frames that did not match the
proprietary HDLC address, bad HDLC CRC, bad
alignment, and under run.
Count of received frames that exceeded max frame
length of 2K bytes in length.
FPGA Rx Packet count
Total number of received frames.
FPGA Overflow Errors
Count of received frames that overflowed the HDLC
buffer.
FPGA TX Packet counts
Total Number of transmitted frames.
Good Octets (in)
LAN Port 1
(NP Interface Traffic Port
marked as 1)
Total good Ethernet frames received, that is frames
that are not bad frames.
Bad Octets (in)
Total bad Ethernet frames received.
LAN Port 2
(NP Interface Traffic Port
marked as 2)
Broadcast (in)
LAN Port 3
(NP Interface Traffic Port
marked as 3)
Multicast (in)
(Ethernet features)
LAN Port 4
(NP Interface Traffic Port
marked as 4)
WAN
(Traffic port connected to
satellite interface)
Management
(Management port for
accessing M&C)
The number of good frames received that have a
Unicast destination GMAC address
The number of good frames received that have a
broadcast destination GMAC address.
The number of good frames that have multicast
destination GMAC address.
Note: this address not included 802.3 Flow Control
messages counted in Pause (In) or does it included
Broadcast frames counted in Broadcast (in).
Unicast (in)
Pause (in)
The number of good Flow Control frames received.
Total frames received with length of less than 64
octets but with valid FCS.
Total frames received with length of less than 64
octets but with invalid FCS.
Total frames received with length of more than
Maxsize (1643 in bridge mode and 1522 in all other
modes) but with valid FCS.
Total frames received with length of more than
Maxsize (1643 in bridge mode and 1522 in all other
modes) but with invalid FCS.
Undersize (In)
Fragments (in)
Oversized (in)
Jabber (in)
Rx Err (in)
Total frames received with RxErr signal from PHY.
FCS (in)
Total Frames received with a CRC error not counted
in Fragments (In), Jabber (In) or RxErr (In).
Octets (Out)
Total Ethernet frames sent from this GMAC
The number of frames sent that have a Unicast
destination GMAC address.
The number of frames sent that have a Broadcast
destination GMAC address.
The number of frames sent that have a Multicast
destination GMAC address.
Unicast (Out)
Broadcast (out)
Multicast (Out)
9–20
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface Operation
9.3.4.6
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Stats | Ether Stats
Use this read-only page to view the base modem’s Ethernet statistics. The most
commonly used statistics are provided on pages accessed via the drop-down list.
Figure 9-17. ‘Stats | Ether Stats’ Page
Modem Ethernet Statistics
Use the drop-down list to select a page to query. Click [Refresh] to display the
attribute statistics for that feature. The available statistics pages are as follows:
• Arp Table
• TCP Stats
• IP Stats
• IP IF Stats
• ICMP Stats
• ARP Stats
• UDP Stats
• ENET Stats
For example, if you query the UDP Stats, once you click [Refresh] the page will
update to display the resultant statistics:
9–21
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Base Modem HTTP Interface Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
9.3.5 Maint (Maintenance)| Unit Info Page
Use this page to review a read-only, scrollable status window containing
information about the currently loaded Bootrom. You may scroll through the
Image 1 and Image 2 content for information about all of the constituent
firmware blocks that make up the bulk.
Figure 9-18. ‘Maint | Unit Info’ Page
9–22
Chapter 10. SERIAL INTERFACE OPERATION
Make sure to operate the SLM-5650A with its latest available firmware.
10.1
Overview
Serial-based remote management of Comtech EF Data’s SLM-5650A Satellite Modem is available using the rear panel 9-pin ‘J10
REMOTE’ port. This chapter summarizes key parameters and procedures and their associated remote commands and queries, and
provides detailed instructions for use of the serial remote interface.
10.2
Remote Control Protocol and Structure
The electrical interface is either an EIA-232 connection (for the control of a single device) or an EIA-485 multi-drop bus (for the control of
many devices). Data is transmitted in asynchronous serial form using ASCII characters. Control and status information is transmitted in
packets of variable length in accordance with the structure and protocol defined in this chapter.
10.2.1
EIA-232
This is a simple configuration in which the Controller device is connected directly to the Target via a two-wire-plus-ground
connection. Controller-to-Target data is carried, via EIA-232 electrical levels, on one conductor, and Target-to-Controller data is
carried in the other direction on the other conductor.
10–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
10.2.2
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
EIA-485
For applications where multiple devices are to be monitored and controlled, a full-duplex (or 4-wire) EIA-485 is preferred. Halfduplex (2-wire) EIA-485 is possible, but is not preferred.
In full-duplex EIA-485 communication there are two separate, isolated, independent differential-mode twisted pairs, each handling
serial data in different directions. It is assumed that there is a ‘Controller’ device (a PC or dumb terminal), which transmits data in a
broadcast mode via one of the pairs. Many ‘Target’ devices are connected to this pair, which all simultaneously receive data from the
Controller. The Controller is the only device with a line-driver connected to this pair – the Target devices only have line-receivers
connected.
In the other direction, on the other pair each Target has a Tri-Stateable line driver connected, and the Controller has a line-receiver
connected. All the line drivers are held in high-impedance mode until one – and only one – Target transmits back to the Controller.
Each Target has a unique address, and each time the Controller transmits in a framed ‘packet’ of data, the address of the intended
recipient Target is included. All of the Targets receive the packet, but only one – the intended – will reply. The Target enables its
output line driver and transmits its return data packet back to the Controller in the other direction, on the physically separate pair.
EIA-485 (full duplex) summary:
• Two differential pairs: one pair for Controller-to-Target, one pair for Target -to-Controller.
• Controller-to-Target pair has one line driver (Controller), and all Target s have line-receivers.
• Target-to-Controller pair has one line receiver (Controller), and all Targets have Tri-State drivers.
10.2.3
Basic Serial Protocol
Serial data can be transmitted and received by a Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART). Serial data is transmitted as
asynchronous serial characters:
• Asynchronous character format is 8-N-1 (8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit)
• Baud rate can vary from 1200 through 38,400 baud.
Serial data is transmitted in framed packets. All bytes within a packet are printable ASCII characters less than ASCII code 127
(DELETE). The Carriage Return and Line Feed characters are considered printable.
10–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
The Controller device manages the monitor and control processes. It is the only device that can start data transmission at will.
Messages sent from the Controller to the Target require responses, except in these cases:
• Acknowledging receipt of a “command” – an instruction message issued by the Controller – to change the configuration of
the Target.
• Returning data that was requested by the Controller – response to a “query” message – that requests information from the
Target.
Target devices can transmit data only when the Controller tells them to.
10.2.4
Packet Structure
Table 10-1. Controller-to-Target Packet Structure
Character
ASCII Code
# Characters
Start of Packet
<
60
1
Target Address
4
Controller-to-Target Examples:
Address Delimiter
/
47
1
Instruction Code
3
Code Qualifier
= or ?
61 or 63
1
Optional Arguments
n
End of Packet
Carriage Return {CR}
13
1
(COMMAND) <0135/RSW=32{CR}
(QUERY) <0135/RSW?{CR}
Table 10-2. Target-to-Controller Packet Structure
Start of Packet Target Address
Address Delimiter
Character
>
/
ASCII Code
62
47
# Characters
1
Target-to-Controller EXAMPLE:
4
1
Instruction Code
Code Qualifier
Optional Arguments
=, ?, !, or *
3
61, 63, 33 or
42
1
(QUERY RESPONSE) >0135/RSW=32{CR}{LF}
10–3
End of Packet
Carriage Return {CR},
Line Feed {LF}
13, 10
From 0 to n
2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
10.2.4.1 Start of Packet
These characters are used to provide a reliable indication of the start of packet. They must not appear anywhere else in the body of
the message:
• Controller-to-Target: This is the “<” character (ASCII code 60). It is also known as the “less than” character.
• Target-to-Controller: This is the “>” character (ASCII code 62). It is also known as the “greater than” character.
10.2.4.2 Target Address
Up to 9,999 devices can be uniquely addressed. In EIA-232 applications, this value is set to 0000, In EIA-485 applications, the
permissible range of values is 0001 to 9999. Program the address into a Target using the front panel (CONFIG:) Remote 
SerialConfig  Interface submenus .
The Controller Unit sends a packet with the address of a Target – the destination of the packet. When the Target
responds, the address used is the same address, to indicate to the Controller the source of the packet. The Controller
does not have its own address.
10.2.4.3 Address Delimiter
This is the forward slash character: / (ASCII code 47)
10.2.4.4 Instruction Code
This three-character alphabetic sequence is intended to be a mnemonic of its operational function. This aids in the readability of the
message, should you display it in its raw ASCII form. For example, “UAT” means “Upconverter Attenuation; “IPA” means “IP Address”,
etc. Only upper case alphabetic characters may be used (A-Z, ASCII codes 65-90).
10.2.4.5 Instruction Code Qualifier
This single character further qualifies the preceding instruction code. Instruction Code Qualifiers obey specific rules.
10.2.4.5.1 Controller-to-Target Rules
From Controller-to-Target, the permitted qualifiers are “=” or “?” (ASCII codes 61 or 63):
10–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
= (ASCII code 61)
This qualifier is the Assignment Operator (AO). It means that the parameter defined by the preceding byte should be set to the value
of the argument(s) that follow it. For example: TFQ=0950.0000 means “set the transmit frequency to 950 MHz.”
? (ASCII code 63)
This qualifier is the Query Operator (QO). It means that the Target should return the value of the parameter(s) defined by the
preceding byte. For example: TFQ? means “query the current value of the transmit frequency.”
10.2.4.5.2 Target-to-Controller Rules
From Target-to-Controller, the Target transmits the symbol =, ?, !, *, or # (ASCII codes 61, 63, 33, 42, or 35) to the Controller:
= (ASCII code 61)
“=” displays in two ways:
1. If the Controller sends a command to set a parameter’s value, and the parameter value is valid, the Target accepts the
command by replying with no message arguments. For example: >0001/TFQ={CR}{LF}
2. If the Controller sends a query to a Target, the Target responds with the configured setting. For example, the query TFQ?
means “query the current value of the transmit frequency” – the Target responds with >0001/TFQ=xxxx.xxxx{CR}{LF} (where
‘xxxx.xxxx’ represents the configured frequency value).
? (ASCII code 63)
“?” is used as follows:
If the Controller sends a command to set a parameter to a particular value, and that value is not valid, the Target rejects the
command by echoing the instruction code, with no message arguments, followed by this character. For example:
>0001/TFQ?{CR}{LF}. This indicates that there was an error in the instruction code sent by the Controller.
! (ASCII code 33)
“!” displays when the Controller sends a command that the Target does not recognize. The Target rejects the command by echoing
the invalid instruction code, followed by this character. For example: >0001/XYZ!{CR}{LF}
10–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
* (ASCII code 42)
“*” is used if the Controller sends a command to set a parameter to a particular valid value, but the modulator will not permit that
parameter to be changed at that time. The Target will reject the instruction by responding with this character, with message
arguments. For example: >0001/TFQ*{CR}{LF}.
# (ASCII code 35)
“#” is used if the Controller sends a command to set a parameter that is correctly formatted, but the modulator is not in Remote
mode, the modem will not permit that parameter to be changed at that time. The Target will reject the instruction by responding
with this character. For example: >0001/TFQ#{CR}{LF}.
10.2.4.6 Optional Message Arguments
Arguments are not required for all messages. Arguments include these ASCII codes:
• Characters “0” through “9” (ASCII codes 48 through 57)
• Period “.” (ASCII code 46)
• Comma “,” (ASCII code 44)
10.2.4.7 End of Packet
•
•
Controller-to-Target: This is the Carriage Return character {CR} (ASCII code 13).
Target-to-Controller: This is the two-character sequence of Carriage Return and Line Feed {CR}{LF} (ASCII codes 13 and 10).
This pairing shows the valid end of a packet.
10–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
10.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Remote Commands and Queries
1) Typical for all tables, see Section 10.2.4.5 for the use of Instruction Code Qualifiers in Controller-to-Target (“Command”
or “Query”) and Target-to-Controller (“Response to Command”) communications.
2) Shaded, bold entries indicate PRIORITY commands/queries. Any change to a higher priority parameter can override any
of the lower priority parameters. See the note provided at the beginning of each section for specific details.
ASYNC ESC Rx Baud Rate, 10–40
10.3.1
ASYNC ESC Rx Format, 10–40
ASYNC ESC Tx Baud Rate, 10–41
ASYNC ESC Tx Format, 10–41
ASYNC ESC Type, 10–39
AUPC Eb/No Target Set Point, 10–39
AUPC Local Carrier Loss Action, 10–42
AUPC Local Enable, 10–42
AUPC Log Sample Interval, 10–41
AUPC Maximum Power Level, 10–39
AUPC Maximum Tracking Rate, 10–39
AUPC Minimum Power Level, 10–39
AUPC Nominal Power Level, 10–40
AUPC Remote Carrier Loss Action, 10–43
BERT Pattern, 10–33
Buffer Fill State, 10–27
Carrier Only Test Modes, 10–28
Circuit ID String, 10–28
Clear All AUPC Log Entries, 10–42
Clear All Stored Events, 10–27
Clear All Stored Statistics, 10–27
CnC Delay Monitor, 10–27
CnC Frequency Offset Monitor, 10–27
CnC Frequency Offset Range, 10–27
CnC Min/Max Search Delay, 10–29
CnC Mode, 10–28
CnC Power Ratio Monitor, 10–29
CnC PSD Ratio, 10–33
CnC Ratio Monitor, 10–29
CnC-APC Activate/ Suspend, 10–25
CnC-APC BER Reset, 10–25
CnC-APC Bit Error Rate, 10–25
CnC-APC FER Reset, 10–25
CnC-APC Frame Error Rate, 10–25
CnC-APC Max Power Level Increase, 10–
26
CnC-APC State, 10–26
Configuration, 10–36
Configuration Load, 10–36
Configuration Save, 10–36
Configured FAST Options, 10–28
DSSS-MA Max Power Limit, 10–14
Eb/No Alarm, 10–30
EIA-485, 10–2
Equipment ID, 10–30
External Buffer Clock Reference, 10–46
External Reference, 10–13, 10–21
Firmware Image, 10–31
Firmware Revision, 10–35
10–7
GigaBit Ethernet Interface
Management IP Address and Subnet
Mask, 10–45
Global Configuration, 10–36
Initialize AUPC Log Pointer, 10–42
Initialize Events Pointer, 10–30
Initialize Statistics Pointer, 10–31
Insert Tx BERT Error, 10–12
Interface Type, 10–10
IP Address, 10–31
Live Rx Faults, 10–24
Live Tx Faults, 10–16
Live Unit Faults, 10–32
Local/Remote Status, 10–31
LoopBack Test Modes, 10–31
Modem Alarm Mask, 10–32
Modem IP Interface Security Mode, 10–
48
Modem Operating Mode, 10–9
Modem Reference Clock, 10–31
Modem RF Band, 10–9
Number of Unread AUPC Log Entries,
10–42
Number of Unread stored Events, 10–33
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Number of Unread stored Statistics, 10–
33
Receive E1 Framing, 10–46
Receive E2 Framing, 10–46
Receive T1 Framing, 10–47
Receive T2 Framing, 10–47
ReCenter Buffer, 10–20
Remote Modem AUPC Enable, 10–43
Remote Modem BERT BER, 10–44
Remote Modem I/O Loopback, 10–44
Remote Modem Pattern Substitution,
10–43
Retrieve next 5 unread AUPC Log
Entries, 10–43
Retrieve next 5 unread Stored Events,
10–34
Retrieve next 5 unread Stored
Statistics, 10–34
Router BPM Mode, 10–48
Router Ethernet Interface
Management IP Address and Subnet
Mask, 10–48
Router IP Address Mode, 10–49
Router Working Mode, 10–48
RTC Date, 10–29
RTC Time, 10–35
Rx BPSK Data Ordering, 10–19
Rx BER, 10–18
Rx BERT BER, 10–18
Rx BERT Errors, 10–19
Rx BERT Reset, 10–19
Rx BERT State, 10–19
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Rx Buffer Programming Mode, 10–19
Rx Buffer Size, 10–20
Rx Clock Invert, 10–20
Rx Clock Source, 10–20
Rx Data Fault, 10–21
Rx Data Invert, 10–21
Rx Data Rate, 10–18
Rx Demod Acquisition Sweep Range,
10–24
Rx Demod Type, 10–17
Rx Descrambler, 10–22
Rx Differential Decoding, 10–21
Rx Eb/No, 10–19
Rx FEC Code Rate, 10–18
Rx FEC Type, 10–17
Rx Framing Mode, 10–17
Rx Frequency, 10–22
Rx Frequency Offset, 10–22
Rx Reacquisition Time, 10–22
Rx Reed-Solomon Code Word, 10–21
Rx Reed-Solomon Decoding, 10–23
Rx Reed-Solomon Interleaver Depth,
10–23
Rx Signal Level, 10–24
Rx Spectrum Invert, 10–23
Rx Spreading Factor, 10–23
Rx Ternary Code, 10–47
Serial Number, 10–34
Statistics Sample Interval, 10–35
Temperature, 10–35
10–8
TRANSEC Ethernet Interface Gateway
IP Address, 10–50
TRANSEC Ethernet Interface
Management IP Address and Subnet
Mask, 10–50
Tx BPSK Data Ordering, 10–13
Tx Clock Invert, 10–13
Tx Data Fault, 10–14
Tx SCT Reference, 10–13
Tx BERT State, 10–12
Tx Carrier State, 10–16
Tx Clock Source, 10–13
Tx Code Rate, 10–12
Tx Data Invert, 10–14
Tx Data Rate, 10–12
Tx Differential Encoding, 10–14
Tx FEC Type, 10–11
Tx Frequency, 10–14
Tx Modulation Type, 10–11
Tx Overhead Type, 10–11
Tx Power Level, 10–14
Tx Reed-Solomon Code Word, 10–13
Tx Reed-Solomon Encoding, 10–15
Tx Reed-Solomon Interleaver Depth,
10–15
Tx Scrambler, 10–15
Tx Spectrum Invert, 10–16
Tx Spreading Equation, 10–15
Tx Spreading Factor, 10–16
Tx Ternary Code, 10–47
Viterbi, 10–11, 10–17
10.3.2
Initial Setup – Priority Commands and Queries
Before executing any Modem, Unit, Bulk/Global, AUPC, or Optional Interface commands/queries, initial setup should be
accomplished with these three commands, prioritized as follows: MOM (Highest Priority), RFB, ITF (Lowest Priority). Priority
commands are indicated by shading throughout these sections. Any change to a higher priority parameter can override any of the
lower priority parameters.
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
Arguments for
Command or
Query
Modem
Operating
Mode
MOM=
MOM?
1 hex byte
Modem RF
Band
RFB=
RFB?
1 byte
Target-to-Controller
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Modem Operating Mode in the form x, where:
0 = OM-73
1 = Mil-165A
2 = IESS-308
3 = IESS-309
4 = IESS-310
5 = TURBO
6 = 16QAM
7 = AUPC
8 = RXBURST
9 = TXBURST
A = TURBO-FA
B = RXBRSTFA
C = LDPC
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/MOM=0{CR} (sets OM-73 operating mode)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Modem RF Band in the form x, where:
0 = 70/140 MHz Band
1 = L-Band (950 MHz – 2000 MHz)
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RFB=0{CR} (sets 70/140 Band)
10–9
Response
to
Command
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
MOM=x
RFB =x
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Interface Type
ITF=
Query
ITF?
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Arguments for
Command or
Query
1 byte
Target-to-Controller
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Interface Type in the form x, where:
0 = EIA-530
1 = HSSI
2 = Unbalance G.703
3 = Balanced G.703
4 = GigaBit Ethernet Interface
6 = Network Processor Card
7 = LVDS Interface
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/ITF=0{CR} (sets EIA-530 interface type)
10–10
Response
to
Command
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
ITF=x
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
10.3.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Modulator (Tx) Commands and Queries
Tx Priority System = (Highest priority) MOM, RFB, ITF (See Section 10.3.2), TFM, TFT, TMD, TCR, and TDR (Lowest Priority). Priority
commands are indicated by shading . Any change to a higher priority parameter can override any of the lower priority parameters.
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
Target-to-Controller
Arguments for
Command or
Query
Tx Overhead
Type
TFM=
TFM?
1 byte
Tx FEC Type
TFT=
TFT?
1 byte
Tx Modulation
Type
TMD=
TMD?
1 byte
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Tx Overhead Type in the form x, where:
0 = None (Unframed)
1 = IBS
2 = IDR
4 = AUPC
NOTE: Depending on the active modem mode, not all selections will be valid.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/TFM=0{CR} (selects Unframed mode)
Command or Query.
Set or returns the Tx FEC Coding type in the form x, where:
0 = None (Uncoded)
1 = Viterbi
2 = Turbo
3 = Sequential
4 = LDPC ULL (Ultra Low Latency)
5 = LDPC LL (Low Latency)
6 = LDPC HP (High Performance)
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/TFT=2{CR} (selects Turbo coding)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Tx Modulation Type in the form x, where:
0 = BPSK
1 = QPSK
2 = OQPSK
3 = 8PSK
4 = 16QAM
5 = 8QAM
NOTE: Depending on FEC type, not all selections will be valid.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/TMD=1{CR} (selects QPSK)
10–11
Response
to
Command
TFM=
TFM?
TFM*
TFM#
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
TFM=x
TFT=
TFT?
TFT*
TFT#
TFT=x
TMD=
TMD?
TMD*
TMD#
TMD=x
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Target-to-Controller
Arguments for
Command or
Query
Tx Code Rate
TCR=
TCR?
1 byte
Tx Data Rate
TDR=
TDR?
10 bytes
Insert Tx BERT
Error
BEI=
N/A
None
Tx BERT State
BTX=
BTX?
1 byte
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Command or Query
Sets or returns the Tx Code Rate in the form x, where:
0 = 1/1 (Uncoded)
1 = 1/2
2 = 3/4
3 = 7/8
4 = 2/3
5 = 5/6
6 = 21/44
7 = 5/16
8 = 17/18
9 = Reserved
A = Reserved
B = .541
C = .451
D = .378
NOTE: Depending on the active FEC Type, not all selections will be valid.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/TCR=1{CR} (selects Rate 1/2)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Tx Data Rate in the form xxxxxx.xxx, where:
xxxxxx.xxx = rate in kbps, in 1 bps steps.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/TDR=002047.999{CR} (selects 2047.999 kbps)
Command only.
Inserts a single bit error in Tx BERT.
NOTE: THIS COMMAND TAKES NO ARGUMENTS.
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Tx BERT State in the form x, where:
0 = Off
1 = On
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/BTX=1{CR} (Tx BERT On)
10–12
Response
to
Command
TCR=
TCR?
TCR*
TCR#
TDR=
TDR?
TDR*
TDR#
BEI=
BEI?
BEI*
BEI#
BTX=
BTX?
BTX*
BTX#
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
TCR=x
TDR=xxxxxx.xxx
N/A
BTX=x
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Target-to-Controller
Arguments for
Command or
Query
Tx SCT
Reference
SCT=
SCT?
1 byte
Tx BPSK Data
Ordering
TBO=
TBO?
1 byte
Tx Clock Invert
TCI=
TCI?
1 byte
Tx Clock Source
TCK=
TCK?
1 byte
Tx ReedSolomon Code
Word
TCW=
TCW?
1 byte
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the SCT Clock Reference in the form x, where:
0 = Internal
1 = Data Source Synchronized
2 = Loop Timing (Rx-Satellite Clock)
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/SCT=0{CR} (selects Internal Modem Reference)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Invert Transmit BPSK Data Ordering in the form x, where::
0 = Standard
1 = Non-Standard
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/TBO=1{CR} (selects Inverted BPSK Ordering)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Invert Transmit Clock in the form x, where:
0 = Normal
1 = Inverted
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/TCI=1{CR} (selects Inverted TX Clock)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Tx Clock Source in the form x, where:
0 = SCT
1 = Tx Terrestrial
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/TCK=1{CR} (selects Tx Terrestrial Clock Source)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Tx RS encoding in the form x, where:
0 = RS(225,205,10)
1 = RS(219,201,9)
2 = RS(208,192,8)
3 = RS(194,178,8)
4 = RS(126,112,7)
5 = RS(220,200,10)
NOTE: Depending on the active modem mode, overhead type, and data rate, not all selections
will be valid.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/TCW=0{CR} (This is a ‘don’t care’ if RS is Off under TRS)
10–13
Response
to
Command
SCT =
SCT?
SCT*
SCT#
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
SCT=x
TBO =
TBO?
TBO*
TBO#
TBO=x
TCI =
TCI?
TCI*
TCI#
TCI=x
TCK=
TCK?
TCK*
TCK#
TCK=x
TCW=
TCW?
TCW*
TCW#
TCW=x
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Target-to-Controller
Arguments for
Command or
Query
Tx Differential
Encoding
TDE=
TDE?
1 byte
Tx Data Fault
TDF=
TDF?
1 byte
Tx Data Invert
TDI=
TDI?
1 byte
Tx Frequency
TFQ=
TFQ?
9 bytes
Tx Power Level
TPL=
TPL?
5 bytes
DSSS-MA Max
Power Limit
TPM=
TPM?
5 bytes
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Tx Differential Encoding in the form x, where:
x=Tx Differential Encoding:
0=Off
1=On
NOTE: Depending on FEC type or Modulation Type, not all selections will be valid.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/TDE=1{CR} (selects Tx Differential Encoding On)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Transmit Data Fault in the form x, where:
0=None
1=DATA
2=AIS
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/TDF=0{CR} (selects Data Fault = None)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Invert Transmit Data in the form x, where:
0=Normal
1=Inverted
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/TDI=1{CR} (selects Inverted TX Data)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Tx Frequency in the form xxxx.xxxx, where:
xxxx.xxxx = frequency value, in MHz, in 100 Hz steps.
NOTE: Where 70/140 MHz operating range is from 52 to 88 MHz or 104 to 176 MHz, and L-Band
operating range is from 950 to 2000 MHz.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/TFQ=0140.9872{CR}
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Tx Output power level, where:
s = sign (+/–)
xx.x = Tx Output power level value where the range is from –40.0 to +10.0 dBm.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/TPL=–13.4{CR}
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the DSSS-MA Max Output power limit in the form sxxx.x, where:
s = sign (+/–)
xx.x = Tx Output power level value where the range is from –40.0 to +10.0 dBm.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/TPM=–30.4{CR}
10–14
Response
to
Command
TDE=
TDE?
TDE*
TDE#
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
TDE=x
TDF =
TDF?
TDF*
TDF#
TDF=x
TDI =
TDI?
TDI*
TDI#
TDI=x
TFQ=
TFQ?
TFQ*
TFQ#
TFQ=xxxx.xxxx
TPL=
TPL?
TPL*
TPL#
TPL=sxx.x
TPM=
TPM?
TPM*
TPM#
TPM=sxx.x
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Target-to-Controller
Arguments for
Command or
Query
Tx ReedSolomon
Interleaver
Depth
TRD=
TRD?
1 byte
Tx ReedSolomon
Encoding
TRS=
TRS?
1 byte
Tx Scrambler
TSC=
TSC?
1 byte
Tx Spreading
Equation
TSE=
TSE?
5 bytes
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Tx RS encoding, where:
0 = Interleaver Depth 4
1 = Interleaver Depth 8
2 = Interleaver Depth 16
NOTE: Depending on the active modem mode, overhead type, and data rate, not all selections
will be valid.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/TRD=0{CR} (This is a ‘don’t care’ if RS is Off under TRS)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Tx RS encoding, where:
0 = Off
1 = On
NOTE: Depending on the active modem mode, not all selections will be valid.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/TRS=0{CR} (sets RS encoding as Off)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Tx Scrambler state, where:
0 = Off
1 = OM-73 Scrambler
2 = V.35 Scrambler
3 = Modified V.35 (Comtech EF Data Closed Network)
4 = Reed-Solomon Synchronous Scrambler
5 = IBS Overhead Synchronous Scrambler
6 = TURBO Scrambler
NOTE: Depending on the active modem mode, FEC type, overhead type, and RS state, not all
selections will be valid.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/TSC=1{CR} (OM-73 Scrambler On)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Tx Spreading Equation in the form abbbb, where:
a = 0 (for Equation 0) or 1 (for Equation 1)
bbbb = GSN (Gold Sequence Number) 0000-9999 (for Equation 0) OR GSN 0000-4095 (for
Equation 1)
COMMAND EXAMPLE 1: <0001/TSE=05000{CR} (Tx Equation 0, GSN 5000)
COMMAND EXAMPLE 2: <0001/TSE=14095{CR} (Tx Equation 1, GSN 4095)
10–15
Response
to
Command
TRD =
TRD?
TRD *
TRD #
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
TRD =x
TRS=
TRS?
TRS*
TRS#
TRS=x
TSC=
TSC?
TSC*
TSC#
TSC=x
TSE=
TSE?
TSE*
TSE#
TSE=abbbb
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Target-to-Controller
Arguments for
Command or
Query
Tx Spreading
Factor
TSF=
TSF?
3 bytes
Tx Spectrum
Invert
TSI=
TSI?
1 byte
Live Tx Faults
N/A
TXF?
8 bytes
Tx Carrier State
TXO=
TXO?
1 byte
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Tx Spreading Factor in the fiorm xxx, where:
xxx = value from 1 to 512.
NOTE: Values other than 1 are only valid when Modem Type = LDPC.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/TSF=001{CR} (Tx Spreading Off)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Tx Spectrum Invert selection in the form x, where:
0 = Normal,
1 = Tx Spectrum Inverted
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/TSI=0{CR} (selects normal)
Query only.
Returns Live Tx Fault as a 32-bit Hexadecimal value in the form xxxxxxxx, where:
80000000 = Modulator Symbol Clock not locked
40000000 = Modulator RF Synthesizer not locked
20000000 = Modulator No IQ Activity
10000000 = Modulator Nyquist Filter Clipping
08000000 = Interface data clock PLLs not locked
04000000 = Interface Terrestrial Clock No Activity
02000000 = Interface SCT PLL not locked
01000000 = Interface No Data Activity
00800000 = APC Home State
00400000 = APC Margin
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE: >0001/TXF=00000000{CR}{LF} indicates No Tx Faults
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Tx Carrier State in the form x, where:
0 = OFF due to front panel or remote control command
1 = ON
2 = RTS
3 = OFF due to ext H/W Tx Carrier Off command (not a valid argument when used as a command)
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/TXO=1{CR} (Tx Carrier ON)
10–16
Response
to
Command
TSF=
TSF?
TSF*
TSF#
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
TSF=xxx
TSI=
TSI?
TSI*
TSI#
TSI=x
N/A
TXF=xxxxxxxx
TXO=
TXO?
TXO*
TXO#
TXO=x
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
10.3.4
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Demodulator (Rx) Commands and Queries
Rx Priority System = (Highest priority) MOM, RFB, ITF (See Sect. C.6.1), RFM, RFT, RMD, RCR, and RDR (Lowest Priority). Priority
commands are indicated by shading . Any change to a higher priority parameter can override any of the lower priority parameters.
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
Target-to-Controller
Arguments for
Command or
Query
Rx Framing
Mode
RFM=
RFM?
1 byte
Rx FEC Type
RFT=
RFT?
1 byte
Rx Demod Type
RMD=
RMD?
1 byte
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Rx Overhead Type in the form x, where:
0 = None (Unframed)
1 = IBS
2 = IDR
4 = AUPC
NOTE: Depending on the active Modem Mode, not all selections will be valid.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RFM=0{CR} (selects Unframed mode)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Rx FEC coding type in the form x, where:
0 = None (Uncoded)
1 = Viterbi
2 = Turbo
3 = Sequential
4 = LDPC ULL (Ultra Low Latency)
5 = LDPC LL (Low Latency)
6 = LDPC HP (High Performance)
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RFT=2{CR} (selects Turbo coding)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Rx Modulation type in the form x, where:
0 = BPSK
1 = QPSK
2 = OQPSK
3 = 8PSK
4 = 16QAM
5 = 8QAM
NOTE: Depending on the active FEC Type, not all selections will be valid.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RMD=1{CR} (selects QPSK)
10–17
Response
to
Command
RFM=
RFM?
RFM*
RFM#
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
RFM=x
RFT=
RFT?
RFT*
RFT#
RFT=x
(same format
as command
argument)
RMD=
RMD?
RMD*
RMD#
RMD=x
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Target-to-Controller
Arguments for
Command or
Query
Rx FEC Code
Rate
RCR=
RCR?
1 byte
Rx Data Rate
RDR=
RDR?
10 bytes
Rx BERT BER
N/A
BBR?
6 bytes
Rx BER
N/A
BER?
6 bytes
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Rx FEC Code Rate in the form x, where:
0 = 1/1 (Uncoded)
1 = 1/2
2 = 3/4
3 = 7/8
4 = 2/3
5 = 5/6
6 = 21/44
7 = 5/16
8 = 17/18
9 = Reserved
A = Reserved
B = .541
C = .451
D = .378
NOTE: Depending on the active FEC Type, not all selections will be valid.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RCR=1{CR} (selects Rate 1/2)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Rx Data rate, in the form xxxxxx.xxx where:
xxxxxx.xxx = Rx Data rate, in kbps, in 1 bps steps.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RDR=002047.999{CR} (selects 2047.999 kbps)
Query only.
Returns the value of the Rx BERT BER in the form a.bEcc where:
a.b = BER value
Ecc = Exponent
NOTE: Returns 0.0E00 if the BERT is not synchronized to a pattern.
-12
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE: >0001/BBR=4.9E12{CR}{LF} (Reports BER as 4.9 x 10 )
Query only.
Returns the value of the estimated corrected BER in the form a.bEcc where:
a.b = BER value
Ecc = Exponent
NOTE: Returns 99999 if the demodulator is unlocked.
-3
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE: >0001/BER=4.8E03{CR}{LF} (reports BER as 4.8 x 10 )
10–18
Response
to
Command
RCR=
RCR?
RCR*
RCR#
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
RCR=x
N/A
RDR=xxxxxx.xxx
N/A
BBR=a.bEcc
N/A
BER=a.bEcc
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Target-to-Controller
Arguments for
Command or
Query
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Rx BERT Reset
BRS=
N/A
None
Command only.
Resets the Rx BERT.
NOTE: THIS COMMAND TAKES NO ARGUMENTS.
Rx BERT State
BRX=
BRX?
1 byte
Rx Eb/No
N/A
EBN?
4 bytes
Rx BERT Errors
N/A
ERR?
7 bytes
Rx Buffer
Programming
Mode
RBM=
RBM?
1 byte
Rx BPSK Data
Ordering
RBO=
RBO?
1 byte
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Rx BERT State in the form x, where:
0 = Off
1 = On
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/BRX=1{CR} (sets Rx BERT as ON)
Query only.
Returns the value of Eb/No in the form xxxx, where:
xxxx = value from 0 to 20 dB in 0.1 dB steps.
NOTES:
1) Returns 99.9 if demod is unlocked.
2) For values greater than 20.0 dB, the reply will be EBN=+020
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE: >0001/EBN=12.3{CR}{LF} (sets Eb/No to 12.3 dB)
Query only.
Returns the total number of Bit Errors.
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE: >0001/ERR=9999999{CR}{LF}
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Rx Buffer Programming Mode in the form x, where:
0 = Buffer Size is programmed in Bits.
1 = Buffer Size is programmed in milliseconds.
NOTE: Command and Queries are not allowed when either the GBEI or NP Module has been
selected as the current interface type.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RBM=0{CR}
Command or Query.
Sets or rewturns the Invert Receive BPSK Data Ordering in the form x, where:
0 = Standard
1 = Non-Standard
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RBO=1{CR} (selects Inverted BPSK Ordering)
10–19
Response
to
Command
BRS=
BRS?
BRS*
BRS#
BRX=
BRX?
BRX*
BRX#
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
N/A
BRX=x
N/A
EBN=xxxx
N/A
ERR=xxxxxxx
RBM=
RBM?
RBM*
RBM#
RBM=x
RBO =
RBO?
RBO*
RBO#
RBO=x
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Target-to-Controller
Arguments for
Command or
Query
Rx Buffer Size
RBS=
RBS?
8 bytes
ReCenter Buffer
RCB=
N/A
None
Rx Clock Invert
RCI=
RCI?
1 byte
Rx Clock Source
RCK=
RCK?
1 byte
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Command or Query.
Sets or return the Rx Buffer Size in the form xxxxxxxx, where:
xxxxxxxx=Rx Buffer Size (in either bits or milliseconds – see RBM command)
NOTE: This command or query are not allowed when either the GBEI or NP Module is selected as
the current interface type.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RBS=00000512{CR}
Command only.
Forces the firmware to recenter the receive Plesiochronous / Doppler buffer.
NOTES:
1) THIS COMMAND TAKES NO ARGUMENTS.
2) This command is not allowed when either the GBEI or NP Module is selected as the current
interface type.
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Invert Receive Clock in the form x, where:
0 = Normal
1 = Inverted
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RCI=1{CR} (selects Inverted RX Clock)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Rx Clock Source in the form x, where:
0 = Rx Satellite
1 = Internal
2 = Tx-Terrestrial
3 = External Clock (only valid with the G.703 Option Card)
NOTE: This command or query are not allowed when either the GBEI or NP Module is selected as
the current interface type.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RCK=2{CR} (selects Tx-Terrestrial)
10–20
Response
to
Command
RBS=
RBS?
RBS*
RBS#
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
RBS=xxxxxxxx
RCB=
RCB?
RCB*
RCB#
N/A
RCI =
RCI?
RCI*
RCI#
RCI=x
RCK=
RCK?
RCK*
RCK#
RCK=x
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Target-to-Controller
Arguments for
Command or
Query
Rx ReedSolomon Code
Word
RCW=
RCW?
1 byte
Rx Differential
Decoding
RDD=
RDD?
1 byte
Rx Data Fault
RDF=
RDF?
1 byte
Rx Data Invert
RDI=
RDI?
1 byte
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns Rx RS encoding in the form x, where:
0 = RS(225,205,10)
1 = RS(219,201,9)
2 = RS(208,192,8)
3 = RS(194,178,8)
4 = RS(126,112,7)
5 = RS(220,200,10)
NOTE: Depending on Modem Mode, Overhead type, and data rate, not all selections will be valid.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RCW=0{CR} (This is a ‘don’t care’ if RS is Off under TRS)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns Rx Differential Decoding in the form x, where:
0 = Off
1 = On
NOTE: Depending on FEC type or Modulation Type, not all selections will be valid.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RDD=1{CR} (selects Rx Differential Decoding On)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Receive Data Fault in the form x, where:
0 = None
1 = DATA
2 = AIS
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RDF=0{CR} (selects Data Fault as None)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Invert Receive Data in the form x, where:
0 = Normal
1 = Inverted
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RDI=1{CR} (selects Inverted RX Data)
10–21
Response
to
Command
RCW =
RCW?
RCW *
RCW #
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
RCW=x
RDD=
RDD?
RDD*
RDD#
RDD=x
RDF =
RDF?
RDF*
RDF#
RDF=x
RDI =
RDI?
RDI*
RDI#
RDI=x
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Rx Descrambler
Query
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Target-to-Controller
Arguments for
Command or
Query
RDS=
RDS?
1 byte
Rx Reacquisition REA=
Time
REA?
3 bytes
Rx Frequency
Offset
N/A
RFO?
5 bytes
Rx Frequency
RFQ=
RFQ?
9 bytes
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Rx Scrambler state in the form x, where:
0 = Off
1 = OM-73 Scrambler
2 = IESS-V.35 Scrambler
3 = Modified V.35 (Comtech EF Data Closed Network)
4 = Reed-Solomon Synchronous Scrambler
5 = IBS Overhead Synchronous Scrambler
6 = TURBO Scrambler
NOTE: Depending on the active modem mode, FEC type, overhead type, and RS state, not all
selections will be valid.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RDS=1{CR} (OM-73 Scrambler On)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Rx Re-acquisition time in the form xxx, where:
xxx = time value, in seconds, from 0 to 999.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/REA=000{CR} (selects 0 seconds)
Query only.
Returns the value of the measured frequency offset of the carrier being demodulated in the form
xxxxx, where:
xxxxx = value ranging from ±0 to ±30 kHz, in 100 Hz steps.
NOTE: Returns 99999 if the demodulator is unlocked.
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE: >0001/RFO=+02.3{CR}{LF} (reports +2.3 kHz)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Rx Frequency in the form xxxx.xxxx, where:
xxxx.xxxx = frequency value, in MHz, in 100 Hz steps.
NOTE: Where 70/140 MHz operating range is from 52 to 88 MHz or 104 to 176 MHz, and L-Band
operating range is from 950 to 2000 MHz.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RFQ=0140.9872{CR}
10–22
Response
to
Command
RDS=
RDS?
RDS*
RDS#
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
RDS=x
REA=
REA?
REA*
REA#
N/A
REA=xxx
RFQ=
RFQ?
RFQ*
RFQ#
RFQ=xxxx.xxxx
RFO=xxxxx
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Target-to-Controller
Arguments for
Command or
Query
Rx ReedSolomon
Interleaver
Depth
RRD=
RRD?
1 byte
Rx ReedSolomon
Decoding
RRS=
RRS?
1 byte
Rx Spreading
Equation
RSE=
RSE?
5 bytes
Rx Spreading
Factor
RSF=
RSF?
3 bytes
Rx Spectrum
Invert
RSI=
RSI?
1 byte
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Rx RS encoding in the form x, where:
0 = Interleaver Depth 4
1 = Interleaver Depth 8
2 = Interleaver Depth 16
NOTE: Depending on the active modem mode, overhead type, and data rate, not all selections
will be valid.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RRD=0{CR} (This is a ‘don’t care’ if RS is Off under RRS)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Rx RS encoding in the form x, where:
0 = Off
1 = On
NOTE: Depending on the active modem mode, not all selections will be valid.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RRS=0{CR} (sets RS encoding as Off)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Tx Spreading Equation in the form abbbb, where:
a = 0 (for Equation 0) or 1 (for Equation 1)
bbbb = GSN (Gold Sequence Number) 0000-9999 (for Equation 0) OR GSN 0000-4095 (for
Equation 1)
COMMAND EXAMPLE 1: <0001/RSE=05000{CR} (Rx Equation 0, GSN 5000)
COMMAND EXAMPLE 2: <0001/RSE=14095{CR} (Rx Equation 1, GSN 4095)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Rx Spreading Factor in the form xxx, where:
xxx = value from 001 to 512.
NOTE: Values other than 1 are only valid when Modem Type = LDPC.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RSF=001{CR} (sets Rx Spreading as OFF)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns Rx Spectrum Invert, where:
0 = Normal
1 = Rx Spectrum Invert
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RSI=0{CR} (selects Normal)
10–23
Response
to
Command
RRD =
RRD?
RRD *
RRD #
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
RRD =x
RRS=
RRS?
RRS*
RRS#
RRS=x
RSE=
RSE?
RSE*
RSE#
RSE=0xxxx
RSF=
RSF?
RSF*
RSF#
RSF=xxx
RSI=
RSI?
RSI*
RSI#
RSI=x
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Target-to-Controller
Arguments for
Command or
Query
Rx Signal Level
N/A
RSL?
5 bytes
Rx Demod
Acquisition
Sweep Range
RSW=
RSW?
8 bytes
Live Rx Faults
N/A
RXF?
8 bytes
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Query only.
Returns the value of the Rx signal level in the form sxx.x, where:
s = sign (+/–)
xx.x = Rx signal level value, in dBm, from +15.0 to –60.0 dBm
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE 1: >0001/RSL=+15.0{CR}{LF}
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE 2: >0001/RSL=–60.0{CR}{LF}
NOTE: UNIT RETURNS 99.9 IF UNIT RETURNS VALUE BEYOND LIMITS.
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE 3: >0001/RSL=+99.9{CR}{LF} (RSL >+15.0 dBm)
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE 4: >0001/RSL=–99.9{CR}{LF} (RSL <–60.0 dBm)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Rx acquisition sweep range of the demodulator in the form xxxx.xxx, where:
xxxx.xxx = value, in kHz, ranging from 0 to 60 kHz.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RSW=0060.000{CR} (selects 60 kHz)
Query only.
Returns Live Rx Fault as 32-bit Hexadecimal value in the form xxxxxxxx, where:
80000000 = Demodulator IF not locked
40000000 = Demodulator Data Decoder not locked
20000000 = Demodulator RF Synthesizer not locked
10000000 = Demodulator No IQ Activity
08000000 = Interface De-Multiplexers not locked
04000000 = Interface Buffer Fault
02000000 = Interface Buffer about to slip
01000000 = Interface Buffer has overflowed
00800000 = Interface Buffer has underflowed
00400000 = Interface Buffer Clock PLL not locked
00200000 = Interface Buffer Clock Reference Activity
00100000 = Interface Data/AIS
00080000 = Eb/No Threshold exceeded
00040000 = Composite Power > 40 dBc
00020000 = Composite Power > 20 dBm
00010000 = BERT Sync Loss
00008000 = APC Band Mismatch
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE: >0001/RXF=00000000{CR}{LF} (indicates No Rx Faults)
10–24
Response
to
Command
N/A
RSW=
RSW?
RSW*
RSW#
N/A
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
RSL=sxx.x
RSW=xxxx.xxx
RXF=xxxxxxxx
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
10.3.5
Parameter Type
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Modem (Unit) Commands and Queries
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
Arguments for
Command or
Query
CnC-APC Bit
Error Rate
N/A
ABE?
4 bytes
CnC-APC BER
Reset
ABR=
N/A
None
CnC-APC Frame
Error Rate
N/A
AFE?
4 bytes
CnC-APC FER
Reset
AFR=
N/A
None
CnC-APC
Activate/
Suspend
APC=
N/A
1 byte
Target-to-Controller
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Query only.
Returns the value of CnC-APC BER in the form xE-c, where:
x = value
E-c = Exponent
BER is measured in frame UW
Note: Returns 9999 if modem is not in CnC-APC mode or there is an APC frame sync error.
-5
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE: >0001/ABE=8E-5{CR}{LF} (indicates CnC-APC BER is 8 x 10 )
Command only.
Forces restart of the CnC-APC BER measurement.
NOTE: THIS COMMAND TAKES NO ARGUMENTS.
Query only.
Returns the value of CnC-APC FER in the form xE-c, where:
x = value
E-c = Exponent
NOTES:
1) BER is measured in frame UW
2) Returns 9999 if modem is not in CnC-APC mode or there is an APC frame sync error.
-5
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE: >0001/AFE=8E-5{CR}{LF} (indicates CnC-APC FER is 8 x 10 )
Command only.
Forces restart of the CnC-APC FER measurement.
NOTE: THIS COMMAND TAKES NO ARGUMENTS.
Command only.
Used to activate or suspend APC operation in form x, where:
0 = no action
1 = Activate APC
2 = Suspend APC
EXAMPLE: <0001/APC=2{CR} (Suspends APC)
10–25
Response
to
Command
N/A
ABR=
ABR?
ABR*
ABR#
N/A
AFR=
AFR?
AFR*
AFR#
APC=
APC?
APC*
APC#
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
ABE=xE-c
N/A
AFE=xE-c
N/A
N/A
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Arguments for
Command or
Query
CnC-APC Max
Power Level
Increase
APL=
APL?
3 bytes
CnC-APC State
N/A
APS?
2 bytes
Target-to-Controller
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns CnC-APC maximum power level increase in the form x.x, where:
x.x = value in range from 0.0 to 9.9 dB.
NOTE: VALUE IS LIMITED BY TX POWER LEVEL.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/APL=3.9{CR} (sets APC max power level increase to 3.9 dB)
Query only.
Returns the state of APC operation in the form xx, where:
00 = APC is not active
01 = No Solution
02 = OK – ReBalance Done
03 = OK(Partial) – CnC Ratio approaches limit
04 = OK(Partial) – Local power approaches minimum value (IF)
05 = OK(Partial) – Local power approaches minimum value (L-Band)
06 = OK(Partial) – Local power approaches maximum value
07 = OK(Partial) – Local power approaches limit set by max power level increase
08 = OK(Partial) – Distant power approaches minimum value (IF)
09 = OK(Partial) – Distant power approaches minimum value (L-Band)
10 = OK(Partial) – Distant power approaches maximum value
11 = OK(Partial) – Distant power approaches limit set by max power level increase
12 = OK(Partial) – Incomplete
13 = No APC Frame Sync
14 = CnC Ratio Problem
15 = Local Eb/No too high
16 = Distant Eb/No too high
17 = Distant End ReBalance failed
18 = Distant End No Response
19 = Fail-Calculate Mismatch
20 = CnC Ratio too high
21 = Please run again
22 = APC is active
23 = Local margin too low
24 = Distant margin too low
25 = Rx Data Rate < 64 kbps
26 = Tx Data Rate < 64 kbps
27 = Local RSL too low
10–26
Response
to
Command
APL=
APL?
APL*
APL#
N/A
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
APL=x.x
APS=xx
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Arguments for
Command or
Query
CnC-APC State
(cont.)
Target-to-Controller
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
28 = Distant RSL too low
29 = Unrecognized Modem
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE: >0001/APS=00{CR}{LF}
Query only.
Returns the value of the buffer fill state in the form xx, where:
xx = value from 1 to 99%
NOTE: Returns 00 if demodulator is unlocked.
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE: >0001/BFS=33{CR}{LF} (reports 33%)
Command only.
Forces the firmware to clear the Stored Events log.
NOTE: THIS COMMAND TAKES NO ARGUMENTS.
Buffer Fill State
N/A
BFS?
2 bytes
Clear All Stored
Events
CAE=
N/A
None
Clear All Stored
Statistics
CAS=
N/A
None
Command only.
Forces the firmware to clear the Stored Statistics log.
NOTE: THIS COMMAND TAKES NO ARGUMENTS.
CnC Frequency
Offset Range
CCF=
CCF?
6 bytes
CnC Delay
Monitor
N/A
CDM?
6 bytes
CnC Frequency
Offset Monitor
N/A
CFM?
6 bytes
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the CnC Sweep Frequency in the form xx.xxx, where:
xx.xxx = Frequency value in the range from 0 to 60.000 kHz
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/CCF=60.000{CR}{LF}
Query only.
When CnC is enabled and locked, returns the delay of the interferer is readable in microseconds.
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE 1: >0001/CDM=229500{CR}{LF} (229.5 µs)
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE 2: >0001/CDM=999999{CR}{LF} (not locked or CnC not enabled)
Query only.
When CnC is enabled and locked, returns the estimated frequency offset between the desired
signal and the interferer is readable in kHz.
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE 1: >0001/CFM=+001.0{CR}{LF} (1 kHz)
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE 2: >0001/CFM=9999.9{CR}{LF} (not locked or CnC not enabled)
10–27
Response
to
Command
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
N/A
BFS=xx
CAE=
CAE?
CAE*
CAE#
CAS=
CAS?
CAS*
CAS#
CCF=
CCF?
CCF*
CCF#
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
CCF=xx.xxx
CDM=xxxxxx
CFM=xxxx.x
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Arguments for
Command or
Query
Target-to-Controller
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Response
to
Command
Configured FAST N/A
Options
CFO?
16 bytes
Command or Query.
N/A
Sets or returns information concerning the Configured FAST Options and their option fields, in the
form abcdefghijxxxxxxxx, where:
a = QOS where 0=Not Installed, 1=Installed
b = Reserved
c = Spectrum Spreading
d = Management Security where 0=Not Installed, 1=Installed
e = Vipersat Compatibility where 0=Not Installed, 1=Installed
f = Reserved
g = TRANSEC Data Rate Option where 0=Base (5,000 kbps), 1=10,000 kbps, 2=20,000 kbps,
3=51,840 kbps, 4=155,520 kbps, 5=2,500 kbps
h = Vipersat Data Rate Option where 0=Base (5,000 kbps), 1=10,000 kbps, 2=20,000 kbps, 3 =
51,840 kbps, 4=155,520 kbps, 5=2,500 kbps
i = Bridged Point to Multipoint where 0=Not Installed, 1=Installed
j = Customer Defined Options 0-3
x =spare
Circuit ID String
CID=
CID?
24 bytes
CnC Mode
CNM=
CNM?
1 byte
Carrier Only
Test Modes
COM=
COM?
1 byte
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the user-defined Circuit ID string, where:
x = a fixed length of 24 characters.
NOTE: Valid characters include Space ( ) * + – , . / 0 9 and A thru Z
Command or Query.
Sets or returns CnC Mode of Operation in the form x, where:
0 = Off
1 = On
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/CNM=0{CR}
Command or Query.
Sets or returns Test Mode in the form x, where:
0 = Normal Mode (no test)
1 = Tx CW
2 = Tx Alternating 1,0 Pattern
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/COM=1{CR} (CW Mode)
10–28
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
CFO=abcdefghijxxx
xxx
CID=
CID?
CID*
CID#
CNM=
CNM?
CNM*
CNM#
CID=x
COM=
COM?
COM*
COM#
COM=x
CNM=x
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Arguments for
Command or
Query
CnC Power
Ratio Monitor
N/A
CPR?
6 bytes
CnC Power
Ratio Monitor
CRA=
CRA?
3 bytes
CnC Ratio
Monitor
N/A
CRM?
4 bytes
CnC Min/Max
Search Delay
CSD=
CSD?
6 bytes
RTC Date
DAY=
DAY?
6 bytes
Target-to-Controller
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Query only.
When CnC is enabled and locked, returns the ratio, in 0.1 dB steps, between the interferer and
the desired signal power. Reporting format varies as follows:
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE 1: >0001/CPR=+02.8{CR}{LF} (interferer > desired)
(form=sdd.d, where: s = sign (+/–), dd.d = value in 0.1 dB steps)
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE 2: >0001/CPR=LT10.0{CR}{LF} (less than –10.0 dB)
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE 3: >0001/CPR=GT10.0{CR}{LF} (greater than +10.0 dB)
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE 4: >0001/CPR=9999.9{CR}{LF} (not locked or CnC not enabled)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns CnC Re-acquisition time in the form xxx, where:
xxx = value from 10 to 999.
NOTE: This is the time wherein CnC will start searching for the delay and frequency offset if a long
duration of unlock occurs.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/CRA=010{CR}
Query only.
When CnC is enabled and locked, returns the ratio, in 1 dB steps, between the interferer and the
desired signal power. Reporting format varies as follows:
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE 1: >0001/CRM=+02{CR}{LF} (interferer > desired)
(form = sdd, where: s = sign (+/–), dd = value in 1 db steps)
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE 2: >0001/CRM=LT10{CR}{LF} (less than –10 dB)
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE 3: >0001/CRM=GT10{CR}{LF} (greater than +10 dB)
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE 4: >0001/CRM=99.9{CR}{LF} (not locked or CnC not enabled)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns CnC min/max delay value in milliseconds, in the form xxxyyy, where:
xxx = min delay value from 0 to 300 ms
yyy = max delay value from 0 to 300 ms
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/CSD=010300{CR}
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the date in the form ddmmyy, where:
dd = day of the month (01 to 31),
mm = month (01 to 12)
yy = year (00 to 99)
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/DAY=240457{CR} (April 24, 2057)
10–29
Response
to
Command
N/A
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
CPR=xxxxxx
CRA=
CRA?
CRA*
CRA#
CRA=xxx
N/A
CRM=xxxx
CSD=
CSD?
CSD*
CSD#
CSD=xxxyyy
DAY=
DAY?
DAY*
DAY#
DAY=ddmmyy
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Arguments for
Command or
Query
Eb/No Alarm
EBA=
EBA?
4 bytes
Equipment ID
N/A
EID?
17 bytes
Initialize Events
Pointer
IEP=
N/A
None
Target-to-Controller
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns Eb/No alarm point in dB, with a range between 0.1 and 20 dB.
Resolution = 0.1 dB.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/EBA=12.3{CR}
Query only.
Returns information concerning the equipment identification, and the option field, in the form
aaaabcdefghijklmx where:
aaaa = defines the modem model number (where 565A=SLM-5650A)
b = Advanced FEC where 0=None, 1=TPC, 2=TPC + LDPC
c = Advanced FEC Data Rate where 0=Base (5,000 kbps), 1=10,000 kbps, 2=20,000 kbps, 3=51,840
kbps, 4=155,520 kbps, 5=2,500 kbps
d = Option Card where 0=None, 1=G.703, 2=GigaBit Ethernet, 4=Network Processor, 5=LVDS
e = Data Rate (Asymmetric Tx) Option where 0=Base (5,000 kbps), 1=10,000 kbps, 2=20,000 kbps,
3=51,840 kbps, 4=155,520 kbps, 5=2,500 kbps
f = Higher-order modulation where 0=None, 1=8PSK, 2=8PSK and 16QAM, 3=8PSK+16QAM and
16APSK/32APSK
g = Reed-Solomon Codec Option where 0=None, 1=Installed
h = TRANSEC Module where 0=None, 1=FEC2 Card and TRANSEC Module Installed, 2=FEC2 Card
Installed (No TRANSEC)
i = AUPC Option where 0=None, 1=Installed
j = ASYNC Engineering Service Channel where 0=None, 1=Installed
k = Demod Only
l = CnC Data Rate where 0=None, 1=up to 512 kbps, 2=up to 1 Mbps, 3=up to 2.5 Mbps, 4=up to 5
Mbps, 5=up to 10 Mbps, 6=up to 15 Mbps, 7=up to 20 Mbps, 8=up to 25 Mbps, 9=up to 30
Mbps, A=up to 40 Mbps, B=up to 51.840 Mbps, C=up to 70 Mbps
m = Sequential Encoding/Decoding Option: 0=None, 1=Installed
x = Asymmetric Rx Data Rate: 0=None, 1=10,000 kbps, 2=20,000 kbps, 3=51,840 kbps, 4=155,520
kbps, 5=2,500 kbps
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE: >0001/EID=565A0000000000000{CR}{LF} (reports SLM-5650A with
no options installed)
Command only.
Resets internal pointer to allow RNE? queries to start at the beginning of the stored events log.
NOTE: THIS COMMAND TAKES NO ARGUMENTS.
10–30
Response
to
Command
EBA=
EBA?
EBA*
EBA#
N/A
IEP=
IEP#
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
EBA=xx.x
EID=aaaabcdefghij
klmx
N/A
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Arguments for
Command or
Query
Firmware Image IMG=
IMG?
1 bytes
IP Address
IPA=
IPA?
18 bytes
Initialize
Statistics
Pointer
LoopBack Test
Modes
ISP=
N/A
None
LOP=
LOP?
1 byte
Local/Remote
Status
LRS=
LRS?
1 byte
Modem
Reference Clock
MRC=
MRC?
1 byte
Target-to-Controller
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns Next Reboot Image in the form x, where:
1 = Bulk Image #1
2 = Bulk Image #2
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/IMG=1{CR} (Image #1 will be active after next reboot)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the IP Address and Subnet Mask for the ‘J5 Ethernet’ 10/100 BaseT Ethernet port in
the form xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.yy, where:
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx = IP Address, and
yy = Subnet Mask (0-31)
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/IPA=010.006.030.001.24{CR}
Command only.
Resets internal pointer to allow RNS? queries to start at the beginning of the stored statistics log.
NOTE: THIS COMMAND TAKES NO ARGUMENTS.
Command or Query.
Sets or returns Loopback Test Modes in the form x, where:
0 = Normal Mode (no test)
1 = IF Loopback
2 = I/O Loopback #1
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/LOP=1{CR} (IF Loopback)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns Local/Remote status in the form x, where:
0 = Local
1 = Serial Remote Control
3 = Serial + Ethernet Remote Control
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/LRS=1{CR} (selects Serial Remote)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns Modem Reference Clock (for Frequency Accuracy) in the form x, where:
0 = Internal
1 = External 1 MHz
2 = External 5 MHz
3 = External 10 MHz
10–31
Response
to
Command
IMG=
IMG?
IMG*
IMG#
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
IMG=x
IPA=
IPA?
IPA*
IPA#
IPA=xxx.xxx.xxx.xx
x.yy
ISP=
ISP#
N/A
LOP=
LOP?
LOP*
LOP#
LOP=x
LRS=
LRS?
LRS*
LRS#
LRS=x
MRC=
MRC?
MRC*
MRC#
MRC=x
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Arguments for
Command or
Query
Modem Alarm
Mask
MSK=
MSK?
6 bytes
Live Unit Faults
N/A
LUF?
8 bytes
Target-to-Controller
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns Alarm mask conditions in the form abcdef, where:
a=spare (must be set to 0)
b=spare (must be set to 0)
c=spare (must be set to 0)
d=spare (must be set to 0)
e=Demod Faults (0 = unmasked, 1 = masked)
f=Eb/No Threshold Alarm (0 = unmasked, 1 = masked)
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/MSK=000001{CR}
Query only.
Returns Live Unit Fault as a 32-bit Hexadecimal value in the form xxxxxxxx, where:
80000000 = +5.0V Power
40000000 = +3.3V Power
20000000 = +2.5V Power
10000000 = +1.5V Power
08000000 = +12V Power
04000000 = -12V Power
02000000 = +18V Power
01000000 = Cooling Fan
00800000 = Ext Reference Activity
00400000 = 192 MHz Clock not locked
00200000 = 10 MHz Ref Clock not locked
00100000 = M&C FPGA not loaded
00080000 = Mod FPGA not loaded
00040000 = Demod FPGA not loaded
00020000 = Decoder FPGA not loaded
00010000 = Tx Interface FPGA not loaded
00008000 = Rx Interface FPGA not loaded
00004000 = FEC #1 FPGA not loaded
00002000 = FEC #2 FPGA not loaded
00001000 = Option Card FPGA not loaded
00000800 = FPGA DCM not locked
00000400 = NP Module Mailbox Comm Error
00000200 = FIPS Card Mailbox Comm Error
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE: >0001/LUF=00000000{CR}{LF} (indicates No Unit Faults)
10–32
Response
to
Command
MSK=
MSK?
MSK*
MSK#
N/A
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
MSK=abcdef
LUF=xxxxxxxx
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Arguments for
Command or
Query
Number of
Unread stored
Events
N/A
NUE?
3 bytes
Number of
Unread stored
Statistics
N/A
NUS?
3 bytes
BERT Pattern
PAT=
PAT?
1 byte
CnC PSD Ratio
N/A
PSD?
5 bytes
Target-to-Controller
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Query only.
Returns the Number of stored Events, which remain Unread, in the form xxx.
NOTE: This means unread over the remote control.
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE: >0001/NUE=126{CR}{LF}
Query only.
Returns the Number of stored Statistics, which remain Unread, in the form xxx.
NOTE: This means unread over the remote control.
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE: >0001/NUS=135{CR}{LF}
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the BERT Pattern in the form x, where:
0 = 2047
1 = Mark
2 = Space
3 = 1:1
4 = 1:2
5 = 2^15-1
6 = 2^20-1
7 = 2^23-1
8 = MIL-188
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/PAT=0{CR} (sets 2047 Pattern)
Query only.
When CnC is enabled and locked, returns the PSD ratio, in dB, between the interferer and the
desired signal power, in 0.1 dB steps. Reporting format varies as follows:
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE 1: >0001/CPR=+02.8{CR}{LF} (interferer > desired)
(form=sdd.d, where: s = sign (+ / –), dd.d = value in dB)
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE 2: >0001/CPR=999.9{CR}{LF} (not locked or CnC not enabled)
10–33
N/A
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
NUE=xxx
N/A
NUS=xxx
PAT=
PAT?
PAT*
PAT#
PAT=x
N/A
PSD=xxxxx
Response
to
Command
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Arguments for
Command or
Query
Retrieve next 5
unread Stored
Events
N/A
RNE?
110 bytes
Retrieve next 5
unread Stored
Statistics
N/A
RNS?
105 bytes
Serial Number
N/A
SNO?
9 bytes
Target-to-Controller
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Response
to
Command
Query only.
N/A
Returns the oldest five Stored Events that have not yet been read over the remote interface in the
form {CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body, where:
Sub-body = Axxxxxxxxddmmyyhhmmss:
A = fault type, where 1=Unit, 2=Rx Traffic, 3=Tx Traffic, 4=Info
xxxxxxxx = Fault Code number, as in LUF?, TXF?, RXF?, or Info Code. Specifically:
00000000 = Power Off
00000001 = Power On
00000002 = Log Cleared
00000004 = Global Config Change
00000005 = NP Module Watch Dog Timer
00000006 = NP Module Boot Timeout
00000007 = TRANSEC Module Boot Timeout
ddmmyyhh = date in day/month/year format
hhmmss = time in hours/minutes/seconds format
NOTE: If there are less than 5 events to be retrieved, the remaining positions are padded with
zeros. If there are no new events, the response is RNE*.
Query only.
N/A
Returns the oldest five Stored Statistics that have not yet been read over the remote interface in
the form {CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body, where:
Sub-body = AA.ABB.Bddmmyyhhmmss:
AA.A = Minimum Eb/No during sample period. “Loss” is displayed if carrier was lost during the
sample period
BB.B = Average Eb/No during sample period. “Loss” is displayed if carrier was lost during the
entire sample period
ddmmyyhh = date in day/month/year format
hhmmss = time in hours/minutes/seconds format
NOTE: If there are less than 5 events to be retrieved, the remaining positions are padded with
zeros. If there are no new events, the response is RNS*.
Query only.
N/A
Used to query the unit 9-digit serial number. Returns its S/N in the form xxxxxxxxx.
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE: >0001/SNO=176500143{CR}{LF}
10–34
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
RNE={CR}Axxxxxxx
xddmmyyhhmmss{
CR}Axxxxxxxxddm
myyhhmmss{CR}A
xxxxxxxxddmmyyh
hmmss{CR}Axxxxx
xxxddmmyyhhmm
ss{CR}Axxxxxxxxdd
mmyyhhmmss
RNS={CR}AA.ABB.
Bddmmyyhhmmss
{CR}AA.ABB.Bddm
myyhhmmss{CR}A
A.ABB.Bddmmyyh
hmmss{CR}AA.ABB
.Bddmmyyhhmms
s{CR}AA.ABB.Bdd
mmyyhhmmss
SNO=xxxxxxxxx
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Arguments for
Command or
Query
Statistics
Sample Interval
SSI=
1 byte
Firmware
Revision
N/A
43 bytes
RTC Time
TIM=
6 bytes
Temperature
N/A
3 bytes
Target-to-Controller
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the sample interval for the Statistics Logging Function in the form x, where:
x = 0 to 9 in 10-minute steps.
NOTE: Selecting 0 disables the statistics logging function.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/SSI=3{CR} (sets the logging inverval to 30 minutes)
Query only.
Returns the value of the internal firmware revision installed in the unit, in the form:
Boot:xx.yy.zz Bulk1:xx.yy.zz Bulk2:xx.yy.zz
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE: >0001/SWR=Boot:01.01.01 Bulk1:01.01.01 Bulk2:01.01.01{CR}{LF}
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the time in the form hhmmss (24-hour military time format), where:
hh = hours from midnight (00 to 23)
mm = minutes (00 to 59)
ss = seconds (00 to 59)
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE: >0001/TIM=231259{CR}{LF} (23 hours:12 minutes:59 seconds)
Query only.
Returns the value of the internal temperature in the form of xxx (degrees C).
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE: >0001/TMP=+26{CR}{LF}
10–35
Response
to
Command
SSI=
SSI?
SSI*
SSI#
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
SSI=x
N/A
SWR=Boot:xx.yy.zz
Bulk1:xx.yy.zz
Bulk2:xx.yy.zz
TIM=
TIM?
TIM*
TIM#
TIM=hhmmss
N/A
TMP=xxx
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
10.3.6
Parameter Type
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Bulk Configuration Commands and Queries
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
Arguments for
Command or
Query
Configuration
Load
CLD=
N/A
1 byte
Configuration
Save
CST=
N/A
1 byte
Global
Configuration
MGC=
MGC?
Command can
be 177 bytes
or 217 bytes;
Query
Response is
always 217
bytes
Target-to-Controller
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Command only.
Causes the modem to retrieve a previously stored configuration from Configuration Memory
location defined by the one-byte argument (0 to 9).
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/CLD=4{CR} (retrieve modem configuration from location 4)
Command only.
Command causes the modem to store the current configuration in Configuration Memory
location defined by the one-byte argument (0 to 9).
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/CST=4{CR} (store the current configuration in location 4)
Command or Query.
Global Configuration of SLM-5650A, in the form:
abcdeeeeeefghijabbbbbbklmnoooooo.ooopppp.ppppqcrestuvwxyyy.yzABCDEFGHHff.fffIJKLLLLLL.
LLLMMMM.MMMMNgggPQRSTUVWXYZZZZ.ZZZAAABCDDDDDDDDEE.EFGHIJKLMNNN.NOOO.OP
PP.PQQ.QR.RSTUVWXXYZZhhhijjjkkkkkmmmmmlllllllllllllllllllllll where:
a = Modem Operating Mode
same as MOM
b = Modem RF Band
same as RFB
same as ITF
c = Modem Interface Type
d = Modem Reference Clock
same as MRC
eeeeee = Modem Alarm Mask
same as MSK
f = Carrier Only Test Modes
same as COM
g = Loopback Test Modes
same as LOP
h = Tx BERT State
same as BTX
i = Rx BERT State
same as BRX
j = BERT Pattern
same as PAT
a = CnC Mode
same as CNM
bbbbbb = CnC Mode
same as CSD
k = expansion byte
same as TFT
l = Tx FEC Type
m = Tx Modulation Type
same as TMD
n = Tx Code Rate
same as TCR
oooooo.ooo = Tx Data Rate
same as TDR
pppp.pppp = Tx Frequency
same as TFQ
10–36
Response
to
Command
CLD=
CLD?
CLD*
CLD#
CST=
CST?
CST*
CST#
MGC=
MGC?
MGC*
MGC#
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
N/A
N/A
MGC=abcdeeeeee
fghijabbbbbbklmn
oooooo.ooopppp.
ppppqcrestuvwxyy
y.yzABCDEFGHHff.f
ffIJKLLLLLL.LLLMM
MM.MMMMNggg
PQRSTUVWXYZZZZ
.ZZZAAABCDDDDD
DDDEE.EFGHIJKLM
NNN.NOOO.OPPP.
PQQ.QR.RSTUVWX
XYZZhhhijjjkkkkkm
mmmmlllllllllllllllllll
llll
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Global
Configuration
(cont.)
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
q = Tx Framing Mode
c = NP Working Mode
r = expansion byte
e = NP Secure Mode
s = Tx Reed-Solomon state
t = Tx Reed-Solomon code word
u = Tx Reed-Solomon interleaver depth
v = Tx Spectrum Invert
w = Tx Scrambler
x = Tx Differential Encoder
yyy.y = Tx Power Level
z = Tx Clock Source
A = Tx SCT Reference
B = Tx Clock Invert
C = Tx Data Invert
D = Tx Data Fault
E = Tx BPSK Data Ordering
F = Tx Carrier State
G = Tx Ternary Code
HH = expansion bytes
ff.fff = CnC Freq Offset Range
I = Rx FEC Type
J = Rx Modulation Type
K = Rx Code Rate
LLLLLL.LLL = Rx Data Rate
MMMM.MMMM = Rx Frequency
N = Rx Framing Mode
ggg = CnC Re-acq Time
P = Rx Reed-Solomon state
Q = Rx Reed-Solomon code word
R = Rx Reed-Solomon interleaver depth
S = Rx Spectrum Invert
T = Rx Descrambler
U = Rx Differential Decoder
V = Rx Clock Invert
W = Rx Data Invert
X = Rx Data Fault
Y = Rx BPSK Data Ordering
ZZZZ.ZZZ = Rx Demod Acq Sweep Range
AAA = Rx Reacquisition Time
B = Rx Clock Source
C = Rx Buffer Programming Mode
10–37
same as TFM
same as GBM
same as MIS
same as TRS
same as TCW
same as TRD
same as TSI
same as TSC
same as TDE
same as TPL
same as TCK
same as SCT
same as TCI
same as TDI
same as TDF
same as TBO
same as TXO
same as TTC
same as CCF
same as RFT
same as RMD
same as RCR
same as RDR
same as RFQ
same as RFM
same as CRA
same as RRS
same as RCW
same as RRD
same as RSI
same as RDS
same as RDD
same as RCI
same as RDI
same as RDF
same as RBO
same as RSW
same as REA
same as RCK
same as RBM
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Global
Configuration
(cont.)
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
DDDDDDDD = Rx Buffer Size
EE.E = Eb/No Alarm Point
F = Statistics Sample Interval
G = Rx Ternary Code
H = Receive T1 Framing
I = Receive E1 Framing
J = Receive T2 Framing
K = Receive E2 Framing
L = External Buffer Clock Source
M = AUPC Local Enable
NNN.N = AUPC Nominal Power Level
OOO.O = AUPC Maximum Power Level
PPP.P = AUPC Minimum Power Level
QQ.Q = AUPC Eb/No Target Level
R.R = AUPC Max Tracking Rate
S = AUPC Local Carrier Loss Action
T = AUPC Remote Carrier Loss Action
U = AUPC Log Sample Interval
V = AUPC ESC Type
W = AUPC ESC Tx Baud Rate
XX = AUPC ESC Tx Format
Y = AUPC ESC Rx Baud Rate
ZZ = AUPC ESC Rx Format
hhh = Tx Spread Factor
i = Spare
jjj= Rx Spread Factor
kkkkk = Rx Spread Poly/GSN
mmmmm = Tx Spread Poly/GSN
lllllllllllllllllllllll = expansion bytes
Fill unused expansion bytes with ‘x’
10–38
same as RBS
same as EBA
same as SSI
same as RTC
same as T1F
same as E1F
same as T2F
same as E2F
same as ERF
same as LPC
same as ANP
same as AMX
same as AMN
same as AET
same as AMT
same as LCL
same as RCL
same as ASI
same as ACT
same as ATB
same as ATF
same as ARB
same as ARF
same as TSF
same as RSF
same as RSE
same as TSE
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
10.3.7
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Automatic Uplink Power Control (AUPC) Commands and Queries
The instruction codes that follow are valid only when the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem Type has been set to AUPC.
Always wait three (3) seconds between consecutive remote modem command/query polls. If Local AUPC is not enabled,
queries will return the last known condition. A request for status from the remote modem will then be transmitted,
ensuring that the next query will return current status.
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
Target-to-Controller
Arguments for
Command or
Query
ASYNC ESC Type ACT=
ACT?
1 byte
AUPC Eb/No
Target Set Point
AET=
AET?
4 bytes
AUPC Minimum
Power Level
AMN=
AMN?
5 bytes
AUPC Maximum AMT=
Tracking Rate
AMT?
3 bytes
AUPC Maximum AMX=
Power Level
AMX?
5 bytes
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns ASYNC ESC Type in the form x, where:
0 = RS-232
1 = RS-485 2-Wire
2 = RS-485 4-Wire
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/ACT=0{CR} (sets the ASYNC ESC to RS-232)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns AUPC Eb/No Target in the form xx.x, where:
xx.x = value from 3.2 to 16.0 dB.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/AET=13.4{CR}
Command or Query.
Sets or returns Minimum Tx Output power level in the form sxx.x, where:
s = sign (+/–)
xx.x = value from –40.0 to +10.0 dBm.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/AMN=–13.4{CR}
Command or Query.
Sets or returns AUPC Maximum Tracking Rate in the form x.x, where:
x.x = Maximum Tracking Rate, 0.5 to 6.0 dBm/minute in increments of .5.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/AMT=0.5{CR}
Command or Query.
Sets or returns Maximum Tx Output power level in the form sxx.x, where:
s = sign (+/–)
xx.x = Tx Output power level, +10.0 and –40.0 dBm.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/AMX=–13.4{CR}
10–39
Response to
Command
ACT=
ACT?
ACT*
ACT#
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
ACT=x
AET=
AET?
AET*
AET#
AMN=
AMN?
AMN*
AMN#
AET=xx.x
AMT=
AMT?
AMT*
AMT#
AMX=
AMX?
AMX*
AMX#
AMT=x.x
AMN=sxx.x
AMX=sxx.x
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Target-to-Controller
Arguments for
Command or
Query
AUPC Nominal
Power Level
ANP=
ANP?
5 bytes
ASYNC ESC Rx
Baud Rate
ARB=
ARB?
1 byte
ASYNC ESC Rx
Format
ARF=
ARF?
2 bytes
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns Nominal Tx Output power level in the form sxx.x, where:
s = sign (+/–)
xx.x = Tx Output power level, +10.0 and –40.0 dBm.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/ANP=–13.4{CR}
Command or Query.
Sets or returns Baud Rate in the form x, where:
0 = 110
1 = 150
2 = 300
3 = 600
4 = 1200
5 = 2400
6 = 4800
7 = 9600
8 = 19200
9 = 38400
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/ARB=0{CR} (sets the ASYNC ESC Rx Baud Rate to 110 Baud)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns Async Format in the form xx, where:
00 = 7 Bits, No Parity, 1 Stop Bit
01 = 7 Bits, Even Parity, 1 Stop Bit
02 = 7 Bits, Odd Parity, 1 Stop Bit
03 = 7 Bits, No Parity, 2 Stop Bits
04 = 7 Bits, Even Parity, 2 Stop Bits
05 = 7 Bits, Odd Parity, 2 Stop Bits
06 = 8 Bits, No Parity, 1 Stop Bit
07 = 8 Bits, Even Parity, 1 Stop Bit
08 = 8 Bits, Odd Parity, 1 Stop Bit
09 = 8 Bits, No Parity, 2 Stop Bits
10 = 8 Bits, Even Parity, 2 Stop Bits
11 = 8 Bits, Odd Parity, 2 Stop Bits
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/ARF=0{CR} (sets the ASYNC ESC Rx Format to 7N1)
10–40
Response to
Command
ANP=
ANP?
ANP*
ANP#
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
ANP=sxx.x
ARB=
ARB?
ARB*
ARB#
ARB=x
ARF=
ARF?
ARF*
ARF#
ARF=xx
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Target-to-Controller
Arguments for
Command or
Query
AUPC Log
Sample Interval
ASI=
ASI?
1 byte
ASYNC ESC Tx
Baud Rate
ATB=
ATB?
1 byte
ASYNC ESC Tx
Format
ATF=
ATF?
2 bytes
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the sample interval for the AUPC Logging Function in the form x, where:
x = 0 to 9 in 10-minute steps.
NOTE: Selecting 0 disables this function.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/ASI=3{CR} (sets the logging inverval to 30 minutes)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns Baud Rate in the form x, where:
0 = 110
1 = 150
2 = 300
3 = 600
4 = 1200
5 = 2400
6 = 4800
7 = 9600
8 = 19200
9 = 38400
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/ATB=0{CR} (sets the ASYNC ESC Tx Baud Rate to 110 Baud)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns Async Format in the form xx, where:
00 = 7 Bits, No Parity, 1 Stop Bit
01 = 7 Bits, Even Parity, 1 Stop Bit
02 = 7 Bits, Odd Parity, 1 Stop Bit
03 = 7 Bits, No Parity, 2 Stop Bits
04 = 7 Bits, Even Parity, 2 Stop Bits
05 = 7 Bits, Odd Parity, 2 Stop Bits
06 = 8 Bits, No Parity, 1 Stop Bit
07 = 8 Bits, Even Parity, 1 Stop Bit
08 = 8 Bits, Odd Parity, 1 Stop Bit
09 = 8 Bits, No Parity, 2 Stop Bits
10 = 8 Bits, Even Parity, 2 Stop Bits
11 = 8 Bits, Odd Parity, 2 Stop Bits
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/ATF=00{CR} (sets the ASYNC ESC Tx Format to 7N1)
10–41
Response to
Command
ASI=
ASI?
ASI*
ASI#
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
ASI=x
ATB=
ATB?
ATB*
ATB#
ATB=x
ATF=
ATF?
ATF*
ATF#
ATF=xx
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Target-to-Controller
Arguments for
Command or
Query
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Clear All AUPC
Log Entries
CAA=
N/A
None
Command only.
Forces the firmware to clear the firmware AUPC log.
NOTE: THIS COMMAND TAKES NO ARGUMENTS.
Initialize AUPC
Log Pointer
IAP=
N/A
None
AUPC Local
Carrier Loss
Action
LCL=
LCL?
1 byte
AUPC Local
Enable
LPC=
LPC?
1 byte
Number of
Unread AUPC
Log Entries
N/A
NUA?
3 bytes
Command only.
NOTE: THIS COMMAND TAKES NO ARGUMENTS.
Resets internal pointer to allow RNA? queries to start at the beginning of the stored statistics
log.
Command or Query.
Sets or returns Tx Output Power level setting when local carrier is lost in the form x, where:
0 = Hold current output power level
1 = Goto Nominal output power level
2 = Goto Maximum output power level
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/LCL=0{CR}
Command or Query.
Sets or returns Local AUPC Control in the form x, where:
0 = Off
1 = On
NOTE: When Local AUPC Control is enabled, modulator output power is automatically
controlled by the modem. Power output commands via TPL are not allowed during this mode;
although, queries will function as normal.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/LPC=1{CR} (Turns on Local AUPC Control)
Query only.
Returns the Number of AUPC Log Entries that remain Unread over the serial remote interface, in
the form xxx.
QUERY RESPONSE EXAMPLE: >0001/NUS=126{CR}{LF}
10–42
Response to
Command
CAA=
CAA?
CAA*
CAA#
IAP=
IAP#
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
N/A
N/A
LCL=
LCL?
LCL*
LCL#
LCL=x
LPC=
LPC?
LPC*
LPC#
LPC=x
N/A
NUA=xxx
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Target-to-Controller
Arguments for
Command or
Query
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Response to
Command
Retrieve next 5
unread AUPC
Log Entries
N/A
RNA?
155 bytes
Query only.
Returns the oldest 5 AUPC Log Entries that have not yet been read over the remote interface in
the form {CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR} Sub-body{CR}Sub-body, where:
Sub-body = AA.ABB.BCCC.CEEE.Eddmmyyhhmmss:
AA.A = Minimum Eb/No during sample period.
BB.B = Average Eb/No during sample period.
CCC.C = Max Output Power during sample period.
EEE.E = Average Output Power during sample period.
ddmmyyhh = date in day/month/year format.
hhmmss = time in hours/minutes/seconds format.
NOTE: If there are less than 5 events to be retrieved, the remaining positions are padded with
zeros. If there are no new events, the response is RNA*.
N/A
AUPC Remote
Carrier Loss
Action
RCL=
RCL?
1 byte
RCL=
RCL?
RCL*
RCL#
Remote Modem RPB=
Pattern
Substitution
RPB?
1 byte
Remote Modem RPC=
AUPC Enable
RPC?
1 byte
Command or Query.
Sets or returns Tx Output Power level setting, when remote carrier is lost, in the form x, where:
0 = Hold current output power level
1 = Goto Nominal output power level
2 = Goto Maximum output power level
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RCL=0{CR}
Command or Query.
Sets or returns Remote Modem Tx Pattern Substitution in the form x, where:
0 = Off
1 = On
NOTE: For compatibility reasons, only the 2047 Tx pattern can be turned On or Off at the
remote modem.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RPB=1{CR} (Turns on remote modem AUPC Control)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns Remote Modem AUPC Control in the form x, where:
0 = Off
1 = On
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RPC=1{CR} (Turns on remote modem AUPC Control)
10–43
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
RNA=
{CR}AA.ABB.BCCC.
CEEE.Eddmmyyhh
mmss{CR}AA.ABB.
BCCC.CEEE.Eddmm
yyhhmmss{CR}AA.
ABB.BCCC.CEEE.Ed
dmmyyhhmmss{CR
}AA.ABB.BCCC.CEE
E.Eddmmyyhhmms
s{CR}AA.ABB.BCCC.
CEEE.Eddmmyyhh
mmss
RCL=x
RPB=
RPB?
RPB*
RPB#
RPB=x
RPC=
RPC?
RPC*
RPC#
RPC=x
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Target-to-Controller
Arguments for
Command or
Query
Remote Modem N/A
BERT BER
RPE?
6 bytes
Remote Modem RPL=
I/O Loopback
RPL?
1 byte
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Query only.
Returns the value of the remote modem’s BERT BER in the form a.bEcc where:
a.b = BER value
Ecc = Exponent
NOTE: Returns 0.0E00 if the BERT is not synchronized to a pattern.
-6
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RPE=4.0E06{CR} (Reports BER as 4.0 x 10 )
Command or Query.
Sets or returns Remote Modem I/O Loopback Mode in the form x, where:
0 = Off
1 = On
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RPL=1{CR} (Turns on remote modem AUPC Control)
10–44
Response to
Command
N/A
RPL=
RPL?
RPL*
RPL#
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
RPE=a.bEcc
RPL=x
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
10.3.8
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Gigabit Ethernet Interface Commands and Queries
The instruction codes that follow are valid only when the optional 10/100/1000 BaseT Gigabit Ethernet Interface (GBEI) Module is
installed in the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem.
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
GigaBit Ethernet GIP=
Interface
Management IP
Address and
Subnet Mask
Query
GIP?
Target-to-Controller
Arguments for
Command or
Query
18 bytes
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Management IP Address and Subnet Mask for the GBEI Module, in the form
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd.ee, where:
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd = IP Address, and
ee = Subnet Mask (0-31)
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/GIP=010.006.030.001.24{CR}
10–45
Response
to
Command
N/A
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
GIP=aaa.bbb.ccc.d
dd.ee
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
10.3.9
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
G.703 Interface Commands and Queries
The instruction codes that follow are valid only when the optional G.703 E1,E2/T1,T2 Interface Module is installed in the SLM-5650A
Satellite Modem.
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
Target-to-Controller
Arguments for
Command or
Query
Receive E1
Framing
E1F=
E1F?
1 byte
Receive E2
Framing
E2F=
E2F?
1 byte
External Buffer
Clock Reference
ERF=
ERF?
1 byte
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns Receive T1 Framing in the form x, where:
0 = None
1 = G.704
NOTE: Command and Queries are not allowed when either the GBEI or NP Module has been
selected as the current interface type.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/E1F=0{CR}
Command or Query.
Sets or returns Receive T2 Framing in the form x, where:
0 = None
1 = G.704
2 = G.742
4 = G.745
NOTE: Command and Queries are not allowed when either the GBEI or NP Module has been
selected as the current interface type.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/E2F=0{CR}
Command or Query.
Sets or returns External Buffer Clock Reference in the form x, where:
0 = External Clock equals Rx Data Rate
1 = 5 MHz External Clock
2 = 10 MHz External Clock
3 = 20 MHz External Clock
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/ERF=0{CR}
10–46
Response
to
Command
E1F=
E1F?
E1F*
E1F#
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
E1F=x
E2F=
E2F?
E2F*
E2F#
E2F=x
ERF=
ERF?
ERF*
ERF#
ERF=x
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Target-to-Controller
Arguments for
Command or
Query
Rx Ternary Code RTC=
RTC?
1 byte
Receive T1
Framing
T1F=
T1F?
1 byte
Receive T2
Framing
T2F=
T2F?
1 byte
Tx Ternary Code
TTC=
TTC?
1 byte
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns Rx Ternary Code in the form x, where:
0 = AMI
1 = B8ZS
2 = B6ZS
3 = HDB3
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RTC=3{CR} (Sets Rx Ternary Code to HDB3)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns Receive T1 Framing in the form x, where:
0 = None
1 = G.704
NOTE: Command and Queries are not allowed when either the GBEI or NP Module has been
selected as the current interface type.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/T1F=0{CR}
Command or Query.
Sets or returns Receive T2 Framing in the form x, where:
0 = None
1 = G.704
3 = G.743
5 = G.747
NOTE: Command and Queries are not allowed when either the GBEI or NP Module has been
selected as the current interface type.
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/T2F=0{CR}
Command or Query.
Sets or returns Tx Ternary Code in the form x, where:
0 = AMI
1 = B8ZS
2 = B6ZS
3 = HDB3
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/TTC=3 (Sets Tx Ternary Code to HDB3)
10–47
Response
to
Command
RTC=
RTC?
RTC*
RTC#
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
RTC=x
T1F=
T1F?
T1F*
T1F#
T1F=x
T2F=
T2F?
T2F*
T2F#
T2F=x
TTC=
TTC?
TTC*
TTC#
TTC=x
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
10.3.10 Network Processor (NP) Interface Commands and Queries
The instruction codes that follow are valid only when the optional Network Processor (NP) Interface Module is installed in the SLM5650A Satellite Modem.
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
Target-to-Controller
Arguments for
Command or
Query
Router BPM
Mode
BRT=
BRT?
1 byte
Router Working
Mode
GBM=
GBM?
1 byte
Router Ethernet
Interface
Management IP
Address and
Subnet Mask
MIP=
MIP?
18 bytes
Modem IP
Interface
Security Mode
MIS=
MIS?
1 byte
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the NP Module’s BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) mode in the form a, where:
0 = Off
1 = On
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/BRT=0{CR}
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the NP Module Router Working Mode in the form a, where:
1 = Vipersat Hub
2 = Vipersat Hub Expansion
3 = Vipersat Remote
4 = Vipersat Remote Expansion
5 = Multipoint Hub
6 = Multipoint Remote
7 = Point to Point
8 = GigaBit Bridge
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/GBM=7{CR}
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Management IP Address and Subnet Mask for the
NP Module in the form aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd.ee, where:
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd = IP Address, and
ee = Subnet Mask (0-31)
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/MIP=010.006.030.001.24{CR}
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the modem IP Interface security level in the form a, where:
0 = Normal or Low Level Security, and
1 = High Level Security
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/MIS=0{CR}
10–48
Response
to
Command
BRT=
BRT?
BRT*
BRT#
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
BRT=a
GBM=
GBM?
GBM*
GBM#
GBM=a
MIP=
MIP?
MIP*
MIP#
MIP=aaa.bbb.ccc.d
dd.ee
MIS=
MIS?
MIS*
MIS#
MIS=a
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
Query
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Target-to-Controller
Arguments for
Command or
Query
Router IP
Address Mode
RIM=
RIM?
1 byte
Router Ethernet
Interface Traffic
IP Address and
Subnet Mask
RIP=
RIP?
18 bytes
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the NP Module’s IP Address Mode in the form a, where:
0 = Single IP Address, and
1 = Dual IP Address
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RIM=0{CR}
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the IP Address and Subnet Mask for the NP Module Traffic port in the form
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd.ee, where:
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd = IP Address, and
ee = Subnet Mask (0-31)
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/RIP=010.006.030.001.24{CR}
10–49
Response
to
Command
RIM=
RIM?
RIM*
RIM#
RIP=
RIP?
RIP*
RIP#
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
RIM=a
RIP=aaa.bbb.ccc.d
dd.ee
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Serial Interface Operation
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
10.3.11 TRANSEC Module Interface Commands and Queries
The instruction codes that follow are valid only when the optional TRANSEC Module is installed in the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem.
Parameter Type
Controller-to-Target
Instruction Code and
Qualifier
Command
TRANSEC
Ethernet
Interface
Gateway IP
Address
TRANSEC
Ethernet
Interface
Management IP
Address and
Subnet Mask
Query
Target-to-Controller
Arguments for
Command or
Query
SMG=
SMG?
15 bytes
SMI=
SMI?
18 bytes
Description of Arguments
(Note that all arguments are ASCII numeric codes from 48 to 57)
Command or Query.
Set or return the Gateway IP Address for the TRANSEC Module in the form aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd,
where:
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd = Gateway IP Address
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/SMG=010.006.030.001{CR}
Command or Query.
Sets or returns the Management IP Address and Subnet Mask for the TRANSEC Module in the
form aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd.ee, where:
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd = Management IP Address, and
ee = Subnet Mask (0-31)
COMMAND EXAMPLE: <0001/SMI=010.006.030.001.24{CR}
10–50
Response
to
Command
N/A
N/A
Response to
Query
(see Description
of Arguments)
SMG=aaa.bbb.ccc.
ddd
SMI=aaa.bbb.ccc.d
dd.ee
Appendix A. SYSTEM
CHECKOUT AND
TROUBLESHOOTING
A.1 Overview
This appendix provides information pertaining to the SLM-5650A Satellite
Modem’s system checkout and fault isolation and identification.
A.2 System Checkout
This section provides instructions for checking the modem setup within
the earth station. Due to the complexity of the modem circuitry, the
checkout procedure should be used only as a basic guideline. More
complicated maintenance tests are beyond the scope of this manual.
CAUTION
This equipment contains parts and assemblies sensitive to damage by
ESD. Use ESD precautionary procedures when touching, removing, or
inserting PCBs.
System checkout entails following the test instructions provided for the interface
PCB, modem PCB, TURBO PCB, and L-Band IF PCB. The instructions include tables
and test points for ensuring that the Eb/N0, typical output spectrums, typical eye
patterns, and constellations are correct. If a test failure occurs, refer to the fault
isolation checkout procedures provided in this appendix.
A–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix A
A.2.1
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Interface Checkout
Use the test setup in Figure A-1 and the procedure that follows to verify the data
interface.
NOISE
GENERATOR
TX IF
MODEM UNDER TEST
VAR ATTEN
RX IF
BERT
DATA
CONNECTORS
VAR ATTEN
BER
TEST SET
Figure A-1. Fault Isolation Test Setup
Do these steps:
1. Ensure the correct data and IF interface is selected and configured for the
proper mode of operation.
2. Connect a BER test set to the appropriate modem data connector as
shown in Figure A-1.
3. Set up the modem for baseband loopback operation by selecting I/O1
(TEST: Loopback  I/O1) from the front panel menu. The modem will run
error-free.
A.2.2
Modulator Checkout
Do these steps:
1. Set up the equipment as shown in Figure A-1 using the 70/140 MHz IF
interface. See Chapter 2. SPECIFICATIONS for the modulator
specifications.
2. Set up the modem for IF loopback operation by using TEST: Loopback 
IF from the front panel menu, or use an external IF loop.
3. Clear all TX faults, Stored Faults, and Alarms using MONITOR: Event-Log
 Clear-All from the front panel menu.
4. Measure the Eb/N0 with a receiver that is known to be properly
operating:
A–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix A
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
a. Refer to Table A-1 and Figure A-2 to check for proper Eb/N0 level. The
(S+N)/N is measured by taking the average level of the noise and the
average level of the modem spectrum top.
b. Use this measurement for the first column on Table A-1.
c. Read across the page to find the S/N and Eb/N0 for the specific code
rate.
Once the demodulator has locked to the incoming signal, using
MONITOR: Rx-Params from the front panel menu displays
frequency offset, signal level, BERT data (if enabled), buffer
status, Eb/N0, and corrected BER.
5. Connect a spectrum analyzer to the modem as shown in Figure A-1.
Ensure the IF output meets the appropriate mask and spurious
specifications. Measure the power output at different levels and
frequencies.
A typical output spectrum is shown in Figure A-3.
6. Check the frequency and phase modulation accuracy as follows:
a. Set the modem to the continuous wave mode by using TEST: Carrier
 Tx-CW from the front panel menu. This sets the carrier modulation
in the OFF condition. A pure carrier should now be present at the IF
output. This should only be used for frequency measurements.
Spurious and power measurements should be taken with the
modulation on.
b. Set the modem to the continuous wave Offset mode by using TEST:
Carrier  Tx-1,0 from the front panel menu. This generates a single
upper side band and suppressed carrier signal. Ensure the carrier and
side-band suppression are < -30 dBc.
7. Set up the equipment as shown in Figure A-1 using the L-Band IF
interface. Repeat steps 2 through 6.
A–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix A
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Table A-1. Conversion to S/N and Eb/N0Chart
(dB)
(S+N)/N
Code
S/N
Rate 1/2
Eb/N0
Code
S/N
Rate 3/4
Eb/N0
Code
S/N
Rate 7/8
Eb/N0
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
9.5
10.0
10.5
11.0
11.5
12.0
12.5
13.0
13.5
14.0
14.5
15.0
15.5
16.0
16.5
17.0
17.5
18.0
18.5
19.0
19.5
20.0
1.8
2.6
3.3
4.1
4.7
5.4
6.0
6.6
7.3
7.8
8.4
9.0
9.5
10.1
10.6
11.2
11.7
12.2
12.8
13.3
13.8
14.3
14.9
15.4
15.9
16.4
16.9
17.4
17.9
18.4
18.9
19.5
20.0
1.8
2.6
3.3
4.1
4.7
5.4
6.0
6.6
7.3
7.8
8.4
9.0
9.5
10.1
10.6
11.2
11.7
12.2
12.8
13.3
13.8
14.3
14.9
15.4
15.9
16.4
16.9
17.4
17.9
18.4
18.9
19.5
20.0
1.8
2.6
3.3
4.1
4.7
5.4
6.0
6.6
7.3
7.8
8.4
9.0
9.5
10.1
10.6
11.2
11.7
12.2
12.8
13.3
13.8
14.3
14.9
15.4
15.9
16.4
16.9
17.4
17.9
18.4
18.9
19.5
20.0
0.0
0.8
1.6
2.3
3.0
3.6
4.3
4.9
5.5
6.1
6.7
7.2
7.8
8.3
8.9
9.4
10.0
10.5
11.0
11.5
12.1
12.6
13.1
13.6
14.1
14.6
15.2
15.7
16.2
16.7
17.2
17.7
18.2
1.8
2.6
3.3
4.1
4.7
5.4
6.0
6.6
7.3
7.8
8.4
9.0
9.5
10.1
10.6
11.2
11.7
12.2
12.8
13.3
13.8
14.3
14.9
15.4
15.9
16.4
16.9
17.4
17.9
18.4
18.9
19.5
20.0
-0.6
0.2
0.9
1.6
2.3
3.0
3.6
4.2
4.8
5.4
6.0
6.6
7.1
7.7
8.2
8.8
9.3
9.8
10.3
10.9
11.4
11.9
12.4
12.9
13.5
14.0
14.5
15.0
15.5
16.0
16.5
17.0
17.5
A–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix A
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
RL -49.00 dBm
ATTEN 10 dB
2.00 dB/DIV
RES BANDWIDTH
10.0 kHz
Modem Rate = 2144 kbit/s, 3/4 Rate Coding
with 7.7 dB Eb/No (S + N)/N = 10 dB
CENTER 70.000 MHz
*RB 10.0 kHz
*VB 10.0 Hz
SPAN 1.000 MHz
ST 30.00 sec
Figure A-2. Typical Output Spectrum – With Noise
RL -20.29 dBm
ATTEN 10 dB
5.00 dB/DIV
CENTER FREQUENCY
140.000 MHz
CENTER 140.000 MHz
*RB 30.0 kHz
PASS
*VB 3.00 Hz
SPAN 5.000 MHz
ST 166.7 sec
Figure A-3. Typical Output Spectrum – Without Noise
A–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix A
A.2.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Demodulator Checkout
Do these steps:
1. Set up the equipment as shown in Figure A-1 using the 70/140 MHz IF
interface.
2. Set up the modem with an external IF loop and level. Use a properly
operating modulator, and ensure that power levels, data rates, code rates,
etc. are compatible.
3. Allow the modem to lock up:
a. Depending on the data rate and overhead type, lock-up may take
several seconds.
b. When the GREEN IF and Data Lock LEDs are ON and any fault has
been cleared (where applicable), the modem will run at the specified
error rate.
c. Run the Rx power level (input amplitude) over the full range and
offset the Tx frequency from the nominal Rx frequency by up to ±30
kHz.
d. Ensure the modem still runs within the specified error rate.
4. Set up the modem to check the constellation by hooking an oscilloscope
that is set in the X-Y mode to ‘J9 Auxiliary’ pins 3 and 8. An alternative
method is to use a computer and the IQ Mon program with an Ethernet
connection to the modem. Typical constellation patterns are shown with
noise (Figure A-4) and without noise (Figure A-5).
A–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix A
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
PC version IQ monitor with noise
Oscilloscope WITH NOISE
Figure A-4. Typical Constellation Patterns – With Noise
A–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix A
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
PC Version IQ Monitor WITHOUT NOISE
Oscilloscope WITHOUT NOISE
Figure A-5. Typical Constellation Patterns – Without Noise
A–8
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix A
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
A.3 Fault Isolation
The design of the modem allows for removal and replacement of some faulty
components in the field. The optional interface PCB’s can be removed from the
modem through the rear panel, without requiring special tools. The TURBO PCB
and power supply can be replaced if the top cover is removed.
CAUTION
This equipment contains parts and assemblies sensitive to damage by
ESD. Use ESD precautionary procedures when touching, removing, or
inserting PCBs.
The fault monitoring capability of the modem assists the operator in determining
which PCB has failed. If possible, replace the faulty PCB and return the damaged
board to Comtech EF Data Product Support for repair. If not, return the complete
modem.
The fault isolation procedure lists the following categories of faults or alarms:
• Modulator
• Demodulator
• Transmit Interface
• Receive Interface
• Unit (Common Equipment)
1) Each fault or alarm category includes possible problems and the
appropriate action required to repair the modem.
2) If any of the troubleshooting procedures mentioned earlier in this
appendix do not isolate the problem and Comtech EF Data Product
Support assistance is necessary, have the following information available
for the representative:
• Modem configuration. Modem configuration includes the
modulator, demodulator, interface, or local AUPC sections.
• Faults (active or stored).
A–9
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix A
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
This section provides instructions for checking the modem setup within
the earth station. Due to the complexity of the modem circuitry, the
checkout procedure should be used only as a basic guideline. More
complicated maintenance tests are beyond the scope of this manual.
CAUTION
This equipment contains parts and assemblies sensitive to damage by
ESD. Use ESD precautionary procedures when touching, removing, or
inserting PCBs.
A–10
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix A
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
A.4 System Faults/Alarms
System faults are reported in MONITOR: Alarms from the front panel menu, and
stored faults are reported in the MONITOR: Event-Log menu. To determine the
appropriate action for repairing the modem, refer to Table A-2 and the list of
possible problems.
Table A-2. SLM-5650A Fault Tree
Test Note
1
2
3
**
****
Fault Tree Legend
Fault/Alarm Relay
Test Points Connector/Pins
TX FAULT
J8/Pin 2 (N.O.), 1 (COM), 6 (N.C.) ****
RX FAULT
J8/Pin 5 (N.O.), 4 (COM), 9 (N.C.) ****
UNIT FAULT
J8/Pin 8 (N.O.), 7 (COM), 3 (N.C.) ****
The IF output is only affected if that particular FEC card is currently passing traffic.
A connection between the common and N.O. contacts indicate no fault/alarm.
FAULT TYPE
MODULATOR
FAULTS
TX
RX
UNIT
TX IF
TX
RX
UNIT
FAULT
FAULT
FAULT AUDIBLE
OUTPUT STATUS
STATUS
STATUS
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY ALARM
OFF
LED
LED
LED
(1)
(2)
(3)
NONE
MOD SYMBOL
CLOCK PLL
MOD
SYNTHESIZER
PLL
MOD I/Q
ACTIVITY
MOD FILTER
CLIPPING
TX INTERFACE
CLOCK PLL
TX INTF
CLOCK
ACTIVITY
TX INTERFACE
SCT PLL
TX INTERFACE
DATA AIS
DEMODULATOR NONE
FAULTS
DEMOD
CARRIER
LOCK
DEMOD
DECODER
LOCK
DEMOD
SYNTHESIZER
PLL
DEMOD I/Q
ACTIVITY
TX
AIS
RX
AIS
GREEN
X
RED
X
X
X
X
RED
X
X
X
X
RED
X
X
X
X
RED
X
X
X
RED
X
X
X
AMBER
X
RED
X
AMBER
X
X
X
X
GREEN
RED
X
X
X
RED
X
X
X
RED
X
X
X
RED
X
X
X
A–11
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix A
FAULT TYPE
DEMODULATOR DEMUX LOCK
FAULTS (cont.)
BUFFER
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
TX
RX
UNIT
TX IF
TX
RX
UNIT
FAULT
FAULT
FAULT AUDIBLE
OUTPUT STATUS
STATUS
STATUS
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY ALARM
OFF
LED
LED
LED
(1)
(2)
(3)
BUFFER FILL
BUFFER
OVERFLOW
BUFFER
UNDERFLOW
BUFFER PLL
UNIT FAULTS
RX
AIS
RED
X
X
X
RED
X
X
X
AMBER
X
AMBER
X
AMBER
X
RED
X
X
X
AMBER
X
AMBER
X
AMBER
X
AMBER
X
BUFFER CLK
REF ACTIVITY
RX INTERFACE
DATA AIS
Eb/N0
THRESHOLD
BERT SYNC
LOSS
NONE
X
GREEN
+5.0V POWER
X
RED
X
X
+3.3V POWER
X
RED
X
X
+2.5V POWER
X
RED
X
X
+1.5V POWER
X
RED
X
X
+12V POWER
X
RED
X
X
-12V POWER
X
RED
X
X
+18V POWER
X
RED
X
X
RED
X
X
AMBER
X
X
X
RED
X
X
X
RED
X
X
X
RED
X
X
X
RED
X
X
RED
X
X
RED
X
X
RED
X
X
RED
X
X
X**
RED
X
X
X**
RED
X
X
RED
X
X
COOLING FAN
EXTERNAL
REF ACTIVITY
192 MHZ
CLOCK PLL
10 MHZ REF
PLL
M&C FPGA
CONFIG
MOD FPGA
CONFIG
DEMOD FPGA
CONFIG
DECODER
FPGA CONFIG
TX INTF FPGA
CONFIG
RX INTF FPGA
CONFIG
FEC #1 FPGA
CONFIG
FEC #2 FPGA
CONFIG
OPTION CARD
FPGA CONFIG
TX
AIS
X
A–12
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix A
FAULT TYPE
UNIT FAULTS
(cont.)
FPGA DCM
PHASE LOCK
LOOP FAULT
NP MAILBOX
COMM ERROR
TRANSEC
MAILBOX
COMM ERROR
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
TX
RX
UNIT
TX IF
TX
RX
UNIT
FAULT
FAULT
FAULT AUDIBLE
OUTPUT STATUS
STATUS
STATUS
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY ALARM
OFF
LED
LED
LED
(1)
(2)
(3)
RED
X
X
RED
X
X
RED
X
X
TX
AIS
RX
AIS
A.5 LED Display and Description
The 10 Light-Emitting Diode (LED) indicators (Item 4 in Figure 7-1) convey
operational states as follows:
• General modem summary fault information;
• Status;
• Alarms.
The behavior of the individual front panel LED indicators is as follows:
• The LED lights GREEN when there are no faults or alarms.
• The LED lights AMBER to indicate that an alarm currently exists. It is
stored in the Event Log memory.
• The LED lights RED to indicate that a fault currently exists. It is stored in
the Event Log memory.
Take particular note of the following LEDs:
Tx ON
• Lights GREEN when the Transmitter is currently ON (this LED reflects the
actual operating state of the transmitter, and not its programmed
setting).
• Remains OFF when the Transmitter is OFF.
A–13
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix A
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
IF LOCK
• Lights GREEN if the Demodulator has constellation lock.
• Remains OFF when there is no constellation lock.
DATA LOCK
• Lights GREEN if the Decoder is locked.
• Remains OFF when there is no Decoder lock.
REMOTE
• Lights GREEN if the modem is in Remote Communication Mode.
• Remains OFF when the unit is in Local Mode (remote monitoring is
possible, but there is no remote control).
TEST MODE
• Lights AMBER when a Test Mode (e.g., IF Loopback) is active.
• Remains OFF when no Test Modes are active.
There could be any number of reasons for a front panel LED to indicate a fault or
an alarm:
• The modem can store up to a total of 255 occurrences of any fault. Use
the front panel MONITOR: Event-log menu to review faults as they occur.
• Alarms are considered minor faults. Alarms are shown on the front panel
VFD in the MONITOR: Alarms nested Transmit, Receive, and Unit screens.
Alarms are graphically represented by a reverse-contrast (white on black)
“+”.
A–14
Appendix B. OPERATIONAL
REFERENCES
B.1 Overview
This appendix provides the end user with reference guides for the following
operational parameters:
• Section B.2 Modes provides tables showing the various operating modes’
available data rates and ranges.
• Section B.3 Clocking Options provides information about common
clocking options and recommended configurations.
• Section B.4 Buffering.
B–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
B.2 Modes
The Data Rates and Symbol Rates shown in the following tables all assume that
Transmission Security (TRANSEC) is turned off. In order to calculate the max data
rate with TRANSEC on, the max data rate shown in the table becomes a max
aggregate data rate. The real data rate can be calculated by dividing the TRANSEC
overhead rate from the aggregate data rate. The TRANSEC overhead rate can be
calculated for any TRANSEC Frame Length (N) as follows:
TRANSEC Overhead Rate = (3 + 16 * N) / (16 * N)
B.2.1
OM-73 Mode
Modulation
Type
BPSK 1/1
BPSK 1/2
BPSK 3/4
BPSK 7/8
QPSK 1/1
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
OQPSK 1/1
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 7/8
B.2.2
Data Rate (kbps)
Min
Max
64
8472
64
15000
64
22500
64
26250
64
20000
64
30000
64
45000
64
51840
64
20000
64
30000
64
45000
64
51840
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
Max
64
10000
128
30000
85.333
29999.999
73.142
30000
32
10000
64
30000
42.666
30000
36.571
29622.857
32
10000
64
30000
42.666
30000
36.571
29622.857
MIL-STD-188-165A Mode
Modulation
Type
BPSK 1/1
BPSK 1/2
BPSK 3/4
BPSK 7/8
QPSK 1/1
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
R-S Code
Word
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
R-S Depth
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Data Rate (kbps)
Min
Max
64
8472
64
15000
64
22500
64
26250
64
20000
64
30000
64
45000
64
51840
B–2
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
Max
64
10000
128
30000
85.333
29999.999
73.142
30000
32
10000
64
30000
42.666
30000
36.571
29622.857
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
Modulation
Type
OQPSK 1/1
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 7/8
8-PSK 2/3
8-PSK 5/6
BPSK 1/2
BPSK 1/2
BPSK 1/2
BPSK 1/2
BPSK 3/4
BPSK 3/4
BPSK 3/4
BPSK 3/4
BPSK 7/8
BPSK 7/8
BPSK 7/8
BPSK 7/8
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 7/8
OQPSK 7/8
OQPSK 7/8
OQPSK 7/8
R-S Code
Word
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
126,112
219,201
225,205
220,200
126,112
219,201
225,205
220,200
126,112
219,201
225,205
220,200
126,112
219,201
225,205
220,200
126,112
219,201
225,205
220,200
126,112
219,201
225,205
220,200
126,112
219,201
225,205
220,200
126,112
219,201
225,205
220,200
126,112
219,201
225,205
220,200
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
R-S Depth
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
Data Rate (kbps)
Min
Max
64
20000
64
30000
64
45000
64
51840
256
51840
256
51840
64
13333.333
64
13767.123
64
13666.666
64
13636.363
64
20000
64
20650.684
64
20500
64
20454.545
64
23333.333
64
24092.465
64
23916.666
64
23863.636
64
26666.666
64
27534.246
64
27333.333
64
27272.727
64
40000
64
41301.369
64
41000
64
40909.090
64
46666.666
64
48184.931
64
47833.333
64
47727.272
64
26666.666
64
27534.246
64
27333.333
64
27272.727
64
40000
64
41301.369
64
41000
64
40909.090
64
46666.666
64
48184.931
64
47833.333
64
47727.272
B–3
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
Max
32
10000
64
30000
42.666
30000
36.571
29622.857
128
25920
102.4
20736
144
29999.999
139.462
29999.999
140.487
29999.998
140.8
30000
96
29999.999
92.975
29999.998
93.658
29999.999
93.867
29999.999
82.826
30000
79.692
29999.999
80.278
29999.999
80.457
30000
72
29999.999
69.371
29999.999
70.243
29999.999
70.4
30000
48
30000
46.487
29999.999
46.829
30000
46.933
30000
41.143
30000
39.846
29999.999
40.139
29999.999
40.229
30000
72
29999.999
69.371
29999.999
70.243
29999.999
70.4
30000
48
30000
46.487
29999.999
46.829
30000
46.933
30000
41.143
30000
39.846
29999.999
40.139
29999.999
40.229
30000
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
Modulation
Type
8-PSK 2/3
8-PSK 2/3
8-PSK 2/3
8-PSK 2/3
8-PSK 5/6
8-PSK 5/6
8-PSK 5/6
8-PSK 5/6
B.2.3
R-S Code
Word
126,112
219,201
225,205
220,200
126,112
219,201
225,205
220,200
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
R-S Depth
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
4, 8
Data Rate (kbps)
Min
Max
256
51840
256
51840
256
51840
256
51840
256
51840
256
51840
256
51840
256
51840
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
Max
144
29160
139.462
28241.194
140.487
28448.78
140.8
28512
115.2
23328
111.57
22592.955
112.39
22759.024
112.64
22809.6
MIL-STD-188-165A Mode – Sequential
Modulation
Type
BPSK 1/2
BPSK 1/2
BPSK 1/2
BPSK 1/2
BPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 3/4
R-S Code
Word
OFF
126/112
219,201
225,205
220,200
OFF
126/112
219,201
225,205
220,200
OFF
126/112
219,201
225,205
220,200
OFF
126/112
219,201
225,205
220,200
OFF
126/112
219,201
225,205
220,200
OFF
126/112
219,201
225,205
R-S Depth
Data Rate (kbps)
Min
Max
64
1067
64
1171
64
1171
64
1171
64
1171
64
2500
64
2222.222
64
2294.520
64
2277.777
64
2272.727
64
3750
64
3333.333
64
3441.780
64
3416.666
64
3409.090
64
4375
64
3888.888
64
4015.410
64
3986.111
64
3977.272
64
2500
64
2222.222
64
2294.520
64
2277.777
64
2272.727
64
3750
64
3333.333
64
3441.780
64
3416.666
N/A
4/8
4/8
4/8
4/8
N/A
4/8
4/8
4/8
4/8
N/A
4/8
4/8
4/8
4/8
N/A
4/8
4/8
4/8
4/8
N/A
4/8
4/8
4/8
4/8
N/A
4/8
4/8
4/8
B–4
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
Max
128
2134
144
2634.750
139.463
2551.731
140.488
2570.488
140.800
2576.200
64
2500
72
2500
69.731
2500
70.243
2500
70.400
2500
42.667
2500
48
2500
46.487
2500
46.829
2500
46.933
2500
36.571
2500
41.142
2500
39.846
2500
40.139
2500
40.228
2500
64
2500
72
2500
69.731
2500
70.243
2500
70.400
2500
42.667
2500
48
2500
46.487
2500
46.829
2500
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
Modulation
Type
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 7/8
OQPSK 7/8
OQPSK 7/8
OQPSK 7/8
OQPSK 7/8
B.2.4
R-S Code
Word
220,200
OFF
126/112
219,201
225,205
220,200
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
R-S Depth
Data Rate (kbps)
Min
Max
64
3409.090
64
4375
64
3888.888
64
4015.410
64
3986.111
64
3977.272
4/8
N/A
4/8
4/8
4/8
4/8
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
Max
46.933
2500
36.571
2500
41.142
2500
39.846
2500
40.139
2500
40.228
2500
IESS-308 Mode – Standard Higher Rates
Modulation
Type
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
Overhead
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
R-S Code
Word
Off
Off
Off
Off
194,178
194,178
194,178
194,178
219,201
219,201
219,201
219,201
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
126,112
126,112
126,112
126,112
208,192
208,192
208,192
208,192
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
R-S Depth
Data Rate (kbps)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
1544
2048
6312
8448
1544
2048
6312
8448
1544
2048
6312
8448
1544
2048
6312
8448
1544
2048
6312
8448
1544
2048
6312
8448
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
44736
B–5
Symbol Rate
(ksps)
1640
2144
6408
8544
1778.787
2328.09
6975.371
9303.371
1778.269
2327.403
6973.254
9300.537
1790.634
2343.805
7023.805
9368.195
1833
2400
7197
9600
1776.708
2325.333
6966.875
9292
1029.333
1365.333
4208
5632
21376
22912
29824
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
Modulation
Type
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
Overhead
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
R-S Code
Word
194,178
194,178
194,178
194,178
194,178
194,178
219,201
219,201
219,201
219,201
219,201
219,201
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
126,112
126,112
126,112
126,112
126,112
126,112
208,192
208,192
208,192
208,192
208,192
208,192
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
194,178
194,178
194,178
194,178
194,178
R-S Depth
Data Rate (kbps)
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 1
4, 8, 1
4, 8, 1
4, 8, 1
4, 8, 1
4, 8, 1
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
44736
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
B–6
Symbol Rate
(ksps)
1217.858
1584.06
4682.247
6324.247
23393.438
25067.506
1217.512
1583.602
4680.836
6232.358
23386.269
25059.821
1225.756
1594.537
4714.537
6277.463
23557.463
25243.317
1254
1632
4830
6432
24144
25872
1216.472
1582.222
4676.583
626.667
23364.667
25036.667
882.286
1170.286
3606.857
4827.428
20040.571
21473.714
27922.857
1057.592
1371.48
4027.069
5357.355
20065.233
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
Modulation
Type
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
QPSK 7/8
B.2.5
Overhead
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
IESS-308
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
R-S Code
Word
194,178
194,178
219,201
219,201
219,201
219,201
219,201
219,201
219,201
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
126,112
126,112
126,112
126,112
126,112
126,112
126,112
208,192
208,192
208,192
208,192
208,192
208,192
208,192
R-S Depth
Data Rate (kbps)
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
34368
44736
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
44736
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
44736
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
44736
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
44736
Symbol Rate
(ksps)
21500.148
27957.265
1057.296
1371.087
4025.859
5355.736
20059.087
21493.561
27948.691
1064.362
1380.46
4054.743
5394.397
20205.826
26150.843
28153.422
1088.571
1412.571
4153.714
5526.857
20708.571
22189.714
28854.857
1056.405
1369.905
4022.214
5350.857
20040.571
21473.714
27922.857
IESS-308 Mode – Extended
Modulation
R-S Code
Overhead
R-S Depth
Type
Word
QPSK 1/2
None
Off
N/A
QPSK 1/2
None
126,112
4, 8, 16
QPSK 1/2
None
219,201
4, 8, 16
QPSK 1/2
None
194,178
4, 8, 16
QPSK 1/2
None
225,205
4, 8, 16
QPSK 1/2
None
208,192
4, 8, 16
QPSK 1/2
IESS-309
Off
N/A
B–7
Data Rate (kbps)
Min
Max
64
30000
64
26666.666
64
27534.246
64
27525.773
64
27333.333
64
27559.809
64
8448
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
Max
64
30000
72
29999.999
69.371
29999.999
69.573
30000
70.243
29999.999
69.667
30000
68.267
9011.2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Modulation
R-S Code
Overhead
R-S Depth
Type
Word
QPSK 1/2
IESS-309 126,112
4, 8, 16
QPSK 1/2
IESS-309 194,178
4, 8, 16
QPSK 1/2
IESS-309 225,205
4, 8, 16
QPSK 1/2
IESS-309 208,192
4, 8, 16
QPSK 3/4
None
Off
N/A
QPSK 3/4
None
126,112
4, 8, 16
QPSK 3/4
None
219,201
4, 8, 16
QPSK 3/4
None
194,178
4, 8, 16
QPSK 3/4
None
225,205
4, 8, 16
QPSK 3/4
None
208,192
4, 8, 16
QPSK 3/4
IESS-309
Off
N/A
QPSK 3/4
IESS-309 126,112
4, 8, 16
QPSK 3/4
IESS-309 219,201
4, 8, 16
QPSK 3/4
IESS-309 194,178
4, 8, 16
QPSK 3/4
IESS-309 225,205
4, 8, 16
QPSK 3/4
IESS-309 208,192
4, 8, 16
QPSK 7/8
None
Off
N/A
QPSK 7/8
None
126,112
4, 8, 16
QPSK 7/8
None
219,201
4, 8, 16
QPSK 7/8
None
194,178
4, 8, 16
QPSK 7/8
None
225,205
4, 8, 16
QPSK 7/8
None
208,192
4, 8, 16
QPSK 7/8
IESS-309
Off
N/A
QPSK 7/8
IESS-309 126,112
4, 8, 16
QPSK 7/8
IESS-309 219,201
4, 8, 16
QPSK 7/8
IESS-309 194,178
4, 8, 16
QPSK 7/8
IESS-309 225,205
4, 8, 16
QPSK 7/8
IESS-309 208,192
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 1/2
None
Off
N/A
OQPSK 1/2
None
126,112
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 1/2
None
219,201
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 1/2
None
194,178
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 1/2
None
225,205
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 1/2
None
208,192
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 1/2 IESS-309
Off
N/A
OQPSK 1/2 IESS-309 126,112
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 1/2 IESS-309 219,201
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 1/2 IESS-309 194,178
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 1/2 IESS-309 225,205
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 1/2 IESS-309 208,192
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 3/4
None
Off
N/A
OQPSK 3/4
None
126,112
4, 8, 16
B–8
Data Rate (kbps)
Min
Max
64
8448
64
8448
64
8448
64
8448
64
45000
64
40000
64
41301.369
64
41288.65
64
41000
64
41339.713
64
8448
64
8448
64
8448
64
8448
64
8448
64
8448
64
51840
64
46666.666
64
48184.931
64
48170.103
64
47833.333
64
48229.665
64
8448
64
8448
64
8448
64
8448
64
8448
64
8448
64
30000
64
26666.666
64
27534.246
64
27525.773
64
27333.333
64
27559.809
64
8448
64
8448
64
8448
64
8448
64
8448
64
8448
64
20000
64
40000
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
Max
76.8
10137.6
74.403
9821.196
74.927
9890.341
74.311
9809.067
42.666
30000
48
30000
46.487
29999.999
46.502
30000
46.829
30000
46.444
30000
45.511
6007.467
51.2
6758.4
49.587
6545.449
49.602
6547.464
49.951
6593.561
49.541
6539.378
36.571
29622.857
41.143
30000
39.846
29999.999
38.859
30000
40.139
29999.999
39.81
29999.999
39.01
4827.428
43.886
5792.914
42.503
5610.385
42.516
5612.112
42.818
5561.624
42.463
5604.181
64
30000
72
29999.999
69.371
29999.999
69.573
30000
70.243
29999.999
69.667
30000
68.267
901.2
76.8
10137.6
74.38
9818.173
74.403
9821.196
74.927
9890.341
74.311
9809.067
42.666
30000
48
30000
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Modulation
R-S Code
Overhead
R-S Depth
Type
Word
OQPSK 3/4
None
219,201
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 3/4
None
194,178
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 3/4
None
225,205
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 3/4
None
208,192
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 3/4 IESS-309
Off
N/A
OQPSK 3/4 IESS-309 126,112
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 3/4 IESS-309 219,201
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 3/4 IESS-309 194,178
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 3/4 IESS-309 225,205
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 3/4 IESS-309 208,192
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 7/8
None
Off
N/A
OQPSK 7/8
None
126,112
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 7/8
None
219,201
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 7/8
None
194,178
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 7/8
None
225,205
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 7/8
None
208,192
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 7/8 IESS-309
Off
N/A
OQPSK 7/8 IESS-309 126,112
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 7/8 IESS-309 219,201
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 7/8 IESS-309 194,178
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 7/8 IESS-309 225,205
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 7/8 IESS-309 208,192
4, 8, 16
B.2.6
Data Rate (kbps)
Min
Max
64
41301.369
64
41288.65
64
41000
64
41339.713
64
8448
64
8448
64
8448
64
8448
64
8448
64
8448
64
20000
64
46666.666
64
48184.931
64
48170.103
64
47833.333
64
48229.665
64
8448
64
8448
64
8448
64
8448
64
8448
64
8448
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
Max
46.487
29999.999
46.502
30000
46.829
30000
46.444
30000
45.511
6007.467
51.2
6758.4
49.587
6545.449
49.602
6547.464
49.951
6593.561
49.541
6539.378
36.571
29622.857
41.143
30000
39.846
29999.999
38.859
30000
40.139
29999.999
39.81
29999.999
39.01
4827.428
43.886
5792.914
42.503
5610.385
42.516
5612.112
42.818
5561.624
42.463
5604.181
IESS-309 Mode – Extended (Closed Network)
Modulation
R-S Code
Overhead
R-S Depth
Type
Word
BPSK 1/2
None
Off
N/A
BPSK 1/2
None
219,201
4, 8, 16
BPSK 1/2
IESS-309
Off
N/A
BPSK 1/2
IESS-309 219,201
4, 8, 16
BPSK 3/4
None
Off
N/A
BPSK 3/4
None
219,201
4, 8, 16
BPSK 3/4
IESS-309
Off
N/A
BPSK 3/4
IESS-309 219,201
4, 8, 16
QPSK 1/2
None
Off
N/A
QPSK 1/2
None
219,201
4, 8, 16
QPSK 1/2
IESS-309
Off
N/A
QPSK 1/2
IESS-309 219,201
4, 8, 16
QPSK 3/4
None
Off
N/A
QPSK 3/4
None
219,201
4, 8, 16
B–9
Data Rate (kbps)
Min
Max
64
15000
64
13767.123
64
8448
64
8448
64
22500
64
20650.684
64
8448
64
8448
64
30000
64
27534.246
64
8448
64
8448
64
20000
64
41301.369
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
Max
128
30000
139.462 29999.999
136.533
18022.4
148.76
19636.346
85.333
29999.999
92.975
29999.999
91.022
12014.933
99.173
13090.898
64
30000
69.371
29999.999
68.267
9011.2
74.38
9818.173
42.666
30000
46.487
29999.999
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Modulation
R-S Code
Overhead
R-S Depth
Type
Word
QPSK 3/4
IESS-309
Off
N/A
QPSK 3/4
IESS-309 219,201
4,8, 16
OQPSK 1/2
None
Off
N/A
OQPSK 1/2
None
219,201
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 1/2 IESS-309
Off
N/A
OQPSK 1/2 IESS-309 219,201
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 3/4
None
Off
N/A
OQPSK 3/4
None
219,201
4, 8, 16
OQPSK 3/4 IESS-309
Off
N/A
OQPSK 3/4 IESS-309 219,201
4, 8, 16
B.2.7
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
Max
45.511
6007.467
49.587
6545.449
64
30000
69.371
29999.999
68.267
9011.2
74.38
9818.173
42.666
30000
46.487
29999.999
45.511
6007.467
49.587
6545.449
IESS-310 Mode – Extended Rates
Modulation
Type
8-PSK 2/3
8-PSK 2/3
8-PSK 2/3
8-PSK 2/3
8-PSK 2/3
8-PSK 2/3
8-PSK 2/3
8-PSK 2/3
8-PSK 2/3
8-PSK 2/3
8-PSK 2/3
B.2.8
Data Rate (kbps)
Min
Max
64
8448
64
8448
64
30000
64
27534.246
64
8448
64
8448
64
20000
64
41301.369
64
8448
64
8448
Overhead
None
None
IESS-309
IESS-309
IESS-309
IESS-309
IESS-309
IESS-309
IESS-309
IESS-309
IESS-309
R-S Code
Word
219,201
219,201
219,201
219,201
219,201
219,201
219,201
219,201
219,201
219,201
219,201
R-S Depth
Data Rate (kbps)
Symbol Rate (ksps)
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
256
51840
256
8448
1544
2048
6312
8448
32064
34368
44736
139.463
28241.194
148.76
4909.087
937.134
1211.701
3534.627
4698.269
17563.701
18818.866
24467.104
Turbo Code Mode
Modulation Type
BPSK 21/44
BPSK 5/16
QPSK 17/18
QPSK 21/44
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
OQPSK 17/18
OQPSK 21/44
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 7/8
Data Rate (kbps)
Min
Max
64
30545.454
64
20000
64
120888.888
64
61090.909
64
96000
64
112000
64
120888.888
64
61090.909
64
96000
64
112000
B–10
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
Max
134.095
63999.999
204.8
64000
33.882
63999.999
67.047
63999.999
42.666
64000
36.571
64000
33.882
63999.999
67.047
63999.999
42.666
64000
36.571
64000
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
Data Rate (kbps)
Min
Max
256
155520
256
144000
256
155520
256
155520
256
155520
Modulation Type
8-PSK 17/18
8-PSK 3/4
8-PSK 7/8
16-QAM 3/4
16-QAM 7/8
B.2.9
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
Max
90.352
54889.411
113.777
64000
97.523
59245.714
85.333
51840
73.143
44434.285
16-QAM Mode
Modulation
Type
16-QAM 3/4
16-QAM 3/4
16-QAM 3/4
16-QAM 7/8
16-QAM 7/8
16-QAM 7/8
R-S Code
Word
None
219,201
208,192
None
219,201
208,192
R-S Depth
None
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
None
4, 8, 16
4, 8, 16
Data Rate ( kbps)
Min
Max
256
51840
256
51840
256
51840
256
51840
256
51840
256
51840
Symbol Rate ( ksps)
Min
Max
85.333
17280
92.975
18827.462
92.889
18810
73.143
14811.428
79.692
16137.825
79.619
16122.857
16-QAM 3/4 requires Reed-Solomon to be ON in order to automatically
resolve data ambiguities.
B.2.10 AUPC Mode
Modulation
Type
BPSK 1/1
BPSK 1/2
BPSK 3/4
BPSK 7/8
QPSK 1/1
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
OQPSK 1/1
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 7/8
8PSK 2/3
8PSK 5/6
16QAM 3/4
16QAM 7/8
BPSK 1/2
R-S Code
Word
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
225,205
Data Rate ( kbps)
Min
Max
64
7942.500
64
14062.500
64
21093.750
64
24609.375
64
18750
64
28125
64
42187.500
64
49218.750
64
18750
64
28125
64
42187.500
64
49218.750
64
51840
64
51840
64
51840
64
51840
256
12812.500
R-S Depth
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
8
B–11
Symbol Rate ( ksps)
Min
Max
68.266
8472
136.533
30000
91.022
30000
78.019
30000
34.133
10000
68.266
30000
45.511
30000
39.009
30000
34.133
10000
68.266
30000
45.511
30000
39.009
30000
136.533
27648
109.226
22118.400
91.022
18432
78.019
15798.857
149.853
30000
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
Modulation
Type
BPSK 3/4
BPSK 7/8
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 7/8
8PSK 2/3
8PSK 5/6
16QAM 3/4
16QAM 7/8
R-S Code
Word
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
R-S Depth
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
Data Rate ( kbps)
Min
Max
256
19218.750
256
22421.875
256
25625
256
38437.500
256
44843.750
256
25625
256
38437.500
256
44843.750
256
51250
256
51840
256
51840
256
51840
Symbol Rate ( ksps)
Min
Max
99.902
30000
85.630
30000
74.926
30000
49.951
30000
42.815
30000
74.926
30000
49.951
30000
42.815
30000
149.853
30000
119.882
24276.292
99.902
20230.243
85.630
17340.209
B.2.11 AUPC Mode – Sequential
Modulation
Type
R-S Code
Word
R-S Depth
BPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 7/8
BPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 7/8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
225,205
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
Data Rate ( kbps)
Min
Max
64
1171
64
2048
64
2048
64
2048
64
2048
64
2048
64
2048
64
1067
64
2048
64
2048
64
2048
64
2048
64
2048
64
2048
Symbol Rate ( ksps)
Min
Max
136.533
2498.133
68.266
2184.533
45.511
1456.355
39.009
1248.304
68.266
2184.533
45.511
1456.355
39.009
1248.304
149.853
2498.341
74.926
2397.658
49.951
1598.439
42.815
1370.09
74.926
2397.658
49.951
1598.439
42.815
1370.09
B.2.12 AUPC Mode – Turbo
Modulation
Type
BPSK 21/44
BPSK 5/16
QPSK 17/18
Data Rate (kbps)
Min
Max
64
13423.295
64
8789.062
64
51840
B–12
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
Max
143.034
29999.998
218.453
29999.998
36.141
29274.352
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
Modulation
Type
QPSK 21/44
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
OQPSK 17/18
OQPSK 21/44
OQPSK 3/4
OQPSK 7/8
8PSK 17/18
8PSK 3/4
8PSK 7/8
16QAM 3/4
16QAM 7/8
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Data Rate (kbps)
Min
Max
64
26846.590
64
42187.500
64
49218.750
64
51840
64
26846.590
64
42187.500
64
49218.750
256
51840
256
51840
256
51840
256
51840
256
51840
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
Max
71.517
29999.998
45.511
30000
39.009
30000
36.141
29274.352
71.517
29999.998
45.511
30000
39.009
30000
96.376
19516.235
121.362
24576
104.025
21065.142
91.022
18432
78.019
15798.857
B.2.13 LDPC Mode – Ultra Low Latency (ULL)
Modulation
Type
BPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 2/3
QPSK 3/4
Data Rate (kbps)
Min
Max
32*
2000
32
2000
41.851
2000
46.991
2000
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
Max
64.868
4054.263
32.434
2027.131
32
1529.239
32
1361.979
DR to SR
Multiplier
2092/1032
2092/2064
2092/5448
2092/3072
*Minimum Data Rate is 8 kbps with Spreading Enabled
B.2.14 LDPC Mode – Low Latency (LL)
Modulation
Type
BPSK .382
BPSK .456
BPSK .547
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 2/3
QPSK 3/4
QPSK 7/8
8QAM 2/3
8QAM 3/4
8QAM 7/8
16QAM 2/3
Data Rate (kbps)
Min
Max
32*
5000
32*
5000
32*
5000
32
5000
42.480
5000
47.720
5000
55.767
5000
256
5000
256
5000
256
5000
256
5000
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
Max
84.676
13230.769
71.019
11096.774
59.182
9247.311
32.188
5029.411
32
3766.519
32
3352.941
32
2869.127
128.313
2506.118
114.223
2230.936
97.741
1909.023
96.140
1877.753
B–13
DR to SR
Multiplier
4128/1560
4128/1860
4128/2232
4104/4080
4104/5448
4104/6120
4104/7152
4096/8172
4096/9180
4096/10728
4092/10944
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
Modulation
Type
16QAM 3/4
16QAM 7/8
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Data Rate (kbps)
Min
Max
256
5000
256
5000
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
Max
85.584
1671.568
73.234
1430.369
DR to SR
Multiplier
4092/12240
4092/14304
*Minimum Data Rate is 8 kbps with Spreading Enabled
B.2.15 LDPC Mode – High Performance (HP)
Modulation
Type
BPSK 1/2
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 2/3
QPSK 3/4
OQPSK 1/2
OQPSK 2/3
OQPSK 3/4
8QAM 2/3
8QAM 3/4
16QAM 3/4
Data Rate (kbps)
Min
Max
32*
15000
32
30000
42.667
40000
48
45000
32
30000
42.667
40000
48
45000
256
41000
256
46000
256
46000
Symbol Rate (ksps)
Min
Max
64
30000
32
30000
32
30000
32
30000
32
30000
32
30000
32
30000
128
20500
113.777
20444.444
85.333
15333.333
*Minimum Data Rate is 8 kbps with Spreading Enabled
B–14
DR to SR
Multiplier
16416/8208
8208/8208
8208/10944
8208/12384
8208/8208
8208/10944
8208/12384
5472/10944
5504/12384
4128/12384
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
B.3 Clocking Options
Clocking of the data from the terrestrial equipment to the satellite (and vice
versa) will depend on the application. This section describes the most common
options and recommended configurations.
SCT (INTERNAL) clock no longer applies when the modem has loop timing on.
The TX clock source is now recovered from the RX satellite data. This recovered
clock is put out on the ST line and is used to clock the terrestrial equipment. The
TX terrestrial clock is now essentially the same as the RX satellite clock, except
that it has been buffered by the terrestrial equipment.
Select TX TERRESTRIAL for the TX clock source when in loop timing, if your
equipment is being slaved off the modem.
B.3.1
IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Master
Use this application when both earth stations have high stability clocks and the
received data is to be clocked to the local network. Refer to Figure B-1 for:
• Clocking block diagram
• TX clock options
• Buffer clock options
The disadvantage of the master/master application is that the RX data will slip, as
the clocks will not be synchronized. If the buffer is properly set up, the slips will
be an exact frame length, causing minimum loss of data. By using very high
stability clocks, the expected time between slips can be several days.
Loss of the buffer clock will mean the buffer will not be emptied and data will not
be available. The buffer clock will normally revert to the low stability internal
reference automatically.
B–15
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Figure B-1. IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Master Clocking Diagram
B–16
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
B.3.2
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Slave
Use this application when the far end earth station does not have local access to
a high stability reference clock, or when it is not required to synchronize with a
local clock. Refer to Figure B-2 for:
• Clocking block diagram
• TX clock options
• Buffer clock options for using external loop timing
Modem loop timing does not apply for G.703 operation. The terrestrial
equipment must select loop timing to recover the clock off the RX data and use
that recovered clock for the TX data.
The disadvantage of the master/slave application is that the signal received at
the slave station is subject to Doppler shift. The length of the buffer at the
master end will need to be twice the length that is normally required,
compensating for the Doppler shift on the outward and return paths
B–17
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Figure B-2. IDR/IBS G.703 Master/Slave Clocking Diagram
B–18
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
B.4 Buffering
There are two reasons for a receive buffer:
1. Plesiochronous buffering of two dissimilar clock frequencies (normally the
far end TX clock verses the local network clock). The clocks may be very
close in frequency to each other and will normally slip at a constant rate.
Figure B-3 shows plesiochronous operation for dissimilar clocks. If
incoming traffic is too fast, an occasional bit will be lost. If incoming traffic
is too slow, an occasional bit will be repeated.
Figure B-3. Clock Slip
2. Doppler buffer of the signal of the satellite. The Doppler shift results from
the “Figure 8” station-keeping movement performed by the satellite in
space over a period of one day (Figure B-4). Doppler shift should not
result in a clock slip, as the buffer will constantly fill and empty.
B–19
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Figure B-4. Doppler Shift
If the two earth stations are configured as master/slave, then the buffer need
only be configured for Doppler operation. The buffer will then have sufficient
capacity for the Doppler shift on the outward and return paths.
A buffer set up for Doppler operation only will typically require less depth than
one intended for both Doppler and plesiochronous operation.
B.4.1
Buffer Size
The depth of the receive buffer will depend on four parameters:
1. Doppler shift caused by satellite.
2. Stability of each clock (plesiochronous/Doppler operation).
3. Frame/Multiframe length of multiplexed data format.
4. Allowable time between clock slips.
B.4.1.1 Doppler
A geostationary satellite should be positioned directly over the equator and orbit
with duration of 24 hours. In practice, the exact inclination of the satellite
(relative to the equator) is influenced by the earth, moon, and sun’s gravity, as
B–20
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
well as solar wind. Station-keeping motors are required to maintain the orbital
position.
When viewed from the earth, the satellite appears to prescribe an ellipse in
space, degrading to a “Figure 8” as the angle of inclination increases. The orbit of
the satellite can result in a peak-to-peak altitude variation of ± 2% (85 km), while
the station keeping of a newly launched satellite will typically be ± 0.1° (150 km).
The total effect will be 172 km relative to the nominal 42,164 km radius.
Depending upon the location of the earth station relative to the satellite, the
variation in propagation delay will typically be 1.15 ms (up to satellite and back
down); therefore a buffer depth of 2 ms is sufficient to cope with most
commercial satellites.
Since station-keeping involves using fuel in the motors, the “lifetime” of the
satellite can be extended by allowing the satellite to drift into a wider “Figure 8”
and using the motor less often.
The older satellites will be found in a more inclined orbit with the station keeping
varying in latitude by as much as ± 4°. The total effect of the inclined orbit may
result in a typical variation in path delay of 35 ms.
B.4.1.2 Plesiochronous
The stability of station reference clocks is normally 1 x 10-12 (derived from a
cesium standard). While the stability is exceptionally high, the two clocks are not
in synchronization with each other and will eventually pass by each other.
The clock used for the TX signal is passed over the satellite, but will not be used
at the RX earth station where a national network derives its time locally. A buffer
will fill up with data using the clock from the satellite and will empty using the
local clock. The object of the buffer is to ensure that the buffer overflows or
underflows at regular, determinable intervals (typically every 40 days). The buffer
depth required (from center to end) would be:
Minimum slip period (seconds) * [stability of far end
(transmit) clock + stability of local clock]
B–21
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
For example:
Far end (transmit) clock stability
1 x 10
-9
Local (buffer) clock
1 x 10
-11
Minimum clock slip
40 days
Buffer Depth=(40*24*60*60)(1*10-9 + 1*10-11)=3.49ms
Because the buffer will either fill or empty (depending on the frequency
relationship of the two clocks), the total buffer depth will be:
2*3.49ms = 6.98ms
B.4.1.3 Frame / Multiframe Length
The depth of the receive buffer required is applicable to all unframed data.
When the data is framed (such as 2048 kbps G732 or 1544 kbps G733), it is
desirable to provide slips in predefined locations. The advantage of organized slip
locations (in relation to the frame) is that multiplexing equipment does not lose
sync and outages on any channel are kept to a minimum.
A 2048 kbps frame structure commonly used is G732. This has a frame length of
256 bits with 16 frames per multiframe (4096 bits total, or 2 ms).
B.4.1.3.1
Multiples of the Frame Length
If this setting is set to NONE, you can choose any buffer depth.
B.4.1.3.2
Total Buffer Length
T1 and E1 framing structure under G.704 are available. When this is selected, the
buffer length is restricted to the size of the buffer. Using the examples from the
three previous sections, the total buffer depth, end to end, will be (rounded up
to the nearest multiframe):
1.15ms (Doppler) + 6.98ms (Plesiochronous)= 8.13ms
B–22
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
If the frame length is 2ms, then the nearest multiframe will be 10ms, or 20,480
bits.
B.4.1.3.3
Converting Between Bits and Seconds
•
Bits to Seconds:
1/Data Rate x Bits = Seconds
•
Seconds to Bits:
Data Rate x Seconds = Bit
B–23
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix B
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Notes:
B–24
Appendix C. OPTIONAL
DATA INTERFACE MODULES
C.1 Overview
The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem rear panel features two slots that
accommodate optional plug-in data interface modules. These modules plug into
either the Interface Option slot that is located on the rear panel of the
SLM-5650A chassis (Figure C-1).
Figure C-1. SLM-5650A Data Interface Module Slot (Empty)
By convention, a modem is Data Communications Equipment (DCE) where Tx
data enters the data interface and Rx data exits. Via the chassis’ internal data
interface module connections, theSLM-5650A provides physical and electrical
connection between the external terrestrial device and the internal circuitry of
the modulator or demodulator.
While the SLM-5650A’s available optional data interface modules are usually
ordered with the modem, they are easily field-installed. The available data
interface modules and reference to their pertinent section in this appendix are as
follows:
For Details
See Appendix Section
CEFD Kit / Assembly
Description
AS/11984
10/100/1000 BaseT (GbE) Interface
Module
C–1
C.2.1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
For Details
See Appendix Section
CEFD Kit / Assembly
Description
AS/11579
G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module
C.2.2
PL/12272-1
Low Voltage Differential (LVDS)
Interface Module
C.2.3
See Appendix D. OPTIONAL NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) INTERFACE
MODULE for complete information about this specific product.
C–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
C.2 SLM-5650A Optional Data Interface Modules
C.2.1
10/100/1000 BaseT (GbE) Interface Module
Figure C-2. 10/100/1000 BaseT (GbE) Interface Module (AS/11985)
The 10/100/1000 BaseT Ethernet – or Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) – Interface Module
(Figure C-2), acts as an Ethernet bridge for data traffic. Monitor and Control
(M&C) information is not supported on the GbE Interface but is available through
the 10/100 BaseT ‘J5 Ethernet’ port of the Base Modem.
The GbE Interface supports data rates from 64 kbps to 155.52 Mbps. IP traffic
entering the interface is encapsulated in HDLC protocol for transmission over the
satellite link. HDLC CRS-16 verification is performed on all received (from WAN)
HDLC frames. The GbE module user interface is a single IEEE 802.3ab 1000 BaseT
copper compliant female RJ-45 connector, wired as per Table C-1.
C.2.1.1
Physical Description
The 10/100/1000 Base GbE Interface Module is implemented on a 4.5W x 6.8D x
.85H inches (11.43W x 17.27D x 2.16H cm) PCB. Connectivity to the SLM-5650A is
accomplished with a 96-pin DIN receptacle. The functional block diagram is
shown in Figure C-3. Figure C-2 shows the rear panel view of the module. The
LAN interface consists of an RJ-45 connector with link status and link activity
Light-Emitting Diode (LED) indicators.
C–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Figure C-3. GbE Interface Functional Block Diagram
C.2.1.2
“J1” Connector Pinout
The GbE Interface is comprised of one IEEE 802.3ab 1000BaseT copper interface
via a single ‘RJ-45’ type female connector (J1). The LAN interface supports
10/100/1000 BaseT operation.
Table C-1. “J1” Connector Pinout
Pin #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Description
BI_DA+
BI_DABI_DB+
BI_DC+
BI_DCBI_DBBI_DD+
BI_DD-
C–4
Direction
bidirectional
bidirectional
bidirectional
bidirectional
bidirectional
bidirectional
bidirectional
bidirectional
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
C.2.1.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Specifications
C.2.1.3.1 General Specifications
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Data Framing: 10/100/1000 BaseT Interface: RFC-894 “Ethernet”
Data Framing Format (WAN): HDLC (Standard Single Channel)
Connector: RJ-45 female, 100Ω
Electrical Properties: Per IEEE 802.3ab
Packet Types: Burst, distributed, or IPV4
Signal Types: Serial data
Voltage Level: Per IEEE- 802.3ab
Packet Latency: 50 ms maximum
Flow Control: None
Cable Length, Maximum: 100 meters CAT 5 cable, patch cords and
connecting hardware, per ISO/IEC 11801:1995 and ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-A
(1995)
Hot Pluggable:
o Cable – YES
o Module – NO
LEDs: Link Status; Link Activity
Ingress Packet Filtration Parameters: MAC, IP Address match value
configuration for media and management packets, UDP port for media
packets
Egress Packet Parameters: Destination IP address and UDP port for media
packets
Packet Filtration Parameters (generic): IP Address match value
configuration for management packets
1000 BaseT Link Statistics:
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Ingress good octets
Ingress bad octets
Ingress Unicast packets
Ingress broadcast packets
Ingress multicast packets
Ingress pause packets
Ingress undersize packets
Ingress fragments
Ingress oversize packets
Ingress jabber
C–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
o
o
o
o
o
o
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Ingress Rx errors
Ingress Frame Check Sequence Errors
Egress octets
Egress Unicast packets
Egress broadcast packets
Egress multicast packets
C.2.1.3.2 Monitor & Control
•
WAN Port Statistics:
o Ingress good octets
o Ingress bad octets
o Ingress Unicast packets
o Ingress broadcast packets
o Ingress multicast packets
o Ingress pause packets
o Ingress undersize packets
o Ingress fragments
o Ingress oversize packets
o Ingress jabber
o Ingress Rx errors
o Ingress Frame Check Sequence Errors
o Egress octets
o Egress Unicast packets
o Egress broadcast packets
o Egress multicast packets
o HDLC link errors
o Rx packet count
o Tx packet count
•
Management Port Statistics:
o Ingress good octets
o Ingress bad octets
o Ingress Unicast packets
o Ingress broadcast packets
o Ingress multicast packets
o Ingress pause packets
o Ingress undersize packets
o Ingress fragments
C–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
•
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Ingress oversize packets
Ingress jabber
Ingress Rx errors
Ingress Frame Check Sequence Errors
Egress octets
Egress Unicast packets
Egress broadcast packets
Egress multicast packets
Controlled Functions
o TX data rate
o Rx data rate
o Tx enable/disable
o Rx enable/disable
o Management IP Address and Mask
C.2.1.3.3 Physical and Environmental
•
•
Physical Size – 4.5W x 6.8D x .85H inches (11.43W x 17.27D x 2.16H cm)
Environmental:
o Temperature – 32° to 122° F (0° to 50°C)
o Humidity – 0 to 95% non-condensing
C–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
C.2.1.4
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
10/100/1000 BaseT (GbE) Interface Module Removal and
Installation
WARNING!
Make sure that the unit is POWERED OFF. Serious injury or damage to
the equipment could result if the unit is powered during module
removal or installation! You must take care not to damage the
module’s components during removal or installation.
Figure C-4. GbE Interface Module Removal or Installation
C.2.1.4.1 GbE Interface Module Removal Procedure
Do these steps:
1. Turn off the power to the modem.
2. Disconnect the RJ-45 cable from the Interface Module.
3. Loosen the (two) captive screws securing the module to the chassis.
4. Pull the module straight out until it is clear of the chassis slot.
C.2.1.4.2 GbE Interface Module Installation Procedure
Do these steps:
1. Insert the Interface Module straight into the slot, using the chassis’
internal card guides, until it plugs securely into the internal card
receptacle.
2. Secure the module to the chassis using the (two) captive screws.
3. Connect the RJ-45 cable to the Interface Module.
4. Turn on the power to the modem.
C–8
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
C.2.2
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Data Interface Module
Figure C-5. G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module (AS/11579 shown)
The G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module (Figure C-5) supports balanced or
unbalanced, and differential/ single-ended operation. The plug-in interface has
full duplex capability.
C.2.2.1
Physical Description
Figure C-6. G.703T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Functional Block Diagram
The G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module is implemented on a 4.5W x 6.8D x
.85H inches (11.43W x 17.27D x 2.16H cm) PCB. Connectivity to the SLM-5650A is
accomplished with a 96-pin DIN receptacle. Figure C-6 shows the functional block
C–9
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
diagram for this interface. Figure C-5 shows the rear panel view of the module.
The interface provides:
• Two (2) G.703 Interfaces:
o Balanced T1/E1 and T2 (J1 BAL. DATA – see Table C-2);
o Unbalanced T1/E1, T2/E2 (J2 Tx and J3 Rx – see Table C-3).
• An External Clock Input (J4 Ext. Ref. – see Table C-3).
C.2.2.1.1 G.703 Balanced “J1 | BAL DATA” Connector (DB-15F)
Table C-2. “J1 | BAL. DATA” DB-15F Connector Pinout
Connector
Ref
Des
Pin #
1
2
3
4
J1
G.703 (Non-D&I)
SD_A G.703
9 SD_B G.703
Ground
10
RD_A G.703
11 RD_B G.703
Ground
12
5
13
6
14
7
15
8
C–10
Direction
In
In
–
Out
Out
–
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
C.2.2.1.2 G.703 Unbalanced “J2” through “J4” BNC Connectors
Table C-3. G.703 Unbalanced Connectors
Description
Connector Type
Direction
J2 Tx
Tx Data G.703
BNC 75Ω Female
Input
J3 Rx
Rx Data G.703
BNC 75Ω Female
Output
J4 Ext. Ref
Ext Clock Ref
BNC 75Ω Female
Input
Connector
C.2.2.2
Ref Des
Specifications
C.2.2.2.1 General Specifications
•
Interface: Balanced and Unbalanced G.703 ports, T1/E1, T2/E2
Selection of a data rate requires TX and RX having the same
data rate.
•
•
External Clock Input: One input
RX Buffer:
G.703 Frame Type
T1
E1
T2
E2
•
Programmable in 0.5 ms increments
Type
Bits
Bytes
G.704
9264
192
G.704
512
64
G.704
12624
1578
G.743
2352
294
G.747
1680
210
G.704
2112
264
G.745
2112
264
G.742
1696
212
Minimum Buffer Size for any rate: 0.5 ms
C–11
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
•
•
•
•
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Minimum Buffer Size:
o G.751 – 61 ms
o G.752 – 44 ms
o G.753 – 61 ms
Clock Options:
o Tx Clock = Tx, Rx (satellite), or External
o Rx Clock = Tx, Rx, External, or Internal
Acquisition Range – Programmed Tx data rate ± 100 ppm
Test:
o Baseband Loopback (at interface)
o Interface Loopback (through interface card)
o 2047 test pattern generator
C.2.2.2.2 Interfaces
•
•
•
G.703 Unbalanced: 1 channel supporting T1/E1, T2/E2, and G.703
o Connector Type – BNC female
o Signals Supported – ITU-T-G.703 SD, RD
o Data Rate –1544, 2048, 6312, and 8448 kbps
o Tx and Rx Data Rates – Tx and Rx data rates are programmed the
same
o Line Coding – HDB3, B8ZS, B6ZS, HDB3, AMI (Common)
o Pulse Mask – ITU-T-G.703
o Impedance – 75Ω Unbalanced, 150Ω Balanced Per ITU-T-G.703
External Clock Input:
o Connector – BNC female
o Impedance – 75 Ω ± 5%
o Return Loss per G.703 – Synchronization XXXXX Interface
o Input Amplitude – 0.5 to 5.0 V peak to peak
o Input Frequency – 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 1.544, 2.048, 6.312, and 8.448
MHz
o Signal Characteristics – Sine wave or square with duty cycle of 50
± 10%
Alarms:
o Loss of Signal
o All 1’s
C–12
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
C.2.2.2.3 Physical and Environmental
•
•
Physical: 4.5 W x 6.8 D x .85 H inches (11.43 W x 17.27 D x 2.16H cm)
Environmental:
o Temperature – 32° to 122° F (0° to 50° C)
o Humidity – 0 to 95% non-condensing
C.2.2.3
G.703 T1/E1, T2/E2 Interface Module Removal and
Installation
WARNING!
Make sure that the unit is POWERED OFF. Serious injury or damage to
the equipment could result if the unit is powered during module
removal or installation! You must take care not to damage the
module’s components during removal or installation.
Figure C-7. G.703 Interface Module Removal or Installation
C.2.2.3.1 G.703 Interface Module Removal Procedure
Do these steps:
1. Turn off the power to the modem.
2. Disconnect all cables (DB-15 and BNC) from the Interface Module.
3. Loosen the (two) captive screws securing the module to the chassis.
4. Pull the module straight out until it is clear of the chassis slot.
C–13
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
C.2.2.3.2 G.703 Interface Module Installation Procedure
Do these steps:
1. Insert the Interface Module straight into the slot, using the chassis’
internal card guides, until it plugs securely into the internal card
receptacle.
2. Secure the module to the chassis using the (two) captive screws.
3. Connect all cables (DB-15 and BNC) to the Interface Module.
4. Turn on the power to the modem.
C–14
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
C.2.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Low Voltage Differential (LVDS) Interface Module
Figure C-8. Low Voltage Differential (LVDS) Interface Module (PL/12272-1)
The Low Voltage Differential (LVDS) Interface Module (Figure C-8) provides a
physical and electrical interface between the SLM-5650A’s modulator or
demodulator signal sources operating with LVDS electrical characteristics.
C.2.3.1
Physical Description
Figure C-9. LVDS Interface Functional Block Diagram
C–15
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
The Low Voltage Differential (LVDS) Interface Module is implemented on a 4.5W x
6.8D x .85H inches (11.43W x 17.27D x 2.16H cm) PCB. Connectivity to the
SLM-5650A is accomplished with a 96-pin DIN receptacle. Figure C-9 shows the
functional block diagram for this interface. Figure C-8 shows the rear panel view
of the module. The ‘J1’ interface is a single Type ‘D’ 25-pin female (DB-25F)
connector wired as per Table C-4.
C.2.3.1.1 “J1” Connector Pinout (DB-25F)
Table C-4. “J1” DB-25F Connector Pinout
PIN #
1
14
2
15
3
16
4
17
5
18
6
19
7
20
8
21
9
22
10
23
11
24
12
25
13
DESCRIPTION
GND
SD_P
SD_N
SCT_N
RX_DATA_N
RX_DATA_P
RTS_N
LVDS_RX_CLK_N
SPARE
RESERVED
SPARE
RTS_P
GND
SPARE
RR_N
SPARE
LVDS_RX_CLK_P
SPARE
RR_P
SPARE
TT_P
TT_N
SCT_P
RESERVED
SPARE
C–16
DIRECTION
–
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
OUT
–
–
–
IN
–
–
OUT
–
OUT
–
OUT
–
IN
IN
OUT
–
–
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
C.2.3.2
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Specifications
C.2.3.2.1 General Specifications
•
•
•
•
•
Digital Data Rate – 64 kbps to 42 Mbps, in 1 bps steps
Tx Clock Source – Rx, INT, Tx Terrestrial, and Data Source Sync
Transmit Clock and Data Inversion – Interface can invert the Tx clock and
data independently of each other.
Buffer Clock Source – INT, Tx Terrestrial, Rx Satellite
Buffer Size –128 to 4,194,304 bits, or 2 to 60 mSec
C.2.3.2.2 Physical & Environmental
•
•
Physical Size – 4.5W x 6.8D x .85H inches (11.43W x 17.27D x 2.16H cm)
Environmental:
o Temperature – 32 to 122°F (0° to 50°C)
o Humidity – 0 to 95% non-condensing
C–17
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix C
C.2.3.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
LVDS Interface Module Removal and Installation
WARNING!
Make sure that the unit is POWERED OFF. Serious injury or damage to
the equipment could result if the unit is powered during module
removal or installation! You must take care not to damage the
module’s components during removal or installation.
Figure C-10. LVDS Interface Module Removal or Installation
C.2.3.3.1 LVDS Interface Module Removal Procedure
Do these steps:
1. Turn off the power to the modem.
2. Disconnect the cable (DB-25) from the Interface Module.
3. Loosen the (two) captive screws securing the module to the chassis.
4. Pull the module straight out until it is clear of the chassis slot.
C.2.3.3.2 LVDS Interface Module Installation Procedure
Do these steps:
1. Insert the Interface Module straight into the slot, using the chassis’
internal card guides, until it plugs securely into the internal card
receptacle.
2. Secure the module to the chassis using the (two) captive screws.
3. Connect the cable (DB-25) to the Interface Module.
4. Turn on the power to the modem.
C–18
Appendix D. OPTIONAL
NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP)
INTERFACE MODULE
D.1
Overview
Figure D-1. Network Processor (NP) Interface Module
The optional SLM-5650A Network Processor (NP) Interface Module (Figure D-1,
also referred to as the “NP Interface” or the “card”), is Comtech EF Data’s third
generation IP router and Ethernet bridge device. The NP Interface supports a
number of primary operating modes:
• Layer 2 Ethernet Bridge Mode
• Layer 2 and Layer 3 SCPC Ethernet BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint)
Mode
• Layer 2 and Layer 3 Vipersat BPM Mode
• Layer 3 SCPC IP Router Mode
• Layer 3 Vipersat STDMA Router Mode
The NP Interface is designed to process more than 150,000 packets per second
(pps) in Layer 2, Layer 3, or BPM mode of operation. It provides four RJ-45
D–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
connectors for user data, wired as described in Table D-1. The NP Interface also
has a single RJ-11 console interface that is intended only for factory-use initial
interface configuration. The Maximum Ethernet Frame size for the SLM-5650A is
1636 bytes for Bridge Mode or 1514 bytes for Router Mode.
To prevent network failure, there should be no more than one Ethernet
connection to a single external switch at any time.
User access to M&C of the NP Interface via the built-in HTTP/HTTPS Interface or
Telnet server (port 23) is possible using the available RJ-45 connectors (see
Figure D-2) as follows:
• When in Router Mode, access is possible using any of the NP Interface
RJ-45 Ports 1 through 4.
• When in BPM Mode (see SectionD.1.5), only the Base Modem’s J5
Ethernet RJ-45 port can be used for monitor and control (M&C).
D.1.1
Functional Hardware Description
Figure D-2. NP Interface Block Diagram
D–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
The NP Interface employs the very high performance Intel IXP2350 network
processor/32-bit microcontroller with four embedded MicroEngines to perform
the high-speed Layer 3 routing functions.
A functional block diagram is provided in Figure D-2. The front-end of the NP
Interface design incorporates a Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) switch device that
provides all Layer 2 management. The back-end of the NP Interface design
incorporates an FPGA to provide the WAN framing and deframing, plus the
interface into the main SLM-5650A modem design.
D.1.2
Connector Pinout
The LAN interface is comprised of four IEEE 802.3ab 10/100/1000 BaseT copper
interfaces via four female RJ-45 connectors wired as shown in Table D-1.
Table D-1. LAN Interface Connector Pinout (Typical)
Pin #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Description
BI_DA+
BI_DABI_DB+
BI_DC+
BI_DCBI_DBBI_DD+
BI_DD-
D–3
Direction
Bidirectional
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
D.1.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Interface Specifications
D.1.3.1 Physical Description
Dimensions
Connectors
Indicators
4.5 W x 6.8 D x .85 H inches (11.43 W x 17.27 D x
2.16H cm)
SLM-5650A connection: (1) 96-pin DIN receptacle
Console interface for board bring-up and factory use
only:
(1) RJ-11 connector
LAN interface: (4) RJ-45 female connectors, 100Ω
Link Status and Activity Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
D.1.3.2 General Specifications
Data Framing
Data Framing Format (WAN)
10/100/1000 BaseT Interface: RFC-894 “Ethernet”
CEFD proprietary
Electrical Properties
Per IEEE 802.3ab
1636 Bytes (Bridge mode)
1541 Bytes (Router mode)
Burst, distributed, or IPV4
Serial data
Max Ethernet Frame
Packet Types
Signal Types
Voltage Level
Packet Latency
Cable Length, Maximum
Hot Pluggable
Per IEEE- 802.3ab
50 ms maximum
100 meters CAT 5 cable, patch cords and connecting
hardware, per ISO/IEC 11801:1995 and ANSI/EIA/TIA568-A (1995)
Card – No
Cable – Yes
D–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
D.1.4
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
NP Interface Module Removal and Installation
WARNING!
Ensure that the unit is POWERED OFF. Serious injury or damage to the
equipment could result if the unit is powered during module removal or
installation.
You must take care not to damage the module’s components during
removal or installation.
Figure D-3. NP Interface Module Removal or Installation
D.1.4.1 NP Interface Module Removal
Do these steps:
1. TURN OFF the power to the modem.
2. DISCONNECT the RJ-45 cable(s) from the NP Interface.
3. LOOSEN the two captive thumbscrews securing the module to the
chassis.
4. REMOVE the module by pulling it straight out until it is clear of the
chassis slot.
D.1.4.2 NP Interface Module Installation
Do these steps:
1. INSTALL the NP Interface Module by inserting it straight into the chassis
slot, using the chassis’ internal card guides, until it plugs securely into the
internal card receptacle.
2. SECURE the module to the chassis using the (two) captive thumb screws.
3. CONNECT the RJ-45 cable(s) to the module.
4. TURN ON the power to the modem.
D–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
D.1.5
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Using BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode
Networks where modems traditionally act as routers – e.g., Vipersat-based
satellite communications systems – and include encryption devices are
sometimes incompatible or require difficult and unwieldy configurations.
Additionally, the NP Interface limits the number of allowable route tables. This, in
turn, can limit the overall size of the network, particularly when OSPF (Open
Shortest Path First) dynamic routing protocol is used in the NP Interface.
In order to increase the flexibility and scalability of the satellite network with
SLM-5650A modems, the optional BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode is a
feature available with NP Interface operation whereby Layer 2 and Layer 3
networks can operate simultaneously. When BPM Mode is selected, you can
operate two independent Layer2 networks and one Layer3 network
simultaneously without interfering with each other.
See Appendix G. VIPERSAT NETWORK APPLICATION EXAMPLES for indepth information about using the BPM FAST Option.
D.1.6
Important Operational Considerations
Before you proceed with using the NP Interface module for secure Ethernet
remote product management, make sure the following is true:
• You have read Chapter 8. ETHERNET INTERFACE OPERATION in its
entirety and you fully understand the requirements and limitations when
using the SLM-5650A Ethernet Interface in non-secure and secure
applications.
• The SLM-5650A is operating with the latest version firmware files.
• The User PC is connected to the Base Modem’s RJ-45 ‘J5 Ethernet’ port.
• You have recorded the unit’s Management IP Address and the NP
Interface IP Address.
• The User PC is running a compatible web browser for operation of the NP
HTTP/HTTPS Interface.
• The User PC is running a terminal emulation program for operation of the
Telnet Remote Control features.
D–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.2
Network Processor (NP) HTTP/HTTPS
Interface
D.2.1
HTTP/HTTPS Interface Introduction
In order to make any Network Processor modifications permanent, all
changes made on any of the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface pages must be
saved before rebooting the unit.
The NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface functionality not only integrates a good portion of
the SLM-5650A Base Modem HTTP Interface non-secure operations (outlined in
detail in Chapter 9. BASE MODEM HTTP INTERFACE OPERATION), but also
provide operations unique to the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface.
The pages for the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface have been designed to work using
either Microsoft’s Internet Explorer Version 7.0 or higher, or Mozilla Firefox
Version 2.0 or higher.
The examples shown in this appendix use Internet Explorer Version 7.0 – most,
but not all, pages will display properly with Internet Explorer Version 6.0.
D.2.1.1 HTTP/HTTPS Interface Availability via Secure Management
Interfaces
Non-secure and secure network management operations are controlled by the
Interface Security Mode setting provided on the Admin | Security page (see
Section D.2.5.2.3 for more information). Its use is dependent on the options
installed in the SLM-5650A Base Modem.
When the SLM-5650A is equipped with the Network Processor (NP) Interface
only, Management Security is an optional feature.
D–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.2.1.1.1 Secure Management – NP Interface Only
CAUTION
Make sure to read this section in its entirety!
When the optional NP Interface is installed in the SLM-5650A without the
optional TRANSEC Module Interface, Management Security is optional and the
following secure network management operating alternatives apply:
• When Management Security is disabled (i.e., Low Level Security is
selected):
o Non-secure serial-based network management is allowed for the
Base Modem using the J10 Remote EIA-232/485 Type ‘DB-9F’ serial
port and the menu-driven Command Line Interface (CLI).
o Non-secure Ethernet-based network management is supported over
the NP Interface using the HTTP (non-secure) Web browser and
SNMPv2.
 When the modem is operating in Router Mode, a number of
Base Modem M&C parameters are available via the NP HTTP
Interface. Similarly, a limited number of status-only NP
parameters are viewable over the Base Modem HTTP
Interface.
 When the modem is operating in BPM (Bridge Point-toMultipoint) Mode, NP Interface Ethernet ports P1 through P4
transparently bridge data traffic; routed network traffic and
network management traffic is possible using the Base
Modem’s J5 Ethernet port.
• When Management Security is enabled (i.e., High Level Security is
selected):
o Secure network management is supported by the NP Interface, but
not by the Base Modem. The Base Modem’s J5 Ethernet port has
the non-secure modes disabled.
o Secure Ethernet-based network management is supported over
HTTPS via Secure Socket Layer (SSL); Secure Shell (SSH) menu-driven
Command Line Interface (CLI) and SNMPv3 are not supported by the
NP.
 When the modem is operating in Router Mode, a number of
Base Modem parameters are available via the NP HTTPS
Interface.
D–8
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D


MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
When the modem is operating in BPM Mode, NP Interface
Ethernet ports P1 through P4 transparently bridge data traffic;
routed network traffic and network management traffic is
possible using the Base Modem’s J5 Ethernet port.
When the modem is operating in (Static) Bridge Mode, NP
Management Security (i.e., High Level Security) is not allowed.
Ethernet communication between the Base Modem and the
NP Interface is therefore disabled.
D.2.1.1.2 Secure Management – NP Interface PLUS TRANSEC
Module Interface
CAUTION
Make sure to read this section in its entirety!
When the optional NP Interface is installed in the SLM-5650A in tandem with the
optional TRANSEC Module Interface and with Management Security enabled, the
network management operating restrictions as previously described (i.e., when
High Level Security is selected) therefore always apply.
The TRANSEC Module Interface provides a proxy function of HTTPS connections
to the Base Modem and the NP Interface; a secure HTTPS connection to the
TRANSEC Module therefore enables user access to all Base Modem and/or all NP
M&C parameters securely through this indirect proxy connection. The Secure
Management interfaces supported by this configuration are summarized as
follows:
Base Modem
HTTPS Proxy via
TRANSEC Module
Network Processor
Interface
HTTP
HTTPS (Proxy via
TRANSEC Module)
SSH
D–9
TRANSEC Module
HTTPS
SSH
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
D.2.2
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
User Login
Access to the SLM-5650A’s NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface depends on the IP Interface
Security Mode setting selected for the interface (via the Admin | Security page –
see Section D.2.5.2.3 for more information).
From any compatible Web browser, enter the NP Interface IP Address into the
browser’s Address area as follows (where “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” represents the IP
Address of the NP Interface).
For a non-secure HTTP session (Low Level Security selected):
http:// xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx;
For a secure HTTPS session (High Level Security selected):
https:// xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.
When prompted, type in a valid User Name
and Password, similar to the dialog box shown
to the right. The default for both is comtech.
Click [OK] to continue.
The NP Interface User Name and Password are each restricted to a
minimum of 7 characters and a maximum of 25 characters, excluding <
(ASCII Code 60), > (ASCII Code 62), “ (ASCII Code 34), and ~ (ASCII Code
126).
D–10
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Once the valid User Name and Password is accepted, the NP HTTP/HTTPS
Interface displays its “splash” page similar to the example shown here:
Operation of the Network Processor may be fully
monitored and controlled from the NP HTTP/HTTPS
Interface. By rolling the cursor over the tabs located
at the top of each page, you can select from the
available nested hyperlinks (as shown to the right).
D.2.3
HTTP/HTTPS Interface – Operational Features
See Section 9.2.3 HTTP Interface Features in Chapter 9. BASE MODEM
HTTP INTERFACE OPERATION for an overview of the navigational and
operational features common with using this interface.
D–11
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
D.2.4
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
HTTP/HTTPS Menu Tree
The following menu tree illustrates the options available via the NP HTTP/HTTPS
Interface:
Info
Home
Contact
Logoff
Admin
Modem
LAN
WAN
Routing
Config
Interface
QoS*
Routes
Monitor
Ethernet
Ports
Security
Events
ARP
QoS
Stats*
Loopback
Test
SNMP
Upgrade
Vipersat
Mode*
FAST
Features
OSPF
Ethernet
Tx
Ethernet
Rx
Vipersat*
Redundancy
Save
Vipersat
1:1
Redundancy
Save
STDMA
IP
Stats
Stats
WAN
Switching
Utility
Clear All
DPC
Defaults
IGMP
Stats
Home State
Time
EventLog
Reboot
This interface provides access to up to 10 navigation tabs (shown in blue). The
diagram further illustrates each tab’s available nested hyperlinks (shown in grey),
which afford more specific functionality.
“*” indicates a FAST Feature that is available on the interface only after
that option has been purchased. See Section D.2.5.2.2 Admin | FAST
Features for more information.
Click any tab or hyperlink to continue.
D–12
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
D.2.5
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
HTTP/HTTPS Page Descriptions
D.2.5.1 Info (Information) pages
Select the Home, Contact, or Logoff hyperlink to continue.
D.2.5.1.1 Info | Home
Use this page to identify pertinent information about the SLM-5650A NP
Interface, including the installed firmware for the Bootrom, Image 1, and Image
2.
Figure D-4. ‘Info | Home’ Page
D–13
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
D.2.5.1.2
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Info | Contact
Use this page to reference basic contact information needed to reach Comtech
EF Data Sales and Product Support via phone, fax, or Web/e-mail hyperlinks
Figure D-5. ‘Info | Contact’ Page
D–14
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.2.5.1.3 Info | Log Off
Use this page to formally disconnect from the interface.
Figure D-6. ‘Info | Logoff’ Page
At the prompt, click [YES, Logoff Now] to execute the logoff process.
Upon disconnection, you must close the Web browser in order to delete the
Network Processor’s security cookie.
D–15
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.2.5.2 Admin (Administration) pages
Depending on the enabled features and options: Click Vipersat Mode, FAST
Features, Security, SNMP, Upgrade, Defaults, Time, Event Log, or Reboot to
continue.
D.2.5.2.1 Admin | Vipersat Mode (FAST Option)
Use this page to specify how the modem/NP Interface is to behave in Vipersat or
non-Vipersat working modes. Once the role of a particular modem in the
network is determined, the intent of this single point of configuration is to
simplify deployment.
Figure D-7. ‘Admin | Vipersat Mode’ Page
Vipersat Modes
Consult adjunct Comtech EF Data publication MN-0000035 Vipersat SLM-5650A
Satellite Network Modem Router User Guide for configuration and use of these
optional features.
D–16
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
This FAST-enabled page allows you to select the following Vipersat modes:
• Vipersat Hub Router
• Vipersat Hub Expansion Router
• Vipersat Remote Router
• Vipersat Remote Expansion Router
Non-Vipersat Multipoint Modes
Item
Multipoint Hub
Router
Multipoint Remote
Router
Description
When in static SCPC (non-Vipersat mode), the option exists for
configuring the modems into a hub and spoke network with a
shared outbound at the hub. All of the modems at the hub
should be put in “Multipoint Hub Router” mode.
If a modem at the remote is configured to be a Hub
router there will be significant degradation to network
performance due to the potential for routing loops.
Select Multipoint Remote Router for all remote modems in a
non-Vipersat multipoint network. A Remote router would be
classified as a modem which receives the shared outbound and
transmits back to the hub on a dedicated SCPC channel
Non-Vipersat Point-to-Point Mode
Item
Point-to-Point
Router
Description
Select for use in a Point-to-Point SCPC link where there are
different IP subnets on either side of the link.
Routing Mode
Item
Gigabit Ethernet
Bridge
Description
Select for use in a Point-to-Point SCPC link when you wish to
bridge traffic (no IP network routing).
This mode is currently only compatible with the
Gigabit Ethernet bridge card for the SLM-5650A.
Ethernet communication between the Base
Modem and the NP Interface is disabled, as the
Base Modem does not support secure network
management interfaces
D–17
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
Item
Router
BPM
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Description
When the modem is operating in Router Mode, a number of
Base Modem M&C parameters are available via the NP HTTP
Interface. Similarly, a limited number of status-only NP
parameters are viewable over the Base Modem HTTP Interface.
When you select BPM Mode, the NP Interface Ethernet ports P1
through P4 transparently bridge data traffic, and network
management is only possible using the Base Modem’s J5
Ethernet port.
In BPM Mode, the Gigabit Ethernet Bridge option becomes inaccessible and
the appearance of the Routing Mode section changes as follows:
Click [Submit] once the appropriate Vipersat or non-Vipersat operating
mode is selected on this page.
D–18
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.2.5.2.2 Admin | FAST Features
This section describes the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface with Vipersat, Quality of
Service (QoS), and Management Security installed on the SLM-5650A.
1) If the SLM-5650A does not have these QoS or Vipersat FAST
options installed, the QoS and QoS Stats hyperlinks located under
the WAN navigation tab, and the hyperlinks located under the
Vipersat navigation tab will not be visible/available to the user.
2) If the SLM-5650A does not have the Management Security FAST
option installed, the “IP Interface Security Mode” and “SSH”
sections on the ‘Admin | Security’ page and the “SNMP v3”
section on the ‘Admin | SNMP’ page will not be visible.
This read-only page displays available FAST Features as “Installed” or “Not
Installed”.
Figure D-8. ‘Admin | FAST Features’ Page
Network Processor and Modem FAST Features
Comtech EF Data offers Vipersat, Management Security, NP BPM, Quality of
Service (QoS), NP OW Serial Commands, and NP Antenna Handover functionality
as optional FAST Features for the NP Interface. The modem’s Demodulator Only
FAST feature status is also provided. To install these options, you must contact
Comtech EF Data Product Support to purchase a modem FAST Access Code.
D–19
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Once the 20-digit modem FAST Access Code is obtained, the purchased FAST
Feature(s) is installed via the SLM-5650A front panel (Utility: FAST 
Configuration  Enter modem code).
1) If the SLM-5650A does not have these QoS or Vipersat FAST options
installed, the QoS and QoS Stats hyperlinks located under the WAN
navigation tab, and the hyperlinks located under the Vipersat
navigation tab will not be visible/available to the user.
2) If the SLM-5650A does not have the Management Security FAST
option installed, the “IP Interface Security Mode” and “SSH”
sections on the Admin | Security page and the “SNMP v3” section
on the Admin | SNMP page will not be visible.
3) Upgrading the FAST features requires a modem reboot in order for
FAST features to be activated, and may require reconfiguration of all
modem parameters.
See Chapter 6. FAST ACTIVATION PROCEDURE and Chapter 7. FRONT
PANEL OPERATION for detailed information on managing FAST Options.
D–20
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.2.5.2.3 Admin | Security (Account Information)
The Admin user may use this page to control access to all Base Modem HTTP and
NP Interface HTTP/HTTPS pages. However, the Admin user does not have access
to the optional TRANSEC Module parameters; this functionality is only available
via the Crypto Officer login provided separately on the TRANSEC Module HTTPS
Interface.
See Section E.2 TRANSEC MODULE HTTPS INTERFACE in Appendix E.
OPTIONAL TRANSEC MODULE OPERATION for further information.
Figure D-9. ‘Admin | Security’ (Management Security) Page
Admin Account Info
The login process requires a name and password as defined by the systems
administrator of the controlling equipment. This name and password is
associated to the name and password of an administrator account. Set the
desired Admin User Name and Admin Password for the administrator account.
Click [Submit] to apply these settings.
The Admin User Name and Password settings are maintained separately
from the IP Interface Security Mode and SSH sections on this page.
D–21
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
IP Interface Security Mode
The desired IP Interface Security Mode can be set to either Low Level Security
for HTTP/FTP/ SNMP/Telnet access, or High Level Security for HTTPS/SSH (Secure
Shell) access only. Click [Submit] to apply this setting. More specifically:
• When Management Security is set to Low Level Security, the NP Interface
can be managed by non-secure protocols such as HTTP and Telnet.
• When Management Security is set to High Level Security, the following
restrictions apply:
o The NP Interface can ONLY be managed via the secure HTTPS protocol
– the https:// address prefix must be specified in order to connect to
the secure NP HTTPS Interface.
o Access via Telnet is not permitted – however, while access to the CLI is
not permitted via the Telnet interface, the CLI is accessible via the SSH
interface;
o Access to the SLM-5650A HTTP and FTP server is disabled since nonsecure protocols are used.
You may also change Management Security via the SLM-5650A front panel:
SELECT: Configure  Remote  EthernetConfig  Option Card Addr 
Network Proc  Security
See Chapter 7. FRONT PANEL OPERATION for detailed information on
using this modem control interface.
SSH (Secure Shell)
SSH Host Key: This key signature, or fingerprint, helps to identify the NP when
connecting through SSH. SSH clients typically show the host key signature when
they connect to a system for the first time. The host key the SSH client shows can
then be compared with the host key the NP displays to verify that they are the
same.
Click [Generate New Host Key] to generate a new host key that uniquely
identifies the NP. After doing this, SSH clients that have connected to the NP
before will usually note or warn that the host key has changed when they
connect again.
D–22
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.2.5.2.4 Admin | SNMP
The Admin user may use this page to change the parameters associated with
Simple Network Management Protocol, an application-layer protocol designed to
facilitate the exchange of management information between network devices.
The SLM-5650A SNMP agent supports SNMPv1, SNMP v2c, and SNMP v3.
See Section 8.4 SNMP Interface in Chapter 8. ETHERNET INTERFACE
OPERATION for complete details on SNMP and using this page.
Figure D-10. ‘Admin | SNMP’ Page
SNMP
The SNMP Read and Write Communities cannot be changed; the default name
for Read Community is public; the default Write Community name is private.
Click [Submit] to enable the SNMP configuration changes made to Trap
Community, Trap, System Contact, and System Location.
D–23
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
SNMP v3
Use this section to create user accounts under SNMPv3 protocol. SNMPv3 is
available only when you set the IP Interface Security Mode security level to
“High”.
Using the provided text boxes, create an Engine ID (the default is
0000000c000000007f000001), User Name and Password as needed (the default
for both is comtech) then, using the available drop-down list, select the Security
Model algorithm as “md5” or “sha”.
This setting must match the setting in the SNMP client; otherwise the
SLM-5650A will not allow communications.
Click [Submit] to enable the SNMP v3 configuration changes made in this
section.
D–24
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.2.5.2.5 Admin | Upgrade
Use this page to review accessibility to and information about the loaded NP
Interface and modem firmware (i.e., the Bootrom and image files), and to
upgrade the operational firmware for the interface.
Figure D-11. ‘Admin | Upgrade’ Page
Network Processor Firmware Info
These fields display the installed NP Interface Firmware (all information is read
only):
Item
Network Processor Bootrom
Network Processor Image 1
Network Processor Image 2
Description
A single Bootrom that initializes the hardware and
loads the full bulk image as selected by the user.
A full copy of software image stored in slot 1.
A full copy of software image stored in slot 2.
D–25
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Modem Firmware Info
These fields display installed SLM-5650A Base Modem firmware for the Bootrom,
Image 1, and Image 2 (all information is read only).
Upgrade
See Chapter 5. FIRMWARE UPDATE for complete details on using the NP
HTTP/HTTPS Interface for upgrading the Base Modem, NP Interface and
TRANSEC Module firmware.
Item
Current Running
Upgrade To
Upgrade Image File
Description
(read only) – displays current NP Interface Firmware
Image as defined on the Admin | Reboot page (e.g.,
Image1 or Image2).
(read only) – displays the NP Interface Firmware
Image that will be overwritten with the new image as
defined on the Admin | Reboot page (e.g., Image1 or
Image2).
Click [Browse] to locate the bulk image on the local
computer’s file system. Click [Upload] to upload the
image.
D–26
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.2.5.2.6 Admin | Defaults
Use this page to restore all previously-configured modem parameters – with the
exception of the Admin User Name and the Admin Password (see Section
8.6.6.2.3) – to their Factory Default Configuration settings.
Figure D-12. ‘Admin | Defaults’ (Factory Default Configurations) Page
Click [Restore Now] to begin the restoration
process. At the user prompt (shown at right),
click [OK] to execute the process, or [Cancel]
to abort the command.
D–27
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.2.5.2.7 Admin | Time (Date and Time)
Figure D-13. ‘Admin | Time’ (Date & Time) Page
Time Zone
Use the drop-down list to select the modem’s time zone. Click [Submit] to save.
Internet Time
Use the drop-down list to select automatic time synchronization (using network
time protocol) as Enabled or Disabled. Click [Submit] to save.
Internet Time Servers
You may edit these fields only when the Internet Time Synchronization is
Enabled.
Item
Primary Internet Time Server
Secondary Internet Time Server
Description
IP Address of primary network time server.
IP Address of secondary network time server.
Edit each address as needed. Click [Submit] to save.
D–28
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Current Date & Time
Item
Current Date / Current Time
Internet Time Status
Update Date & Time
Description
These fields display the date and time as of the moment
this page was accessed. The current date and time of
the modem is set from the modem’s front panel and
kept current using a battery back-up clock. This means
that the date and time will be correct even if the
modem loses power.
This displays the status of network time server (if NTP is
enabled).
Click [Update Now] to refresh the Current Date and
Current Time displays.
D–29
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.2.5.2.8 Admin | Event Log
Use this page to view logged events specific to the NP Interface, and to monitor
or troubleshoot the health of the interface and any issues found in the field.
Figure D-14. ‘Admin | Event Log’ Page
Clear Event Log
Click [Clear Log] to delete all existing log entries. The event log is reset to one (1)
entry: “Eventlog Cleared”.
Event Logging
•
•
Logging On/Off – Select On to enable or Off to disable logging of event
messages.
Logging Level – Use the drop-down list to select Errors Only, Errors and
Warnings, or All Information. This sets the filtering of the highest
displayed message level.
Click [Submit] to execute these settings.
Event Log Table
Column
Index
Type
Description
Event log entries are numbered in the order they are received.
Describes the severity of the event.
D–30
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Column
Description
Displays the date that the event was logged. In accordance with
Date
European convention, the date is shown in DAY/MONTH/YEAR format.
Time
Displays the time of day that the event was logged.
Category
For use by Product Support.
Description Provides a brief description of the action logged.
D.2.5.2.9 Admin | Reboot
Use this page to display the currently available boot images for both the NP
Interface and Modem, or to select from which images the NP Interface and
modem will boot.
Figure D-15. ‘Admin | Reboot’ Page
Once the NP and/or Modem image boot selections are made, [Submit]
MUST be clicked for the boot parameter updates to take effect upon the
next reboot.
D–31
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Network Processor Boot From
Use the drop-down list to select the Network Processor image to boot from
Image 1, Image 2, or Newest. Click [Submit] to save the selection.
Modem Boot From
Use the drop-down list to select the Modem image to boot from Image 1 or
Image 2. Click [Submit] to save the selection.
Reboot
You must make sure to allow time for the Network Processor Boot From
or Modem Boot choices to submit/save to flash memory, and for the
‘Admin | Reboot’ page to refresh, prior to executing a modem reboot.
Click [Reboot Now] to reboot the entire modem; this includes the Base Modem,
Network Processor and TRANSEC Module.
D–32
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.2.5.3 Modem pages
Use the Modem pages to configure or view the primary Transmit parameters and
primary Receive parameters of the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem.
Select Config, Monitor, Events, Stats, or Utility to continue.
D.2.5.3.1 Modem | Config (Modem Configuration)
Figure D-16. ‘Modem | Config’ (Modem Configuration) Page
Modem Operating Mode
Modem Type – This read-only item identifies the modem operating mode:
Modem Type
OM-73
MIL-165A
IESS-308
IESS-309
Description
Linkabit OM-73 modem compatibility mode.
Functionality defined by MIL-STD-188-165A.
Functionality defined by IESS-308, the Intelsat Intermediate Data
Rate standard.
Functionality defined by IESS-309, the Intelsat Business Services
standard.
D–33
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
Modem Type
IESS-310
TURBO
16-QAM
AUPC
TX-BURST
RX-BURST
RX-BURST-FA
TURBO-FA
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Description
Functionality defined by IESS-310, the Intelsat 8-PSK Intermediate
Data Rate standard.
Functionality defined by IESS-315 plus Comtech EF Data Turbo
mode interoperability.
16-QAM is selected as a modulation type.
Automatic Uplink Power Control is used.
The unit is a Vipersat Remote Modem.
The unit is a Vipersat STDMA Hub Modem with its Acquisition
Mode set to “Standard.”
The unit is a Vipersat STDMA Hub Modem with its Acquisition
Mode set to “Long”.
The unit is a Vipersat Hub Expansion Modem.
Reference – Use the drop-down list to select a Reference type:
Reference Type
Internal
Ext-1MHz
Ext-5MHz
Ext-10MHz
Description
Internal high stability ovenized 10 MHz oscillator
External 1 MHz reference, (accepts sine wave or square wave and
locks the internal reference to the 1 MHz)
External 5 MHz reference, (accepts sine wave or square wave and
locks the internal reference to the 5 MHz)
External 10 MHz reference, (accepts sine wave or square wave and
locks the internal reference to the 10 MHz)
Unit Interface Type – This read-only item identifies the Network Processor as the
active interface type.
Frequency Band – Use the drop-down list to set the IF Frequency Band as 70/140
MHz (52-88 MHz, or 104-176 MHz) or L-Band (950-2000 MHz).
Click [Submit] to save any changes made to this section.
Transmit
FEC Type – Use the drop-down list to select:
FEC Type
Viterbi
None
Description
(standard) K = 7 convolutional encoder
(standard) Uncoded
D–34
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
FEC Type
Turbo
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Description
(optional) Turbo Product Code, which is a block code
Modulation Type – Use the drop-down list to select:
Modulation Type
BPSK
QPSK
OQPSK
8PSK
16QAM (optional)
Description
Bi Phase Shift Keying
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
8 Phase Shift Keying
(optional) 16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
FEC Code Rate – Use the drop-down list to select:
FEC Code Rate
Viterbi
Uncoded
Turbo
Description
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8
1/1
5/16, 21/44, 3/4, 7/8, or 17/18
Data Rate – Enter the transmit data rate, in kbps.
Frequency – Enter the transmit frequency, in MHz, in 100-Hz steps. Note that:
• The range for 70/140 MHz operation is 52-88 MHz or 104-176 MHz.
• The range for L-Band operation is 950-2000 MHz.
Spectrum – Use the drop-down list to select Normal or Invert. Use this to
counteract frequency converters that invert the spectrum.
Scrambler – Use the drop-down list to select (for energy dispersal):
Selection
V.35
Modified-V.35
IBS
Turbo
OM73
Synch
Description
ITU standard
Comtech EF Data Closed Network with Reed Solomon
compatible (modified V.35)
Used for IESS-309 and AUPC operation
Synchronous scrambler synchronized to the Turbo block
Linkabit OM-73 modem compatibility mode
Synchronous scrambler synchronized to the Reed-Solomon
D–35
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
Selection
Off
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Description
Disables scrambling
Tx Power Level – Enter a value, in 0.1 dB steps, from -40 dBm to +10 dBm.
Carrier – Use the drop-down list to select:
Selection
On
RTS
VSAT
Off
Description
Enables carrier.
Request to Send. RTS is an interface signaling control. If enabled,
RTS can be used to control the output state of the modulator.
Only available when using either the EIA-530 or HSSI interface.
VSAT mode ties control of the Transmit Signal to the status of
the Receiver. If the receiver is Locked the Transmitter is Enabled.
If the receiver is Unlocked the Transmitter will be disabled.
Disables carrier.
1) When changing Modulation Type the data rate must be set to a rate
supported by the modulation type or the change to the modulation
type will not be allowed. Some choices will only be visible if the
modem is set to a compatible mode, or if an option is installed or
enabled.
2) When entering the data rate, the following interactions need to be
taken into account:
• If the modulation type selected is 8-PSK or 16-QAM the
minimum data rate allowed is 256 kbps.
• When changing certain parameters like modem type, the data
rate will default to 64 kbps or 256 kbps.
• The calculated symbol rate is displayed for the user. This is
helpful for determining the occupied bandwidth required for the
selected modulation type, code rate and overhead.
3) When entering an IF frequency, the M&C will check the occupied
bandwidth calculated from the data rate, modulation type, code
rate and overhead and will not allow an IF frequency to be entered
if the occupied bandwidth falls outside of the minimum or
maximum IF frequencies.
Click [Transmit Submit] to save the desired configuration settings.
D–36
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Receive
FEC Type – Use the drop-down list to select:
FEC Type
Viterbi
None
Turbo
Description
(standard) K = 7 convolutional encoder
(standard) Uncoded
(optional) Turbo Product Code, which is a block code
Demodulation Type – Use the drop-down list to select:
Modulation Type
BPSK
QPSK
OQPSK
8PSK
16QAM
Description
Bi Phase Shift Keying
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
8 Phase Shift Keying
(optional) 16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
FEC Code Rate – Use the drop-down list to select:
FEC Code Rate
Viterbi
Uncoded
Turbo
Description
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8
1/1
5/16, 21/44, 3/4, 7/8, or 17/18
Data Rate – Enter the receive data rate, in kbps.
Frequency – Enter the receive frequency, in MHz, in 100-Hz steps. Note that:
• The range for 70/140 MHz operation is 52-88 MHz or 104-176 MHz.
• The range for L-Band operation is 950-2000 MHz.
Spectrum – Use the drop-down list to select Normal or Invert. Use this to
counteract frequency converters that invert the spectrum.
Descrambler – Use the drop-down list to select (for energy dispersal):
Selection
V.35
Description
ITU standard
D–37
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
Selection
Modified-V.35
IBS
Turbo
OM73
Synch
Off
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Description
Comtech EF Data Closed Network with Reed Solomon
compatible (modified V.35)
Used for IESS-309 and AUPC operation
Synchronous descrambler synchronized to the Turbo block
Linkabit OM-73 modem compatibility mode
Synchronous descrambler synchronized to the Reed-Solomon
Disables descrambling
1) When changing demodulation type the data rate must be set to a
rate supported by the demodulation type, or the change to the
demodulation type will not be allowed. Some choices will only be
visible if the modem is set to a compatible mode, or if an option is
installed or enabled.
2) When entering the data rate, the following interactions need to be
taken into account:
• If the demodulation type selected is 8-PSK or 16-QAM the
minimum data rate allowed is 256 kbps.
• When changing certain parameters like modem type, the data
rate will default to 64 kbps or 256 kbps.
• The calculated symbol rate is displayed for the user. This is
helpful for determining the occupied bandwidth required for the
selected demodulation type, code rate and overhead.
3) When entering an IF frequency, the M&C will check the occupied
bandwidth calculated from the data rate, demodulation type, code
rate and overhead and will not allow an IF frequency to be entered if
the occupied bandwidth falls outside of the minimum or maximum
IF frequencies.
Click [Receive Submit] to save the desired configuration settings.
D–38
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.2.5.3.2 Modem | Monitor (Modem Status)
Use this read-only page to view the currently available modem receive
parameters and operating temperature.
Figure D-17. ‘Modem | Monitor’ (Modem Status) Page
Receive Parameters
This section displays the modem’s currently reported link values:
Item
BER
Eb/No
Frequency
Offset
Signal Level
Description
Displays the estimated BER based on the demodulator’s measurement
of the carrier to noise.
Displays the estimated Eb/No of the received carrier. The range is
threshold to 20 dB Eb/No.
Displays the received carrier frequency offset in Hz.
The range is the same as the acquisition range of the modem, 60 kHz.
Displays the signal level of the received carrier in dBm.
The range supported is +15 to –60 dBm.
Temperature
This section reports the temperature of the modem in degrees Celsius.
D–39
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.2.5.3.3 Modem | Events (Modem Events Log)
Use this read-only page to view operating events. When a fault condition occurs,
it is time-stamped and put into the log. Similarly, when the fault condition clears,
this is also recorded.
Figure D-18. ‘Modem |Events’ (Modem Events Log) Page
Clear/Refresh Modem Events
Click [Clear] to delete all log entries. Click [Refresh] to refresh the Event Log to
display the most recently recorded events.
Event Log
Column
Index
Fault Detail
Date
Time
Description
Displays the internal table index.
Provides a description of the fault or event.
Date of the log entry (in YY/MM/DD format).
Time of the log entry (in HH:MM:SS format).
D–40
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.2.5.3.4 Modem | Stats (Modem Statistics Log)
Figure D-19. Modem | Stats (Modem Statistics Log) page
Clear/Refresh Modem Statistics
Click [Clear] to delete all log entries. Click [Refresh] to refresh the Link Statistics
Log to display the most recent entries.
Logging Interval
Use the drop-down list to set the statistics recording interval. Valid settings are
from every 10 Minutes to every 90 Minutes in 10-minute increments, or
Disabled.
Click [Submit] to save all changes made to this page.
Link Statistics Log
Displays the following read-only modem statistics:
Column
Index
Min Eb/No
Avg Eb/No
Date
Time
Description
Displays the internal table index.
Minimum measured Eb/N0 during the configured time interval.
Average measured Eb/N0 during the configured time interval.
Date of the log entry (in YY/MM/DD format).
Time of the log entry (in HH:MM:SS format).
D–41
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.2.5.3.5 Modem | Utility (Modem Utilities)
Figure D-20. ‘Modem | Utility’ (Modem Utilities) Page
Date and Time
To set the Date and Time of the modem:
• Time (HH: MM: SS) – Set the hours in 24-hour time format
• Date (DD/MM/YY) – Set the date in accordance with European
convention (DAY/MONTH/YEAR) format.
Click [Submit] to save any changes made to this section.
Circuit ID
CID – Enter a name for the communication link in this text field. This name can
be any combination of alphanumeric characters up to 24 characters in length.
Additional characters supported are: ( ) * + / period (.) comma (,) and
[space].
Click [Submit] to save any changes made to this section.
D–42
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.2.5.4 LAN pages
Select Interface, Ethernet Ports, or ARP to continue.
D.2.5.4.1 LAN | Interface
Use this page to set LAN operating parameters, to view the MAC Address of the
NP Interface, and to set the IP Address and Mask of the NP Interface.
Figure D-21. ‘LAN | Interface’ Page
LAN Interface
MAC Address (read-only) – The MAC is set at the factory to a guaranteed unique
address that cannot be modified by the user.
IP Addressing Mode – Click for Single or Dual mode:
• In Single mode, the Traffic IP Address is used as M&C as well as NextHop
IP Address for adjacent routers.
D–43
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
•
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
In Dual mode, the Management IP Address is used as M&C access to the
NP Interface, and Traffic IP Address is used as the NextHop IP Address for
adjacent Routers.
Traffic IP Address – This is the IP Address of the NP Interface only. Once set to a
valid value, it is the address that should be used for M&C connectivity as well as
the Next Hop Address when IP Addressing Mode is set to Single.
Traffic Subnet Mask (1-30) – This is the Subnet Mask used in conjunction with
the Traffic IP Address to determine the subnet locally attached to by the LAN
interfaces.
Management IP Address – This is the IP Address of the NP Interface only. Once
set to a valid value, it is the address that should be used for M&C connectivity
when IP Addressing Mode is set to Dual.
Management Subnet Mask (1-30) – This is the subnet mask used in conjunction
with the Management IP Address to determine the subnet locally attached to by
the LAN interfaces.
Click [Submit] to save changes made to any of the above items.
For VLAN Port Configuration:
Single Port VLAN – Use the drop-down list to select Enabled or Disabled. When
Single Port VLAN is Enabled, the SLM-5650A’s Ethernet port accepts the VLANtagged packets from the NP Interface port specified from the "VLAN Port Select"
drop-down list.
VLAN Port Select – the use the drop-down list to select Port 1 through Port 4.
This designates the Ethernet port on which VLAN-tagged packet are ingress and
egress.
Click [Submit] to save the desired Single Port VLAN setting.
When BPM Mode is enabled and any Vipersat operating mode other
than Vipersat Hub or Vipersat Hub Expansion is selected (see Section
8.6.6.2.1), the VLAN Port Configuration portion of the ‘LAN | Interface’
page becomes disabled and is not visible, as shown here:
D–44
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
However, when BPM Mode is enabled and either Vipersat Hub or
Vipersat Hub Expansion is selected (see Section 8.6.6.2.1), the VLAN Port
Configuration portion of the ‘LAN | Interface’ page is replaced with the
Multi-TDM Tunneling Mode controls, as shown here:
Multi-TDM Tunneling Mode (ViperSat Hub or ViperSat Hub
Expansion Mode only)
Multi-TDM Tunneling is a technique where a VLAN “tunnel” is set up between
the Hub unit and any expansion units that are being used to create an SCPC link
with a Remote that is Home Stated to the specified Hub Time-Division
Multiplexing (TDM) Modem.
When an Expansion unit is configured by VMS for an SCPC link, it queries its
assigned hub for the correct VLAN ID. If the feature is turned off, the Hub unit
responds with a zero (0). If the feature is enabled, the Hub will respond with a
VLAN tag that is unique on the current LAN segment.
D–45
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Set the Multi-TDM Tunneling Mode: Click Off, Automatic, or Manual:
• Off – In this mode, the feature is not used and there is no VLAN tag used.
• Automatic – In this mode, the Hub generates the VLAN tag from the last
12 bits of its IP Address. In most cases, this will guarantee a unique value.
• Manual – This mode SHOULD ONLY BE USED if the network is configured
in such a way that two or more hub units on the LAN segment may have
the same value in the low order 12 bits of their IP Address. Once this
mode is selected, a text box will appear to allow entry of a unique ID in
the range from 2 to 4095.
In Manual mode, it is the user’s responsibility to ensure that
each Hub box on the segment is given a unique value in that
range.
Click [Submit] to save the desired Multi-TDM Tunneling Mode setting.
Flow Control Enable
Use the drop-down list to set Flow Control as Enabled or Disabled. Click [Submit]
to save.
Ethernet Flow Control is a technique by which the receiver sends a message to
the sender to back-off traffic once congestion is encountered.
With Flow Control Enabled, the NP Interface monitors the QOS queue depths to
identify the congestion, if any, of the QOS queue sizes. If the queue reaches 90%
of the configurable QOS queue depth, then the interface sends Ethernet Pause
Frames (IEEE 802.3) with pass time 0xFFFF to the LAN ports. Upon dropping all of
the QOS depths to 50%, the interface again sends Pause frames with pass time
0x0000 to resume the traffic back.
Proxy ARP Enable
Use the drop-down list to set Proxy ARP (Proxy Address Resolution Protocol) as
Enabled or Disabled. Click [Submit] to save.
Proxy ARP is a technique by which an NP Interface in Router Mode on a given
network answers the ARP queries for a network address that is not on this
network, but is reachable via the NP Interface.
D–46
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
With Proxy ARP enabled, the NP Interface (in Router Mode) 'snoops' all
ARP_REQs; it will send an ARP_REPLY (one if the ARP_REQ host address is an NP
host address that is reachable via one of the routes in the Route Table).
D.2.5.4.2 LAN | Ethernet Ports
Use this page to view the current status of the Ethernet ports and to set each
port to manual or auto-negotiate configuration. Only the NP Interface Ethernet
ports are shown in this screen. The Base Modem Ethernet port statistics and port
information are set from the modem’s front panel.
Figure D-22. ‘LAN | Ethernet Ports’ Page
Ethernet Link Status
This read-only section displays the status for each NP Interface Ethernet port.
D–47
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Ethernet Speed/Duplex
Use the drop-down lists to configure each port to one of the following states:
Auto, 1000 Full, 100 Full, 10 Full, 100 Half, or 10 Half.
Click [Submit] once the Ethernet ports have been configured to suit on this page.
D.2.5.4.3 LAN | ARP (ARP Table)
Figure D-23. ‘LAN | ARP’ Page
ARP Table (Edit Static ARPs)
This table displays all current ARP entries (both Static and Dynamic). The current
Static ARPs may be directly edited here:
Column
Index
IP
MAC
Type
Description
(read-only ) This is the internal table index
Enter the IP Address in the form XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Enter the MAC Address in the form YY:YY:YY:YY:YY:YY
(read-only ) This displays the Entry Type as Static or Dynamic
D–48
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Click [Submit Changes] to save the changes made in this section.
Add Static ARP
Use this section to directly add a Static ARP entry. Click [Add Entry] to add the
entry. Note that the index will automatically increment to the next available
number.
Delete Static ARP
Enter Entry Index to Delete – Type in the Index number. Click [Delete Entry] to
execute removal of the entry.
Flush Dynamic ARPs
Click [Flush ARP Table] to execute the command as needed.
D–49
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.2.5.5 WAN Pages
This section depicts the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface with Quality of Service
(QoS) and Vipersat installed on the SLM-5650A. QoS and Vipersat are
FAST Feature options which must be purchased from Comtech EF Data.
See Section D.2.5.2.2 Admin | FAST Features for more information.
Note that, if the SLM-5650A does not have the QoS option installed, the
QoS hyperlinks outlined in this section will not be visible/available to the
user. When QoS is disabled, a separate QoS status page is shown.
Select QoS, QoS Stats, or Loopback Test to continue.
D.2.5.5.1 WAN | QoS (Quality of Service)
Figure D-24. ‘WAN | Quality of Service’ Page
Quality of Service Feature
Select the Quality of Service operation as On or Off. Click [Submit].
D–50
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Differential Services (DiffServ)
The option is available here for configuring each queue to one of the following
attributes (the minimum/maximum value range is shown in brackets):
• Service Rate (kbps) [ 0.000 / (Tx Data Rate)]
• Med. Drop Precedence (% full) [20 / 90 ]
• High Drop Precedence (% full) [10 / 80]
• Max Queue Depth (bytes) [1500 / 64000]
Click [Submit] after all values have been adjusted to enable settings.
D.2.5.5.2 WAN | QoS Stats (Quality of Service Statistics)
Figure D-25. WAN | Quality of Service Statistics page
Clear / Refresh Differentiated Services (DiffServ) Stats
Click [Clear] to clear queue statistics. Click [Refresh] to update queue statistics.
Differential Services (DiffServ)
This read-only status table displays the following attributes:
D–51
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
Column
Priority
Per-Hop Behavior
(PHB)
Codepoint (DSCP)
Sent Packets
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Description
Traffic class that determines how packets will be forwarded.
Codepoint value in Type of Service (ToS) byte in IP header.
Number of packets sent from queue associated with PHB class.
Number of packets dropped in queue associated with PHB
Dropped Packets
class.
Queued Packets
Number of packets in queue associated with PHB class.
Queued Bytes
Number of bytes in queue associated with PHB class.
Queue Depth (% Full) Percentage (%) full for queue associated with PHB class
Bandwidth (kbps)
Current data rate for queue associated with PHB class.
D.2.5.5.3 WAN | Loopback Test
Use this page to test the operational integrity of the NP Interface M&C, WAN
Interface, and IF Interface.
Figure D-26. WAN | Loopback Test page
Loopback Test
Loopback Test Results – This message window displays the results of the
completed Loopback Test.
Packet Loopback Test – When you click [Start Test], the NP Interface sends 50
multicast packets towards the WAN interface, and enables the IF Loopback. All
packets returned from the IP Loopback will count by the NP Interface, and are
displayed in the Packet Loopback Test Results window.
D–52
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.2.5.6 Routing Pages
Select Routes or OSPF to continue.
D.2.5.6.1 Routing | Routes
Use this page to enter static routes into the NP Interface. This facilitates the
routing of IP traffic over the satellite or to another device on the local LAN. Route
entries can be in any combination of Unicast and Multicast routes.
Figure D-27. ‘Routing | Routes’ Page
Route Table (Display)
This read-only table provides information on a per-route basis:
Column
Index
Route Description
Destination IP/Mask
Description
This identifies the route entry [1 to 256].
This label helps users to maintain their network.
This identifies the route to the destination network.
D–53
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Column
Interface
Description
There are two valid selections for routing to a
destination network:
• Select toWAN when the route to the destination
network is over the satellite link. The toWAN routes
do not need a Next Hop IP Address.
• Select toLAN when the route to the destination
network is attached to the LAN interface.
Next Hop IP
When the route type is toLAN, the Next Hop IP Address
defines the locally attached router’s IP Address, which
you can use to route to the destination network. This is
the case when there is another subnet addressed to the
modem on the LAN side.
Add New Route
Make sure that you accurately create and add new route entries.
Existing routes can’t be modified. If you make a mistake when adding a
new route entry, you must delete the incorrect entry, and then recreate
and re-add your new route.
Use this section to add a route entry to the route table. Enter the information,
and click [Add Entry] to add the route. The route is immediately added to the
route table for processing.
Delete Route
Enter the route table entry, by Index number, which you wish to delete when that
route either is no longer needed or is “Invalid”. Click [Delete Entry] to delete that
route table entry.
A route entry “Route Description” field will change to “Invalid” if the
modem’s Gateway IP Address is changed to an existing “Destination IP”
Address in the route table.
D–54
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.2.5.6.2 Routing | OSPF
Use this page to define the operating parameters for Open Shortest Path First
routing.
Figure D-28. ‘Routing | OSPF’ Page
OSPF Parameters
Enter the operating parameters for the OSPF Interface. Valid ranges are provided
in parentheses.
OSPF – Select the OSPF operating interface as Disabled or Enabled.
Area Network Address – Enter the IP address for the area.
Area Subnet Mask (8-30) – Enter the subnet mask for the area.
OSPF Area (0 - 4294967295) – An area is a set of networks and hosts within an
Autonomous System (AS) that have been administratively grouped together. The
SLM-5650A NP Interface supports only one OSPF Area at a time. A group of
(adjacent) routers which cooperate by exchanging their routing data base for the
D–55
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
specified network range – i.e., an OSPF router – will only send its database to
other routers that advertise that they are in the same area.
Cost (1 - 65535) – Enter the explicit cost of sending a packet via this interface.
Retransmit Interval (1 - 65535 seconds) – Enter the number of seconds between
link state advertisement retransmissions for adjacencies belonging to an OSPF
interface.
Transmit Delay (1 - 65535 seconds) – Enter the parameters used to define the
route to the destination network.
Priority (0 - 255) – Set the priority to help determine the OSPF. Note that 0, or
not designated, is the default value.
Hello Interval (1 - 65535 seconds) – Enter the number seconds between the
‘Hello’ packets that are sent on an OSPF interface.
Dead Interval (1 - 65535 seconds) – Enter the number seconds that a device’s
‘Hello’ packets must not have been seen before its neighbors declare the OSPF
router down.
Authentication Key – Assign a specific password to be used by neighboring OSPF
routers on a network segment that is using OSPF’s simple password
authentication.
Message Digest Key – Enable OSPG MD5 authentication.
D–56
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.2.5.6.3 Routing | IGMP
Use this page to facilitate use of Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)
with configured multicast routes.
Figure D-29. Routing | IGMP page
IGMP, when enabled, responds to IGMP queries for the configured multicast
routes on the transmit side and generates IGMP queries on the receive side. If
there are no active IGMP receivers on the LAN, it will stop forwarding the
multicast traffic (received from the satellite) to the LAN.
IGMP Parameters
IGMP – Select IGMP as Disabled or Enabled.
Query Interval – Enter a value, in seconds, from 1 to 60. The default value is 1.
This is the interval between general queries sent by the modem. By varying the
query interval, a modem administrator may tune the number of IGMP messages
on the subnet; note that larger numbers cause the IGMP queries to be sent less
often.
Response Interval – Enter a value, in seconds, from 1 to 25. The default value is
10. This is the maximum response time inserted into the periodic general
queries. By varying the Response Interval, a modem administrator may tune the
“burstiness” of IGMP messages on the subnet; note that larger values make the
traffic less “bursty” as host responses are spread out over a large interval.
D–57
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
The number of seconds assigned to the Response Interval must be less
than the number of seconds assigned to the Query Interval.
Last Member Query Interval – Enter a value, in seconds, from 1 to 25. The
default value is 10. This is the maximum response time inserted into groupspecific queries that are set in response to Leave Group messages, and is also
amount of time between group-specific query messages. This value may be
tuned to modify the "leave latency" of the network; a reduced value results in
reduced time to detect the loss of the last member of a group.
Robustness – Enter a value from 2 to 10. The default value is b. The Robustness
Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a subnet. If a subnet is
expected to be lossy, the Robustness Variable may be increased. IGMP is robust
to (Robustness Variable-1) packet losses.
The Robustness Variable MUST NOT be 0, and SHOULD NOT be 1.
Version – Enter 1 for IGMPv1 or 2 for IGMPv2.
Click [Submit] to save the desired IGMP configuration changes on this page.
D–58
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.2.5.7 Stats (Statistics) pages
Select Ethernet Tx, Ethernet Rx, IP, WAN, or Clear All to continue.
D.2.5.7.1 Stats | Ethernet Tx
Figure D-30. ‘Stats | Ethernet Tx’ Statistics Page
Clear/Refresh Ethernet Tx Stats
Click [Clear] to delete all Ethernet Tx statistics (this will also clear all Ethernet Rx
statistics). Click [Refresh] to update the page with the most recent statistics.
Tx Valid Frames
Column
Port
Unicast
Description
This is the corresponding Ethernet port on the NP Interface and,
when in BPM Mode, the Base Modem’s J5 Ethernet port.
This is the number of valid Unicast frames transmitted.
D–59
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
Column
Broadcast
Multicast
Pause
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Description
This is the number of valid broadcast frames transmitted.
This is the number of valid multicast frames transmitted.
This is the number of PAUSE frames transmitted.
Tx Collision Frames
The counters provided in this table are applicable in half-duplex only.
Column
Port
Collision
Late Collision
Single Collision
Multiple Collision
Maximum Collision
Description
This is the corresponding Ethernet port on the NP Interface and,
when in BPM Mode, the Base Modem’s J5 Ethernet port.
This is the number of Collision events seen by the GMAC, not
including those controls in a single, Multiple, Excessive or Late.
This is the number of times a collision is detected later than 512
bits-times into the transmission of the frame.
This is the total number of successfully transmitted frames that
experienced exactly one collision.
This is the total number of successfully transmitted frames that
experienced more than one collision.
This is the number of frames dropped in the transmit GMAC
because the frame experienced 16 consecutive collisions.
Tx Discarded/Filtered
Column
Port
Discarded
Filtered
Description
This is the corresponding Ethernet port on the NP Interface and,
when in BPM Mode, the Base Modem’s J5 Ethernet port.
This is the total number of frames received with either FCS
errors or Tx Maximum Collision frames.
Currently not implemented.
D–60
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.2.5.7.2 Stats | Ethernet Rx
Figure D-31. Stats | Ethernet Rx Statistics page
Clear/Refresh Ethernet Rx Stats
Click [Clear] to delete all Ethernet Rx statistics (this will also clear all Ethernet Tx
statistics). Click [Refresh] to update the page with the most recent statistics.
Rx Valid Frames
Column
Port
Unicast
Broadcast
Multicast
Pause
Description
This is the corresponding Ethernet port on the NP Interface and,
when in BPM Mode, the Base Modem’s J5 Ethernet port.
This is the number of valid Unicast frames received.
This is the number of valid broadcast frames received.
This is the number of valid multicast frames received.
This is the number of PAUSE frames received.
D–61
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Rx Error Frames
Column
Port
Invalid FCS
Alignment
Undersized
Oversized
Description
This is the corresponding Ethernet port on the NP Interface and,
when in BPM Mode, the Base Modem’s J5 Ethernet port.
This is the total frames received with CRC error.
This is the total frames received with either Fragments Error or
Jabber Error.
This is the total frames received with a length of less than 64
bytes but with a valid FCS.
This is the total frames received with a length of more than
1536 bytes but with a valid FCS.
Rx Discarded/Filtered
Column
Port
Discarded
Filtered
Description
This is the corresponding Ethernet port on the NP Interface and,
when in BPM Mode, the Base Modem’s J5 Ethernet port.
This is the total frames received with Undersized, Fragments,
Oversized, Jabber, or invalid FCS errors.
Currently not implemented.
D–62
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.2.5.7.3 Stats | IP
Figure D-32. ‘Stats | IP’ Statistics Page
Clear/Refresh IP Statistics
Click [Clear] to delete all statistics. Click [Refresh] to update the page with the
most recent statistics.
Router Statistics
Item
Received Packets
Forwarded Packets
Description
This is the total packets received by router.
This is the total packets forwarded by router.
D–63
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
Item
Dropped Packets
End Station Packets
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Description
This is the total packets dropped by router.
This is the total packets directed to the NP Interface.
Router Errors
Item
Description
Counts the packets received with IP header length are less
Bad Header Packets
than 20 bytes OR IPV4 version is NOT 4. Applies in nonswitch mode only.
This counter updates if the ingress packet total length
(PACKET_SIZE) less than the Ethernet header size (if
Bad Total Length Packets
present, only from LAN and END station) and total length in
IPV4 total length filed. Applies in non-switch mode only.
This counter updates if the IPV4 packet received with TTL
zero and need to be forwarded. Applies in non-switch
TTL Expired Packets
mode only.
Counts the packets received with IPV4_DEST_ADDR has no
No Route Packets
match in Route Table. Applies in non-switch mode only.
This counter updates if total length filed in IPV4 header is
Length Too Small Packets less than 20 bytes OR PACKET_SIZE is less than 20. Applies
in non-switch mode only.
If incoming packet has Ethernet type was not IPV4, IPv6,
Bad Header Protocol
ARP, PPP_SESSION, or PPP_DISCOVERY and non-switch
Packets
mode. It accepts all the Ethernet types in switch mode.
Bad Header Checksum
Counts the packets received with bad IPV4 header
Packets
checksum. Applies in non-switch mode only.
This counter updates if the IPV4 destination address is
Bad Header Destination
either 255.255.255.255, or 0.X.X.X, or 127.X.X.X, or (224Address Packets
255).X.X.X. Applies in non-switch mode only.
Internal Processing Error Non Switch mode: This counter updates if the Ingress
Packets
packet cannot traverse within the ME components due to
resources scarcity.
Switch mode: This counter updates if a) the ingresses
packet destination MAC address is NP’s MAC but the IP
address is NOT the NP’s IP, or b) if the ingress packet cannot
traverse within the MEs components due to internal
resources scarcity.
D–64
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
End Station Statistics
Item
Received Packets
Forwarded Packets
Local Delivery Packets
Created Fragment
Packets
Description
This is the total packets destined to the NP Interface.
This is the total packets forwarded by router.
This is the number of packets delivered to management
applications running on the NP Interface.
This is the number of IP fragments created by the NP
Interface because the packet being sent exceeds the
maximum transmit unit (MTU).
End Station Errors
Item
Description
This is the total End Station packets dropped due to
Invalid Header Packets
incorrect length or IP Header Checksum.
This is the number of IP packets dropped by the NP
Invalid Address Packets
Interface because of an invalid destination address.
This is the number of IP Packets dropped by the NP
No Route Packets
Interface because no “route destination” matched in the
rout table.
This is the number of IP packets dropped by the NP
Invalid Fragment Packets
Interface because IP fragments could not be reassembled.
ICMP Statistics
Where ICMP is Internet Control Message Protocol:
Item
Created ICMP Message
Packets
Created ICMP
Destination Unreachable
Packets
Created ICMP Time
Exceeded Packets
Created ICMP Parameter
Problem Packets
Created ICMP Redirect
Packets
Description
This is the total ICMP message packets.
This is the total ICMP Destination Unreachable message
packets.
This is the total ICMP Time Exceeded message packets.
This is the total ICMP Parameter Problem message packets.
This is the total ICMP Redirect message packets
D–65
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
ICMP Errors
ICMP Send Errors Packets – This is the number of ICMP packets dropped by the
NP Interface because of an unknown ICMP error.
D.2.5.7.4 Stats | WAN
Figure D-33. ‘Stats | WAN’ Statistics Page
Clear/Refresh WAN Statistics
Click [Clear] to delete all statistics. Click [Refresh] to update the page with the
most recent statistics.
WAN Tx Frames
Column
Network Layer
Data Link Layer
Satellite Layer
Description
This is the total packets sent to data link layer.
This is the total frames sent to satellite layer.
This is the total frames sent over satellite.
D–66
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
WAN Tx Errors
Column
Network Layer
Data Link Layer
Satellite Layer
Description
This counter increments if the packets cannot traverse from
WAN_DLL_OUT component to ETH_TX-3 component to due
to internal resource scarcity.
This is the total data link layer Tx errors.
This is the total satellite layer Tx errors.
WAN Rx Frames
Column
Network Layer
Data Link Layer
Satellite Layer
Description
This is the total packets received from data link layer.
This is the total frames received from satellite layer.
This is the total frames received over the satellite.
WAN Rx Errors
Column
Network Layer
Data Link Layer
Satellite Layer
Description
This counter updates for every WAN ingress packets with
size more than 1700 bytes.
These are the total WAN_FPGA Errors
These are the total WAN_FPGA Errors.
Detailed Satellite Rx Errors
Column
WAN Rx Bad Address
Errors
WAN Rx Undersized
Errors
WAN Rx HDLC Frame
Errors
WAN Rx Overrun Errors
WAN Rx Packet CRC
Errors
WAN Rx HDLC CRC Errors
Description
HDLC Address of the received frame does not match one of
the eight configured HDLC addresses.
For a given CEFD WAN Control byte setting, received frame
is too short to be valid.
Any one of the following HDLC error conditions: Abort,
Octet Alignment, or Frame Length shorter than 32-bits.
HDLC receive FIFO has overflowed.
The Packet CRC checksum failed.
The received HDLC frame has failed the HDLC CRC
checksum.
D–67
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.2.5.7.5 Stats | Clear All
Use this page to simultaneously clear the statistics for the Ethernet Tx, Ethernet
Rx, IP, and WAN Stats pages.
Figure D-34. ‘Stats | Clear All’ Statistics Page
Clear All Statistics (Ethernet / IP / WAN)
Click [Clear All Statistics] to execute.
D–68
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.2.5.8 Vipersat Pages
Figure D-35 shows the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface pages with Vipersat
installed on the SLM-5650A. Vipersat is a FAST Option which must be
purchased from Comtech EF Data. See Section D.2.5.2.2 Admin |
FAST Features for more information.
Note that if the SLM-5650A does not have the Vipersat FAST Option
installed, the hyperlinks associated with the Vipersat navigation tab
will not be visible or otherwise available to the user.
Consult adjunct Comtech EF Data publication MN-0000035 Vipersat
SLM-5650A Satellite Network Modem Router User Guide for
configuration and use of these optional pages.
Figure D-35. Vipersat pages
D–69
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.2.5.9 Redundancy Page
This page provides read-only status information on the configured redundant
configuration.
Figure D-36. Redundancy page
The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem, when connected to a Comtech EF Data
CRS-311 1:1 Redundancy Switch, provides fully-automatic protection of IP packet
traffic in the case of equipment failure.
If the Redundancy tab is selected without a 1:1 Redundant Configuration, per
Figure D-36 the 1:1 Redundancy status is displayed as Unavailable.
D–70
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.2.5.10 Save page
In order to make any Network Processor modifications permanent,
you must use this page to save Unit Configuration before rebooting
the unit.
Figure D-37. ‘Save’ Page
Use this page to save the current unit configurations to Flash memory. This
makes all configuration changes made under the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface
permanent until either a new round of setting updates is initiated and saved, or
all settings are restored to the original factory defaults via the ‘Admin | Defaults’
page (see Section D.2.5.2.6 for full details).
Click [Save Now] to begin the save process. At the
prompt (shown at right), click [OK] to complete
the process, or Cancel to abort the command.
D–71
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Notes:
D–72
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
D.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Network Processor (NP) Telnet/SSH CLI
Interface Operation
This appendix section defines the Command Line Interface (CLI) user menu
system provided with the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem’s optional NP (Network
Processor) Module Interface. Access to the CLI depends on the IP Interface
Security Mode setting that has been selected for the NP Interface:
D.3.1
Important Operational Considerations
Before you proceed with using the NP Interface module for secure Ethernet
remote product management, make sure the following is true:
• You have read Chapter 8. ETHERNET INTERFACE OPERATION in its
entirety, and you fully understand the requirements and limitations when
using the SLM-5650A Ethernet Interface in non-secure and secure
applications.
• The SLM-5650A is operating with the latest version firmware files.
• The User PC is connected to the Base Modem’s RJ-45 ‘J5 Ethernet’ port.
• You have recorded the unit’s Management IP Address and the NP
Interface IP Address.
• The User PC is running a compatible web browser for operation of the NP
HTTP/HTTPS Interface.
• The User PC is running a terminal emulation program for operation of the
Telnet Remote Control features.
For the Telnet/SSH CLI Interface Operations note that:
• The CLI is accessible via Telnet when the IP Interface Security Mode has
been set to “Low Level Security”. SSH (Secure Shell) will not be available
for CLI operations at this security level.
• The CLI is accessible only via SSH when the IP Interface Security Mode has
been set to “High Level Security”. Telnet will not be available for CLI
operations at this security level.
• See Section D.2.5.2.3 ‘Admin | Security’ (Account Information) in this
appendix for detailed information about the IP Interface Security Mode
features for the NP Interface, including overviews on using Telnet and
SSH.
D–73
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.3.1.1 Telnet User Access
Telnet operation is permissible only when the IP Interface Security Mode has
been set to “Low Level Security”. See Section D.2.5.2.3 ‘Admin | Security’
(Account Information) in this appendix for instructions on setting the security
level to allow for Telnet (non-secure) operation of the CLI.
When connecting via Telnet, the user must have network connectivity to the NP
Interface. This connectivity can be via a local LAN, a remote LAN, or via a satellite
link from another modem.
D.3.1.1.1 Telnet Operational Guidelines
Telnet access is available on TCP Port 23. The default user name and password
are both comtech.
The user name and password are required to gain access to system
through the HTTP/HTTPS and CLI interfaces. For security reasons, the
“Restore Factory Defaults” command (see Section D.3.2.2.5 in this
appendix) does NOT reset the user name and password.
The Telnet CLI allows, at most, seven (7) concurrent logins to the Telnet menu via
multiple Telnet sessions.
Note that the CLI user name and password are the same as the NP
HTTP/HTTPS Interface user name and password.
D.3.1.2 SSH (Secure Shell) User Access
SSH access and operation is permissible only when the IP Interface Security Mode
has been set to “High Level Security”. See Section D.2.5.2.3 ‘Admin | Security’
D–74
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
(Account Information) in this appendix for instructions on setting the security
level to allow for SSH (secure) operation of the CLI.
At login, note that the CLI user name and password when starting an SSH CLI
session are the same as the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface user name and password.
See Section 6.6 SSH (Secure Shell) Interface for initial setup and operational
examples for using an SSH terminal emulator application for CLI operations.
D.3.1.3 Using the Command Line Interface
D.3.1.3.1 CLI Menu System – Parallel Functionality
The CLI, accessible via Telnet and SSH, allows you to change operating
parameters in a manner similar to the functionality as provided for the
monitoring, configuration, and control via the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem’s
front panel menus (see Chapter 7. FRONT PANEL OPERATION) and in the NP
Module HTTP/HTTPS Interfaces (see Section D.2 Network Processor (NP)
HTTP/HTTPS Interface in this appendix).
D.3.1.3.2 CLI Menu – Common Information, Navigation, Operation
Features
1) Certain operational menu selections (e.g., Vipersat Configuration) are
visible/selectable only when that FAST Option has been purchased and
enabled for operation. The menu pages that follow show all available
options as installed – the configuration in use may or may not provide the
level of functionality depicted in this appendix.
2) With some exceptions, the menu pages depicted in this appendix feature
the following common informational or navigational aids:
Menu Options/Fields
[Text field example]
Entry
[RO]
Description
Typically found in the body of the page. This
designates the field as a read-only
status/informational message. There is no user
action required for this item.
D–75
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
Menu Options/Fields
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Entry
Save Parameters to Flash
S
Logout of CLI Session
L
Exit Menu
X
Description
Allows user to save the current configuration of
the NP Interface to permanent storage. This
configuration will be restored on each
successive power cycle.
Allows user to log out of the CLI session.
Allows user to exit the current menu and return
to the parent menu. Alternately, the user may
press the Esc key to perform the same action.
3) Typically, once any mnemonic is entered, the user
is prompted to type in a functional selection, an
alphanumeric configuration string, or an
operational value. This prompt is provided at the
bottom of the active page and takes the form of a
selection choice and/or a blank prompt (a solid
bar), as shown in the example to the right:
4) If a parameter is rejected for any reason, an error will appear at the top of
the page, along with an explanation that serves to assist the user in the
re-entry of information, as shown in this example:
5) Any changes made via the CLI should be saved to permanent storage prior
to terminating the CLI session. Although changes are retained after a CLI
session ends (as long as the SLM-5650A remains running), take note also
that changes will be lost if, for example, the modem is rebooted or the NP
Interface is reset or loses power. Modified parameters can be saved by
issuing the Save command “S” from any menu. You are prompted to
confirm that all changes should be made permanent:
D–76
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
6) When you attempt to terminate a CLI session via Logout command “L”,
the CLI prompts you to confirm that you wish to end your session:
D.3.2
Command Line Interface Pages
D.3.2.1 Main Menu
The Main Menu serves as the CLI’s primary navigation page. All selections made
on this page take the user to submenus listed in this table (operation features
nested under each of these submenus, in turn, are described in the appendix
sections listed):
Submenu
Administration
Entry
A
Function/Description
The Administration Menu provides a basic set of
standard admin functions to the NP Interface.
D–77
See…
Sect. D.3.2.2
(D.3.2.2.1
through
D.3.2.2.8)
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
Submenu
Entry
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Function/Description
Satellite
Modem
Configuration
M
The Satellite Modem Configuration option
displays nested menus that allow the user to
configure and monitor the satellite Base Modem.
LAN
N
The LAN menu allows the user to change the IP
address and view the ARP (Address Resolution
Protocol) table.
WAN
W
Route Table
R
OSPF
F
IGMP
I
Vipersat
Configuration
V
Redundancy
Configuration
E
Operations and
Maintenance
O
The WAN menu allows the user to configure QoS
(Quality of Service) and DiffServ (Differentiated
Services).
The Route Table menu allows the user to
configure the Unicast/Multicast routing tables.
The OSPF Menu allows the user to configure
Open Shortest Path First routing parameters.
The IGMP Menu allows the user to configure
Internet Group Management Protocol
parameters
The FAST-Feature-enabled Vipersat Configuration
menu allows the user to configure Vipersat
functionality. This menu selection is
visible/available only after the Vipersat option
has been purchased.
The Redundancy Configuration Menu allows the
user to view the 1:1 IP redundancy status.
The Operations & Maintenance menu allows the
user to configure various options used to control
and maintain the system. This menu also
provides diagnostic tools for troubleshooting and
statistics.
D–78
See…
Sect. D.3.2.3
(D.3.2.3.1
through
D.3.2.3.6)
Sect. D.3.2.4
(D.3.2.4.1
through
D.3.2.4.3)
Sect. D.3.2.5
Sect. D.3.2.6
Sect. D.3.2.7
Sect. D.3.2.8
Sect. D.3.2.9
Sect. D.3.2.10
Sect. D.3.2.11,
D.3.2.11.1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.3.2.2 Administration Menu page (A)
The Administration Menu page, opened from the Main Menu, contains the
following options or fields:
Menu
Options/Fields
Information
System Working
Mode
Entry
I
W
Description
Displays information for NP and Modem Bootrom running status,
load images, and current configuration status.
Prompts you to select:
Vipersat modes:
0 – Vipersat Hub
1 – Vipersat Hub Expansion
2 – Vipersat Remote
3 – Vipersat Remote Expansion
Non-Vipersat modes:
4 – Multipoint Hub Router
5 – Multipoint Remote Router
6 – Vipersat Remote Expansion
Bridge Mode:
7 – Gigabit Ethernet Bridge
D–79
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
Menu
Options/Fields
Entry
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Description
BPM Mode
B
Prompts you to select BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) mode of
operation:
0 – Disabled
1 – Enabled
FAST Feature Code
F
Displays currently installed FAST options.
Security
A
Allows you to set admin user name and password, and set IP
Interface Security Mode.
SNMP
P
Displays SNMP configuration parameters.
Restore Factory
Defaults
D
Allows you to restore factory default configuration settings.
Set Time
T
Allows you to configure automatic time synchronization through
Network Time Protocol (NTP).
Event Log
E
Displays summary of faults and events.
Boot Network
Processor From [#]
N
Prompts you to enter NP boot image:
1 – Image 1
2 – Image 2
3 – Newest
Boot Base Modem
From [#]
M
Prompts you to enter modem boot image:
1 – Image 1
2 – Image 2
Reboot Now
R
Prompts you to enter Y to reboot, N to exit command without
rebooting.
D–80
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.3.2.2.1 Administration Menu | Information page (I)
The read-only SLM 5650 Network Processor – System Images page, opened from
the Administration Menu, displays the information for NP and Modem bulk
images, and current NP running bulk image:
Press any character to return to the Administration Menu page.
D–81
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.3.2.2.2 Administration Menu | FAST Feature Code Page (F)
The read-only FAST Features page, opened from the Administration Menu,
displays the status (i.e., Installed or Not Installed) of all available FAST options:
Press any character to return to the Administration Menu page.
D–82
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.3.2.2.3 Administration Menu | Security Page (A)
The HighLevel Security setting will disable the Telnet menu interface.
Do not enable High Level Security if using Telnet or connectivity will
be lost! When the High Level Security setting is selected, SSH can be
used to interface with the CLI menu system.
The Security Menu page, opened from the Administration Menu, contains the
following options or fields:
Menu
Options/Fields
Entry Description
Admin User Name
A
Admin Password
P
IP Interface Security
Mode
M
SSH Host Key
Signature
Allows you to set the Admin User Name (excluding < > ” ~, a
minimum of 7 / maximum of 25 characters is permitted).
Allows you to set the Admin Password (excluding < > ” ~, a
minimum of 7 / maximum of 25 characters is permitted).
Prompts you to select the IP Interface Security Level:
Press
For
User Accessibility
0
Low Level Security
HTTP and Telnet allowed
1
High Level Security
Only HTTPS/SSH allowed
This key signature, or fingerprint, helps to identify the NP when
connecting through SSH. SSH clients typically show the host key
[RO] signature when they connect to a system for the first time. You can
then compare the host key the SSH client shows with the host key
the NP displays to verify that they are the same
D–83
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
Menu
Options/Fields
Generate New Host
Key
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Entry Description
Generates a new host key that uniquely identifies the NP.
NOTE: After doing this, SSH clients that have connected to the NP
before will usually note or warn that the host key has changed
when they connect again.
G
D.3.2.2.4 Administration Menu | SNMP Page (P)
The SNMP page, opened from the Administration Menu, allows the user to
change the parameters associated with Simple Network Management Protocol,
an application-layer protocol designed to facilitate the exchange of management
information between network devices.
The SLM-5650A SNMP agent supports SNMPv1, v2c and, when the IP Interface
Security Level has been set to High, SNMPv3. The page contains the following
options or fields:
Menu
Options/Fields
Entry
Read Community
[RO]
Write Community
[RO]
Trap Community
T
Trap
I
System Contact
C
System Location
N
Description
For complete details on SNMP and using this menu, see Chapter
8.2 SNMP Interface.
D–84
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Once all changes have been made using this menu, in order for the configuration
to take effect, the user must press ‘S’ to save these SNMP configuration changes,
then reboot the modem using the Reboot Now prompt (press ‘R’ using the
Administration Menu) as outlined in this appendix in Section D.3.2.2.8.
D.3.2.2.5 Administration Menu | Restore Factory Defaults (D)
Select ‘D’ from the Administration Menu to restore all previously-configured
modem parameters to their Factory Default Configuration settings. You are
prompted:
Are you sure you wish to continue? (Y or N)
Press ‘Y’ to begin the restoration process, or ‘N’ to abort the command and
return to the previous menu.
Using ‘Restore Factory Defaults’ does not change the user name and
password settings.
D–85
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.3.2.2.6 Administration Menu | Set Time Page (T)
The Time Control (Set Time) page, opened from the Administration Menu,
contains the following options or fields:
Menu
Options/Fields
Time Zone
Automatic
Synchronize
Primary Internet
Time Server
Secondary Internet
Time Server
Entry
Description
Z
T
P
Q
Current Date
[RO]
Current Time
[RO]
Internet Time Status
[RO]
Update Date & Time
D
See Section D.2.5.2.7 ‘Admin | Time’ (Date and Time) for full
details on this page’s functionality.
D–86
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.3.2.2.7 Administration Menu | Event Log Page (E)
Once the System Event Log page is opened from the Administration Menu, the
system is polled for summary events and faults, the following message appears:
Please wait for the event log to appear
This may take up to a minute
When ready, the page displays a scrollable list as per the following example:
From here, the page contains the following options or fields:
Menu
Options/Fields
Entry
Previous Page
P
Next Page
N
Top
T
Bottom
B
Logging On/Off
O
Logging Level
L
Clear Event Log
C
Description
Allows user to navigate, on a per-page basis, between the start
and end of the Event Log.
See Section D.2.5.2.8 ‘Admin | Event Log’ for full details on this
page’s functionality.
D–87
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.3.2.2.8 Administration Menu | Reboot Now prompt (R)
Before rebooting, the user must remember to SAVE PARAMETERS TO
FLASH (Select ‘S’ from the Administration Menu); otherwise, all
changes made prior to reboot will be lost.
Select ‘R’ from the Administration Menu to reboot the system. You are
prompted:
Are you sure you wish to continue? (Y or N)
Press ‘Y’ to begin the reboot process, or ‘N’ to abort the command and return to
the previous menu.
Pressing ‘Y’ causes the entire modem to reboot; this includes the
Base Modem, NP Interface, and the TRANSEC Module.
D–88
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.3.2.3 Satellite Modem Configuration (Modem Menu) Page (M)
The Modem Menu (Satellite Modem Configuration) page, opened from the Main
Menu, contains the following options/fields:
Menu
Options/Fields
Entry
Description
Modem Type
[RO]
Displays modem type
Interface
[RO]
Displays installed interface
Reference
[RO]
Displays active reference (internal / external)
B
Prompts you to select:
0 – 70/140 MHz
1 – L-Band
M
Allows you to configure modulator operating parameters
D
Allows you to configure demodulator operating parameters
Receive Monitor
R
Read-only – displays active Rx operating parameters
Events
E
Stats
T
Utility
U
Frequency Band
Modulator
Settings
Demodulator
Settings
Displays the Modem Event Log and allows you to set or adjust
display parameters for logging
Displays the System Event Log and allows you to set or adjust
display parameters for logging
Allows you to select/set:
T – Time (in HH:MM:SS format)
D – Date (in DD/MM/YY format), or
C – Circuit ID (exactly 24 characters).
D–89
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.3.2.3.1 Satellite Modem Configuration | Modulator Menu Page
(M)
The Modulator Menu page, opened from the Modem Menu (Satellite Modem
Configuration) page, contains the following options or fields:
Menu
Options/Fields
Entry
FEC Type
T
Modulation
M
FEC Code Rate
C
Data Rate
D
Description
Prompts the user to select:
0 – None
1 – Viterbi
2 – Turbo
3 – Sequential
Prompts the user to select:
0 – BPSK
1 – QPSK
2 – OQPSK
3 – 8-PSK
4 – 16-QAM
Prompts the user to select:
0 – 1/1
1 – 1/2
2 – 3/4
3 – 7/8
4 – 2/3
5 – 5/6
6 – 21/44
7 – 5/16
8 – 17/18
Allows user to edit Data Rate using   arrow keys.
D–90
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
Menu
Options/Fields
Entry
Frequency
F
Spectrum
I
Scrambler
R
Power Level
P
Carrier
A
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Description
Allows user to edit Frequency using   arrow keys.
Prompts user to select:
0 – Normal
1 – Inverted
Prompts the user to select:
0 – Off
1 – OM73
2 – V.35
3 – Modified V.35
4 – SYNC
5 – IBS
6 – TURBO
Allows user to edit Power Level using   arrow keys.
Prompts the user to select
0 – OFF
1 – ON
2 – RTS
3 – VSAT
D–91
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.3.2.3.2 Satellite Modem Configuration | Demodulator Menu
Page (D)
The Demodulator Menu page, opened from the Modem Menu (Satellite Modem
Configuration) page, contains the following options or fields:
Menu
Options/Fields
Entry Description
Prompts the you to select:
0 – None
1 – Viterbi
2 – Turbo
3 – Sequential
Prompts the you to select:
0 – BPSK
1 – QPSK
2 – OQPSK
3 – 8-PSK
4 – 16-QAM
Prompts the you to select:
0 – 1/1
1 – 1/2
2 – 3/4
3 – 7/8
4 – 2/3
5 – 5/6
6 – 21/44
7 – 5/16
8 – 17/18
FEC Type
T
Demodulation
M
FEC Code Rate
C
Data Rate
D
Allows you to edit Data Rate using   arrow keys.
Frequency
F
Allows you to edit Frequency using   arrow keys.
D–92
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
Menu
Options/Fields
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Entry Description
Spectrum
I
Descrambler
R
Prompts you to select:
0 – Normal
1 – Inverted
Prompts the you to select:
0 – Off
1 – OM73
2 – V.35
3 – Modified V.35
4 – SYNC
5 – IBS
6 – TURBO
D–93
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.3.2.3.3 Satellite Modem Configuration | Receive Monitor Page
(R)
The read-only Receive Parameters (i.e., Receive Monitor) page, opened from the
Modem Menu (Satellite Modem Configuration) page, displays the Rx parameters:
Press ‘X’ to return to the Modem Menu (Satellite Modem Configuration) page.
D–94
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.3.2.3.4 Satellite Modem Configuration | Events Page (E)
The Modem Event Log page, opened from the Modem Menu (Satellite Modem
Configuration) page, displays a scrollable list as per the following example:
When ready, the page contains the following options or fields:
Menu
Options/Fields
Previous Page
Next Page
Top
Bottom
Clear Event Log
Entry Description
P
N
T
B
Allows user to navigate, on a per-page basis, between the start
and end of the Event Log.
C
See SectionD.2.5.3.3 Modem | Events for full details on this
page’s functionality.
D–95
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.3.2.3.5 Satellite Modem Configuration | Stats Page (T)
Once the Modem Statistics (Stats) page is opened from the Modem Menu
(Satellite Modem Configuration) page, as the system is polled for summary
events and faults, the following message appears:
Please wait for the event log to be read
This may take up to a minute
When ready, the page displays a scrollable list of as per the following example:
The page contains the following options or fields:
Menu
Options/Fields
Previous Page
Next Page
Add Entry
Modify Entry
Delete Entry
Logging Level
Clear Event Log
Entry Description
P
N
A
M
D
L
C
Allows you to navigate, on a per-page basis, between the start
and end of the Stats Log.
See Section D.2.5.3.4 Modem | Stats for full details on this page’s
functionality.
D–96
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.3.2.3.6 Satellite Modem Configuration | Utility Page (U)
The Modem Utility Menu page, opened from the Modem Menu (Satellite Modem
Configuration) page, contains the following options or fields:
Menu
Options/Fields
Time
Date
Circuit ID
Entry Description
T
D
C
Allows you to set the time in HH:MM:SS format.
Allows you to set the date in International format (DD/MM/YY).
Allows you to define a name for the Circuit ID.
This ID must consist of exactly 24 characters in UPPER
CASE ONLY. No spaces are permitted in this ID; use a
dash [-] instead.
D–97
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.3.2.4 LAN Menu Page (N)
The LAN Menu page, opened from the Main Menu, contains the following
options or fields:
Menu
Options/Fields
Entry
Interface
I
Ethernet Ports
E
ARP Menu
A
Flow Control
F
Proxy ARP
P
Port VLAN
Enable
M
Port VLAN Select
N
Description
The LAN Interface menu allows you to view the MAC address of the
Network Processor and set the IP address and mask of the Network
Processor:
The Ethernet Ports menu allows you to view the current status of the
Ethernet ports and set each port to auto-negotiate or for manual
configuration.
The ARP Menu allows you to view and edit the ARP (Address
Resolution Protocol) table.
Prompts you to select
0 – Disabled
1 – Enabled
Prompts you to select
0 – Disabled
1 – Enabled
Prompts you to select
0 – Disabled
1 – Enabled
Prompts you to select
0 – Port 1
1 – Port 2
2 – Port 3
3 – Port 4
D–98
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
Menu
Options/Fields
Port VLAN Id
Entry
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Description
Enter an ID value from 2 to 4095. Packets containing specified VLAN
only will ingress and egress from the NP Interface port specified via
"VLAN Port Select" (Entry “N”).
O
D.3.2.4.1 LAN Menu | Interface Page (I)
The Interface page, opened from the LAN Menu page, contains the following
options or fields:
Menu
Options/Fields
Entry Description
MAC Address
[RO]
IP Addressing
Mode
A
Traffic IP Address
Management IP
Address
Submit Changes
T
M
C
The MAC is set at the factory to a guaranteed unique address that
cannot be modified by the you.
Prompts you to select:
0 – Single (Traffic IP Address only)
1 – Dual (Traffic and Management IP Addresses)
Allows you to edit the Traffic IP Address using the  arrow keys.
Allows you to edit the Management IP Address using the  arrow
keys.
Saves any changes made to the Traffic and Management IP
Addresses.
D–99
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.3.2.4.2 LAN Menu | Ethernet Ports Menu Page (E)
The Ethernet Ports Menu page, opened from the LAN Menu page, provides readonly NP Interface Ports 1 through 4 Link Status information, and allows the user
to manually change the Ethernet Port Speed/Duplex Configurations for each port
by pressing ‘1’ through ‘4’ as needed.
D.3.2.4.2.1
LAN Menu | Ethernet Ports Menu | Ports 1-4 Speed/
Duplex Configuration
When you press ‘1’, ‘2’, ‘3’ or ‘4’ on the Ethernet Ports Menu page, you are then
prompted to configure NP Interface Ports 1 through 4, on a per-port basis, with
one of the following selections:
0
1
2
3
4
5
–
–
–
–
–
–
Auto
10 Mbps Half Duplex
10 Mbps Full Duplex
100 Mbps Half Duplex
100 Mbps Full Duplex
1000 Mbps Full Duplex
See Section D.2.5.4.2 LAN | Ethernet Ports for an overview of this functionality.
D–100
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.3.2.4.3 LAN Menu | ARP Menu (A)
The ARP Table page, opened from the LAN Menu page, contains the following
options or fields:
Menu
Options/Fields
Entry Description
Add entry
A
Modify Entry
M
Delete Entry
Previous Page
Next Page
D
P
N
See Section D.2.5.4.3 LAN | ARP (ARP Table) for an overview of
command functionality.
Allows user to navigate, on a per-page basis, between the start and
end of the ARP Table.
D–101
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.3.2.5 WAN Menu Page (W)
The WAN Menu page, opened from the Main Menu, contains the following
options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Entry
QoS Feature
Q
Global Config &
Statistics
G
Global Con Display
A
Global Statistics
B
Class Selector 6
C
Expedited Forwarding
E
Assured Forwarding
Class 1
Assured Forwarding
Class 2
Assured Forwarding
Class 3
Assured Forwarding
Class 4
1
Description
Prompts you to select:
0 – Disabled
1 – Enabled
See Section D.2.5.5 WAN Pages for an overview of command
functionality and/or information presented for these
functions.
2
3
4
D–102
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
Menu Options/Fields
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Entry
Description
Default
D
Provides you with read-only display of the DiffServ default
queue.
Clear (reset) Statistics
R
Allows you to reset all DiffServ statistics.
D.3.2.6 Routing Table Page (R)
With the Routing Table page (opened from the Main Menu), static routes can be
entered into the IP Module to route IP traffic over the satellite or to another
device on the local LAN. Route entries can be in any combination of Unicast and
Multicast routes. The Routing Table page contains the following options or fields:
Menu
Options/Fields
Entry Description
Add entry
A
Modify Entry
Delete Entry
Previous Page
Next Page
M
D
P
N
See Section D.2.5.6.1 Routing | Routes for an overview of command
functionality.
Allows you to navigate, on a per-page basis, between the start and
end of the Routing Table.
D–103
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.3.2.7 OSPF Configuration Page (F)
The OSPF Menu page, opened from the Main Menu, contains the following
options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
OSPF
Entry
E
Area Network
Address
Area Subnet Mask
OSPF Area
Cost
Retransmit Interval
Transmit Delay
Priority
Hello Interval
Dead Interval
Authentication Key
Message Digest Key
M
A
C
R
T
P
H
D
K
J
Submit Changes
Z
Description
Enables or Disables the Open Shortest Path First operation.
Typing ‘E’ prompts user to select:
0 – Disabled
1 – Enabled
N
See Section D.2.5.6.2 Routing | OSPF for an overview of
command functionality and/or information presented for
these functions.
Saves any changes made on this page to the OSPF operating
parameters.
D–104
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.3.2.8 IGMP Configuration Page (I)
The IGMP Menu page, activated from the Main Menu, contains the following
options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Entry
IGMP
E
Query Interval
Response Interval
Last Member Query
Interval
Robustness
IGMP Version
Q
R
M
Submit Changes
Z
O
V
Description
Enables or Disables the Internet Group Management Protocol
operation. Typing ‘E’ prompts user to select:
0 – Disabled
1 – Enabled
See SectionD.2.5.6.3 Routing | IGMP for an overview of
command functionality and/or information presented for
these functions.
Saves any changes made on this page to the IGMP operating
parameters.
D–105
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.3.2.9 Vipersat Configuration Page (V)
Vipersat is a FAST Option that must be purchased from Comtech EF Data. See
Section D.2.5.2.2 Admin | FAST Features for more information about FAST
options.
If the SLM-5650A does not have this option installed, the functionality associated
with this FAST Option will not be visible/available to the CLI user.
The appearance of this page changes depending on the selected Vipersat Mode
of operation (see Section D.2.5.2.1 Admin | Vipersat Mode (FAST Option). The
example shown here depicts the menu when the Vipersat Remote mode is
selected.
Consult adjunct Comtech EF Data publication MN-0000035 Vipersat
SLM-5650A Satellite Network Modem Router User Guide for
configuration and use of these optional menu pages.
D–106
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.3.2.10 Redundancy Configuration Page (E)
The 1:1 Redundancy Menu page, opened from the Main Menu, provides the user
with read-only status information on the redundant operations configuration.
The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem, when connected to a Comtech EF Data
CRS-311 1:1 Redundancy Switch, provides fully-automatic protection of IP packet
traffic in the case of equipment failure. Refer to the pertinent redundancy switch
Installation and Operation Manual for detailed information on the use of the
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem in redundant operations.
If the user selects the Redundancy tab without a 1:1 Redundant Configuration,
the 1:1 Redundancy status is displayed as Unavailable.
D–107
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.3.2.11 Operations & Maintenance Page (O)
The Operations & Maintenance page, opened from the Main Menu, contains the
following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Entry
T
Statistics
Ping/TraceRoute
Target IP
Ping Above Address
Max Trace Route
Hops
Trace Route Above
Address
Base Management
Port
WAN to WAN Internal
Mcast Addr
Debug Menu
I
P
M
R
B
W
D
Description
Provides you with read-only access to Ethernet Tx/Rx, LAN,
WAN operating statistics; allows you to clear existing
statistics.
Allows you to edit target IP address for ping and trace route
using the  arrow keys.
Allows you to ping on IP Address.
Allows you to set the maximum number of trace route hops
using the  arrow keys.
Allows you to trace route on IP address.
Allows you to edit the Vipersat base management UDP/TCP
port using the  arrow keys.
Allows you to edit the WAN-WAN Internal Multicast Address
using the  arrow keys.
Password-restricted for factory use only.
Ping and Trace Route are only available through the CLI Operations &
Maintenance page. For ping and trace route to work, the you must
enter a target IP address. You can then choose to issue a Ping or Trace
Route to the Target IP Address. When doing a Trace Route, the
maximum trace route hops can also be specified.
D–108
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
D.3.2.11.1 Operations & Maintenance | Statistics Page (T)
The Statistics page, opened from the Operations & Maintenance page, provides
read-only statistics pages for varied operating parameters and commands used to
clear those statistics.
Menu Options/Fields
Ethernet TX
Ethernet RX
IP
WAN
Clear Ethernet
Statistics (Tx & Rx)
Clear IP Statistics
Clear WAN Statistics
Entry
T
R
I
W
Description
See Section D.2.5.7 Stats (Statistics) pages for an overview of
the information provided on these read-only pages.
1
2
3
Allows you to clear all statistics.
D–109
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix D
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Notes:
D–110
Appendix E.OPTIONAL
TRANSEC MODULE
OPERATION
E.1
Overview
The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem is optionally equipped with the TRANSEC
Module, either in standalone operation with the SLM-5650A Base Modem, or in
tandem with the optional Network Processor (NP) Interface Module.
The SLM-5650A is fully compatible and interoperable in all specified modes of
operation with KIV-19 Provisional and KG-95-1 Provisional Transmission Security
(TRANSEC) equipment currently used by the Government.
EIA-422 data rates higher than 20 Mbps (for complete interoperability
with the KG-95-1) are provisional.
For either configuration, the TRANSEC Module provides a proxy function of
HTTPS connections to the Base Modem and the NP Interface; a secure HTTPS
connection to the TRANSEC Module therefore enables secure user access to all
Base Modem and/or all NP M&C parameters through this indirect proxy
connection.
When the TRANSEC Module is installed, Management Security is mandatory and
therefore security is always enabled: Network management M&C limitations
that are enacted when High Level Security is in effect therefore always apply.
E–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
E.2
TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface
E.2.1
HTTPS Interface Introduction
You can fully control and monitor operation of the SLM-5650A TRANSEC Module
from its HTTPS (Secure HTTP) Interface.
The pages in the SLM-5650A TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface have been
designed for optimal performance when using Microsoft’s Internet Explorer Ver.
7.0 or higher or Mozilla Firefox Ver. 2.0 or higher.
The examples shown in this appendix use Internet Explorer Version 7.0.
E.2.1.1
Secure Management – TRANSEC Module PLUS NP Interface
CAUTION
Make sure to read this section in its entirety!
When the optional NP Interface Module is installed in the SLM-5650A in tandem
with the optional TRANSEC Module and with Management Security enabled, the
network management operating restrictions as previously described (i.e., when
High Level Security is selected) therefore always apply.
The TRANSEC Module provides a proxy function of HTTPS connections to the
Base Modem and the NP Interface; a secure HTTPS connection to the TRANSEC
Module therefore enables user access to all Base Modem and/or all NP M&C
parameters securely through this indirect proxy connection. The Secure
Management interfaces supported by this configuration are summarized as
follows:
Base Modem
Network Processor Interface
TRANSEC Module
HTTPS Proxy via
TRANSEC Module
HTTP
HTTPS (Proxy via TRANSEC
Module)
SSH
HTTPS
SSH
E–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
E.2.2
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
User Login
From the PC, type https://www.xxx.yyy.zzz (where “www.xxx.yyy.zzz” represents
the IP Address of the SLM-5650A TRANSEC Module) into the Address area of the
Web browser:
You may be prompted with a Security Alert:
Should the advisory appear, click [Continue to this website] to proceed.
From any page in the TRANSEC Module HTTPS interface, you may select one of
three modes of operation using the Interface Navigator drop-down list, located at
the top left-hand corner of all TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface pages:
E–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
•
•
•
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Crypto Officer connects you to the secure TRANSEC Module HTTPS
Interface (User Name and Password required).
Modem Operator connects you to the Base Modem HTTP Interface. See
Chapter 9. BASE MODEM HTTP INTERFACE OPERATION for further
information.
Network Operator connects you to the secure Network Processor (NP)
HTTP/HTTPS Interface (User Name and Password required). See Section
D.2 Network Processor (NP) HTTP/HTTPS Interface in Appendix D.
OPTIONAL NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) INTERFACE MODULE for further
information.
To continue to the TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface pages, select Crypto Officer
from the drop-down. Click [Go!].
When the Login page appears, type in a valid Crypto Officer User Name and
Crypto Officer Password – the default for both is comtech. Click [Log On].
The TRANSEC Module User Name and Password are each restricted to
a minimum of 7 and a maximum of 25 characters, excluding: (ASCII
Code 58), < (ASCII Code 60), > (ASCII Code 62), “ (ASCII Code 34), and ~
(ASCII Code 126).
When you enter a valid User Name and Password, the SLM-5650A TRANSEC
Module “home” page (Figure 10-1) appears. Click any tab or hyperlink to
continue.
E–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Figure E-1. TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface ‘Home’ Page
While you may use legacy IE browser
versions ( e.g., Internet Explorer 6.0),
Comtech EF Data Technical Support
does not provide support services for
these older browsers. Should you
encounter problems connecting to the
secure web interface using an older
browser, follow this troubleshooting
tip:
From the browser tool bar, go to the
Tools | Internet Options | Advanced
tab, then under the Security heading,
use the available check boxes to
disable the Secure Sockets Layers (SSL
2.0 and SSL 3.0), then enable the
Transport Layer Security (TLS 1.0).
Remember to re-enable SSL once
finished with troubleshooting.
Operation of the TRANSEC Module may be fully monitored
and controlled from the TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface.
E–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
By rolling the cursor over the tabs located at the top of each page, you can select
from the available nested hyperlinks.
E.2.3
HTTPS Interface – Operational Features
See Section 9.2.3 HTTP Interface – Operational Features in Chapter 9.
BASE MODEM HTTP INTERFACE OPERATION for an overview of the
navigational and operational features common with using this
interface.
E.2.4
HTTPS Menu Tree
The following menu tree illustrates the options available via the TRANSEC
Module HTTPS Interface:
Page Navigation Tabs
Interface Navigator
Drop-down List
Home
Admin
Stats
Maint
Crypto Officer
Home
Config
Module
Status
Unit Info
Modem Operator
Contact
Update
Network Operator
Event
To the left, as described in previously, the Interface Navigator Drop-down list
(shown in green) allows secure access to one of the SLM-5650A’s three distinct
Web interfaces. Once you select Crypto Officer (i.e., the TRANSEC Module HTTPS
Interface), access is granted to the interface’s four available navigation tabs
(shown in blue). Beyond this top-level row of navigation tabs, available nested
hyperlinks (shown in grey) afford specific interface functionality.
Click any tab or hyperlink to continue.
E–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
E.2.5
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface Page
Descriptions
The page examples provided throughout the remainder of this
appendix section omit the Interface Navigator section that is typically
located above the Comtech banner on each page; the purpose and
function of this common segment is defined in Section E.2.2 User
Login.
E.2.5.1
Home Pages
Select Home or Contact to continue.
E.2.5.1.1 Home | Home
Use this page to identify the SLM-5650A TRANSEC Module’s operational
(Firmware) Version. You may return to this page from anywhere within the HTTPS
Interface by clicking the Home tab or hyperlink.
Figure E-2. ‘Home | Home’ Page
E–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
E.2.5.1.2 Home | Contact
Use this page to reference basic contact information needed to reach Comtech
EF Data Sales and Product Support via phone, fax, or Web/email hyperlinks.
Figure E-3. ‘Home | Contact’ Page
E–8
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
E.2.5.2
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Admin (Administrative) Pages
The Admin pages provide configuration, firmware upgrade, and events log
management functions.
Select Config, Update, or Event to continue.
E.2.5.2.1 Admin | Config
Figure E-4. ‘Admin | Config’ Page
E–9
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Active Key
Key Signature (read-only) – This is a signature, or fingerprint, of the Transmission
Encryption Keys (TEKs) generated by the Seed Key and Passphrase. You can
compare signatures on different modems to ensure that each has the same Seed
Key and Passphrase.
The TEKs are updated only when you submit a Passphrase.
Key Signature (read-only) – You may generate 26 TEKs from the Seed Key and
Passphrase (described below). The active TEK (1 through 26) is displayed here.
When you wish to change the encryption key being used to encrypt traffic, click
[Next TEK] to select the next key in the set of 26 TEKs.
1) The [Next TEK] button is disabled when the module is in
Secondary mode; the current TEK mirrors the TEK the connected
primary modem uses.
2) The TEK only increments and never decrements; you cannot reuse a previous key. The only way to reset the TEK to 1 is by clicking
[Activate Future Key] (described below).
Seed Key (write-only) – Enter a 32-character Seed Key to generate TEKs when
the TRANSEC Module is given a Passphrase.
Confirm Seed Key (write-only) – Re-enter the newly created Seed Key to ensure
its accuracy. Once the Seed Key is re-entered and confirmed, click [Update Seed
Key] to finalize this change.
Enter Passphrase (write-only) – Enter a 10- to 32-character Passphrase that is
combined with the previously entered Seed Key to generate TEKs. Once you
enter the Passphrase, click [Update Passphrase] to finalize this change.
Future Key
[Activate Future Key] – You can program a second seed key and passphrase to
generate a second set of TEKs. These keys will lie dormant until you activate
them by clicking [Activate Future Key]. At that time, the following happens:
• The active TEKs are replaced by the ones generated with the Future Seed
Key and Future Passphrase.
E–10
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
•
•
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
The Current TEK gets reset to 1.
Secondary modems connected to this one will also activate their Future
Keys.
The [Activate Future Key] button is active only when the following
conditions are met:
• The modem is in Primary mode (see Encryption Mode,
explained below).
• The Current TEK is greater than 1.
Future Seed Key (write-only) – Enter a 32-character Future Seed Key to generate
a TEK when the TRANSEC Module is given a Future Passphrase (described below).
Confirm Future Seed Key (write-only) – Re-enter the newly created Future Seed
Key to ensure its accuracy. Once the Future Seed Key is re-entered and
confirmed, click [Update Seed Key] to finalize this change.
Future Passphrase (write-only) – Enter a 10- to 32-character Passphrase that is
combined with the previously entered Seed Key to generate TEKs. Once you
enter the Passphrase, click [Update Passphrase] to finalize this change.
Encryption Parameters
Operating Mode – Select Encryption Mode as Primary or Secondary:
• If you select Primary, the TRANSEC Module allows you to advance the
TEK and activate the future key independently of any other modems.
• If you select Secondary, the TRANSEC Module's TEK automatically mirrors
the TEK of the primary modem and the module activates the future key
when the primary modem activates its future key.
Click [Update Mode].
Encryption – Click [Change Encryption state] to toggle display of the On and Off
radio buttons. The “layered” appearance of this control is intended to prevent
you from accidentally toggling the Encryption State.
By selecting the Encryption State as ‘On’, this causes the data traffic to be
encrypted by the TRANSEC Module using the current TEK. This encrypted data is
E–11
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
then delivered to the Base Modem for transmission, regardless of the state of the
receiving modem.
Three user-defined parameters must match in order for encrypted
communication to commence between two TRANSEC Module-equipped
modems:
• Seed Key.
• Passphrase.
• Encryption Frame Length.
Select the desired operational state, then click [Update Encryption] to save the
selected state and then return this selection to its “protected” mode; the On and
Off radio buttons will be hidden once again and the operational state message
will update accordingly (i.e., “Encryption is On” or “Encryption is Off”).
Encryption Frame Length – Enter the Frame Length value as a number of (AES)
16-byte blocks per Frame. Acceptable range is from 1 (faster acquisition, higher
overhead) to 16 (slower acquisition, lower overhead).
See Appendix H. OVERHEAD and SYMBOL RATE CALCULATION for
details on the framed formats and the effect on the modem’s carrier
symbol rate bandwidth.
Click [Update Frame Length] to implement this change.
Reset All Keys – Click [Zeroize] to reset all encryption keys in the module’s
memory to the default values.
Run self tests – Click [Test] to run the module’s cryptographic self tests.
•
•
•
If the tests succeed, the module will resume operation.
If the tests fail, the module will report an error to the event log.
If encryption is enabled and the tests fail, the module will stop
transmitting data to protect its integrity.
E–12
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Network Parameters
Secure Management IP – Enter a new Management IP Address for the TRANSEC
Module that suits your specific operational environment.
If you change this parameter, you will have to repeat the login process
(described in Section E.2.2) using this newly-assigned IP Address in
order to regain access to the TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface.
Subnet Bits – Enter a new IP subnet mask for the TRANSEC Module, from 1 to 30,
that suits your specific operational environment.
Gateway IP –Enter a new Gateway IP Address for the TRANSEC Module that suits
your specific operational environment.
The IP Address that you enter must match the subnet of the Secure
Management IP. If it does not, then the Gateway IP Address displayed
here will default to 0.0.0.0.
Click [Update Settings] to apply changes made to any of these parameters.
Crypto Officer Credentials
Crypto Officer Username – Enter a TRANSEC Module Crypto Officer Username
that is a minimum of 7 and a maximum of 25 characters.
Password – Enter a TRANSEC Module Crypto Officer Password that is a minimum
of 7 and a maximum of 25 characters.
Confirm Password – Re-enter the newly created Crypto Officer Password to
ensure its accuracy.
1) You may not use the following characters when creating the
Crypto Officer Username and Password:
(ASCII Code 58), < (ASCII Code 60), > (ASCII Code 62), “ (ASCII Code
34), and ~ (ASCII Code 126).
2) The default for both the Crypto Officer Username and Password is
comtech.
Click [Update Credentials] to finalize this update.
E–13
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
SSH Console
Host Key Signature – This key signature, or fingerprint, helps to identify the
TRANSEC Module when connecting through SSH (Secure Shell) Interface. SSH
clients typically show the host key signature when they connect to a system for
the first time. You can then compare the host key the SSH client shows with the
host key the TRANSEC Module displays to verify that they are the same.
Click [Generate New Host Key] to generate a new host key that uniquely
identifies the TRANSEC Module. After doing this, SSH clients that have connected
to the TRANSEC Module before will usually note or warn that the host key has
changed when they connect again.
SSH Console – Select the administrative access to the console as On or Off. Click
[Update SSH] to implement this setting.
E–14
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
E.2.5.2.2 Admin | Update
See Chapter 5. FIRMWARE UPDATE for instructions regarding the use
of the ‘Admin | Update’ page, and for detailed information on the
procedures associated with the TRANSEC Module firmware update
process.
Figure E-5. ‘Admin | Update’ Page
E–15
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
E.2.5.2.3 Admin | Event
Use this page to display the events log specific to the TRANSEC Module, and to
monitor and troubleshoot the health of the TRANSEC Module.
Figure E-6. ‘Admin | Event’ Page
Event Log Control
Logging State – Select On to enable or Off to disable the logging of event
messages.
Logging Level – Use the drop-down list to select the maximum filtering level of
displayed messages. Choices are Errors Only, Errors and Warnings, and All
Information.
Click [Submit] to execute these settings.
E–16
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Event Log
Column
Description
Index
The event messages are numbered in the order they are received.
Type
Describes the severity of the event. See Table E-1 for an overview of the event
types and their recommended user responses.
Date
Displays the date that the event was logged using MONTH/DAY/YEAR format.
Time
Displays the time of day that the event was logged in 24-hour format.
Category
All messages in this log are categorized as EventLog.
Click [Clear Log] to clear the event log of all messages. The event log is reset to
zero entries.
Table E-1. Event Log Message Types (By Order of Increasing Severity)
Event Type
Informational
Warning
Minor
Major
Critical
Event Description
Level of Severity / User Action
Normal operational status change;
e.g., successful password or
configuration setting change.
Status change that the system might
not accept or expect; e.g., setting
the future passphrase without first
setting the future seed key, entering
an invalid remote command, etc.
Error condition that the system
should be able to recover from
without affecting the operation of
the system; e.g., encountering
software ‘bug’, etc.
Such events are not recorded into
the Events Log.
A more severe error that may
indicate a degradation of the
stability of the system; e.g., out-ofrange temperature readings for the
TRANSEC Module, etc.
The most severe error level
indicating that system failure has
occurred or is imminent; e.g.,
memory allocation failure, OS
failure, etc.
E–17
Minimum. Event logged is for user
reference only.
Moderate. You should consult the
pertinent sections of this manual to
troubleshoot, then repeat the
command or procedure as needed.
Moderate. You should report issues
when convenient to Comtech EF Data
Product Support, Contact
information is provided on the
SLM-5650A TRANSEC Module HTTPS
Interface Home | Contact page).
Maximum. You should contact
Comtech EF Data Product Support as
soon as possible to address issue.
Maximum. You should contact
Comtech EF Data Product Support
immediately to arrange for
RMA/in-factory service.
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
E.2.5.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Stats (Statistics) | Module Status Page
Figure E-7. ‘Stats | Module Status’ Page
Encryption Parameters
AES256 Firmware Version – This identifies the version of the AES 256 core.
Encryption Frame Length – This displays the currently configured AES 256 frame
length.
Board Temp – This displays the temperature of the TRANSEC Module.
TRANSEC Clock Status – This displays the DCM locked status for the AES 256
core.
Transmit Status
TX Frame Count – This displays the number of transmitted AES 256 frames.
TX Status – This describes the value of the TX Status register.
E–18
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
DCM Lock – This displays the state of the TX DCM lock.
Bypass Traffic – This displays the encryption status (Bypass on means Encryption
off).
Crypto Traffic – When Detected, the module has sampled outgoing traffic and
verifies it has been encrypted. When Not Detected, encryption is off, or the
module cannot verify encrypted traffic.
BIST Done – This indicates if the AES 256 core is analyzing the results of its Builtin Self Test (BIST) for the TRANSEC TX.
Receive Status
RX CRC Errors – This displays the count of received CRC errors.
RX Frame Count – This displays the number of received AES 256 frames.
RX Status – This displays the value of the Rx Status register.
DCM Lock – This displays the state of the Rx DCM lock.
Unique Word Lock – This indicates that the decryption engine has successfully
found the unique word and has been able to lock to it.
Out of Sync – This indicates that an out-of-sync condition has been detected by
the encryption engine.
BIST Done – This indicates if the AES 256 core is analyzing the results of its Builtin Self Test (BIST) for the TRANSEC RX.
Automatic Refresh Status Timer
The page updates itself automatically for the duration of the countdown timer.
When the timer reaches 0:00, the page stops updating to help conserve system
resources.
To manually override the timer, click [Stop] to interrupt or [Reset] to restart the
timer.
E–19
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
E.2.5.4
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Maint (Maintenance) | Unit Info Page
Use this scrollable read-only page to view the Firmware Information window. The
information provided here serves to verify that the correct firmware is loaded
into the unit.
Figure E-8. ‘Maint | Unit Info’ Page
E–20
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
E.3
TRANSEC Module SSH/CLI Interface
Operation
E.3.1
Overview
This appendix section defines the Command Line Interface (CLI) user menu
system provided with the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem’s optional TRANSEC
Module via a SSH (Secure Shell) interface.
The SSH interface allows you to change operating parameters similar to those
found on the TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface, and with the monitoring,
configuration, and control operations available via the modem front panel. See
Section E.2 TRANSEC Module HTTPS Interface or Chapter 7. FRONT PANEL
OPERATION, respectively, for detailed information about the command
functionality outlined in this appendix.
E.3.1.1
SSH (Secure Shell) User Access
As explained in Section 8.4 SSH (Secure Shell) Interface in Chapter 8.
ETHERNET INTERFACE OPERATION, this appendix section uses PuTTY
(Figure E-9), a free and open source terminal emulator application
used as a serial console client for SSH, Telnet, rlogin and raw TCP
computing protocols. While the TRANSEC Module CLI main and nested
screens will be identical across terminal emulator applications, setup
may differ slightly – this appendix assumes user familiarity with the
preferred SSH interface.
Figure E-9. ‘PuTTY’ Examples
E–21
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Once connected to the TRANSEC Module via the SSH interface, you will need to
provide a login name and password (the defaults for both are comtech). When
the valid login and password are provided, you are taken directly to the CLI Main
Menu, as shown in the Figure E-9 examples.
See Section 8.4 SSH (Secure Shell) Interface in Chapter 8. ETHERNET
INTERFACE OPERATION for initial setup and operational examples for
using an SSH terminal emulator application for CLI operations.
E.3.1.2
Using the Command Line Interface
E.3.1.2.1 CLI Menu System – Parallel Functionality
The CLI, accessible via SSH, allows you to change operating parameters in a
manner similar to the functionality as provided for the monitoring, configuration,
and control via the SLM-5650A Satellite Modem’s front panel menus (see
Chapter 7. FRONT PANEL OPERATION) and in the TRANSEC Module HTTPS
Interface (see Section E.2 in this appendix).
E.3.1.2.2 CLI Menu – Common Information, Navigation, Operation
Features
1) With some exceptions, the menu pages depicted in this appendix feature
the following common informational or navigational aids:
Menu Options/Fields
[Text field example]
Save Parameters to
Flash
Logout of CLI Session
Exit Menu
Entry Description
Typically found in the body of the page. This
designates the field as a read-only
[RO]
status/informational message. There is no
user action required for this item.
Allows user to save the current configuration
of the NP Interface to permanent storage. This
S
configuration will be restored on each
successive power cycle.
L
Allows user to log out of the CLI session.
Allows user to exit the current menu and
return to the parent menu. Alternately, you
X
may press the Esc key to perform the same
action.
E–22
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
2) Typically, once any mnemonic is entered, you are
prompted to type in a functional selection, an
alphanumeric configuration string, or an
operational value. This prompt is provided at the
bottom of the active page and takes the form of a
selection choice and/or a blank prompt (a solid
bar), as shown in the example to the right:
3) If a parameter is rejected for any reason, an error will appear at the top of
the page, along with an explanation that serves to assist you in the reentry of information, as shown in these examples:
4) Any changes made via the CLI should be saved to permanent storage prior
to terminating the CLI session. Although changes are retained after a CLI
session ends (as long as the SLM-5650A remains running), take note also
that changes will be lost if, for example, the modem is rebooted or the NP
Interface is reset or loses power. Modified parameters can be saved by
issuing the Save command “S” from any menu. You are prompted to
confirm that all changes should be made permanent:
5) When you attempt to terminate a CLI session via Logout command “L”,
the CLI prompts you to confirm that you wish to end your session:
E–23
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
E.3.2
Command Line Interface Pages
E.3.2.1
Main Menu
The Main Menu serves as the CLI’s primary navigation page. All selections made
on this page take you to submenus listed in this table (operational features
nested under each of these submenus, in turn, are outlined in the appendix
sections listed):
Submenu
Entry Function/Description
Configuration
C
Module Status
M
Event Log
E
Unit Info
I
Comtech EF Data
Information
Z
The Configuration Menu page provides
configuration access to the TRANSEC Module
encryption features.
The Module Status page (no nested menus). This
read-only page compiles the TRANSEC Module’s
current operating parameters.
Opens the Event Log page. You monitor and
control operational faults and alarms here.
Opens the Unit Info page. The firmware bootup
settings and system reboot controls are provided
on this page.
Opens the Comtech EF Data Information page (no
nested menus). This read-only page provides
Comtech EF Data Product Support contact
information.
E–24
See Section…
E.3.2.2
(E.3.2.2.1
through
E.3.2.2.6)
E.3.2.3
E.3.2.4
E.3.2.5
E.3.2.6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
E.3.2.2
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Configuration page [C]
The Configuration Menu page, opened from the Main Menu, contains the
following options or fields:
Menu
Options/Fields
Entry
[Operating mode:]
[RO]
Active Encryption
Key
Future Encryption
Key
Encryption Settings
Network
Configuration
Crypto Officer
Credentials
SSH Console
A
F
Description
See Section…
Identifies the modem’s active Encryption Mode
as Primary or Secondary (see Section E.3.2.1.3
for details).
Opens the nested Active Encryption Key Menu
page.
Opens the nested Future Encryption Key Menu
page.
N/A
E.3.2.1.1
E.3.2.1.2
E
Opens the nested Encryption Menu page.
E.3.2.1.3
N
Opens the nested Network Menu page.
E.3.2.1.4
C
Opens the nested Credentials Menu page.
E.3.2.1.5
S
Opens the nested SSH Console Menu page.
E.3.2.1.6
See Section E.2.5.2.1 Admin | Config for detailed information about
the configuration parameters and operations addressed by these
nested menus.
E–25
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
E.3.2.2.1 Configuration | Active Encryption Key Menu page [A]
The Active Encryption Key Menu page, opened from the Configuration Menu,
contains the following options or fields:
Menu
Options/Fields
Entry Description/User Prompt
[Key Signature]
[RO]
Current Active Key Signature is identified here.
Seed Key
K
You are prompted to enter a 32-character Active Seed Key to
generate a TEK when the TRANSEC Module is given a Passphrase
(described below).
Confirm Seed Key
C
You are prompted confirm to the Active Seed Key just entered.
[Seed Key fields]
[RO]
Passphrase
[Current TEK]
P
[RO]
Displays the status of the Active Seed Key in real time.
You are prompted to enter a 10- to 32-character Passphrase that
is combined with the previously entered Active Seed Key to
generate TEKs.
Identifies the Current TEK (1 through 26).
Generates the next available TEK. The [Current TEK] field will
update accordingly.
Next TEK
N
This command is disabled when the module is in
Secondary mode and the current TEK mirrors the TEK
the connected primary modem uses.
E–26
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
E.3.2.2.2 Configuration | Future Encryption Key Menu page [F]
The Future Encryption Key Menu page, opened from the Configuration Menu,
contains options or fields that are identical to those provided from the Active
Encryption Key Menu, except that all commands are applicable to management
of Future Encryption Keys:
Menu
Options/Fields
Entry
Description/User Prompt
[Key Signature]
[RO]
Future Key Signature is identified here.
Seed Key
K
Confirm Seed Key
C
[Seed Key fields]
[RO]
Passphrase
Activate Future Key
You are prompted to enter a 32-character Future Seed Key to
generate a TEK when the TRANSEC Module is given a
Passphrase (described below).
You are prompted confirm to the Future Seed Key just
entered.
Displays the status of the Future Seed Key in real time.
You are prompted to enter a 10- to 32-character Passphrase
that is combined with the previously entered Future Seed
Key to generate TEKs.
Activates the future key and resets the TEK index to 1.
This option appears only when the module is in
Primary mode, you have entered a Future Seed Key
I
and Passphrase, and you have advanced the
(not
current TEK so it is anywhere from 2 to 26.
shown)
See Section E.2.5.2.1 Admin | Config for further
information about Active vs. Future Encryption
Keys.
P
E–27
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
E.3.2.2.3 Configuration | Encryption Menu page [E]
The Encryption Menu page, opened from the Configuration Menu, contains the
following options or fields:
Menu
Options/Fields
Entry
Encryption
E
Operating Mode
O
Frame Length
F
Zeroize All Keys
Z
Description
Prompts you to sets the Encryption Mode operation:
0 – Disabled
1 – Enabled
Prompts you to sets the Operating Mode operation:
0 – Primary
1 – Secondary
Specifies the length of the AES 256 encryption frame from 1 to
255.
Resets all encryption keys in the module’s memory and flash to
default values.
Runs the module’s cryptographic self tests.
Run Self Tests
R
• If the tests succeed, the module will resume
operation.
• If the tests fail, the module will report an error to
the event log.
• If encryption is enabled and the tests fail, the
module will stop transmitting data to protect its
integrity
E–28
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
E.3.2.2.4 Configuration | Network Menu page [N]
The Network Menu page, opened from the Configuration Menu, contains the
following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Entry
Secure Management
IP
M
Subnet Bits
B
Gateway IP
G
Description
User changes the TRANSEC Module IP Address as needed.
Note: If this address is changed, it will be necessary to repeat
the login process for the SSH interface, as described in Section
8.4, using the newly-designated IP Address, to regain access
to the TRANSEC Module SSH CLI.
User changes the IP subnet mask of the TRANSEC Module as
needed.
User changes the TRANSEC Module IP Gateway Address as
needed.
If this address is changed, it must match the subnet
of the Secure Management IP. If it does not, then the
Gateway IP Address text box will default to 0.0.0.0.
E–29
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
E.3.2.2.5 Configuration | Credentials Menu page [C]
The Credentials Menu page, opened from the Configuration Menu, contains the
following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Crypto Officer User
Name
Entry
Description
U
You are prompted to create the desired User Name.
Crypto Officer Password
P
You are prompted to create the desired Password.
Confirm Password
C
You are prompted to confirm the Password just entered.
[Password Fields]
[RO]
Provides the status of the password field in real time.
The Crypto Officer User Name and Password are each restricted to a
minimum of 7 and a maximum of 25 characters, excluding: (ASCII Code
58), < (ASCII Code 60), > (ASCII Code 62), “(ASCII Code 34), and ~ (ASCII
Code 126).
E–30
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
E.3.2.2.6 Configuration | SSH Console Menu page [S]
The SSH Console Menu page, opened from the Configuration Menu, contains the
following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Entry
[Host Key Signature]
[RO]
Generate new host Key
G
SSH
S
Description
Displays the key signature, or fingerprint, which helps to
identify the TRANSEC Module when connecting through
SSH.
You are prompted to generate a new host key that uniquely
identifies the TRANSEC Module.
You are prompted to toggle Secure Shell Console operation:
0 – Off
1 – On
E–31
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
E.3.2.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Module Status Page [M]
The read-only Module Status page, opened from the Main Menu, provides you
with the TRANSEC Module Interface’s current operational parameters:
• AES 256 Version;
• Encryption Frame Length;
• Operating Mode;
• Board Temperature;
• TRANSEC Clock Status;
• Transmit Status;
• Receive Status.
Press any key to return to the Main Menu page.
E–32
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
E.3.2.4
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Event Log [E]
The Event Log Menu page, opened from the Main Menu, contains the following
options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Entry
Logging
M
Logging Level
E
View Event Log
V
Clear Event Log
C
Description
Sets recording of events and alarms:
0 – Off
1 – On
Sets the level of information collected for the Events Log:
0 – Errors Only
1 – Errors and Warnings
2 - All Information
Displays the tally of events logged since the last time the Log
was cleared.
Clears the event log of all messages. Once selected, you are
prompted with the following message:
This action will clear the event log.
Are you sure? (Y/N)
Enter ‘Y’ or ‘N’. If ‘Y’ is entered, the event log is reset to zero
entries, and the following message is displayed:
Event log cleared.
Press Any Character to Continue.
Press any key to return to the Event Log Menu page.
See Section E.2.5.2.3 Admin | Event for detailed information about the
operating parameters addressed by this menu.
E–33
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
E.3.2.5
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Unit Info [ I ]
See Chapter 5. FIRMWARE UPDATE for detailed information on the
procedures associated with the TRANSEC Module firmware update
process.
The Unit Information page, opened from the Main Menu, provides information
needed to verify that the correct firmware is loaded for operation of the unit.
Note the following options or fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Entry Description
[Bootrom Info]
[RO]
[Bulk 1 Info]
[RO]
[Bulk 2 Info]
[RO]
Boot From
B
Displays the bootrom firmware.
Displays the firmware version loaded into the Slot 1
location.
Displays the firmware version loaded into the Slot 2
location.
Selects the firmware boot source for modem operations as
follows:
0 – Newest (automatically selects the most current version
firmware residing in either Slot 1 or Slot 2);
1 – Slot 1 (selects the firmware residing in the Slot 1
location;
2 – Slot 2 (selects the firmware residing in the Slot 2
location.
If the ‘Boot From’ selection is changed, you must
reboot the modem in order for that firmware
selection to be loaded for operation.
E–34
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
Menu Options/Fields
Reboot
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Entry Description
R
Reboots the modem. Once selected, the following message
displays:
This action will reboot the TRANSEC module.
Are you sure? (Y/N)
Enter ‘Y’ or ‘N’. If ‘Y’ is entered, the reboot process begins
by closing the SSH CLI. On the SLM-5650A front panel VFD,
three messages will display at minimum (depending on the
modem’s installed options):
THIS MODEM WILL REBOOT IN FIVE SECONDS!
BOOTING MODEM…
…PLEASE WAIT
INITIALIZING MODEM…
Once the modem reboots, you must initialize a new SSH CLI
session to resume use of this interface.
E.3.2.6
Comtech EF Data Information page [Z]
The read-only Comtech EF Data Information page, opened from the Main Menu,
provides you with basic contact information to reach Comtech EF Data Product
Support via phone or email.
Press any key to return to the Main Menu page.
E–35
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix E
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Notes:
E–36
Appendix F. DOUBLETALK
CARRIER-IN-CARRIER OPTION
WARNING!
BEFORE YOU ATTEMPT TO COMMISSION A SATELLITE LINK USING
CARRIER-IN-CARRIER (CnC), YOU MUST ENSURE THAT THE LINK IS ROBUST
ENOUGH FOR NORMAL OPERATION. ONLY WHEN YOU HAVE DONE THIS –
AND YOU RESOLVE ALL SYSTEM ISSUES (E.G., ANTENNA-POINTING,
CABLING, TERRESTRIAL INTERFERENCE, SATELLITE INTERFERENCE, ETC.) –
SHOULD YOU ATTEMPT THE USE OF CARRIER-IN-CARRIER.
F.1
Overview
Space segment costs are typically the most significant operating expense for any
satellite-based service, having a direct impact on the viability and profitability of
the service. For a satellite transponder that has finite resources in terms of
bandwidth and power, the leasing costs are determined by bandwidth and power
used. Therefore, a satellite circuit should be designed for optimal utilization to
use a similar share of transponder bandwidth and power.
The traditional approach to balancing a satellite circuit – once the satellite and
earth station parameters are fixed – involves trade-off between modulation and
coding. A lower order modulation requires less transponder power while using
more bandwidth; conversely, higher order modulation reduces required
bandwidth, albeit at a significant increase in power.
Comtech EF Data’s DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier option adds a new dimension to
satellite communication optimization.
F–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix F
F.1.1
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
What is DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier?
The SLM-5650A’s DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier (CnC) option uses a patented
signal processing algorithm developed by Raytheon Applied Signal Technology
that allows both the forward and reverse carriers of a full duplex link to share the
same segment of transponder bandwidth, using patented “Adaptive
Cancellation.” Raytheon Applied Signal Technology uses the term DoubleTalk, and
Comtech EF Data refers to it as DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier (CnC) 1.
CnC was first introduced in Comtech EF Data products such as the CDM-Qx
Satellite Modem, CLO-10 Link Optimizer, and CDM-625 Advanced Satellite
Modem. The implementation of DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier in the SLM-5650A
has been further refined, and some of the limitations that existed in the prior
offerings have been overcome.
CnC technology provides a significant improvement in bandwidth and power
utilization, beyond what is possible with FEC and modulation alone, allowing
users to achieve unprecedented savings. When combined with advanced
modulation and FEC, it allows for multi-dimensional optimization:
• Reduced operating expense (OPEX) – e.g., Occupied Bandwidth &
Transponder Power;
• Reduced capital expenditure (CAPEX) – e.g., Block Up Converter/HighPower Amplifier (BUC/HPA) size and/or antenna size;
• Increased throughput without using additional transponder resources;
• Increased link availability (margin) without using additional transponder
resources;
• A combination of any of the above to meet different objectives.
Conclusion: When using the DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier (CnC) option, up to
50% savings in transponder utilization is possible when carriers share common
bandwidth.
1
®
DoubleTalk is licensed from Raytheon Applied Signal Technology.
®
DoubleTalk is a registered trademark of Raytheon Applied Signal Technology.
®
Carrier-in-Carrier is a registered trademark of Comtech EF Data.
F–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix F
F.2
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Application Requirements
These conditions are necessary in order to operate DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier:
• Link must be full duplex:
• A SLM-5650A must be used at the end of the link where the cancellation
needs to take place. Normally, this is both ends of the link.
• The transponder is operated as Loopback. That is, each end of the link
must be able to see a copy of its own signal in the downlink path from the
satellite. The looped back signal is then subtracted, which leaves the
signal from the distant end of the link. DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier
cannot be used in spot beam systems.
• The transponder needs to be “bent-pipe” – meaning no on-board
processing, demodulation, regeneration can be employed.
Demodulation/remodulation does not preserve the linear combination of
the forward and return signals and the resulting reconstituted waveform
prevents recovery of the original constituent signals.
Figure F-1 shows a simplified conceptual block diagram of CnC processing. The
two ends of the link are denoted 'A' and 'B' and the uplink and downlink are
shown.
This performance is achieved through advanced signal processing algorithms that
provide superior cancellation while tracking and compensating for these
common link impairments:
• Time varying delay: In addition to the static delays of the electronics and
the round-trip delay associated with propagation to the satellite and
back, there is a time-varying component due to movement of the
satellite. The CnC module tracks and compensates for this variation.
• Frequency offset and drift: Common sources are satellite Doppler shift,
up and down converter frequency uncertainties, and other drift
associated with the electronics in the SLM-5650A itself. The CnC module
tracks and compensates for this frequency offset and drift.
• Atmospheric effects: Fading and scintillation can affect amplitude, phase,
and spectral composition of the signal and the degree to which it
correlates with the original signal. The CnC module tracks and
compensates for these atmospheric related impairments.
• Link Asymmetries: Various asymmetries in the forward and return link
can produce differences in the relative power of the two received signal
F–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix F
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
components. These can be both deterministic (static) or random (and
time varying). An example of the former would be the differences
resulting from antenna size/gain variations between the two ends of the
link. An example of the latter would be transient power differences due to
different levels of atmospheric fading in the uplinks. CnC compensates for
the asymmetries, up to a certain extent.
Figure F-1. Conceptual Block Diagram
In a number of ways, CnC carriers behave similar to conventional carriers in
satellite links. Both are exposed to adjacent carriers, cross-polarization, and rain
fade, and exhibit impairments when any of these become too great. CnC
additionally operates in an environment where:
• Carriers intentionally occupy the same spectral slot, and
• Performance depends upon desired and co-located interfering carrier. The
interfering carrier is canceled, leaving the desired carrier for
demodulation.
F–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix F
F.2.1
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Operational Recommendations
The rules for CnC operation are summarized as follows:
• Both earth stations share the same footprint so each sees both carriers.
• CnC carriers are operated in pairs.
• One outbound with multiple return carriers is not allowed.
• Asymmetric data rates are allowed (no restrictions).
• The ratio of power spectral density is normally less than 11 dB.
• CnC operates with modems – not modulators only or demodulators only.
In addition, to minimize ‘false’ acquisition, observe the following:
• Use of IESS-315 V.35 Scrambler is highly recommended.
• Keep the search delay range as narrow as possible – once the modem has
reported the search delay, narrow the search delay range to the nominal
reported value ±5 ms – for example, if the modem reported delay is 245
ms, narrow the search range to say 240-250 ms.
• Use external data source (e.g. Fireberd) or internal BER tester when
testing CnC performance.
• To prevent self-locking in case the desired carrier is lost, it is
recommended that the two carriers have some configuration difference –
for example, use different settings for Spectrum Inversion.
F–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix F
F.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
System Functionality and Operational Considerations
Figure F-2 illustrates a conventional, full duplex satellite link where two carriers
are placed in non-overlapping channels. Figure F-3 shows the same link using the
SLM-5650A equipped with the DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier option. Note that
only 50% of the bandwidth is being used, as both carriers are now occupying the
same bandwidth.
The transponder downlinks the composite signal containing both carriers on the
same band to the SLM-5650A, which then translates the signal to near-baseband
where it can be filtered (decimated) and then processed as a complex envelope
signal. The SLM-5650A then suppresses the version of the near-end carrier on
the downlink side, and then passes the desired carrier to the demodulator for
normal processing.
To further illustrate, as shown in Figure F-4, without CnC, the two carriers in a
typical full duplex satellite link are adjacent to each other. With CnC, only the
composite signal is visible when observed on a spectrum analyzer. Carrier 1 and
Carrier 2, shown here for reference only, are overlapping, thus sharing the same
spectrum.
Figure F-2. Conventional FDMA Link
F–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix F
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Figure F-3. Same Link Using SLM-5650A and DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier
Figure F-4. Duplex Link Optimization
The SLM-5650A CnC module operates on the near-zero signal before the
demodulator, and is waveform-agnostic. This means that no prior knowledge of
the underlying modulation, FEC, or any other waveform specific parameter is
required in order to perform the signal suppression operation. The only caveat to
this is that the waveform must be sufficiently random.
Because acquiring the delay and frequency offset of the interfering carrier is
fundamentally a correlation operation, anything deterministic in the interfering
carrier (within the correlation window of the algorithm) will potentially produce
F–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix F
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
false correlation peaks and result in incorrect delays and/or frequency. Normally,
this is not a problem, since energy dispersal techniques are used in the vast
majority of commercial and military modems. However, it is something that must
be kept in mind when troubleshooting a system that uses the CnC technique for
signal suppression.
One possible way to mitigate false peaks is to narrow the correlation window. For
example, if the delay is known to be around 240ms, set the minimum search
delay to 230ms and the maximum search delay to 250ms.
As all advances in modem technologies – including advanced modulation and FEC
techniques – approach their theoretical limits of power and bandwidth
efficiencies, CnC allows satellite users to achieve spectral efficiencies (bps/Hz)
that cannot be achieved with modulation and FEC alone. Table shows how CnC,
when used with 16-QAM, approaches the bandwidth efficiency of 256-QAM
(8bps/Hz).
Table F-1. Spectral Efficiency using DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier
As shown here, CnC allows equivalent spectral efficiency using a lower order
modulation and/or FEC Code Rate; CAPEX is therefore reduced by allowing the
use of a smaller BUC/HPA and/or antenna. And, as CnC can be used to save
transponder bandwidth and/or transponder power, it can be successfully
deployed in bandwidth-limited as well as power-limited scenarios.
F–8
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix F
F.3.1
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Cancellation Process
The signal processing technology employed via CnC continually estimates and
tracks all parametric differences between the local uplink signal and its image
within the downlink. Through advanced adaptive filtering and phase locked loop
implementations, it dynamically compensates for these differences by
appropriately adjusting the delay, frequency, phase and amplitude of the
sampled uplink signal, resulting in optimal cancellation performance.
When a full duplex satellite connection is established between two sites,
separate satellite channels are allocated for each direction. If both directions
transmitted on the same channel, each side would normally find it impossible to
extract the desired signal from the aggregate due to interference originating
from its local modulator. However, since this interference is produced locally, it is
possible to estimate and remove its influence prior to demodulation of the data
transmitted from the remote location.
For the CnC cancellation, it is necessary to provide each demodulator with a copy
of its local modulator’s output.
As shown in Figure 15-5: Modem 1 and Modem 2 transmit signals S1 and S2
respectively. The satellite receives, translates, and retransmits the composite
signal. The downlink signals S1* and S2* received at Modem 1 and Modem 2
differ from the transmit signals primarily in terms of phase, frequency, and delay
offsets.
Figure F-5. DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Signals
F–9
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix F
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Referring to Figure F-6: For round trip delay estimation, a search algorithm is
used that correlates the received satellite signal to a stored copy of the local
modulator’s transmitted signal. The interference cancellation algorithm uses the
composite signal and the local copy of S1 to estimate the necessary parameters
of scaling (complex gain/phase), delay offset and frequency offset. The algorithm
continuously tracks changes in these parameters as they are generally timevarying in a satellite link.
Figure F-6. Carrier-in-Carrier Signal Processing Block Diagram
The resulting estimate of the unwanted interfering signal is then subtracted from
the composite signal. In practical applications, the estimate of the unwanted
signal can be extremely accurate. Unwanted interfering signal suppression of 30
dB or more has been achieved in commercial products with minimal degradation
of the demodulator performance.
F.3.2
Margin Requirements
Typical interfering signal cancellation is 28 to 35 dB (depending on the product).
The residual interfering signal appears as noise causing a slight degradation of
the Eb/No. To compensate for the residual noise, a small amount of additional
link margin is required to maintain the BER. Margin requirements depend on the
product, modulation and power ratios:
For the SLM-5650A, the additional margin requirements are as follows:
Modulation
Nominal Margin*
BPSK
0.3 dB
QPSK/OQPSK
0.3 dB
8-PSK
0.5 dB
8-QAM
0.4 dB
16-QAM
0.6 dB
* Equal power and equal symbol rate for the
interfering carrier and the desired carrier, i.e., 0
dB PSD ratio. Measured at IF with AWGN, +10
dBc Adjacent Carriers, 1.3 spacing.
F–10
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix F
F.3.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Carrier-in-Carrier Latency
Carrier-in-Carrier has no measurable impact on circuit latency.
F.3.4
Carrier-in-Carrier Link Design
Carrier-in-Carrier link design involves finding the FEC and modulation
combination that provides optimal bandwidth utilization. Just like conventional
link design, it is an iterative process that involves trying different FEC and
modulation combinations with Carrier-in-Carrier until an optimal combination is
found.
For optimal Carrier-in-Carrier performance, it is recommended that the two
carriers have similar symbol rate and power. This can be achieved by selecting
appropriate MODCODs as shown in following sections.
F.3.4.1
Symmetric Data Rate Link
Consider this example:
Satellite & Transponder
Earth Station 1
Earth Station 2
Data Rate
Galaxy 18 @ 123º W, 13K/13K
Phoenix, AZ – 4.6 m
Phoenix, AZ – 2.4 m
512 kbps / 512 kbps
The traditional link was based on QPSK TPC 3/4 and required 0.96 MHz of leased
BW. The LST (Intelsat’s Lease Transmission Plan Program) summary for the
traditional link is as follows:
F–11
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix F
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Carrier-in-Carrier link design involved trying different Modulation & FEC Code
Rates to find the optimal combination:
• 8-QAM, LDPC 2/3 with Carrier-in-Carrier
• QPSK, LDPC 3/4 with Carrier-in-Carrier
• QPSK, LDPC 2/3 with Carrier-in-Carrier
• QPSK, LDPC 1/2 with Carrier-in-Carrier
Link parameters and LST summary for QPSK, LDPC 2/3 with Carrier-in-Carrier is as
follows:
F–12
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix F
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
The link budget summary for the different MODCOD combinations is as follows:
Signal
No.
Modulation & FEC
Allocated
BW (MHz)
PEB (MHz)
Leased BW
(MHz)
1
2
3
4
8-QAM, LDPC 2/3
QPSK, LDPC 3/4
QPSK, LDPC 2/3
QPSK, LDPC 1/2
0.3584
0.47785
0.53735
0.7168
1.1468
0.6734
0.5777
0.5184
1.1468
0.6734
0.5777
0.7168
Savings
Compared
to Original
-20%
30%
40%
25%
PSD
Ratio
(dB)
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
Based on this analysis, QPSK, LDPC 2/3 with Carrier-in-Carrier provides the
maximum savings of 40%.
In addition to 40% reduction in Leased Bandwidth, using Carrier-in-Carrier also
reduced the required HPA Power by almost 40%:
HPA Power
HPA @ 4.6 m
HPA @ 2.4 m
F.3.4.2
Traditional Link
(QPSK, TPC 3/4)
0.7 W
1.5 W
CnC Link
(QPSK, LDPC 2/3)
0.5 W
1.1 W
HPA Power Reduction
40%
36%
Asymmetric Data Rate Link
As occupied (or allocated) bandwidth of a Carrier-in-Carrier circuit is dictated by
the larger of the two carriers, it is strongly recommended that the smaller carrier
be spread as much as possible using a lower order modulation and/or FEC, while
meeting the PSD ratio spec. Spreading the smaller carrier using a lower order
modulation has multiple benefits:
• Lower order modulation is always more robust;
• Lower order modulation uses less transponder power – this reduces total
transponder, and increases available link margin;
F–13
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix F
•
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Lower order modulation uses less transmit power on the ground – this
can significantly reduce the BUC/SSPA size by not only reducing the
transmit EIRP, but also reducing the BUC/SSPA backoff.
Consider this example:
Satellite & Transponder
IS-901 @ 342º W, 22/22 (EH/EH)
Earth Station 1
Africa – 4.5 m
Earth Station 2
Africa – 3.0 m
Data Rate
3000 Mbps / 1000 Mbps
While the traditional link was based on QPSK, TPC 3/4 and required 3.9 MHz of
leased bandwidth, the Carrier-in-Carrier link was based on QPSK, LDPC 3/4 and
QPSK, LDPC 1/2 and required 2.8 MHz of leased bandwidth.
The savings summary is as follows:
Original Link
Item
Data Rate (kbps)
Modulation
FEC
Occupied BW
(MHZ)
Power Eq. BW
(MHz)
Leased BW (MHz)
Hub HPA (W)
Remote HPA (W)
With Carrier-in-Carrier and
LDPC
Hub to
Remote
Total
Remote
to Hub
3000
1000
QPSK
QPSK
LDPC 3/4 LDPC 1/2
Hub to
Remote
3000
QPSK
TPC 3/4
Remote
to Hub
1000
QPSK
TPC 3/4
2.8
0.9
3.7
2.8
1.4
2.8
3.3
0.6
3.9
2.5
0.3
2.8
Total
3.9
26.0
10.6
2.8
20.3
6.4
Savings
27.5%
22%
40%
If this link was designed using QPSK, LDPC 3/4 in both directions, it would have
required:
•
•
•
•
•
Occupied BW – 2.8 MHz
Power Eq. BW – 3.0 MHz (a 7.2% increase in Power Eq. BW)
Leased BW – 3.0 MHz (a 7.2% increase in Leased BW)
Hub HPA – 20.3 W
Remote HPA – 8.3 W (a 30% increase in Remote power)
F–14
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix F
F.3.4.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Power Limited Links
Carrier-in-Carrier can provide substantial savings even when the original link is
power limited. Spreading the carrier by using a lower modulation and/or FEC
along with latest FEC such as VersaFEC can substantially reduce the total power
which can then be traded with bandwidth using Carrier-in-Carrier. The concept is
illustrated with the following examples:
The conventional link is using 8-PSK, TPC 3/4:
Switching to VersaFEC and using a lower order
modulation – e.g., QPSK, VersaFEC 0.803 increases the
total occupied bandwidth, while reducing the total
power equivalent bandwidth:
Now using CnC, the second QPSK, VersaFEC 0.803
carrier can be moved over the first carrier – thereby
significantly reducing the total occupied bandwidth and
total power equivalent bandwidth when compared to
the original side-by-side 8PSK, TPC 3/4 carriers:
To continue, consider this example:
Satellite & Transponder
IS-901 @ 342º W, 22/22 (EH/EH)
Earth Station 1
Africa – 9.2 m
Earth Station 2
Africa – 4.5 m
Data Rate
2.048 Mbps / 2.048 Mbps
F–15
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix F
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Whereas the original link used 8-PSK TPC 3/4, the Carrier-in-Carrier link used
QPSK VersaFEC 0.803. The savings summary is as follows:
With Carrier-in-Carrier and
VersaFEC
Item
Hub to Remote
Hub to
Remote
Total
Total
Remote to Hub
Remote
to Hub
Data Rate (kbps)
2048
2048
2048
2048
Modulation
8-PSK
8-PSK
QPSK
QPSK
FEC
TPC 3/4 TPC 3/4
0.803
0.803
Occupied BW (MHZ)
1.3
1.3
2.6
1.8
1.8
1.8
Power Eq. BW (MHz)
2.2
1.0
3.2
1.1
0.5
1.6
Leased BW (MHz)
3.2
1.8
Hub HPA (W)
5.0
2.0
Remote HPA (W)
11.6
4.7
Note: 1 dB HPA BO for QPSK, 2 dB HPA BO for 8-PSK, 1 dB Feed Loss.
Original Link
Savings
44%
60%
60%
Using Carrier-in-Carrier and VersaFEC reduced the leased bandwidth by almost
44% and HPA power by 60%.
F.3.5
Carrier-in-Carrier Commissioning and Deployment
Prior to commissioning a Carrier-in-Carrier link, it is critical that the link is fully
tested in non Carrier-in-Carrier mode and all system issues including external
interference, antenna pointing, cabling, SSPA backoff are resolved. Only after the
link is robust, should the user attempt turning on Carrier-in-Carrier.
The following procedure is recommended for Carrier-in-Carrier commissioning
and deployment.
Do these steps:
1. Turn ON the carrier at Site ‘A’. Carrier from Site ‘B’ is OFF. CnC function is
OFF at both sites.
a. Using a spectrum analyzer, measure Co+No/No at the input to the
modem at Site ‘A’.
b. Using a spectrum analyzer, measure Co+No/No at the input to the
modem at Site ‘B’.
c. Measure/record Eb/No at Site ‘B’. Make sure there is sufficient margin
to account for CnC.
F–16
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix F
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.3.6
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
d. Measure/record Receive Signal Level (RSL) at Site ‘B’.
Turn OFF the carrier at Site ‘A’. Turn ON the carrier at Site ‘B’. CnC function
is OFF at both sites.
a. Using a spectrum analyzer, measure Co+No/No at the input to the
modem at Site ‘A’.
b. Using a spectrum analyzer, measure Co+No/No at the input to the
modem at Site ‘B’.
c. Measure/record Eb/No at Site ‘A’. Make sure there is sufficient margin
to account for CnC.
d. Measure/record RSL at Site ‘B’.
Using Co+No/No readings calculate PSD ratio at Site ‘A’ and Site ‘B’. If it is
not within specification, make necessary adjustments to bring it within
specification and repeat measurements in Steps 1 and 2.
• Also verify that the RSL is within spec.
Now without changing the transmit power levels, turn ON both the
carriers (on the same frequency) and turn CnC ON.
a. Measure/record Eb/No at Site ‘A’ and ‘B’.
b. Measure/record RSL at Site ‘A’ and ‘B’.
c. Now compare Eb/No in presence of two over lapping carriers with
CnC with Eb/No when only one carrier was ON. Eb/No variation
should be within spec for that modulation, FEC and PSD ratio.
You can repeat the test for different PSD ratio and Eb/No.
Validating Carrier-in-Carrier Performance
Carrier-in-Carrier performance can be easily validated by verifying that Eb/No
degradation due to Carrier-in-Carrier is within published specification for the
observed Power Spectral Density Ratio.
The following procedure is recommended for validating Carrier-in-Carrier
performance.
Do these steps:
1. Setup a conventional side-by-side link of the desired Eb/No:
a. Carrier-in-Carrier should be OFF.
b. Record the Eb/No as displayed by the Modems.
c. Observe the 2 carriers on a spectrum analyzer and record the PSD
ratio.
F–17
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix F
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Example Link:
• Full duplex 512 kbps, QPSK, LDPC 2/3 circuit between 4.6 m and
2.4 m antennas
• Recorded Eb/No = 2.6 dB (at both modems)
• PSD Ratio = 1.2 dB (measured at larger Antenna)
2. Relocate one of the carriers on top of the other carrier:
a. Enable Carrier-in-Carrier.
b. Record the Eb/No as displayed by the Modems.
3. Calculate change in Eb/No and verify against specification.
Example Link:
• Recorded Eb/No = 2.4 dB
• Change in Eb/No = 0.2 dB
• Eb/No Degradation (Spec.) at 1.2 dB PSD = 0.3 dB
• Modem performance is within spec
F–18
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix F
F.4
F.4.1
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Operational References
Carrier-in-Carrier Link Budget Calculation
The following procedure is required for calculating the link budget for a Carrierin-Carrier Link.
Do these steps:
1. Calculate the link budget for both carriers in the duplex link, with required
CnC margin:
2. Verify that the PDS ration is within spec for the SLM-5650A.
3. Calculate the Allocated Bandwidth (BW) and Power Equivalent Bandwidth
(PEB) for the duplex link:
• BWDuplex Link = Greater of (BWCarrier 1, BWCarrier 2)
• PEBDuplex Link = PEBCarrier 1 + PEBCarrier 2
• Leased BWDuplex Link = Greater of (BWDuplex Link,
PEBDuplex Link)
4. For an optimal link, the Leased Bandwidth and the Power Equivalent
Bandwidth should be equal / nearly equal.
F–19
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix F
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
5. Repeat the link budget process by selecting different Modulation and FEC,
until the BW and PEB is nearly balanced.
F.4.2
Estimating PSD Ratio
PSD can be estimated from a link budget using Downlink EIRP and Symbol Rate:
PSD = Downlink EIRP – 10 * Log (Symbol Rate)
PSD Ratio Example:
Carrier
A to B
B to A
Downlink EIRP
27 dBW
24 dBW
Symbol Rate
500 ksps
375 ksps
Power Spectral Density
-29.99 dBW/Hz
-31.74 dBW/Hz
PSD Ratio (@ A) = -29.99 – (-31.74) = 1.75 dB
PSD Ratio (@ B) = -31.74 – (-29.99) = -1.75 dB
F.4.2.1
Estimating PSD Ratio from LST
F–20
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix F
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
F.4.2.2
Estimating PSD Ratio from Satmaster
F.4.2.3
Estimating PSD Ratio Using Spectrum Analyzer
PSD Ratio or CnC Ratio can also be estimated using a Spectrum Analyzer capable
of integrating the signal power in a given bandwidth.
CnC Ratio (in dB) = PowerC1 (in dBm) – PowerC2 (in dBm)
PSD Ratio (in dB) = (PowerC1 – 10 log BWC1 (in Hz)) –
(PowerC2 – 10 log BWC2 (in Hz))
= CnC Ratio – 10 log (BWC1 / BWC2)
If the two carriers have same Symbol Rate / Bandwidth, then the CnC Ratio is
same as the PSD Ratio.
F–21
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix F
F.5
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier Specifications
Operating Mode:
Requires the two links to share a common carrier frequency (Outbound and
Inbound symbol rates do not have to be equal)
Power Spectral Density Ratio and CnC Ratio:
• BSPK/QPSK/8-PSK/8-QAM: –7 dB to +11 dB (ratio of power spectral
density, outbound interferer to desired inbound)
• 16-QAM: –7 dB to +7 dB (ratio of power spectral density, outbound
interferer to desired inbound)
With asymmetric carriers the absolute power ratio (or CnC
ratio) would be different, depending on the ratio of the symbol
rates.
For Example:
• Outbound interferer = 1 Msymbols/sec
• Desired Inbound = 500 ksymbols/sec
• Ratio of power spectral density = +7 dB
• Absolute power ratio (CnC Ratio) = +7dB + (10 log
Outbound/desired symbol rate) = +10 dB
Maximum Symbol Rate Ratio:
3:1 (TX:RX or RX:TX)
Inbound/Outbound frequency uncertainty:
Within the normal acquisition range of the demod, as follows:
• Below 64 ksymbols/sec: ±1 to ±(Rs/2) kHz, where Rs = symbol rate in
ksymbols/sec
• Between 64 and 389 ksymbols/sec: ± 1up to a maximum of ± 32kHz
• Above 389 ksymbols/sec: ±1 to ± (0.1Rs) kHz, up to a maximum of ± 200
kHz
Delay range:
0-330 ms
Eb/No Degradation (equal Inbound/Outbound power spectral density):
BPSK = 0.3dB QPSK = 0.3dB OQPSK = 0.3dB
8-PSK = 0.5dB 8-QAM = 0.4dB 16-QAM = 0.6dB
F–22
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix F
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
For +10 dB power spectral density ratio (outbound interferer 10 dB higher than
desired inbound) add an additional 0.3 dB
Monitor Functions:
• Delay, in milliseconds
• Frequency offset (between outbound interferer and desired inbound).
100 Hz resolution
• CnC ratio, in dB (ratio of absolute power, outbound interferer to desired
inbound)
CnC Monitor Accuracy:
±1.0 dB for symmetric symbol rate
F.6
Carrier-in-Carrier Summary
Comtech EF Data’s DoubleTalk Carrier-in-Carrier can provide significant savings in
operational expenses. The following should be considered when evaluating CnC:
• CnC can only be used for full duplex links where the transmitting earth
station is able to receive itself.
• CnC can be used in both bandwidth limited and power limited situations.
• The maximum savings is generally achieved when the original link is
symmetric in data rate.
F.7
Glossary of Terms
Bandwidth, Allocated or Occupied:
Bandwidth or Allocated Bandwidth or Occupied Bandwidth is the frequency
space required by a carrier on a transponder.
For example: A Duplex 10 Mbps Circuit with 8PSK Modulation, FEC Rate 3/4 and
1.4 Spacing requires:
• Allocated BW = (DR / SE) * CSF [(Data Rate / Spectral Efficiency) * Carrier
Spacing Factor]
• Allocated BW = 6.222 MHz = (10 / 2.25) * 1.4
For a 36 MHz transponder, 6.222 MHz corresponds to 17.3% Bandwidth
Utilization.
F–23
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix F
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Bandwidth, Leased (LBW):
Almost all satellite operators charge for the Leased Bandwidth (LBW). Leased
Bandwidth or Leased Resource is the greater of the Allocated Bandwidth and
Power Equivalent Bandwidth.
For example: If a carrier requires 3 MHz of Allocated BW and 4.5 MHz of PEB, the
Leased Bandwidth is 4.5 MHz
Bandwidth, Power Equivalent (PEB):
Power Equivalent Bandwidth (PEB) is the transponder power used by a carrier,
represented as bandwidth equivalent.
PEB Calculation Example:
• Transponder EIRP = 37 dBW
• Output Backoff (OBO) = 4 dB
• Available EIRP = 37 – 4 = 33 dBW = 103.3 = 1995.26 Watts
• Transponder Bandwidth = 36 MHz
• Power Available / MHz = 1995.26 / 36 = 55.424 W
• If a carrier uses 24 dBW, its PEB = 102.4 / 55.424 = 4.532 MHz
This corresponds to 12.59% of available transponder power.
CnC Ratio:
Ratio of Interfering Carrier Power to Desired Carrier Power (unit in dB).
The Interfering Carrier is the Tx Carrier from local modulator; the Desired Carrier
is the carrier from the distant end received by the local demodulator.
At the station transmitting C1: CnC Ratio (in dB) = PowerC1 (in dBm) – PowerC2
(in dBm)
Eb/No:
Ratio of Energy per bit (Eb) to Noise density (No) (unit in dB):
• Eb/No = C/No – 10log(DR) [where DR is the Data Rate]
• Eb/No = Es/No – 10log(SE) [where SE is Spectral Efficiency]
Es/No:
Ratio of Energy per symbol (Es) to Noise density (No) (unit in dB):
F–24
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix F
•
•
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Es/No = C/No – 10log(SR) [where SR is the Symbol Rate]
Es/No = Eb/No + 10log(SE) [where SE is Spectral Efficiency]
C/N:
Ratio of Carrier Power (C) to Noise (N) (unit in dB):
Equivalent to Es/No when calculated in the
Symbol Rate bandwidth.
C/No:
Ratio of Carrier Power (C) to Noise Density (No) (unit in dBHz)
Co+No/No:
Ratio of Carrier Density (Co) + Noise (No) to Noise Density (No) (unit in dB):
•
•
•
C/N = C/No – 10log(B) [where B is bandwidth
in Hz]
Eb/No = C/No – 10log(DR)
[where DR is data rate in bits/sec]
= C/N + 10 log (B) – 10 log (DR)
= C/N – 10 log (SE)
[where SE is Spectral Efficiency]
Eb/No = 10 log (10 ((Co+No/No)/10) – 1) – 10 log (SE)
[where SE is Spectral Efficiency]
Spectral Efficiency is in bps/Hz
Power Spectral Density (PSD):
Power Spectral Density (PSD) is the signal power per unit bandwidth: dBW/Hz or
dBm/Hz
For example: Signal power = 20 dBm
Signal bandwidth = 5 MHz
PSD = 20 – 10 log (5,000,000) = -46.99 dBm / Hz
F–25
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix F
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
PSD Ratio:
Ratio of Power Spectral Density (PSD) of the interfering carrier to the desired
carrier.
If looking at the two carriers side-by-side
on a spectrum analyzer:
Quasi Error Free (QEF):
Quasi Error Free (QEF) corresponds to PER ~10-7
PER (packet error rate) is based upon a 188-byte MPEG frame size
Spectral Efficiency (SE):
Ratio of the Data Rate to the Symbol Rate.
Symbol Rate & Data Rate:
Symbol Rate and Data Rate are related:
• DR = SR * SE [Data Rate = Symbol Rate * Spectral Efficiency]
• SR = DR / SE [Symbol Rate = Data Rate / Spectral Efficiency]
F–26
Appendix G. VIPERSAT
NETWORK APPLICATION
EXAMPLES
G.1
Overview
The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem’s optional Network Processor (NP) Interface
Module (also referred to as the “NP Interface” or the “card”), when installed and
operating in Router Mode OSPFv2 or BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode,
makes point-to-multipoint topologies possible. This appendix provides the
following Vipersat Network Application Examples:
• OSPFv2
• BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode
G–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix G
G.2
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
OSPF v2 in a Shared Outbound Satellite
Network
This section examines the challenges and solutions for using the SLM-5650A
Satellite Modem and Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) in a shared outbound/split
path satellite network such as Vipersat.
G.2.1
Shared Outbound Satellite Network Overview
F igure G -1. S atellite S hared Outbound Network
A shared outbound network saves satellite bandwidth and reduces operating
expenses by allowing multiple remote terminals to share the same channel from
a hub ground station.
Figure G-1 illustrates a satellite shared outbound network. Notably, the
outbound interface at the hub is not the same interface at which return traffic
received. This is referred to as “split path.”
G–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix G
G.2.2
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
OSPF Basics
Certain critical features of the OSPF protocol that impact a shared outbound
satellite network are as follows:
• OSPF requires that the communication channel between the interfaces
that connect any two given OSPF nodes must have ability to pass traffic
bidirectionally.
• A router running the OSPF algorithm will send out “Hello” packets on
each interface, when the response from a node on the same subnet as
the interface is received, OSPF will create a the neighbor adjacency with
that node. In this way, the subnets and segments of the OSPF network are
discovered, mapped and an OSPF database is created. This database is
used by all OSPF routers to determine open shortest paths to all remote
networks. OSPF nodes that do not follow these rules will not be added to
a router's neighbor adjacency database.
G.2.3
OSPF Challenges
Use of a split path violates the requirement whereby OSPF messaging is sent and
received on the same interface. Therefore, the hub modems will not achieve
“neighbor adjacency” with any of the remote routers. This means that running
OSPF on the hub routers will not add any value.
In the example diagram, the SLM-5650A NP Router is essentially a two-port
router, thereby requiring that another OSPF node must always be in place
“downstream” at the remote.
However, if this downstream router is running OSPF, could the high costs
associated with a satellite link be managed and reduced by specifically
configuring the router interface? Such a configuration would allow the overall
OSPF network to control whether traffic should pass to the satellite link, or to a
lower-cost link, such a terrestrial fiber, based upon availability. The possibility of
such a solution is examined in the following use case.
G.2.4
OSPF Maritime Use Cases
The maritime use cases presented here depicts application of OSPFv2 as part of a
deployed network of routers that includes the SLM-5650A Network Processor
(NP) Interface.
G–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix G
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
The primary objective of these use cases is to describe the process of
automatically re-routing traffic when alternative transmission links are available
in a maritime environment. Specifically, the satellite link should be used when at
sea, and the high-speed terrestrial link should be used when at shore. This switch
should occur automatically.
If other communication links such as ship-to-ship or back-up lower-speed
satellite networks are available, then the OSPF routing protocol will select the
best path as defined by link cost.
G.2.4.1 OSPF Use Case: At Shore
F igure G -2. OS P F S upport at S hore
When at shore, as depicted in Figure G-2, the shipboard OSPF network
automatically re-routes packets destined to non-shipboard networks over the
high-speed, low-cost network.
G–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix G
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
G.2.4.2 OSPF Use Case: At Sea
F igure G -3. OS P F S upport at S ea
When at sea, all traffic is routed to the satellite network. If other communication
links such as ship-to-ship or backup lower-speed satellite networks are available,
then the OSPF routing protocol selects the best path as defined by link cost.
G–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix G
G.2.5
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
OSPF Deployment Solution
G.2.5.1 OSPF Test Network
F igure G -4. OS P F L aboratory Tes t Network
Figure G-4 depicts the test network created to demonstrate how OSPFv2 can be
used in a large-scale Vipersat deployment.
It has been determined that OSPF can be used with a Vipersat and shared
outbound topology by enabling a common router feature: IP Tunneling.
G–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix G
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
G.2.5.2 OSPF Test Solution
F igure G -5. OS P F Tes t S olution
Multi-TDM Tunneling is a technique where a VLAN “tunnel” is set up between
the Hub unit and any expansion units that are being used to create an SCPC link
with a Remote that is Home Stated to the specified Hub Time-Division
Multiplexing (TDM) Modem.
As shown in Figure G-5, if an IP tunnel is configured from each of the remote
Autonomous System Boundary Routers (ASBRs) to the OSPF routers at the hub,
the two routers will attain neighbor adjacency. All of the necessary OSPF
messages will be exchanged to include the remote shipboard network into the
OSPF domain.
This configuration allows the network to automatically reconfigure to the lowercost terrestrial link when connected and automatically return to the higher-cost
satellite link when the terrestrial link is disconnected.
It is recommended that the hub OSPF router be a backbone router (area 0.0.0.0),
and each of the shipboard networks be a single OSPF area. This will reduce the
amount of OSPF messaging required to be transmitted over the satellite network.
G–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix G
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
G.2.5.3 OSPFv2 Summary
The proposed solution using router-configurable IP tunneling to connect the
remotes to the hub OSPF router satisfies the use case with minimal operator
configuration.
While the addition of an IP tunnel will add overhead, the overall reduction in
satellite bandwidth using the dynamic shared bandwidth functionality of Vipersat
will more than offset the added overhead. Load switching, used in conjunction
with OSPF, will allow the bandwidth to be automatically returned to the pool
once a lower-cost terrestrial link is connected.
Advantages
•
•
•
•
•
•
Allows for automatic path selection via OSPF in a split path configuration
with minimal impact to the network.
Because each ship is its own area, there will be a reduced amount of
OSPF traffic over the satellite.
If the operator uses Vipersat load switching at the remote (i.e. shipboard
SLM-5650A NP), then once the terrestrial link is connected, traffic will be
redirected to fiber link and the load-switching algorithm will free the
satellite link and return it to STDMA operation. This will free up significant
satellite bandwidth automatically for use by other ships still at sea.
Satellite link availability will still be available to the participating OSPF
routers because periodic LSA and Hello packets will not be received on
the router interface in case of satellite outage.
Reduces the number of OSPF nodes in the network.
Allows for automatic path selection via OSPF in a split path configuration
with minimal impact to the network.
Disadvantages:
•
•
Because IP tunnels are set up from the remote ASBR to the hub backbone
router, an additional 20-byte IP header will be added to all packets
traversing the satellite interface.
An IP tunnel will have to be configured for each ship to the hub OSPF
router.
G–8
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix G
G.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Network Processor (NP) Interface BPM (Bridge
Point-to-Multipoint) Mode
Networks where modems traditionally act as routers – e.g., Vipersat-based
satellite communications systems – and include encryption devices are
sometimes incompatible or require difficult and unwieldy configurations.
Additionally, the NP Interface is limited to 256 allowable route tables. This, in
turn, can limit the overall size of the network, particularly when OSPF dynamic
routing protocol is used in the NP Interface.
In order to increase the flexibility and scalability of the satellite network with
SLM-5650A Satellite Modems, BPM (Bridge Point-to-Multipoint) Mode, an
optional FAST feature, has been introduced in the NP Interface’s FW-0000051L
Ver. 1.9.1 firmware release.
When BPM Mode is selected, Layer 2 and Layer 3 networks can operate
simultaneously – i.e., the users can operate two independent Layer2 networks
and one Layer3 network without interfering with each other.
G.3.1
BPM Mode Functional Description
F igure G -6. E thernet P ort C onfiguration in B P M Mode
The NP Interface features four Ethernet ports: P1 through P4. When BPM Mode
is enabled, the SLM-5650A Base Modem ‘J5 Ethernet’ management port
effectively becomes the NP Interface’s fifth Ethernet port. All five Ethernet ports
are then segregated into three Ethernet switches.
G–9
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix G
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
As shown in Figure G-6:
• NP Ethernet ports P1 and P2, with internal Data WAN Port ‘A’ forms the
red switch group referred to as Bridge-Group1. This group is reserved for
bridged Layer 2 traffic only.
• NP Ethernet ports P3 and P4, with internal Management WAN Port ‘B’
forms the blue switch group referred to as Bridge-Group2. This group is
reserved for bridged Layer 2 traffic only.
• The SLM-5650A Base Modem J5 Ethernet port, with internal VS WAN Port
‘C’ forms the green switch group referred to as Router-Group. This set is
reserved for routed Layer 3 traffic and management use only.
All three switch groups are isolated such that:
• Traffic from NP Interface Port P1 can only transmit to the Data WAN Port
‘A’ or NP Interface port P2. It will NOT transmit to the NP Interface ports
P3 or P4, the Base Modem J5 Ethernet port, Management WAN Port ‘B’,
or VS WAN Port ‘C.’
• The traffic from NP Interface Port P3 can transmit to the Management
WAN Port ‘B’ or NP Interface Port P4. It will NOT transmit to the NP
Interface ports P1 or P2, the Base Modem J5 Ethernet Port, Data WAN
Port ‘A’, or VS WAN Port ‘C.’
• The traffic from the Base Modem J5 Ethernet Port can transmit to VS
WAN Port ‘C.’ It will NOT transmit to NP Interface Ports P1 through P4,
Data WAN Port ‘A’, or Management Port ‘B.’
G.3.1.1 Glossary of Terms
Primary Port:
This is the port that can transmit the traffic those ingresses from any port within
its group.
Examples:
• NP Interface Port P1 can transmit the traffic coming from Data WAN Port
‘A’ or NP Interface Port P2.
• NP Interface Port P3 can transmit the traffic coming from Management
WAN port ‘B’ or NP Interface Port P4.
• The Base Modem J5 Ethernet port can transmit the traffic coming from VS
WAN port ‘C.’
G–10
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix G
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Expansion Port:
This is the port that can transmit the traffic that ingress from its primary port
within that group.
Examples:
• NP Interface Port P2 can transmit the traffic coming from NP Interface
Port P1 only.
• NP Interface Port P4 can transmit the traffic coming from NP Interface
Port P3 only.
WAN Port:
This is a logical port that transmits the packet only to the primary ports, but it
can receive the packets from either the primary port or the expansion port.
Examples:
• Data WAN port ‘A’ Bridge-Group1.
• Management WAN port ‘B’ in Bridge-Group2.
• VS WAN port ‘C’ in Router-Group.
G.3.2
BPM Mode Configuration
BPM Mode is available on the NP Interface as a FAST Option. Once the FAST
Access Code has been purchased during normal business hours from Comtech EF
Data Product Support, it is then activated in the NP Interface-equipped modem
via the modem front panel. Once activated, BPM Mode must then be enabled for
operation.
For more information about FAST, see:
• Section 1.3.1.7 Fully Accessible System Topology (FAST) in
Chapter 1. INTRODUCTION
• Chapter 6. FAST ACTIVATION PROCEDURE
• Section 7.2.7.10 (UTIL:) FAST in Chapter 7. FRONT PANEL
OPERATION
• Section D.2.5.2.2 Admin | FAST Features in Appendix D.
OPTIONAL NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP) INTERFACE MODULE.
You may enable BPM Mode operation either from the SLM-5650A front panel
menu (CONFIG: Remote  EthernetConfig  Option Card Addr  Network
Proc), or from the NP HTTP/HTTPS Interface ‘Admin | Vipersat Modes’ page.
G–11
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix G
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
See Section 7.3.3.9 CONFIG: Remote in Chapter 7. FRONT PANEL
OPERATION or Section D.2.5.2.1 Admin | Vipersat Mode (FAST
Option) in Appendix D. OPTIONAL NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP)
INTERFACE MODULE for further details.
G–12
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix G
G.3.3
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
BPM Mode in Hub Data Traffic Networks
Figure Legend
Equipment
Data Type
1
TDM Modem
A
STDMA Return Link
2
Hub LAN Data Switch
B
Forward Link
3
Hub router
C
Network Encryption
4
Other Devices
D
MAC Learning Disabled (Entire Switch)
5
Hub Demodulator Data Switch E
SCPC Return #1
6
Demodulator #1
F
SCPC Return #2
7
Demodulator #2
G
SCPC Return #N
8
Demodulator #N
F igure G -7. Hub Data Traffic Network
In a point-to-multipoint system, at the hub a split-path topology is used and
traffic in the Forward Link and Return Link directions may be processed by
different SLM-5650A modems.
G–13
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix G
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Figure G-7 shows a typical Hub Data Traffic Network for one Layer 2 Network
(‘P1/P2/A’ shown in red). The other two networks (‘P3/P4/B’ shown in blue and
‘P5/C’ shown in green) can be used in a similar fashion.
Note that the Hub Demodulators used in this configuration are SLM-5650A
modems configured for operation with the optional ‘Demodulator only’ FAST
Feature enabled.
In the Forward Link direction, all traffic is transmitted by the Hub Time-Division
Multiplexing (TDM) Modem. Packets received from the Hub Data Network are
received by the Hub TDM Modem on a Data LAN Port (P1) and forward to the
Data WAN.
The packets received by Return Link channels can come into the Hub in one of
two ways:
1. They are processed by the Hub TDM Modem for Self-Organizing Time
Division Multiple Access (STDMA) channels.
2. Hub Demodulators are used for Single Channel per Carrier (SCPC)
channels.
In Figure G-7, the external hub switch supporting data traffic is shown as two
separate switches: the Hub LAN Data Switch, and the Hub Demodulator Data
Switch. It is important to note that this is a functional concept only – the physical
implementation of this switch can be accomplished in one of three ways:
1. Two separate switches, as illustrated in Figure G-7.
2. One physical switch, partitioned into two logical switches using port
isolation. Many commercially available managed switches have this
capability.
3. A data-path router directly connected to the Hub TDM Modem’s P1 port,
with the functionality of the Hub Demodulator Data Switch implemented
by means of daisy-chaining the Hub Demodulator units’ Data LAN ports
(i.e., connecting the P1 port of one Hub Demodulator to the P2 port of
the next Hub Demodulator). This third method has the advantage of
reducing the required Hub equipment. However, it has the disadvantage
of adding between 5 µsec and 0.01 ms of delay per Hub Demodulator
unit traversed, depending on packet size (64 – 1500 bytes @ 1000 Mbps
GigE negotiation between Hub Demodulators and the Hub TDM Modem).
G–14
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix G
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Note also that for return link packets arriving via SCPC channels, you must make
sure to avoid potential issues associated with the split path topology inherent in
the point-to-multipoint system architecture. In order to forward the packets
received from the Hub Demodulator to the Hub expansion port P2, MAC learning
on the HUB demodulators switch should be disabled, as indicated by Data Type
‘D’ in Figure G-7.
G.3.4
Dynamic Hub Demodulators in a Multiple TDM
Hubs Configuration
In BPM Mode, multiple Hub TDM Modem configuration is supported along with
dynamic assignment of Hub Demodulators.
In a dynamic Hub Demodulator assignment, the Hub Demodulator can be
assigned to any Hub TDM Modem. Packet transmission should therefore be
forwarded from the Hub Demodulator to the corresponding Hub TDM Modem.
In order to accommodate this, a separate VLAN packet tagging is used.
Packets transmitted from the Hub Demodulator will be tagged with configured
VLAN (or double-tagged if the packet already has a VLAN) and then sent to all
designated Hub TDM Modems. The corresponding Hub TDM Modem(s) will
receive and process these packets, while non-corresponding Hub TDM Modems
will ignore them.
F igure G -8. Hub V L AN C onfiguration HT T P /HT T P S Interfac e P ages
With this configuration (see Figure G-8), the Hub TDM Modem is set to Vipersat
Hub per the ‘Admin | Vipersat Mode’ web page and configured for Multi-TDM
Tunneling Mode per the ‘LAN | Interface’ web page (see Sections D.2.5.2.1 and
D.2.5.4.1, respectively, in Appendix D. OPTIONAL NETWORK PROCESSOR (NP)
INTERFACE MODULE).
G–15
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix G
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
This VLAN communication is configurable as Automatic. When Multi-TDM
Tunneling Mode is configured as Manual, then a unique VLAN ID has to be
entered.
G.3.5
Remote Data Traffic Handling
Figure Legend
Data Type
Equipment
1
Remote Modem
A
Tx / Rx Data Link from Hub
2
Remote LAN Data Switches
B
Network Encryption
3
Remote Router
4
Other Devices
F igure G -9. R emote (S poke) Data Traffic Network
In BPM Mode, remote operation requires no special configuration – remote role
is the same for either point-to-point or point-to-multipoint topologies.
As Figure G-9 shows:
• NP Ethernet ports P1 and P2, with internal Data WAN Port ‘A’ , form the
red switch group referred to as Bridge-Group1;
• NP Ethernet ports P3 and P4, with internal Management WAN Port ‘B’ ,
form the blue switch group referred to as Bridge-Group2;
• The SLM-5650A Base Modem ‘J5 Ethernet’ port, with internal VS WAN
Port ‘C’, forms the green switch group referred to as Router-Group.
G–16
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix G
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Observe the following rules with this configuration:
• NP Interface ports P1, P3, and Base Modem Ethernet Port J5 are the
primary ports.
• NP Interface ports P2 and P4 are the secondary ports.
Note that, while the remote LAN switches shown in Figure G-9 are included to
illustrate how third party Layer2 switches can be used, their use is not
mandatory.
G–17
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix G
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Notes:
G–18
Appendix H. OVERHEAD AND
SYMBOL RATE
CALCULATIONS
H.1 Overview
The SLM-5650A Satellite Modem has several optional features and functions that
can add overhead. This appendix describes:
• The processing flow where overhead can be added;
• The amount of overhead added by each feature when enabled;
• The calculation of modem symbol rate and modem chip rate (when
optional spreading is enabled), given the programmed modem bit rate.
H–1
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix H
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
H.2 SLM-5650A Processing Flow and Symbol Rate
Calculation
The SLM-5650A supports both serial and Ethernet interfaces, and provides
options for framing, modulation and spreading. Figure H-1 shows the processing
flow for these functions when the SLM-5650A ‘J6 EIA530’ rear panel connector
and the optional Network Processor Module’s Port ‘1’ are used for the Serial and
Ethernet interfaces, respectively.
Figure H-1. SLM-5650A – Feature Block Diagram
The symbol rate SR (Carrier 3dB Bandwidth) is a function of the programmed data
bit rate BR with FEC encoding, modulation, and transport overhead factors as
shown in the equation “SR=BR/MOCRFRSFTFC” (referred to hereafter as
“Equation 1”), containing the following Operands:
• Operand 1 – MO = Modulation Order ‘1’ if BPSK
‘2’ if QPSK
‘3’ if 8PSK
‘4’ if 16QAM
• Operand 2 – CR = Code Rate of the Forward Error Correction (FEC) (e.g.,
CR = 0.75 if stated FEC code rate = “3/4”)
• Operand 3 – FRS = Reed Solomon Framing Factor, where:
o FRS = (n/k) where (201,219) is default RS for MIL-165A
o FRS = 1 where the RS is disabled.
•
Operand 4 – Fc = CnC AUPC Mode or ACPC Control Framing
Factor, where:
o FC = 15/16 if AUPC Mode is enabled;
o FC = 32605/32768 if ACPC Mode is enabled;
H–2
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix H
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
o FC = 1 if neither feature is enabled.
Only one of these two features (AUPC Mode or ACPC Mode)
may be enabled at any given time.
•
Operand 5 – FT = TRANSEC Framing Factor, where:
o FT = N*16/[N*16+3], where ‘N’ is the selected Frame
Length in AES blocks per frame, in the range of 1 to 16.
o FT = 1 if the TRANSEC encryption is disabled.
If the Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) feature is
enabled, then the simple equation for Chip Rate (SC)
equivalent to (Bw) of the spread signal is: “SC=K*SR”
where ‘K’ is the programmed spreading factor (e.g. 2, 4, 8, 16,
32, 64, up to 512)
H–3
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix H
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
H.3 Sources of Overhead
H.3.1
Framing Overhead
Several modes of operation add framing overhead to the satellite channel.
IBS and IDR framing are also technically supported in the SLM-5650A, in
that these framing modes can be enabled. However, the overhead
channel information associated with these framing modes is not
available external to the modem in either transmit or receive directions.
These framing modes therefore are of limited use in the SLM-5650A,
and are not included for consideration in this appendix.
H.3.1.1 Reed–Solomon/Outside FEC Codec Framing Factor
The overhead factor of this feature is referred to as “Operand 3” in Section
H.2:
• Reed–Solomon can be appended with the Viterbi FEC, but it is only
supported in the MIL-165A and IESS modem type configurations.
The Reed–Solomon error correction is user selectable to operate
within a set of predefined legacy formats.
H.3.1.2 AUPC/ASYNC (ESC) and ACPC Channel Framing
AUPC/ASYNC overhead channel and the ACPC framing factor are
referred to as “Operand 4” in Section H.2:
• The AUPC/ASYNC overhead channel supports an EIA-232 or EIA-422
overhead channel that is asynchronous to the main traffic channel. This
legacy communications channel also supports modem-to-modem
receiver signal Eb/No status used to automatically adjust the Tx uplink
power when (AUPC Power Control) is enabled. If the AUPC framing mode
is enabled, 16 framed output bits are created for every 15 input bits of
the transport stream regardless if the features are being used. The
AUPC/ASYNC overhead factor is a function of the programmed Data Rate.
• The Automatic CnC Power Control (ACPC) overhead frame provides
modem-to-modem receiver CnC signal status required to implement the
CnC ratio balancing ACPC algorithm. When this feature is enabled, 32769
H–4
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix H
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
framed output bits are generated for every 32605 input bits of the
transport stream.
ASYNC/AUPC and ACPC communications framing are mutually exclusive
features. You may not enable these features simultaneously.
H.3.1.3 TRANSEC Framing
When the TRANSEC encryption is enabled the transport Frame size is user
selectable as (N * AES block). The parameter “N” is programmable from 1 to 16;
each AES block is 16 bytes in length; each frame has a 3 byte header. This leads
to the FT factor, identified as “Operand 5” in Section H.2. Larger values of “N”
create lower overhead, at the expense of slightly longer TRANSEC frame
acquisition times.
H.3.2
Total Framing Overhead
There may be times where the framing overhead is of interest, expressed as a
percentage of framing overhead bits within the framed transport stream.
Identified as “Operand 5” in Section H.2, this value can be expressed as:
Framing Overhead[%]=[1-FTFC]*100
As per “Equation 1” (see Section H.2), since the factors FT and FC are less than
unity, the Framing Overhead (when framing is present) increases the symbol rate.
Framing overhead has no effect on the programmed modem bit rate, which is
equivalent to the input bit rate of a serial data stream input to the modem.
H.3.3
IP Traffic Encapsulation Overhead
When the Ethernet traffic interface is used, a framed transport overhead is
necessary to encapsulate the packets into the transport stream. When the
SLM-5650A operates in (Static) Bridge Mode, Ethernet packets received
from the interface are encapsulated as-is. When the SLM-5650A operates in
Router Modes, the Ethernet MAC header and CRC are removed from the
input Ethernet packets, and IP packets are encapsulated into the HDLC
frame.
H–5
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix H
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
In either (Static) Bridge Mode or Router Mode, a form of the High-Level
Data Link Control (HDLC) is used to encapsulate the Ethernet or IP packets.
A start flag byte (0x7E) is added to each packet and a 2-byte CRC is
appended to the end. In addition, in order to enable the receiver to
recognize the start flag within the data stream, a “0” is inserted wherever
five “1”s occur in a row in the transport data stream. Assuming random bits,
the probability of bit stuffing using this technique is 1/62.
See RFC 4814 “Hash and Stuffing: Overlooked Factors in
Network Device Benchmarking” for a derivation of this
probability.
Considering both sources of HDLC Overhead means that, for a packet length “L”,
the ratio of input bits to encapsulated output bits is expressed as “Equation 2”:
FH=L/[L+3+L/62] = L/[(63/62)L+3]
Unlike framing overhead, HDLC Overhead reduces the effective throughput of
packet bits relative to the programmed modem data rate. Packet Throughput, in
packet bits/second, is expressed as “Equation 3”:
Packet Throughput=(Programmed Modem Data Rate)*FH
HDLC Overhead – referred to as “Equation 4” – is expressed as a percent
overhead of the modem date rate:
HDLC OH[%]=(1-FH)*100=([(1/62)L+3]/[(63/62)L+3])*100
The HDLC Overhead ranges from approximately 6% for L=64 to approximately
1.8% for L=1518.
H–6
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix H
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
H.4 Product Support
For further information about the SLM-5650A’s overhead support of interfaces
and framing options, please call Comtech EF Data Product Support:
By phone:
+1.240.243.1880
+1.866.472.3963 (toll free USA)
By email:
[email protected]
Web Site:
www.comtechefdata.com
H–7
SLM-5650A Satellite Modem
Appendix H
MN-SLM5650A
Revision 9
Notes:
H–8
2114 WEST 7TH STREET TEMPE ARIZONA 85281 USA
480 • 333 • 2200 PHONE
480 • 333 • 2161 FAX
">